Skip to main content

Full text of "CSUF Course Catalogs 1959-2007"

See other formats






GENERAL 

CATALOG 

1972-73 


CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, FULLERTON 
FULLERTON, CALIFORNIA 92634 (714) 870-2011 


(FORMERLY CALIFORNIA STATE COLLEGE, FULLERTON) 


COMPLIMENTARY COPY 


4 


THIS CATALOG 

Within this catalog may be found general academic and administrative information as well as specific 
descriptions of the departments, their majors and the courses offered in each. The first major part 
contains orienting information such as the calendar, materials on the California State University and 
Colleges, an overview of Cal State Fullerton and facts about student services and activities on the 
campus. 

The subsequent sections of the catalog are concerned with: admission, registration, records and 
regulations; academic advisement; and university courses. The next sections, organized by schools 
and divisions, describe the departments and the programs of study and courses they offer. The final 
part of the catalog contains directories: a listing of individuals and groups participating in the 
governance of the university and with information on advisory councils, auxiliary organizations, and 
the faculty and administration. An Index can be found at the end to help the reader locate specific 
items he needs or wishes to know about. 

Because this catalog must be prepared well ahead of the academic year It covers, changes in some 
programs and rules occur. The class schedule (and subsequent errata sheets) are the final authority 
In regard to classes offered, instructors and revisions of regulations. This publication can be bought 
for a small fee from the Titan Bookstore. 

Through the assistance of the Department of Art, Beverly Fotheringham has done the graphic work 
on this catalog and Susan Ragan has been the photographer. The final organizing and editing was 
done by Caroline Williams assisted by Wayne Untereiner and Len Klikunas In the Office of Academic 
Services and Planning and Catherine Lisej and jerry Keating in the Office of Public Affairs. 


U— I 9 85 


5 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 

GENERAL INFORMATION— Cal State Fullerton Calendar 9, the California 
State University and Colleges 1 3, Cal State Fullerton: An Overview 1 5, Student 
Services and Activities 29. 

ADMISSION, REGISTRATION, RECORDS AND REGULATIONS— Admis- 
sion to the University 41, Registration 51, Records and Regulations 57. 

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS— Bachelor's Degree 67, Master's Degrees 71 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT— 79 

UNIVERSITY CURRICULA— 87 

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS— 97 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS— 135 
COMPUTER SCIENCE— 165 
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION— 171 
SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING- 211 

DIVISION OF HEALTH EDUCATION, PHYSICAL EDUCATION, 
RECREATION AND ATHLETICS— 231 

SCHOOL OF LETTERS, ARTS AND SCIENCES— 245 

DIVISION OF LIBRARY SCIENCE^«)7 

DIRECTORIES — Trustees 417, Office of the Chancellor 419, Campuses 420, Cal 
State Fullerton 421, Auxiliary Organizations 437, Cooperating Teachers 443, 
Faculty and Administration 447, Index 476. 


U-l t flS 



GENERAL INFORMATION 


lS-1 9 » 



CAL STATE FULLERTON CALENDAR 
FOR 1972-73 


9 


1972 


JUNE 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 

18 tf SO St SS 30 24 
25 SO S7 SO 20 SO . . 


JULY 

S M T W T F S 

1 

2‘Tm 5nrT s 

9 10 “l2 13 14 15 
16 17 18 19 20 21!22 
23 24 2 5 ji 27 <^29 
30«i; 


AUGUST 

5 M T W T F S 

ir‘2 3 4 5 

6 78 9 10 11|12 

13 14 15 16 17 18jl9 

20 21 22 23 24 SS|26 

27SiJiimtt|.. .. 


OCTOBER 
S M T W T F S 
1 ; 2 3 4 5 Ot 7 

8Q]iO 11 12 13 14 
15J»17 18 19 20 21 
22 1^24 Si SO Sr 28 
29 Vil 


NOVEMBER 
S M T W T F S 
ISO 4 

5 'O 7 8 9 10 11 
12 13 14 15 16 IT 18 
19 20 21 22 1231 2fl 25 

26 flr &«ilBrT7 .. 


DECEMBER 
S M T W T F 


17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 
31 


FEBRUARY 
S M T W T F S 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 
11 1113 14^6 16 17 
18 ( l^20| 21 22 23 24 

25Wmm 


MARCH 

S M T W T F S 

‘ 4 '» r r 8 9:10 
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 
18 ,19 20 21 22 23i24 

25iiirlO»«N31 


APRIL 

S M T W T F S 
1 ^ 

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 


JUNE 

S M T W T F S 

12 

3 4 5 6 7 8 0 
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 
17 10 10 SO SI S3 23 
24 SS SS S7 St SO 30 




JULY 



s 

M 

T W T 

F 

S 

1 

8 

1 9 

10 lwi2 13 ( 

7 

14 

15 

16 

17 18 19 

20 

21 

22 

s 

24 25fli 

27j28 

29 

m 

3f.,. .. 




AUGUST 

S M T W T F 

s 


.. .. 1 TT 0 

4 

5 

8 9 10- 

11 

12 

13 14 15 16 17 

18 

19 

20 21 22 23 24 

25 

26 

wfmmmn 



SEPTEMBER 
S M T W T F S 

3 prnBHiiBBiBP 9 

10 ni2 13 14 15 16 
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 |iW2SWili30 


JANUARY 

S M T W T F S 
. . 1 2 3 ^ 4 6 

7 ; 8 ^ 9 10 13 

14 19 20 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 
28 29 30 31 


MAY 

S M T W T F S 
.. ..Jl 2 3 4| 5 
Orr 8 9 10 11 12 
13 il4 15 16 17 18 19 
20 1^22 23 it Ml 26 
27 1^2 9 30|31 .. .. 


SEPTEMBER 
S M T W T F S 

1 

2 Q] ■iBHIi 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 
30 


1973 

□ Classes 
n Holidays 


10 

SUMMER SESSION 1972 


)une 19, Monday First summer session begins — registration and classes 

July 4, Tuesday Independence Day holiday — all offices closed. No instruc- 

tion 

July 28, Friday First summer session ends 

July 31, Monday Second summer session begins — registration and classes 

August 1, Tuesday Filing period opens for application to the spring semester 

1973 

September 4, Monday Labor Day holiday; all offices closed; no instruction 

September 8, Friday Second summer session ends; effective date of graduation for 


those completing requirements 

FALL SEMESTER 1972 


November 1971 

Initial period for filing applications for admission to the fall semester 1972 began for all 
students and former students not in attendance during the spring semester 1972. All 
applications received by November 30, 1971, received equal consideration for inclusion 
in enrollment quotas. Applications continued to be accepted after November 30, 1971, 
for consideration in unfilled categories within the policies of the statewide common 
admissions program. 


September 18, Monday Academic year begins. See Schedule of Classes for details 

about advisement, orientation and registration 

September 22, Friday Last day to register without late registration fee. Application 

deadline for baccalaureate degree candidates for graduation. 


June 1973 and September 1973, and for January 1973 mas- 
ter's degree candidates to request a graduation check 

September 25, Monday Instruction begins 

October 9, Monday Columbus Day holiday — all offices closed. No instruction 

October 23, Monday Veterans Day holiday — all offices closed. No instruction 

November 1, Wednesday Filing period opens for application to the fall semester 1973 

November 23-24, Thursday-Friday Thanksgiving recess — all offices closed 

December 18, Monday Winter recess begins 

January 2, Tuesday instruction resumes 

January 1 7, Wednesday 

January 18-19, Thursday-Friday 
January 22, Monday 


.Last day of classes 
.Examination study days 
.Semester examinations begin 


january 26, Friday 


11 

.Semester examinations end; semester ends; effective date of 
graduation for those completing requirements 


SPRING SEMESTER 1973 


August 2, 1972 

Initial period for filing applications for the spring semester 1973 begins for all new 
students and former students not in attendance during the fall semester 1972. All applica- 
tions received by August 31, 1972, will have equal consideration for inclusion in enroll- 
ment quotas. Applications will continue to be accepted after August 31, 1972, for 
consideration in any unfilled category within the policies of the statewide common 
admissions program. 


February 5, Monday Semester begins. See Schedule of Classes for details about 

advisement, orientation and registration 

February 8, Thursday Last day to register without late registration fee. Application 

deadline for baccalaureate degree candidates for graduation 
January 1974, and for June 1973 and September 1973 mas- 
ter's degree candidates to request a graduation check 


February 12, Monday Instruction begins 

February 19-20, Monday-Tuesday Academic holidays — all offices closed. No instruction (Ob- 

servance of Washington's and Lincoln's birthdays) 

April 16, Monday Spring recess begins 

April 23, Monday Instruction resumes 

May 28, Monday Memorial Day holiday — all offices closed. No instruction 

May 30, Wednesday Last day of classes 

May 31 -June 1, Thursday-Friday Examination study days 

June 4, Monday Semester examinations begin 

June 8, Friday Semester examinations end. Semester ends. Effective date of 

graduation for those completing requirements. Commence- 
ment 


SUMMER SESSION 1973 


June 18, Monday First summer session begins — registration and classes 

July 4, Wednesday Independence Day holiday — all offices closed 

July 27, Friday First summer session ends 

July 30, Monday Second summer session begins — registration and classes 

September 3, Monday Labor Day holiday; all offices closed; no instruction 

/ 

September 7, Friday Second summer session ends; effective date of graduation for 

those completing requirements 


«»-l 9 1*0 


12 

FALL SEMESTER 1973 


November 1, 1972 

The initial period for filing applications for admission to the fall semester 1973 is sche- 
duled to begin for all students not in attendance during the spring semester 1973, within 
the policies of the statewide common admissions program. 


SO-I 9 190 


13 

THE CALIFORNIA 

STATE UNIVERSITY AND COLLEGES 


On November 29, 1971, the Governor signed into law Assembly Bill 123 which created the California 
State University and Colleges, thereby redesignating the system previously known as the California 
State Colleges. This legislation provided legal recognition that the California State Colleges have 
achieved the status of universities in their first decade as a unified system of higher education. 
First brought together as a system under an independent Board of Trustees by the Donahoe Higher 
Education Act in the early 1960s, the California State University and Colleges now consists of 19 
campuses, covering the state from Humboldt In the north to San Diego In the south. Current 
enrollment exceeds 263,000 full- and part-time students, with a faculty of approximately 14,500. 
Responsibility for the California State University and Colleges is vested in the Board of Trustees, 
whose members are appointed by the Governor. The Trustees appoint the Chancellor, who Is the 
chief executive officer of the system, and the Presidents, who are the chief executive officers on 
the respective campuses. 

The Trustees, the Chancellor and the Presidents develop systemwide policy, with actual Implementa- 
tion at the campus level taking place through broadly based consultative procedures. The Academic 
Senate of the California State University and Colleges, made up of elected representatives of the 
faculty from each campus, recommends academic policy to the Board of Trustees through the 
Chancellor. 

Each campus in the system has its own unique geographic and curricular character, but all emphasize 
the liberal arts and sciences. Programs leading to the bachelor's and master's degrees are master- 
planned to anticipate and accommodate student interest and the educational and professional needs 
of the State of California. A limited number of joint doctoral programs are also offered. Although 
there is Increasing recognition of the importance of research to the maintenance of quality teaching, 
the primary responsibility of the faculty continues to be the Instructional process. 

While California State University, San Jose, the oldest, was founded over a century ago, prior to 
World War II only seven State Colleges were in existence, with a total enrollment of 13,000. Since 
1947, 12 new campuses have been established, and sites have been selected for additional ones in 
Ventura, San Mateo and Contra Costa counties. California State College, Bakersfield, the newest, was 
opened to students in 1970. Enrollment in the system is expected to pass 300,000 by 1980. 


34—1 9 190 




-i. 


.' -\ ^ ■ ■ \ l: • : 


■V 


■•! ^ C - '-J •'• . . .• ■ 

, .;, •- . i;-'vr ' ■•' •■ •-’■ 

• . , ■ >y,^C ' ' •- ■' 

' f^-»rc -.y - ’ ■'■ " 

'■•i.-l:- - ' '.S’r-fr n:'.-. 

, . ;:, V S « i' rC-’ - 

C; - ■ •• ' ‘.- ^u£V 

r . ' ' : ’,‘.i'm‘'. r*', K: fiif k 

. IV 'iO' ' .■'>*!’• '- 

■V.v .■ * •.. -^y^K V U 

- /z.r, 

;• i.7 Jj / - b'.^y " •;' •• '■'■ 

, i; . : irf u ■ ’-H - ;■ -:■) 


15 

CAL STATE FULLERTON: AN OVERVIEW 


GOVERNANCE 

Governance on the campus level at California State University, Fullerton is the responsibility of the 
President and his administrative staff. Working closely with the President are a number of faculty 
and student groups which initiate, and review and recommend for approval university programs, 
policies and procedures. Although the President is vested with the final authority on all university 
activities, the traditions at Fullerton have been to encourage maximum faculty and staff participation 
in campus decision-making and governance. Increasingly, students are becoming involved and 
active, too, and some student representatives are found on most university, school, and departmental 
committees and policy-making bodies. 

ADVISORY BOARD 

The California State University, Fullerton Advisory Board consists of community leaders interested 
in the development and welfare of the university. The board serves the President in an advisory 
capacity, particularly in matters which affect university and community relations. Members are 
nominated by the President and appointed by the Board of Trustees for terms of four years. 

PHILOSOPHY AND OBJECTIVES 

The main functions of an institution of higher learning are to disseminate and advance knowledge. 
The philosophy which guides an institution can limit or promote the successful achievement of these 
objectives. Therefore, from its inception. Cal State Fullerton has directed its educational program 
toward the fullest possible development of the Individuals who participate in It. For both faculty and 
students this entails a commitment to high standards of scholarship, a comprehensive rather than 
a narrow approach to major areas of study, and a concern with research and other creative activity. 
The university holds to the belief that an enduring educational experience must be founded upon 
exploration of our cultural heritage, through basic studies in the liberal arts and sciences, and that 
it can and should at the same time prepare for success in a chosen occupation or profession. 
Accordingly, the required general education program has as its objective the development In each 
student of: 

1. The effective use and interpretation of the written and spoken language. 

2. An understanding of the wide range of human endeavor and accomplishments in liberal arts 
and sciences, their Interrelationships, and the various choices and values they represent. 

3. An understanding of information and principles in some areas of the liberal arts and sciences 
in sufficient depth to encourage critical and creative thought and expression. 

4. A spirit of Inquiry into the past and into the future, in order to cope with conditions In the 
continually changing world. 

5. An understanding of the rights, privileges and responsibilities of citizenship in the community 
and nation, and of effective participation in today's world. 

In addition, the university requires of all students who are candidates for a degree — whatever their 
special purpose — the pursuit of a subject major. 

(For specific details, see page 67.) 

RETROSPECT AND PROSPECT 

Cal State Fullerton was the 12th State College in California to be authorized by the Legislature. The 
following year, 1958, resulted in the designation of a site in northeast Fullerton, and 1959 saw the 
purchase of the site, the appointment of Dr. William B. Langsdorf as the founding president, the 
selection of the first staff, and the planning for the opening of the new college in the fall. Orange 
County State College started classes for 452 full-time and part-time students in September, 1959, 
using leased quarters for its administrative offices on the Fullerton Union High School campus and 
for its classrooms at Fullerton's Sunny Hills High School. In the fall of 1960, the college opened 
classes on its own campus where it occupied 12 temp)orary buildings. The name changed to Orange 


3S-1 9 tlO 


1 6 Natural and Cultural Ecology 

State College in July, 1962, to California State College at Fullerton in July, 1964, to California State 
College, Fullerton in July, 1968 and to California State University, Fullerton in June, 1972. The first 
permanent building, the six-story Letters and Science Building, was occupied in 1963. 

Today, there are many dramatic evidences of additional, very rapid growth. Nine large and modern 
permanent buildings have been completed, and enrollment has climbed to approximately 17,000. 
Since 1963 the curriculum has expanded to include lower division work and many graduate pro- 
grams. More than $50 million already has been invested in land, buildings and equipment — a sum 
expected to increase appreciably by the 1980's when the university is due to reach its projected peak 
enrollment of nearly 27,000. 

During this rapid growth, the university also has achieved a growing reputation for academic 
excellence. Cal State Fullerton began this spectacular development at a period when the citizens and 
government of California were revising and greatly expanding their commitments to quality public 
higher education. The Donahoe Higher Education Act of 1960 established the California State 
Colleges as a system under an independent Board of Trustees, redefined the functions of the State 
Colleges, and related them to both the community colleges and to the University of California 
system. In this atmosphere of public support. Cal State Fullerton was the first of the State Colleges 
to submit and secure approval for a five-year master curricular plan and one of the first three to 
secure approval of a master building plan and one that was able to think in terms of its ultimate 
enrollment objectives from the beginning. During the same period. Orange County was experiencing 
its own unprecedented growth. 

In l%9-70, it became apparent that colleges and universities statewide and nationally were entering 
a new period of development. Growing financial problems on all levels of government, mounting 
criticisms of contemporary educational policies and practices, and a loss of much public support 
for education were symptomatic of much deeper and more widespread problems and changes in 
our society and its schools. In the context of what increasingly seemed to be the emergence of a 
new, and in many ways, different type of culture and world, the colleges and universities (like other 
major institutions) were acutely experiencing the confusions and conflicts such basic and rapid 
cultural transformations generate. 

Like other colleges and universities. Cal State Fullerton currently is reexamining and reevaluating 
even its most basic educational goals and assumptions and practices. It is not yet clear how higher 
education can more effectively assume its central responsibilities of teaching, developing knowledge, 
and providing public service in the future that lies ahead. It is clear, however, that higher education 
must become more aware of, more articulate about, and more scholarly regarding the learning 
experiences that occur on and outside campuses. It is clear, too, that vigorous and imaginative and 
pluralistic educational experimentation needs to be rapidly and greatly increased and that students 
as well as members of the larger community have vital and increasing roles to play in these processes. 
There are developing, too, deep)ening and widening convictions that; educators may have under- 
estimated the F>otentialities and learning capacities of people; and that new teaching strategies and 
curriculum materials could result in higher, and an increasingly widespread attainment of, education- 
al standards. 

On May 26, 1971, Dr. L. Donald Shields, who had served as acting president for seven months, was 
appointed the second president of Cal State Fullerton. Under his presidency five task forces subse- 
quently were established to plan for the formation of a school of applied and professional studies; 
to explore opportunities for external degree, extension and continuing education programs; to study 
form and function for a learning resources center; to develop a long-range plan for the establishment 
of university priorities and the allocation of available resources; and to analyze the university's 
academic and administrative organization in terms of its structure and processes. President Shields 
also has vigorously pursued creating more effective working relationships with the community. 
Cal State Fullerton is looking forward to increasing the contribution it may make in the work ahead. 
This institution already is rethinking and improving the quality of its part in higher education so that 
people will have more freedom to shape and create the sort of future they value and that is possible 
with the resources and knowledge that man now has. 

NATURAL AND CULTURAL ECOLOGY 

Fullerton, a city of 88,(XX) inhabitants, is located in northern Orange County, about 30 miles southeast 
of central Los Angeles. It is in the center of the new Southern California population center and within 
easy freeway access of all the diverse natural and cultural attractions of this region. 


Campus and Buildings 1 7 

Orange County, with an area of 782 square miles, is the 48th in size of California's 58 counties, but 
it is the second largest county in population (1.5 million), and in total personal income. Orange 
County has experienced during the last 20 years almost unprecedented growth of population, 
economic and other activities: it was the fastest growing area in the United States. This expansion 
came partly because of the proximity of Orange County to rapidly expanding Los Angeles; the 
increasing access through the developing freeway system; and natural attractiveness of the beaches, 
countryside and climate. 

In 20 years what had been a predominantly, slowly-changing agricultural and resort area, was 
transformed into a dynamic and predominantly industrial growth center for new types of manufac- 
turing and commercial and cultural enterprises. Much land in Orange County, however, still is 
available and comparatively untouched. Agriculture, and particularly orange groves and cattle 
ranching, still are highly visible activities. But space-age industries and industrial parks, new schools 
and shops and housing developments, tourist facilities and imaginative cultural attractions, and large 
scale planned communities continue to encroach upon the diminishing expanses of habitable land. 
Today, there co-exists an interesting mixture of the old and new economic and life styles in Orange 
County. Underneath the soil, archeologists and bulldozers uncover traces of the hunting and gather- 
ing Indian bands which flourished as early as 4,000 years ago in what was a benign and bountiful 
region. More visible traces remain of the Spanish and Mexican periods and cultures: Mission San 
Juan Capistrano, which began the agricultural tradition in Orange County, and subsequent adobes 
from the great land grants and ranches that followed. Additionally, both customs and many names 
persist from this period, and so does some ranching. The architectural and other evidences of the 
subsequent pioneer period are still quite visible: farmsteads, old buildings from the new towns that 
then were established in the late 1800's, mining operations, and traces of early resort and other types 
of promotional activities. For about 1(X) years, farming was the main economic activity with products 
such as grapes, walnuts, vegetables, and increasingly oranges replacing the older wheat and cattle 
ranches. Today, agriculture still is very important, and Orange County ranks sixth among California's 
counties in mineral production with its oil, natural gas, sand and gravel, and clay mining and 
processing activities. 

The extensive development of the 42 miles of beaches in Orange County and the development of 
such attractions as Disneyland, Knott's Berry Farm, the Laguna Festival of Arts and Pageant of 
Masters, and the Anaheim Stadium and Convention Center continue to make tourism an increasingly 
important activity. So does the Mediterranean-type climate with: rainfall averaging 14 inches per 
year; and generally mild days (with either freezing or lOO-degree temperatures uncommon) with 
frequent morning fogs during the summer. Both downtown Los Angeles and the Pacific Ocean can 
be reached by car in half an hour, and mountain and desert recreation areas are as close as an hour's 
drive from the campus. 

THE CAMPUS AND ITS BUILDINGS 

Once part of a vast orange grove, the attractively landscaped campus now consists of 225 acres 
bounded on the south by Nutwood Avenue, on the west by State College Boulevard, on the north 
by Yorba Linda Boulevard and on the east by the Orange Freeway. The portion of Orange County 
immediately surrounding the campus is predominantly suburban: it includes housing tracts, apart- 
ment complexes, shopping centers, space-age industrial firms and still remaining orange groves and 
undevelop)ed hills and fields. 

The campus itself has a high density urban layout of buildings and facilities developed to serve a 
predominantly commuting public. The university's modern buildings were planned so that no 
student should need more than 10 minutes to go from one class to another. The campus is surround- 
ed with well-lighted and landscaped parking facilities. Shopping and sevices are available in College 
Park, a commercial establishment just adjacent to the campus on the south. 

Even though most of the campus has been converted into modern buildings, facilities for athletic 
activities, parking lots, or attractively landscaped areas, there still remain about 40 acres of the 
original orange grove, a portion of which will become an arboretum within the next few years. 
Several older buildings also remain, including one which has been converted into the attractive 
Faculty Center and another into the Foundation headquarters, and many of the original temporary 
buildings. 

The first permanent building, the Letters and Science Building, was occupied in 1963. This imposing 
structure, master planned to serve ultimately as a facility for undergraduate and graduate science 
instruction and research, has been used to house other programs until they could warrant new 
facilities of their own. 


54-1 9 »0 


18 Faculty 

Since 1%3, growth has been rapid. The Music-Speech-Drama Building was completed in 1964, the 
Physical Education Building in 1%5, the Library-Audiovisual Center in 1966, the Commons cafeteria 
facility in 1967, the Humanities-Social Sciences Building and Art Center in 1969, and the Administra- 
tion-Business Administration Building and Engineering Building in 1971. 

The latter two reflect a commitment to programs with high community involvement. In addition to 
the many undergraduate students who will study and learn In these buildings, many professional 
engineers and local businessmen also will use these very advanced facilities to continue their 
educations. 

New buildings are being planned to keep pace with university enrollment increases. At least one new 
academic facility and several building additions are contemplated for the 1970's. Construction is due 
to begin In 1972 on a 25,000-square-foot, ultramodern Student Health Center, and plans for a large 
University Union are presently on the drawing board. These facilities will be available by the 
mld-1970's. 

The ample freeway and surface street accommodations that approach the main entrance to the 
university's modern campus also provide comparatively easy access to the great and diverse learning 
resources available in Southern California: many other colleges and universities; museums, libraries, 
art galleries; zoos; and the wide variety of economic, governmental, social, and cultural activities 
and experiments that may be found In this dynamic and complex region of California and the United 
States. 

STUDENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY 

Much of the distinctive character and learning atmosphere of any campus comes from the nature 
and vitality of its students. Diversity, the synthesis of academic with work and family interests, strong 
high school records and relative maturity are some of the predominant characteristics of the student 
body at Cal State Fullerton. The campus is both a large and a still rapidly growing one despite its 
comparative newness. Nearly 16,000 students were enrolled in 1971-72, and this year's total is 
expected to be 17,600. 

The university is a commuter institution: 4 percent of the students live on campus; 24 percent work 
35 hours a week or more; and yet 60 percent take 1 2 or more units of coursework each semester. 
Seventy-five percent come from a radius of 15 miles from the campus, but many have lived 
elsewhere before coming to Orange County. 

Twenty-three percent are lower division students, 56 percent are university juniors and seniors, and 
another 21 percent are doing graduate work. Over seven-eights of the upper-division students are 
transfers from other institutions, principally community colleges. Fifty-nine percent are men, and the 
median age is 23. Forty-one p>ercent are women, and the median age is 22. Thirty-seven percent are 
married. One third of the students participate In both the day and evening programs during the 
regular semesters, and one tenth are involved only in the late afternoon or evening program. 
Many already have clearly defined disciplinary, professional, and artistic interests. Some still are 
searching for a meaningful vocation and are in the process of exploring different fields of knowledge 
and the work that might develop from them. Most are trying to understand themselves and their 
world better so that they can become more effective human beings and citizens. 

THE FACULTY 

Central to the effectiveness of any Institution of higher learning is the quality and dedication of Its 
faculty. Cal State Fullerton is proud of the high caliber of its faculty and of the commitments of its 
individual faculty members to teaching and scholarship. 

In the fall of 1971, there were 553 full-time and 242 part-time faculty members teaching on the 
campus. For the full-time faculty members the median age was 36, and almost all had had some 
previous college or university teaching experience before coming to Fullerton. Faculty members also 
have a wide variety of experiences and accomplishments in research, the arts, professional work, 
consulting, and other creative activities. Sixty-nine p)ercent of the full-time faculty have earned their 
doctorate degrees, and these have come from more than 100 major colleges and universities. 
Criteria for selection to the faculty include mastery of knowledge in an academic specialty, demon- 
strated skill and experience in teaching, and continuing interest in scholarly study and research. 
Retention and promotion criteria also include service to the university and to the community. 


Summer Sessions 19 


ACADEMIC PROGRAMS 

The university offers a full four-year program of freshman through senior work as well as credential 
programs for teachers and graduate, master's level work in many disciplines and professional fields. 
The university provides a diversity of educational opp>ortunities to satisfy the broad range of back- 
grounds and interests of its students. Approximately 1,500 courses have been developed to provide 
learning from introductory to highly specialized, in-depth and advanced, work in a wide variety and 
growing number of fields of study. 

Fullerton currently awards the baccalaureate degree in 34 fields of knowledge. More advanced work 
and the master's degree are awarded in 28 programs. Many of the baccalaureate and master's degree 
programs offer a choice of specializations (or options or emphases). Additionally, a; least a few 
courses are given in many fields or subject matter areas in which some other colleges and universi- 
ties offer full degree programs. Often these courses are given by a number of different departm'ents. 
Such an interdisciplinary trend fits not only with broader, cultural integration of knowledge but also 
with the recent development of a growing number of interdisciplinary efforts, including some new 
degree programs, at Fullerton. 

Certain traditions have developed with the academic programs at Cal State Fullerton. One is that 
of relative balance in strength of the programs in the physical sciences, the social sciences, the 
humanities and the fine arts. Another is that of academic excellence in the various specializations 
offered by the university and the comparative freedom given to departments and professional 
schools to develop the depth programs for their majors. Another pattern is the great freedom given 
to most students in selecting courses to satisfy their general education or breadth requirements. Still 
other tendencies include the encouragement of: a diversity of approaches to teaching; experimenta- 
tion and innovation in courses and programs; and student participation in curricular planning and 
decision-making. 

ACCREDITATION 

Cal State Fullerton is fully accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges. Specific 
programs have been accredited by the California State Board of Education, the American Association 
of Collegiate Schools of Business, the National Association of Schools of Music, the American 
Chemical Society, the American Speech and Hearing Association, the American Council on Educa- 
tion for journalism and the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education (in elementary 
education, secondary education, special education, and speech and hearing audiology). 

Cal State Fullerton is a member of the Council of Graduate Schools in the United States and the 
Western Association of Graduate Schools. 


SCHEDULE OF CLASSES 

The regular, educational program of the university is offered continuously from 8 a.m. until 10 p.m., 
Monday through Friday. A class schedule, listing all classes meeting during these hours, is prepared 
for each semester and can be bought at the Titan Bookstore. 

The classes held during the late afternoon and evening hours are a growing part of the regular 
university offering and are taught by the full-time and part-time university faculty members. Students 
enrolling in these classes must have met all admission requirements of the university, including the 
filing of an official application for admission, the filing of complete official transcripts from other 
schools, colleges and universities and in the case of lower-division applicants, the completion of 
required tests for admission. 

The classes given during the summer sessions and by the Extension Office do not require admission 
to the university, but specific courses frequently require satisfying particular prerequisites. Separate 
schedules are provided for the summer sessions and extension programs. 

SUMMER SESSIONS 

The summer session is designed to meet the needs of students who are interested in the enrichment 
of their educational background as well as completing requirements for a degree or credential. 
Summer session courses are the equivalent of university courses offered in the fall and spring 
semesters, and apply toward graduation and residence requirements as well as teaching credential 
requirements. Both day and evening classes are scheduled. Many courses have prerequisite require- 


20 Conferences and Institutes 


ments which students must meet. Master's degree work is also offered. 

The university usually conducts two six-week sessions which run consecutively. 

The dates for the 1972 sessions are June 19 through July 28 for the first session, and July 31 through 
September 8 for the second. Also offered are a number of two- and three-week workshops. In 
addition to much of the regular curriculum, summer offerings include many unique and innovative 
programs for teachers and other professional groups. The Associated Students offers a program of 
recreational activities and a lecture series to serve a wide variety of interests. 

A summer sessions class schedule Is usually available by February, and may be obtained by writing 
the dean of continuing education. This schedule contains Information on matters such as costs and 
registration. 

Admission to the Summer Sessions 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the same as in the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses In the summer session. However, students are expected to have satisfied the 
prerequisites for the courses in which they register. Admission to summer session does not grant 
admission to the regular session. Admission to the summer sessions is completed at registration. 

Authorized Student Load 

Title 5 of the California State Administrative Code states, "Not more than one semester unit may 
be earned for each week of attendance in summer session, except that uF)on approval of appropriate 
college authorities, additional semester units may be earned at the rate of one-half unit for each three 
units of credit for which a student is registered." 

This means that combinations can be arranged so that a student may earn up to seven units during 
either of the two six-week summer sessions when a total of not more than two courses is involved 
(i.e., a four-unit course and a three-unit course, or a five-unit course and a two-unit course). Any 
student who enrolls by error in more than seven units during a six- week summer session will find 
that credit for excess units will not be counted toward a degree, credential or other objective. Any 
other exceptions must be petitioned through the Office of Admissions and Records. 

EXTENSION PROGRAM AND SERVICES 

The resources of Cal State Fullerton are made available through the extension program to those who 
are unable to take university work in residence but who wish to pursue university-level study for 
purposes of resuming an interrupted or incompleted education, to enhance professional or vocation- 
al abilities, or for personal growth and fulfillment. 

Extension offerings include regularly established university courses as well as courses and workshops 
designed to meet the needs of particular groups and communities, and may be Initiated at various 
times during the year. Any adult may enroll in an extension course provided he meets the prerequi- 
sites of the course; it is not necessary that he also be enrolled in the university. 

The maximum extension credit which will be accepted toward baccalaureate degrees is 24 semester 
units, of which not more than 1 2 units may be transferred from other colleges or universities. Six 
semester units of extension credit may be applied toward a master's degree with appropriate 
approvals. Extension credit may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirements for 
graduation. 

Veterans may use the educational benefits available to them under federal and state laws to enroll 
in university extension courses provided the classes are part of their prescribed and recognized 
objectives as approved by the Veterans Administration. 

For information about establishing an extension course, or for current offerings, write or telephone 
the Extension Office. 


CONFERENCES AND INSTITUTES 

The university is interested In taking an active part in the development of conferences and institutes. 
The conference director, in cooperation with the respective academic departments and schools, will 
work with agency representatives in planning the program, selection of a competent staff, and the 
general conduct of the conference. 


70-1 » 370 


Instructionally Related Services 21 

Requests for information or assistance with particular educational problems which might be met 
through the extension program should be directed to the conference director. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

A Study abroad program of global scope Is offered by the California State University and Colleges 
International Programs. Year-long study opportunities for students from all 19 campuses are available 
at distinguished Institutions of higher learning throughout the world. 

Cooperating universities abroad include the University of Provence, France; the Free University of 
Berlin and the University of Heidelberg, Germany; the University of Florence, Italy; the University 
of Stockholm and the University of Uppsala, Sweden; the University of Madrid and the University 
of Granada, Spain; Tel Aviv University and the Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel; and Waseda 
University, Japan. In the United Kingdom, cooperating universities, which may vary from year to 
year, have included Dundee, Leicester, Liverpool, London, Oxford, Sheffield, Southampton and 
Wales. An area studies program with Instruction in English Is also available in Taiwan, Republic of 
China. 

Selected students remain enrolled and continue to earn residence credit at their California State 
University and Colleges campus. Full credit Is earned for academic work successfully completed at 
the cooperating institutions abroad. Application of credit earned toward the degree requirements 
of the home campus Is In accordance with college regulations. Students are selected from each 
campus on the basis of academic, linguistic and personal qualifications, as well as career objectives. 
Requirements include: 

Upper division or graduate standing by the beginning of the academic year abroad. 

Grades of B or better in at least 30 semester or 45 quarter units. 

Proficiency in the language of instruction, as specified below. 

Faculty recommendations. 

Proficiency in the language of the host country is a requirement for the programs in France, 
Germany, Italy (except for students applying for the area studies program) and Spain. Even where 
language proficiency Is not required, however, competence in the language of the host country will 
assure broader curricular opportunities. 

Average expenses for the entire year — including round-trip transportation between California and 
the study centers, room and board, health and accident insurance, home campus fees, moderate 
vacation traveling, textbooks, and personal expenses — range from $2,600 to $3,050. Students ordi- 
narily remain eligible for any financial aid for which they otherwise would qualify on their home 
campus. 

Application for the 1973-74 academic year must be submitted before March 1, 1973 (except for 
United Kingdom applicants who must submit applications by January 5, 1973). Applicants are 
notified of acceptance by April 1, 1973. Detailed Information may be obtained by writing to the 
California State University and Colleges International Programs, 5670 Wilshire Boulevard, Los Ange- 
les 90036. 

INSTRUCTIONALLY RELATED SERVICES 

The university provides an extensive program of instructionally related services for its students and 
faculty. These include the universitywide services of the university Library, the Instructional Media 
Center and the Computer Center described in the following sections. Four offices. Academic Serv- 
ices and Planning, Academic Administration, Academic Staffing Services and Institutional Research, 
make studies on university programs and assist In coordinating, planning educational operations and 
sharing information on educational trends and innovations on the Fullerton campus with those going 
on elsewhere. 

The Library 

The university Library is housed on the first and third through sixth floors of the Library-Audiovisual 
Center, which was completed in 1966. As its collection grows and the enrollment increases, the 
Library will occupy the second floor of the building. Designed presently to seat approximately 1,150 
persons and to house about 300,000 books as well as related materials, the building contains group 
study and seminar rooms, study carrels for graduate students and facilities for individual and group 
listening, for the reading of microform materials and for copying materials in book and microform. 


7S-I 9 410 


22 Instructionally Related Services 


The main book collection will contain about 315,000 volumes at the beginning of the 1972-73 
academic year. During that year about 20,000 volumes will be added. Besides attempting to build 
a balanced collection of basic works, the Library has concentrated its efforts in several subject areas. 
As a result relatively strong collections are now available in such fields as World War II, international 
relations since 1870, Kant, Shakespeare, Melville, ichthyology, angling, historiography and historical 
bibliography, library science, mathematics and British and U.S. history. 

A selective depository for U.S. government documents since 1964, the Library will house about 
1 11,000 U.S. documents by the beginning of the 1972-73 academic year. The Library has, in addition, 
some 10,000 reels of microfilmed U.S. government documents, chiefly State Department archives, 
but also such items as the Congressional Record and the papers of various presidents as well as 
microfiche copies of the material in Project ERIC. The Library is a depository for California state 
documents and for California curriculum materials, including current samples of state adopted texts, 
curriculum guides from all over the United States, and non-book instructional materials. 

The Library subscribes to over 4,000 periodicals, it has some 18,500 volumes of bound periodicals 
and has extensive microform holdings in backfiles of periodicals and of local, national, and interna- 
tional newspapers. 

Among its major holdings are the Human Relations Area Files, the British 19th Century Parliamentary 
Papers, the Parliamentary Debates, a microfilm edition of the Published Colonial Records of the 
American Colonies, 1619-1800, and in conjunction with the Patrons of the Library, the Langsdorf 
Anniversary Collection of Crabhorn Press and Book Club of California books. 

Library hours are posted in the lobby and listed in the Library information sheet which is available 
at the reference and circulation desks. Librarians with various subject backgrounds are on duty at 
all times to aid students and faculty in the use of Library resources. 

Instructional Media Center 

The Instructional Media Center includes both the extensive Audiovisual Services located in the lower 
level of the Library Building and the Instructional Television Services located in the Television Studio 
of the Music-Speech-Drama Building. Services to faculty and students include use of all types of 
audiovisual equipment and materials, rental of films from major rental libraries, and for faculty: 
production of transparencies, charts, posters, embossographs and diagrams plus all types of still and 
motion picture photography. Television services include videotaping facilities and playback both in 
the studio and on or off campus. 

The center is responsible for the coordination and development of instructional applications of 
media, and the improvement of programs and materials designed for instructional use. Liaison and 
service relations are maintained with other media learning-oriented units on the campus. Personnel 
of the center are prepared to assist the faculty in their analysis of media needs as related to the 
procurement or production of materials pertinent to instructional development. 

Computer Center 

The Computer Center, located on the second floor of the Administration-Business Administration 
Building, serves as the central computing facility for all of the university. As the central campus 
computing facility, it provides support for instruction, research and administrative computing serv- 
ices. 

The computing system at Fullerton is integrated into the State Distributed Computer Network which 
provides a wide range of computing services. The local campus computer is a CDC 31 50 with 32,000 
words (130,000 characters) of memory, card reader, card punch, printer, two tape drives and four 
disk drives. As a component of the network, the Computer Center can communicate with a large- 
scale CDC 3300 Computer located at the Division of Information Systems in Los Angeles. The 
Distributed Computer Network also provides time-sharing services on a CDC 3170 and access to 
an IBM 360/91 at UCLA. Keypunch, teletype terminals, a sorter and an interpreter for student use 
are available in an open shop area located in the Computer Center. 

A computer science degree is offered jointly by the Departments of Quantitative Methods and 
Mathematics and the School of Engineering. Many other departments, including Sociology, Geogra- 
phy and Accounting, use the computer facility in their coursework. Students' jobs receive the highest 
priority of ail work batch-processed on the CDC 3150. The Computer Center maintains a library of 
application programs for general use. Such languages offered by the system include FORTRAN, 
COBOL, ALGOL, BASIC and COMPASS (the assembly language for CDC). 


Research Organizations 23 


Office of Academic Administration 

The Office of Academic Administration was established in 1971 to coordinate the following instruc- 
tionally related functions: Academic Staffing Services; Computer Services; Institutional Research; and 
Admissions and Records. The associate vice president for academic administration also provides 
supervisory direction for the Division of Health Education, Physical Education, Recreation and 
Athletics. 

Office of Academic Staffing Services 

The Office of Academic Staffing Services is responsible for all activities related to the scheduling of 
classes during the academic year. In addition to the preparation of the class schedule, the office 
coordinates all changes and adjustments to It, administers and prepares the staffing formula for the 
university, and has a primary responsibility for course-section and facilities utilization reporting 
during and after registration. 

Office of Institutional Research 

The Office of Institutional Research serves as an information center and a problem-solving agency 
which collects, interprets and disseminates Information. These data Include enrollment histories and 
projections, distributions of data classes according to selected factors (e.g. level, type of Instruction, 
unit value), summaries of student characteristics, and other statistics related to student population, 
course offerings and resources. Most of the data collection and analysis Is related to the reporting 
requirements of the California State University and Colleges and other agencies. However, the office 
evaulates data, provides assistance in design of specialized studies and also conducts analytic studies 
to serve the decision-making and policy-formulating needs of Cal State. 

Office of Academic Services and Planning 

In 1969 the Office of Academic Planning was created to coordinate the development of educational 
programs, to provide an all-university perspective on educational activities at the campus, and to 
stimulate academic Innovations. A dean of academic planning was appointed to provide leadership 
for this office and to work closely with the vice president, academic affairs, the Curriculum Commit- 
tee, the Committee for Educational Development and Innovation and other individuals and groups 
concerned with changing and improving the educational programs of this Institution. 

This office currently Is responsible for preparing the catalog and for some of the university-level 
reviewing and approving of new courses and programs. It also makes studies of important education- 
al problems and activities on the campus. Additionally, It does the preliminary fact finding and staff 
work for some of the new plans, policies and procedures designed to improve the quality and vitality 
of the learning climate and experiences on the campus. 

The Office of Academic Planning was reorganized and expanded in 1971 to Include coordination 
of the functions of the Library, the Instructional Media Center, the Office of Continuing Education 
and the Office of Academic Advisement. The associate vice president, academic services and 
planning also provides supervisory direction for the Division of Library Science. 

RESEARCH ORGANIZATIONS AND SERVICES 
AND SPECIAL STUDY CENTERS 

Much and varied research is going on at Fullerton. Most of this is being done by individual faculty 
members and students as part of their scholarly and professional development activities. Research 
training is an important part of the education for more advanced work in most disciplines and 
professions, and many of our students are encouraged and assisted to learn and apply research skills 
in either independent or team projects. 

The Research Committee of the Faculty Council and the Contracts and Grants Office provide 
stimulus, coordination and direction to the research efforts of the university. 

A Student Research Fellowship program and a Faculty Research Grant program award "seed grants" 
to promising research projects every year. Services supporting research are given by the Cal State 
Fullerton Foundation, the university Computer Center, and the university Library. Augmenting the 
on-campus aids to research are the great and diverse resources available for study in the Southern 
California area. 

A number of special centers with specific research objectives are operating at the university. These 


99—1 9 406 


24 Research Organizations 

include the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community (with its affiliated 
Center for Economic Education, the Real Estate Research Institute, the Technological Studies Institute 
and the joint Institute for Urban Studies), the Center for Governmental Studies, the Institute for 
Molecular Biology, the Reading Center, the Laboratory for Phonetic Research, the Special Education 
Clinic, the Speech and Hearing Clinic and the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 

Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community 

The Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community provides: 

1 . School of Business Administration and Economics and other faculty with additional opportu- 
nity to participate in research activities in order to improve and reinforce teaching and 
professional competence; 

2. Professional research and consultation services to the local area normally considered as being 
serviced by the university, including private business, labor, agriculture, and local government 
agencies; 

3. Educational services, e.g., seminars and conferences, to improve the level of understanding 
and competence of local decision-makers in specialized areas relating to business administra- 
tion and economics; and 

4. A focus, through research, for the education of students and citizens in the business and 
economic problems of the local community, and for the involvement of faculty in such 
educational programs. 

The operations of the center are carried out by constituent institutes, programs, and projects for 
which the center provides overall leadership and coordination. The institutes are long-term, continu- 
ing organizations designed to operate in selected major problem and functional areas of strategic 
significance and concern to the school. Programs and projects within the center are organized to 
carry on work outside the institutes' area of interest, which are a smaller scale and for a shorter 
time-span. 

Currently included within the Center for Research in Business, Economics and the Community are: 
the affiliated Center for Economic Education; the Real Estate Research Institute; the Technological 
Studies Institute; and the Joint Institute for Urban Studies. 

Center for Economic Education 

The Center for Economic Education is one of many such centers at colleges and universities in 
the United States working with the national Joint Council on Economic Education to expand eco- 
nomic understanding. Center programs include (1) services to schools and colleges, individual 
educators, and the community; (2) research and professional training; and (3) operation of an 
economic education Information center. The center consists of a broadly based executive policy 
board; an administrative staff; and formally organized groups of participating users. Although operat- 
ing autonomously, the center is affiliated with the Center for Research In Business, Economics and 
the Community. 

Real Estate Research Institute 

The Real Estate Research Institute conducts a continuing research program, with special emphasis 
on urban development in Orange County. Studies are undertaken in cooperation with various public 
and private agencies, including the University of California, but primary funding is from the California 
State Department of Real Estate. Opportunities exist for student participation in the various research 
activities. 

Technological Studies Institute 

The Technological Studies Institute conducts an interdisciplinary program of technological studies 
including research activities closely integrated with special course offerings and a library collection 
on technology. Research activities include study of methodology and techniques for measuring and 
analyzing technological change and Its economic and social impacts; study of technology transfer 
and applications; and analysis of Impacts of technological change on individuals, industries and 
society. Curriculum activities of the program are coordinated through the School of Letters, Arts and 
Sciences and courses included in the program are listed with that school's courses in this catalog. 


98—1 9 510 


Research Organizations 25 


joint Institute for Urban Studies 

The Joint Institute for Urban Studies represents a cooperative effort by California State University, 
Fullerton and the University of California, Irvine to study the processes and problems of urban 
development with special reference to Orange County. 

Center for Governmental Studies 

The Center for Governmental Studies is part of the Department of Political Science's expanding 
research and teaching activities. Established in 1965, the center has four major functions: first, to 
collect and make available fugitive governmental and political materials; second, to assist local 
government agencies and citizen groups In the study of local governmental problems; third, to 
provide students with instruction and experience in research techniques and methodology; and 
fourth, to provide facilities for community institutes and seminars. 

Institute for Molecular Biology 

The Institute for Molecular Biology was established for the purpose of promoting an atmosphere 
congenial to research and creative activity In the molecular biological sciences. It is an Interdiscipli- 
nary organization comprised of certain faculty from the Departments of Biological Science, Chemis- 
try and Physics. The institute is dedicated to the pursuit of problems of human welfare, utilizing an 
approach at the cellular and molecular level of Inquiry. Its purposes are (1 ) to foster and encourage 
communication of ideas and information among its membership for mutual professional improve- 
ment; (2) to encourage students to adopt affiliation with the membership and to adopt an interdisci- 
plinary understanding of their particular areas of emphasis; (3) to foster an active research program 
on the part of the membership on problems best approached by the Integration of chemistry, physics 
and biology; and (4) to seek ways of Improving the Individual teaching performance of its member- 
ship through interdisciplinary communication at all levels of instruction. 

It is Intended that the institute will function as a service to the departments that It represents. The 
institute sponsors a series of special seminars devoted to topics in the molecular biological sciences, 
featuring speakers from Its own personnel and from other campuses. 

Reading Center 

The Reading Center Is located in the School of Education. Its primary purpose is to serve as a clinic 
and laboratory for graduate students in the reading option of the Master of Science in Education. 
Children from the university community schools attend the Reading Center for diagnosis and 
remediation. The center houses materials and equipment relating to reading instruction. 

Laboratory for Phonetic Research 

The Laboratory for Phonetic Research Is a major research and training facility in the Department 
of Linguistics at Cal State Fullerton. It is equipped with the necessary electromechanical facilities 
required for the acoustical, psychoacoustical, and physiological study of human speech. 

Its objectives are threefold: 

Instruction. To provide teaching, training and experience for students who will serve during their 
professional lives to assist the language handicapped. 

Research. To provide advanced students and faculty with facilities for research on language 
function and dysfunction. 

Community service. To provide qualitative diagnostic assistance to the university community 
to the extent possible. 

The courses which center about the laboratory are designed to prepare students as operators in the 
electromechanical aspects of clinical and research work in the analysis of normal and disordered 
speech. 

Advanced students and faculty use the laboratory to carry out significant research projects In 
acoustical, articulatory and experimental phonetics. To date, a wide range of such projects have 
either been completed or are currently in progress. The laboratory publishes the Research Reports 
series, available Internationally through the ERIC system. 


108—1 9 530 


26 


Titan Shops 

Special Education Clinic 

The primary purpose of the Special Education Clinic is to provide intensive experiences for students 
with children referred by schools and other agencies in the community. The experiences involve 
educational assessment, instructional methodology and evaluation. All students participating In the 
clinic attend clinic seminars and prepare cases for presentation at the seminars. 

Speech and Hearing Clinic 

The Speech and Hearing Clinic operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. In addition is an off-campus clinical program for graduate students that Involves 
experiences within medical and paramedical settings. The primary purpose of the clinics both on 
campus and off campus Is to provide opportunities for teaching, service and research. University 
students receive clinical experience and opportunity for observation. The on-campus clinic Is ac- 
credited by the Board of Examiners of the American Speech and Hearing Association and the 
California State Department of Education. 

Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary 

The Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary operates as a nonprofit California State University, Fullerton Founda- 
tion agency. The sanctuary provides for a program of continuing educational service to the commu- 
nity; a research center for biological field studies; a facility for teacher education in nature 
interpretation and conservation education; and a center for training students planning to enter into 
the public service field of nature Interpretation. 


CALIFORNIA STATE UNIVERSITY, 

FULLERTON FOUNDATION 

The California State University, Fullerton Foundation was established and incorporated in October 
1959 to provide essential student and faculty services which cannot be provided from state appro- 
priations; to supplement the program and activities of the university In appropriate ways; and to assist 
otherwise the university in fulfilling Its purposes and in serving the people of the State of California — 
especially those of the area in which the school is located. 

Services provided by the foundation include administration of scholarship and student loan funds; 
sponsored research programs; Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary; and certain Institutes. 

The foundation's overall policies are administered by a board of trustees made up of members of 
the university faculty, administration and students as well as community leaders. 


TITAN SHOPS, INC. 

On July 1, 1971, the Titan Bookstore and the food services were sold by the Foundation to Titan 
Shops, Inc., as recommended in Section 42407 of Title 5, California Administrative Code. 


Titan Bookstore 

Students are able to purchase or order books and supplies as needed for classes from the on-campus 
booksto^owned and of^rated by the Titan Shops, Inc. The Titan Bookstore is a nonprofit operation: 
Its proceeds ° fhe educational aims of the university. It is located directly east of 

ticTn BuHd^ng^ closely adjacent to the Administration-Business Adminlstra- 


Food Services 


°ack bar^inX’loweMev^oHh^'^'®''"" franchised to provide food in the Commons and in a 
at other locations. A variety o/re^aS^' "f ^ '‘^Ik S 

or driving distance from the unive ** ^ ^ ^ ^ 


I 


lOfr-1 9 9S0 






29 


STUDENT SERVICES AND ACTIVITIES 


The university provides many academically-related services for its students so that they can derive 
greater value from attendance at Fullerton. Included among the areas in which professionaly staffed 
services are provided are counseling and testing, student activities and government, a student 
residence center, health, financial aid, vocational rehabilitation, international education, placement, 
judicial affairs and alumni affairs. The offices which provide these services operate under the 
auspices of the dean of students. 

Opportunities are provided for students to become involved in all phases of university life at Cal 
State Fullerton. The choices of activities range from membership in small interest groups to service 
with members of the faculty and administration on major fact-finding, decision-making and policy- 
recommending groups. An extensive organization of clubs, interest groups, boards, councils, and 
committees has been created within the student body and university community so that opportuni- 
ties to participate in activities are available for all interested students. 

OFFICE OF THE DEAN OF STUDENTS 

Coordination of Student Personnel Services centers in the Office of the Dean of Students. The 
professional functions of this area are directly administered by the Counseling and Testing Center, 
the Student Activities Office, the Student Residence Center, the Office of Placement Services, the 
Financial Aid Office, the Office of judicial Affairs, the Student Health Center and the Educational 
Opportunity Program. Collateral responsibilities include foreign student advising, coordination of the 
California State University and Colleges' international student programs, selective service, veterans 
affairs and the alumni program. 

COUNSELING AND TESTING SERVICES 

Counseling 

Students who need assistance with such concerns as choosing an academic major or vocational goal, 
with study skills, or with personal problems affecting their academic progress may obtain help 
through the Counseling Center. The staff of professionally trained counselors and psychologists has 
available a variety of resources including occupational information files, vocational and psychologi- 
cal tests, college and graduate school catalogs and directories of various kinds to assist the student. 
The Counseling Center also maintains contact with agencies and professional persons In the commu- 
nity to whom students may be referred. 

Counseling services are available only to fully matriculated, registered students. 

Testing 

Universitywide testing programs are coordinated and administered by the Testing Center. These 
include university admissions tests and general tests for graduate school admission. In addition, the 
Testing Center provides advice and consulting services to instructional departments in the develop- 
ment and administration of admission, selection, and placement tests for use by a specific depart- 
ment. 

The Testing Center also conducts ongoing research on the validity and appropriateness of tests used 
in university testing programs. 

Testing requirements for students seeking admission are listed in the admissions section of the 
catalog. Students seeking information about testing requirements for specific instructional programs 
should inquire in the appropriate instructional division or the Counseling and Testing Center. 

STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

The university recognizes the important role of student activities. An extensive organization of clubs, 
interest groups, commissions, councils and communities has been created within the student body 
structure so that opportunities are available to every student according to his interest, ability and 
available time. 


114—1 9 990 


30 Student Activities 


Student Activities Center 

The Student Activities Center provides a wide range of service. A professional staff provides aid and 
consultation to individuals and groups as well as assisting the Associated Students in planning and 
implementing programs, events and projects. The staff advises all student organizations concerning 
established policies and procedures, and aids students in arranging for use of university services and 
facilities. 

Student Government 

All registered students are members of the Associated Students of Cal State Fullerton. The Associated 
Students is governed through the executive, legislative, and judicial branches of the Associated 
Students organization. The president and commissioners constitute the executive branch which has 
the responsibility for the development and administration of the program, including such activities 
as publications, religious clubs. Intercollegiate athletics, intramural athletics, forensics, and music. 
The Associated Students Senate has full responsibility for legislation by which this program is directed 
and for the allocation of student funds for the program. The judicial branch serves as the legal body 
for interpretation of the constitution and enforcement of Associated Student policies. 

Student Organizations 

Student organizations are recognized as vital to the total educational process. They are chartered 
to encourage and facilitate use of university resources and Integrate activities with a goal of sustaining 
a viable university community. Any group of students may become a chartered organization, 
provided the goals and activities are consistent with university rules and regulations. Organizations 
are classified under the following headings: (1) Cocumcular (organizations which share learning 
goals with a specific department); (2) Political or Religious; (3) Service; ar\6 (4) Social. More than 
75 organizations are now recognized, including seven national social fraternities, five national social 
sororities, a number of departmental associations and many special interest groups. 

Student Publications 

The university newspaper, the Daily Titan, is published as a product of the journalism classes and 
financed by the Associated Students. In addition, a handbook Is available for use by organizations 
in the development and operation of their program. Two magazines. Focus and the Promethean, 
are also published by students. 

Athletics 

The intercollegiate athletic program consists of teams In baseball, basketball, cross country, football, 
golf, gymnastics, soccer, swimming, tennis, track and field, water polo and wrestling. A year-round 
program of intramural activities includes basketball, badminton, flag football, handball, softball, 
tennis and wrestling, swimming and weight lifting. 

The university is a member of the California Collegiate Athletic Association (CCAA). All athletic 
teams compete under rules of the National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA). 

Intramural Activities 

The intramural program is conducted on a seasonal basis and involves a variety of athletic and 
recreational activities for both men and women. Rules and regulations which govern participation 
in the intramural program are available in the Office of the Director of the Intramural Program or 
in the Student Activities Center. 

Extramural Activities 

Participation by women in extramural volleyball, basketball, tennis, swimming, track, and golf is 
provided though membership in the Extramural Coordinating Council of Southern California and the 
American Recreation and Athletic Federation for University Women. 

Recreation Programs 

Individual recreation opportunities in weight training, swimming, handball, volleyball, basketball and 
badminton are available through membership In the University Recreation Programs to members 
of the student body, faculty and staff. 


ll»-l 9 61S 


student Residence Center 31 


Draft Advisement and Information Programs 

A professional staff provides information, guidance and referrals for students of the university on all 
questions and problems stemming from Selective Service requirements. This service, provided by 
the Associated Students, works closely with the Selective Service assistant In the Admissions and 
Records Office as well as all other areas of Student Personnel Services. 

Birth Control Information Services 

Birth control counseling at the Student Health Center has been supplemented by a Birth Control 
Information Service, financed and operated by the Associated Students under the direction of the 
university medical director. A part-time coordinator is available in the University Union to make 
appointments with a Student Health Center physician. The physician advises the patient on the 
advantages and disadvantages of the various methods of birth control as well as giving the necessary 
physical examination. 

Campuswide Events 

Student boards, organized by the Associated Students, sponsor many campuswide events. The 
lecture series, pop concerts, film series and special events are part of the ongoing program. All 
recognized student organizations frequently cosponsor events in the area of their interests. 

Child Care Center 

Sponsored by the Associated Students is the Children's Center which provides daytime nursery care 
for children of Cal State Fullerton students for a nominal fee. The professionally staffed center, 
located near the campus, is licensed by the State of California. 

Experimental College 

The Experimental College Is a program created and funded by the Associated Students. A student 
director and his staff coordinate, guide, plan and publicize the program to the university community. 
The Experimental College is recognized by the university community as a creative, positive cocur- 
ricular program that is a supplement to the regular instructional program of the university. 

Legal Information and Referral 

This unique office provides assistance to students on matters pertaining to law and makes referrals 
in cooperation with the Orange County Bar Association and the Legal Aid Society. A full-time law 
student attending a recognized school of law maintains scheduled office hours in the University 
Union. 

Mutual Ticket Agency 

The Associated Students, through its business office, operates a ticket agency for the benefit of all 
students. Purchases for drama, music, shows and sporting events may be made during regular office 
hours. The agency is located in the University Union. 

Student News Bureau 

The Student News Bureau was organized In 1%0 to provide the outside press with news of student 
activities on the campus. It is financed by a budgeted allocation from Associated Students. 

University Union 

The University Union Is leased by the Associated Students from the university. This facility houses 
the Associated Students government offices and business office, as well as the Student Activities 
Center, student organizations rooms and a snack bar. Facilities are available to all students for 
meeting rooms, pool, cards, films, and small discussion groups. The union is located in the lower 
level of the Letters and Science Building. 

STUDENT RESIDENCE CENTER 

The Student Residence Center Is responsible for maintaining lists of off-campus housing, rooms and 
apartments. These listings are continuously updated through conventional and computerized proce- 
dures. 


122—1 9 030 


32 Financial Aid 


In addition to its listing service, the center provides information about rental leases. Model leases 
which enumerate the rights and privileges of both tenant and landlord are available. Students having 
questions about tenant rights can obtain appropriate pamphlets from the center. 

Assistance also Is provided to students who are seeking roommates. A summer orientation program 
designed to bring together small groups of students having similar interests and housing needs is 
provided. A bulletin board containing lists of available rooms and roommates requested also Is 
provided by the center. 

STUDENT HEALTH SERVICES 

The purpose of the Student Health Center Is to provide high quality medical service early in the 
course of an Illness, to promote a healthful and sanitary environment on campus in which to live 
and study, to stimulate better health awareness among the students, and to educate them to the high 
standards of good therapeutic and preventive care. 

The Student Health Center Is In Room 553 of the Letters and Science Building and Is open from 8 
a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday of each weekday that classes are in session. No staff Is 
available when the Student Health Center Is not open for off-campus calls. Special care and time 
are given to counseling of both emotional and physical problems. Physicians and nurses are continu- 
ously on duty during the day to care for emergencies and for the treatment of illnesses and injuries. 
Among the services presently offered are the following: 

1 . Emergency care 

2. Diagnosis and treatment of medical and surgical problems 

3. Medical counseling 

4. Psychiatric counseling and diagnosis 

5. Specialists' diagnostic services when directly referred by the Student Health Center 

6. Follow-up care as may be recommended by the student's private physician within the scope 
of available facilities 

7. Electrocardiography 

8. Physical therapy treatment 

9. Routine Immunizations 

10. Laboratory and X-ray facilities 

All fees for care in the Student Health Center, unless otherwise specifically stated, have been prepaid 
by the State of California and by the student's registration fee. Only registered undergraduates and 
graduates are eligible for all or any of the health services offered. Emergency is available to 

everyone on campus. 

Health, Accident, Hospital Insurance 

All students are urged to carry this type of insurance. An excellent policy at a low premium is 
available to all students through the Associated Students' Business Office. Medical care when the 
Health Center is not open Is an expense of the student. Such insurance will defray much of the cost 
of private medical care. 

FINANCIAL AID 

The Financial Aid Office provides guidance and assistance in financial matters to all students. 
Financial aid administers all scholarships, emergency loans, grants. National Defense Loans and the 
work-study programs. 

Scholarships 

A limited number of scholarships is available for outstanding students. Qualified students should 
obtain scholarship applications from the Financial Aid Office, and return by April 15 for the fall 
semester. Scholarship applications are evaluated by the university Scholarship Committee. Awards 
are based on scholastic record, financial need and p)ersonal qualifications. Some scholarships are 
limited to students majoring In specified disciplines. Departmental recommendations weigh heavily 
in such cases. 

Scholarships offered by Cal State Fullerton are made possible by interested organizations, business 
firms and individuals. Recent contributors to the scholarship program include: 


13»-1 10 55 


Financial Aid 


33 


California Congress of Parents and Teachers, Inc. 

Cal State Fullerton Computer Center Scholarship Fund 

California State Employees' Association (Cal State Fullerton Chapter) 

Delta Delta Delta East Orange County Alumnae Chapter 
Edward Mittleman Memorial Scholarship 
Fourth District, California Parents and Teachers Association 
Fullerton Rotary Club 

Gamma Phi Beta Sorority (Orange County Alumnae) 

Los Amigos Club of Fullerton 

Mr. and Mrs. Rodney Coulson (President's Award) 

Mu Phi Epsilon Scholarship Fund 
Orange County Engineering Council Scholarship 
Robert King Maxwell Memorial Scholarship Fund 
Sadie Landon Memorial Music Scholarship Fund 
Sheryl Cummings Memorial Scholarship Fund 

Loans 

The generosity of organizations and individuals enables the university to offer short-term loans to 
students who meet unexpected financial difficulties of a temporary nature. Loans from these funds 
are made for various periods of time and to specified categories of students, according to university 
regulations and the wishes of the donors. The prime purpose of these loans is to meet educationally 
related expenses, and thus loans cannot be made for the purposes which are normally financed by 
private lending institutions. Application for a short-term loan may be made at any time during the 
school year. 

The following is a listing of the loan funds available during the 1972-73 school year: 

Altrusa Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 
Associated Students Foreign Student Loan Fund 
Betty Casault Memorial Fund 

California Retired Teachers Association (Laura Settle Fund) 

Carrie Lou Sutherland Memorial Fund 

Cal State Fullerton Faculty Women's Club Loan Fund 

Gamma Epsilon Chapter of Delta Kappa Gamma Loan Fund 

James Merrick Memorial Loan Fund 

Laura E. Imhoff Memorial Loan Fund 

Mary Virginia Lopez Memorial Loan Fund 

Pan-Hellenic Club of Northern Orange County Loan Fund 

Pierre Guyette Memorial Loan Fund 

Robert E. Edwards Memorial Loan Fund 

Rossmoor Women's Club Loan Fund 

Rotary Club of Fullerton, Foreign Students Loan Fund 

Soroptimist International Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

Stan Chase Memorial Loan Fund 

Trust-Davis Memorial Loan Fund 

Zonta Club of Fullerton Loan Fund 

National Defense Student Loans 

Cal State Fullerton joins with the federal government and the State of California in making long-term, 
low-interest loans available to students under the National Defense Education Act. Details and 
applications are available at the Financial Aid Office. Deadlines for submissions of applications are 
December 1 for the spring semester, April 1 for the summer sessions and June 1 for the fall semester. 
All unmarried applicants under age 25 are required to file a Parents' Confidential Statement with the 
College Scholarship Service, Box 1025, Berkeley 94701, designating Cal State Fullerton as one of the 
recipients. The Parents' Confidential Statement assists the university to evaluate financial need, and, 
since it must be on hand before the loan application can be acted upon, early submission is advised. 
These forms can be obtained at most secondary schools or at the Financial Aid Office. 


2 — 8.3097 


138—1 10 70 


34 


Vocational Rehabilitation 


Federal Insured Loan Program 

The university cooperates with the federal government and private lending institutions in making 
guaranteed loans available to full-time students. A loan recipient under this program must meet the 
following qualifications: 

a. have an adjusted family Income of less than $15,000 per year 

b. be a full-time student 

c. be enrolled and in good standing at the university or accepted for enrollment. 

The interest on these loans Is 7 percent per annum on the unpaid balance. The U.S. Office of 
Education will pay all interest while the student is enrolled as a full-time student. Repayment ranges 
from 5 to 10 years following graduation, according to arrangements made with the lender. Applica- 
tions and further information may be obtained from the Financial Aid Office. 

University Work-Study Program 

The university cooperates with the federal government in providing work-study jobs. Students who 
can establish "need eligibility" may work up to an average of 15 hours a week during the school 
year and up to 40 hours in the summer. Under this program there are on-campus opportunities such 
as library and Instructional aides, clerks, computer center aides, and laboratory and research assist- 
ants. Off-campus jobs In nonprofit community agencies include teacher aides, recreation leaders, 
office trainees, and administrative interns. Interested students should consult the Financial Aid Office 
for eligibility requirements. 

Educational Opportunity Grants 

Federal funds have been made available to the university to use in making grants to undergraduate 
students who display "exceptional financial need" and who would otherwise be unable to continue 
their education. These grants range from $200 to $1,000 per year and are non-repayable. These grants 
are always awarded in conjunction with other forms of aid, and thus a Parents' Confidential 
Statement is required. Deadlines are the same as for the National Defense Student Loans. 

Alan Pattee Scholarship (Children of Deceased Peace Officers or Firemen) 

Surviving children, natural or adopted, of California peace officers or firemen killed in the line of 
duty are not charged fees or tuition of any kind while enrolled at any California State University or 
College, according to the Alan Pattee Scholarship Act and Section 23762, California Education Code. 
Students qualifying for these benefits are known as Alan Pattee scholars. 

INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION 

Foreign Students 

Special services for foreign students are coordinated by the international student counselor. These 
services Include aid with problems concerning visa status and employment; orientation to academic 
procedures and requirements; advisement related to finances, social standards and customs; and to 
resources and opportunities offered by campus and community. 

International Programs 

Information concerning study opportunities for American students in foreign universities Is available 
in the International Student Office. The international student counselor coordinates the selection of 
students applying for admission to one of the international programs operated by the California State 
University and Colleges in France, Germany, India, Israel, Italy, japan, Spain, Sweden, Taiwan, 
United Kingdom and the U.S.S.R. (See also International Programs on page 21.) 

VOCATIONAL REHABILITATION SERVICES 

Students who have a physical, emotional or other disability which handicaps them vocationally may 
be eligible for the services of the State Department of Rehabilitation. These services include vocation- 
al counseling and guidance, training (with payment of costs of such as books, fees and tuition) and 
job placement. Under certain circumstances students may also qualify for help with medical needs, 
living expenses and transportation. 


143— t 10 95 


Placement Services 35 

Contact the California State Department of Rehabilitation, 421 North Brookhurst Street, Anaheim 
92801. Telephone (714) 635-5500. 

EDUCATIONAL OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM 

The Educational Opportunity Program is an innovative educational program designed to provide 
comprehensive services for culturally different students. These services include the identification, 
selection and counseling of students who, because of academic, ethnic, financial or motivational 
barriers, would not normally acquire a university education. 

EOP gives each of the students in its program much individual attention. It also uses knowledge of 
the culturally different student's distinctive patterns of social behavior, learning styles, motivations 
and aspirations to assist students in realizing their full potentialities. Special tutorial and counseling 
activities are used so that EOP students will be more effective in their regular coursework at the 
university. The Educational Opportunity Program also strives to develop esprit and a sense of 
community among its students through a variety of creative and identity-seeking activities. 

Its students are encouraged not only to understand the background and strengths of their own 
particular ethnic groups but also to work together in support of central, universal human values. EOP 
also is keenly interested in advancing the understanding of different cultural groups on this campus 
and an awareness of their problems and potentialities. It has been active in supporting the ethnic 
studies departments and their courses. EOP also has worked effectively to bring university students, 
faculty and administrators into more frequent and meaningful contacts with students and community 
members from culturally different groups. 

The service departments of the Educational Opportunity Program include counseling, tutorial, faculty 
liaison and research evaluation. Other components structured to assist students are special activities, 
recruitment and supporting secretarial services. 

PLACEMENT SERVICES 

A centralized Placement Center Is maintained with responsibilities for assisting students in finding 
both part-time and career employment. The university believes that It best serves both the student 
and employers only when its graduates have been placed In the professions for which they are 
prepared and trained. 

Part-Time Placement 

Students wishing part-time jobs either on or off campus are eligible to receive the assistance of the 
office if they are taking three units or more. New students may receive service as soon as they have 
been issued a student body number. Secretarial skills are in great demand, but calls for drivers, 
custodians, teacher aides, draftsmen, waiters, clerks, youth and recreation leaders, sitters, gardeners, 
etc., are received. Entering freshmen who must augment their resources while going to school are 
encouraged to limit their work hours to approximately 1 5 per week. 

Business, Industry and Government Placement 

Through personal interviews the career placement counselor assists graduating seniors, graduate 
students, and alumni seeking career employment In business, industry, or public service in defining 
occupational preference, providing active job leads and making up rwumes. 

In addition, the Placement Center makes arrangements for the on-campus recruitment program 
which brings the employers to the students. Also available through the center are applications for 
computerized job placement service operated by the Cal State Fullerton Placement Council. It Is 
called GRAD (Graduate Resume Accumulation and Distribution) and it is for the Cal State alumni 
seeking new professional opportunities. 

Located In the Placement Center is the Career Library with an ever-expanding selection of resource 
materials on career opportunities. Federal, state, county, city and armed forces brochures and 
applications are also available for student access. 

The Placement Center serves as liaison office for the military and Action/ Peace Corps-VISTA offering 
counseling and information brochures to any interested student. 


I4»-I 10 110 


36 Alumni Affairs 


Educational Placement 

Students in the teacher education, pupil personnel services, or administration curriculum of the 
university, who are in the final semester of a credential program, or who are In student teaching or 
directed field work, are eligible to register and receive the services of the Placement Center, chief 
of which is help in establishing a professional employment file. Such registrants are supplied informa- 
tion on openings and helped to establish their candidacies in the school districts and educational 
institutions. 

Students who are not in the student teaching program but who are completing their credential 
program at the university are also eligible for service. This includes those about to receive their 
master's degree, who plan to apply for a community university credential. 

JUDICIAL AFFAIRS 

The Office of judicial Affairs is concerned with formulating and adjudicating student rights and 
grievances as well as clarifying diverse responsibilities which are essential to a vigorous, responsive 
and productive educational community. This purpose Is accomplished through the coordination and 
Implementation of the judicial procedures of the university related to student conduct and academic 
appeals; reviewing policies involving student rights and responsibilities as outlined in University 
Policy Statement 300.000, Statement of Students Rights and Responsibilities; discipline, advocacy 
and the like in order to recommend changes which benefit students and the university community 
as a whole. 

Additionally, the Office of judicial Affairs carries out special projects related to Student Personnel 
Services. 


ALUMNI AFFAIRS 

The Alumni Association of Cal State Fullerton provides the opportunity for alumni to maintain 
contact with the university after graduation through various publications, information about continu- 
ing education programs as well as special social and service events at the university. Further 
Information regarding membership and the programs can be obtained by calling the Office of Alumni 
Affairs. 




ADMISSION, REGISTRATION, 
RECORDS AND REGULATIONS 


196-1 10 160 








t, , 



{ 




41 


ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY 


OFFICE OF ADMISSIONS AND RECORDS 

The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for the administration of the admission, 
registration, and records programs and services for undergraduate and graduate students in the 
regular sessions of Cal State Fullerton. These programs and services include: the admission and 
readmission of students within established enrollment categories, quotas and priorities; the evalua- 
tion of the applicability of undergraduate transfer credit toward all-university requirements of the 
curriculum; the registration of student programs of study, including enrollment into classes; the 
maintenance of academic records; the administration of academic probation and disqualification 
policies; the provision of enrollment certifications on student request, including transcripts of aca- 
demic records, certificates for Selective Service, Veterans Administration and other purposes; the 
certification of the completion of degree and credential requirements; the review of petitions for 
exceptions to academic regulations; and the provision of information about these programs and 
services. 

RELATIONS WITH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 

The Office of Relations with Schools and Colleges administers a universitywide program to assist 
undergraduate students in the transition from school to college. This assistance is provided in the 
form of preadmission guidance to prospective students, counseling with parents, provision of current 
information about the university's curricula and requirements to school and college counselors, and 
research into the articulation problems of the transfer student. 

Requirements for Admission 

Requirements for admission to the California State University and Colleges are in accordance with 
Title 5, Chapter 5, Subchapter 2, of the California Administrative Code as amended by the Board 
of Trustees of the California State University and Colleges on November 24, 1970. A prospective 
applicant who is unsure of his status under the requirements is encouraged to consult his school or 
college counselor or the university Admissions Office. 

Application Procedure for 1973-74 

All prospective students must file a completed application for admission within the appropriate filing 
period. A completed undergraduate application includes Part A, the application form ; Part B, the 
residence questionnaire; Part E, the data form; and the nonrefundable application fee of $20. A 
graduate application includes Parts A, B and E; Part C, the supplemental graduate admission applica- 
tion; and the nonrefundable application fee of $20. Graduate applicants who were enrolled as 
undergraduate students at the university in the term immediately preceding the term for which they 
now wish to apply must also complete all the required forms and submit the $20 application fee. 
Each applicant may file only one application for any one term within the California State University 
and Colleges. The application should be filled with the campus of first choice. Alternative choice 
campuses may be listed on the application. 

Admission Categories and Quotas 

Admission quotas are established at each college for student categories selected within policies 
established by the Trustees of the California State University and Colleges. At Fullerton, categories 
have been established for students who are: first-time freshmen; freshman and sophomore under- 
graduate transfer applicants; junior and senior undergraduate transfer applicants; special program 
applicants; hardship applicants; and foreign students. Also, there is a quota for each graduate level 
program. After admission to Fullerton, requests for change to a different (i.e., a new) academic 
objective involving established admission categories and quotas will be evaluated following policies 
and procedures parallel to those for new students. 


lei— 1 10 189 


42 Admission to the University 

Application Filing Periods for 1973-74 


Term 


Initial Filing Period 
Jan. 2-31, 1973 
Nov. 1-30, 1972 
Nov. 1-30, 1972 
June 1-30, 1973 
Aug. 1-31, 1973 
Aug. 1-31, 1973 


Extended Filing Period 
Begins (continues until 
quotas are reached) 


Summer quarter 1973 
Fall quarter 1973 


Feb. 2, 1973 
Dec. 1, 1972 
Dec. 1, 1972 
July 1, 1973 
Sept. 1, 1973 
Sept. 1, 1973 


Fall semester 1973 


Winter quarter 1974 
Spring semester 1974 
Spring quarter 1974 


Semester Calendar 


Quarter Calendar 


Chico 
Fresno 
Fullerton 
Long Beach 
Sacramento 


San Diego 
San Fernando 
San Francisco 
San Jose 
Sonoma 


Bakersfield 


Hayward 
Humboldt 
Los Angeles 


Dominguez Hills 


Pomona 
San Bernardino 
San Luis Obispo 
Stanislaus 


Initial Filing Period 

All applications received during the initial filing period will receive equal consideration within 
established enrollment categories, quotas, and priorities. Irrespective of the time and date they are 
received. 

Space Reservations 

Applicants who can be accommodated within category quotas will receive confirmation of space 
reservation. Although the space reservation Is not a statement of admission, it is a commitment on 
the part of the university to admit a student once eligibility has been determined. When the student 
receives notice of the space reservation, he should initiate action to have transcripts of all college 
and high school work sent to the campus where space has been reserved. The institution will inform 
him of the number of copies of transcripts required, dates for submittal, and where they should be 
sent. The student should not request that transcripts be sent until requested to do so by the campus 
where space has been reserved. 

Redirection 

Applications of students who cannot be accommodated at their first choice campus will automatical- 
ly be redirected to their second choice, and. If they cannot be accommodated there, to their third 
choice, and so on. 

Hardship Petitions 

Each college or university has established procedures to consider qualified applicants who would 
be faced with an extreme hardship if not admitted. Prospective hardship petitioners should contact 
the campus regarding specific policies governing hardship admission. 

Extended Filing Period 

Campuses not filling enrollment quotas during the initial filing period will continue to accept applica- 
tions during the extended filing period until quotas are filled. Application priority within the extended 
period will be granted in chronological order of application receipt. 

How to Apply 

1 . Submit a completed application for admission within the announced filing period accompanied 
by the required application fee to: 

Office of Admission and Records 
California State University, Fullerton 
Fullerton, California 92634 

2. Request required transcripts of record of all previous scholastic work from each school or 


165-1 10 aos 


Admission of Undergraduate Students 43 

college attended when asked to do so by the campus where space has been reserved for you. 
The transcripts required at Fullerton are 
— for undergraduates — 

(a) the high school transcript and 

(b) a transcript from each college or university attended. Undergraduate applicants for a 
teaching credential must submit two copies of the transcript from each college or 
university attended; 

— for graduates — 

(a) applicants for unclassified graduate standing with no degree or credential objective must 
submit a transcript from the college or university where the baccalaureate was earned. 

(b) applicants for a master's degree or teaching credential, or both, must submit two copies 
of the transcript from each college or university attended. 

All students are advised that they should also have a complete set of college transcripts for their 
personal use at all times of advisement. 

All transcripts must be received directly from the issuing institution to be considered official 
and cannot be returned to the student. Foreign language transcripts must be accompanied by 
certified English translations. 

3. If required, submit the scores from either the Scholastic Aptitude Test or the American College 
Test. Scores are required for all undergraduate applicants with fewer than 60 completed 
semester units of study (90 quarter units). Applicants to classified graduate curricula must 
submit the scores of any qualifying examinations required in their prospective program of study. 

UNDERGRADUATE ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS 

First-time Freshmen 

Applicants who have completed no college work after high school graduation will be considered 
for admission as first-time freshmen under one of the following provisions. Results of either the CEEB 
Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Testing program examination (ACT) are 
acceptable in establishing eligibility. 

Exceptions: College credit earned concurrent with high school enrollment; college credit earned 
in summer session after high school and prior to regular matriculation in college; college credit 
granted for the CLEP or Advanced Placement programs, or military or USAFI courses; or college 
credit granted for some nontraditional learning experience, will not affect the applicant's status 
as a first-time freshman for application quota purposes as well as admission. Further, the accelerat- 
ed student, who completes his high school program mid-year, who has applied to the California 
State University and Colleges for the following fall term, but chooses to attend a local community 
college in the spring term will be considered a first-time freshman for application quota purposes 
as well as admission. All such college or advanced standing credit, if fully acceptable as transfer 
credit, will be granted the student after admission. 

California high school graduates or legal residents for tuition purposes must have a grade-point 
average and total score on the SAT, or composite score on the ACT, which together provide an 
eligibility index placing them in the upper one-third of California high school graduates. For 1972-73 
the minimum eligibility index is 3,072 using the SAT or 741 using the ACT. 

High school graduates from other states or possessions who are nonresidents for tuition purposes 
must present an eligibility index which places them in the upper one-sixth of California high school 
graduates. For 1972-73 the minimum eligibility index is 3,402 using the SAT or 826 using the ACT. 
The eligibility index is computed either by multiplying the grade-point average by 800 and adding 
it to the total SAT score, or multiplying the grade-point average by 200 and adding it to 10 times 
the composite ACT score. Grade-point averages are based on work completed in the last three years 
of high school, exclusive of physical education and military science. 

As an alternative, the following table may be used to determine the eligibility of graduates of 
California high schools (or California legal residents) for freshman admission to a California State 
University or College. This table is based on the eligibility index. Scores shown are the SAT Total 
and the ACT Composite. Students with a given GPA must present the corresponding test score. 
Conversely, students with a given ACT or SAT score must present the corresponding CPA in order 
to be eligible. 


170—1 10 £» 


44 Admission of Undergraduate Students 


ADMISSIONS TABLE FOR CALIFORNIA HIGH SCHOOL GRADUATES 
OR CALIFORNIA LEGAL RESIDENTS 



ACT 

SAT 


ACT 

SAT 


ACT 

SAT 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

CPA 

Score 

Score 

( )* 



2.80 

19 

832 

2.39 

27 

1160 

3.20 

11 

512 

2.79 

19 

840 

2.38 

27 

1168 

3.19 

11 

520 

2.78 

19 

848 

2.37 

27 

1176 

3.18 

11 

528 

2.77 

19 

856 

2.36 

27 

1184 

3.17 

11 

536 

2.76 

19 

864 

2.35 

28 

1192 

3.16 

11 

544 

2.75 

20 

872 

2.34 

28 

1200 

3.15 

12 

552 

2.74 

20 

880 

2.33 

28 

1208 

3.14 

12 

560 

2.73 

20 

888 

2.32 

28 

1216 

3.13 

12 

568 

2.72 

20 

896 

2.31 

28 

1224 

3.12 

12 

576 

2.71 

20 

904 

2.30 

29 

1232 

3.11 

12 

584 

2.70 

21 

912 

2.29 

29 

1240 

3.10 

13 

592 

2.69 

21 

920 

2.28 

29 

1248 

3.09 

13 

600 

2.68 

21 

928 

2.27 

29 

1256 

3.08 

13 

608 

2.67 

21 

936 

2.26 

29 

1264 

3.07 

13 

616 

2.66 

21 

944 

2.25 

30 

1272 

3.06 

13 

624 

2.65 

22 

952 

2.24 

30 

1280 

3.05 

14 

632 

2.64 

22 

960 

2.23 

30 

1288 

3.04 

14 

640 

2.63 

22 

968 

2.22 

30 

1296 

3.03 

14 

648 

2.62 

22 

976 

2.21 

30 

1304 

3.02 

14 

656 

2.61 

22 

984 

2.20 

31 

1312 

3.01 

14 

664 

2.60 

23 

992 

2.19 

31 

1320 

3.00 

15 

672 

2.59 

23 

1000 

2.18 

31 

1328 

2.99 

15 

680 

2.58 

23 

1008 

2.17 

31 

1336 

2.98 

15 

688 

2.57 

23 

1016 

2.16 

31 

1344 

2.97 

15 

696 

2.56 

23 

1024 

2.15 

32 

1352 

2.96 

15 

704 

2.55 

24 

1032 

2.14 

32 

1360 

2.95 

16 

712 

2.54 

24 

1040 

2.13 

32 

1368 

2.94 

16 

720 

2.53 

24 

1048 

2.12 

32 

1376 

2.93 

16 

728 

2.52 

24 

1056 

2.11 

32 

1384 

2.92 

16 

736 

2.51 

24 

1064 

2.10 

33 

1392 

2.91 

16 

744 

2.50 

25 

1072 

2.09 

33 

1400 

2.90 

17 

752 

2.49 

25 

1080 

2.08 

33 

1408 

2.89 

17 

760 

2.48 

25 

1088 

2.07 

33 

1416 

2.88 

17 

768 

2.47 

25 

1096 

2.06 

33 

1424 

2.87 

17 

776 

2.46 

25 

1104 

2.05 

34 

1432 

2.86 

17 

784 

2.45 

26 

1112 

2.04 

34 

1440 

2.85 

18 

792 

2.44 

26 

1120 

2.03 

34 

1448 

2.84 

18 

800 

2.43 

26 

1128 

2.02 

34 

1456 

2.83 

18 

808 

2.42 

26 

1136 

2.01 

34 

1464 

2.82 

18 

816 

2.41 

26 

1144 

2.00 

35 

1472 

2.81 

18 

824 

2.40 

27 

1152 

( )t 




Graduates of High Schools in a Foreign Country 

Applicants who are graduates of foreign high schools must have preparation equivalent to that 
required of eligible California high school graduates. The university will carefully review the previous 
record of all such applicants and only those with promise of academic success equivalent to that 
of eligible California high school graduates will be admitted. Such applicants are not required to take 
either the SAT or ACT. 


• Students earning grade-point averages above 3.20 are eligible for admission, 
t Students earning grade-point averages below 2.0 are not eligible for admission. 


177—1 10 ass 


Admission of Graduate Students 45 


Non-High School Graduates 

Applicants who are over 18 years of age, but have not graduated from high school, will be considered 
for admission only when preparation In all other ways Is such that the university believes promise 
of academic success is equivalent to that of eligible California high school graduates. 

High School Students 

Students still enrolled in high school will be considered for enrollment in certain special programs 
If recommended by their principal and if in the judgment of the university their preparation Is 
equivalent to that required of eligible California high school graduates. Such admission is only for 
a given course or program. 

Recommended Preparation 

Overall excellence of performance in high school subjects and test score evidence of academic 
potential provide the best bases for predicting success at Cal State Fullerton. While no specific course 
pattern Is required, prospective students are strongly encouraged to include the following subjects 
in their preparation for work at Fullerton: college preparatory English; another language; mathemat- 
ics; laboratory science; history or social science (or both); and study in speech, music, art and other 
subjects contributing to a well-rounded academic background. Students who anticipate intensive 
study In science are urged to take four years of mathematics and three years of foreign language 
in high school. 

ADMISSION OF UNDERGRADUATE TRANSFER STUDENTS 

Applicants for admission as undergraduate transfers will be considered for admission under one of 
the following provisions: 

Applicants who have successfully completed 60 or more semester units, or the equivalent, are 
eligible for admission if they have achieved a grade-point average of 2.0 (C) and were in good 
standing at the last college attended. Nonresident applicants must have earned a grade point 
average of at least 2.4 (C-F). 

Applicants who have successfully completed fewer than 60 semester units, or the equivalent, are 
eligible for admission if they meet the above requirements and the current first-time freshman 
requirements. Applicants for admission as transfer students who have been continuously enrolled 
at a college since graduation from high school are eligible if they meet the first-time freshman 
requirements in effect at the time of their high school graduation. Either SAT or ACT test results 
are required of transfer applicants with fewer than 60 semester units. 

Note: For terms beginning on or after September 1, 1974, college credit used in the admission of 
all undergraduate transfer students will be that credit determined to be transferable coWe^e credit. 

Other Applicants 

Applicants not admissible under one of the above provisions should enroll in a community college 
or other appropriate institution. Only under the most unusual circumstances, and then only by 
special action, will such applicants be permitted to enroll in the university. 

REDIRECTION 

It is not possible for the university to accommodate all qualified applicants. If an application Is 
accepted and it later becomes evident that admission will not be possible, the application will, at 
the applicant's request, be forwarded to any other California State University or College where space 
is still available. No additional application fee then will be required. 

ADMISSION OF GRADUATE STUDENTS 

Unclassified Graduate Status 

For admission with graduate standing as an unclassified graduate student, a student: shall have 
completed a four-year college course and hold an acceptable baccalaureate degree from an accred- 
ited institution; or shall have completed equivalent academic preparation as determined by the 
appropriate authorities; and additionally must satisfactorily meet the professional, personal, scholas- 


181—1 10 285 


46 Readmission 


tic and other standards for graduate study (including qualifying examinations) that the appropriate 
authorities may prescribe. Such admission does not, however, constitute acceptance to specific 
graduate degree or credential curricula. 

Classified Graduate Status 

A student who has been admitted to a California State University or College under the unclassified 
graduate requirement above may, upon application, be admitted to an authorized graduate degree 
or credential curriculum if he satisfactorily meets the professional, personal, scholastic, and other 
standards for admission to the graduate curriculum (including qualifying examinations) that the 
appropriate authorities may prescribe. 

ADMISSION OF STUDENTS FROM OTHER COUNTRIES 

Normally, the university accepts for consideration only two categories of applicants from other 
countries: 

1 . Those who have completed, with a good academic record, a two-year program in an accredit- 
ed institution of higher education. 

2. Those who have completed a bachelor's degree or Its equivalent, with a good academic record, 
in an accredited institution and wish to enroll as graduate students. 

All applicants whose native language is other than English are required to present a satisfactory score 
on the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL). The International administrations of this 
examination are scheduled for October 30, 1972; and January 15, March 26, and June 4, 1973. 
Applicants should obtain the TOEFL Bulletin of Information and registration forms well in advance. 
Copies of this bulletin and registration forms are often available at American embassies and consu- 
lates, offices of the United States Information Service, United States educational commissions and 
foundations abroad, bi-national centers, and several private organizations. Those who cannot obtain 
locally a TOEFL Bulletin of Information should write to: Test of English as a Foreign Language, Box 
899, Princeton, New jersey, U.S.A., 08540. 

Application procedures In other respects are the same as for other students, except that transcripts 
of educational documents in languages other than English must be accompanied by approved 
translations into English. 

SUMMER SESSION STUDENTS 

Although the quality of the program and most of the course offerings are the same as In the regular 
session, the university does not require an advance application or transcripts from students register- 
ing for credit courses in the summer session. However, students must be high school graduates and 
are expected to have satisfied the prerequisites for the courses in which they register. In addition, 
students are expected to file a request to register In the summer session. Admission to summer 
session does not grant admission to the regular session. 

READMISSION OF FORMER STUDENTS 

A Student previously enrolled in the university, planning to return after an absence of one or more 
semesters, must file a new application for admission in accordance with procedures set forth below. 
The application fee Is required If the student was not enrolled in either of the two semesters prior 
to the semester to which he is seeking admission or if he was enrolled in another institution during 
his absence from Cal State Fullerton. Unless a leave of absence was granted, catalog requirements 
at the time of readmission will apply. 

Former Students in Good Standing 

A student who left the university In good standing will be readmitted provided any academic work 
attempted elsewhere since the last attendance does not change his scholastic status. Transcripts of 
the record of any work attempted In the interim are required. 

Former Students Who Were on Probation 

A student on probation at the close of his last enrollment will be readmitted on probation provided 
he is otherwise eligible. The student must furnish transcripts of any college work taken during his 
absence. 


186-1 10 310 


Genera! Information About Admission 47 


Former Students Who Were Disqualified 

The readmission of a previously disqualified student is by special action only. Ordinarily the univer- 
sity will consider an application for reinstatement only after the student has remained absent for a 
minimum of one year following disqualification and has fulfilled all recommended conditions. In 
every instance, readmission action is based on evidence, including transcripts of study completed 
elsewhere subsequent to disqualification, which in the judgment of the university warrants such 
action. If readmitted, the student is placed on scholastic probation. 

GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT ADMISSION 

Determination of Residence 

The following statement of the rules regarding residency determination Is not a complete discussion 
of the law, but a summary of the principal rules and their exceptions. The statutes governing 
residence determination for tuition purposes are found in Education Code Sections 23753.2-23762, 
Government Code Sections 243-244, and Civil Code Section 25. The determination of whether a 
student qualifies as a "resident" for admission and tuition purposes Is made by the university after 
review of a "Residence Questionnaire" completed by each student upon entering the university. The 
residence questionnaire is designed to provide to the university Information necessary for residency 
determination. Including the applicability of any exceptions. 

The general rule is that a student must have been a California resident for at least one year 
immediately preceding the residence determination date in order to qualify as a "resident student" 
for admission and tuition purposes. A residence determination date is set for each academic term 
and is the date from which residence is determined for that term. 

Whether a student has acquired California residence usually depends on whether the student has 
attained majority; i.e., has become an adult. Majority is attained at 18 years of age. If the student 
is a minor, residence is derived from (and therefore is the same as) that of his or her father. If the 
father is not living, the student's residence is that of the mother while she remains unmarried. A minor 
cannot change his residence by either his own act or that of his guardian. 

Upon attaining majority, the student may acquire a residence apart from his or her parents. The 
acquisition of California residence by an adult requires both physical presence in the state and, at 
the same time, an intent to remain in California indefinitely, that is, an Intent to regard California 
as one's permanent home. Although physical presence Is easily proven, subjective intent is more 
difficult, requiring the student to present evidence of various objective manifestations of such intent.* 
The residence of a married woman is that of her husband unless she is separated, in which case 
she can establish her own residence. An alien Is not eligible to acquire residence until admitted into 
the United States for permanent residence under an Immigrant visa. 

Since the general rules of residence determination, summarized above, work hardships in some 
cases, the Legislature has provided a number of exceptions which, in effect, waive nonresident 
tuition. These rules are limited in scope, and are quite detailed. If It appears that any of them may 
be applicable, the student may wish to discuss the matter with the residence clerk of the 
university. Exceptions are provided for: 

1 . Minors living under the direct care and control of a California resident for periods of time which 
are specified in the law. 

2. Minors whose parents were California residents but who have left the state. (Depending on 
the length of the parents' residence in California, the minor is given a "grace period" during 
which he is considered a California resident even though his or her parents have become 
residents of another state.) 

3. Minors who have a parent in active military service and stationed in California on the residence 
determination date; California resident minors who have a parent In active military service but 
stationed outside the United States on the residence determination date, and California resident 
spouses of such servicemen. 

4. Persons who have attained their majority by the residence determination date, and who were 

• The foregoing rules will have a special application during the 1972-73 academic year with respect to persons who attain their 
majority as a result of the recent legislative change reducing the age of majority from 21 to 18. 


196-1 10 360 


48 Genera! Information About Admission 


entirely self-supporting and present in California for the entire preceding year. 

5. Women who are California residents and who marry nonresidents provided residence is not 
established in any other state. 

6. Children of deceased public law enforcement or fire suppression employees, who were Cali- 
fornia residents, and who were killed In the course of law enforcement or fire suppression 
duties. 

7. Full-time California State University or College employees and their children and spouses. 

8. Certain credentialed, full-time employees of school districts. 

9. Certain exchange students. 

The student is cautioned that this summation of rules regarding residency determination is by no 
means a complete explanation of their meaning. The student should also note that changes may have 
been made by the Legislature between the time this catalog Is published and the relevant residence 
determination date. 

Admission to Credential Programs 

Admission to the university as a student does not constitute admission to the teaching credential 
program. Students who plan to work toward teaching credentials must apply to the School of 
Education following procedures available from the School of Education. 

Cancellation of Admission 

A student who Is admitted to the university for a given semester but who does not register in the 
specified semester will have his admission canceled. The student must file a new application form 
when he again seeks admission and must follow the complete application procedure and meet the 
then current admission requirements. 

Honors at Entrance 

Honors at entrance are awarded to both freshman and transfer students who have demonstrated 
outstanding achievement in past academic work. For first-time freshmen who no previous college 
units earned, a grade-point of 3.5 on a 5-point scale must be earned In the coursework considered 
for admission to the university. Students who have completed fewer than 60 college semester units 
of credit must meet the grade-point average criteria for first-time freshmen and must also have 
earned a 3.5 grade-point average on all this past college work attempted. Students who have 
completed 60 or more semester college units are eligible if a grade-point average of 3.5 is earned 
In all college work completed. 

Undergraduate Entrance Testing Requirements 

All undergraduate students, who have completed fewer than 60 semester or 90 quarter units of 
college work, are required to submit scores from either one of two national testing programs before 
eligibility for admission to the university can be determined. This requirement does not affect 
undergraduate students who have previously attended Cal State Fullerton and who have submitted 
ACT or SAT scores at the time of their first admission. 

Registration forms for either test may be obtained from high school and community college counse- 
lors, Cal State testing offices or directly from the testing service at the address below: 


SAT 


ACT 


CEEB 
Box 1025 

Berkeley, Calif. 94770 


Registration Unit 
P. O. Box 168 
Iowa City, Iowa 52240 


Dates Test Given: 


Dates Test Given: 


Oct. 14, 1972 
Nov. 4, 1972 
Dec. 2, 1972 
Jan. 13, 1973 
March 3, 1973 
April 7, 1973 
May 5, 1973 
July 14, 1973 


Oct. 21, 1972 
Dec. 9, 1972 
Feb. 24, 1973 
April 28, 1973 
July 21, 1973 


900-1 10 380 


Evaluation of Academic Records 49 


To take one of these tests: 

1 . Obtain a registration form and a Student Information Bulletin from your high school or commu- 
nity college counselor, from one of the addresses above, or from the university Testing Center. 
Select a test center near your home from the list printed In the Bulletin. 

2. Send the completed registration form and the appropriate test fee to the proper address. Do 
not send to the Fullerton campus. 

3. Have your ACT or SAT scores reported to the Testing Center, Cal State Fullerton. These scores 
should be received before the deadline for application. Use the appropriate code number for 
score reports. 

If you have already taken either the ACT or SAT send $1 to the appropriate testing agency and 
request that your scores be reported to the Testing Center. Use appropriate code number when 
requesting such reports, and provide complete Information concerning testing date, test center, name 
and address changes, etc. These test scores when included on high school or college transcripts are 
not acceptable. 

Health Requirements for Admission 

Undergraduate and graduate students must, upon admission, submit completed health history and 
physical examination forms. In addition, evidence of a negative chest X-ray taken within 12 months 
before their registration must be presented. A tuberculin skin test may be obtained in lieu of an X-ray. 
Evidence of a smallpox vaccination within the past 10 years is also required. 

The following services may be completed at the Student Health Center for a charge of $1 : urinalysis, 
hemotocrit, tuberculin skin test and smallpox vaccination. 

All health requirements must be satisfactorily completed before the student will be allowed to 
complete registration. It is urged that the health clearance be obtained before the date of registration 
as this will conserve the student's registration time. 

EVALUATIONS OF ACADEMIC RECORDS 

Evaluation of Transfer Credits 

The Office of Admissions will evaluate previous college work in terms of its relationship to the 
requirements of Cal State Fullerton. All degree candidates will be issued a credit summary during 
the first semester of attendance which serves as a basis for determining specific remaining require- 
ments for the student's specific objectives. 

Once Issued to a student, the evaluation remains valid as long as the student enrolls at the date 
specified, pursues the objective specified, and remains in continuous attendance. The student will 
not be held to additional graduation requirements unless such requirements become mandatory as 
a result of changes in the California Administrative Code or the California Education Code. If the 
student does not remain in continuous attendance and has not applied for and been granted a formal 
leave of absence, the evaluation issued upon readmission will specify the remaining requirements 
for the student's specific objectives. 

In view of the foregoing regulations, the student should notify the Office of Admissions Immediately 
if he changes the objective specified in his evaluation. While the evaluation for a student remains 
valid, the student is held responsible for complying with all changes in regulations and procedures 
which may appear in subsequent catalogs. 

Acceptance of Credit 

Credit for work completed at accredited institutions, other than coursework identified by such 
institutions as remedial or in other ways as being nontransferable, will be accepted toward the 
satisfaction of degree and credential requirements at the university within limitations of residence 
requirements and community university transfer maximums. 

Transfer of Credit From a Community College 

Upper division credit is not allowed for courses taken In a community college. Credential credit is 
not allowed for courses in professional education taken In a community college. This does not 
Invalidate credit for preprofessional courses taken at a community college, such as introduction to 


9M— I 10 400 


50 Evaluation of Academic Records 


education, art or design, arithmetic, or music for classroom teachers. After a student has completed 
70 units of college credit at a community college, no further community college units will be 
accepted for unit credit. 

Credit for Military Service 

Students who have been in active military service for at least a year may be granted six units of 
undergraduate credit. Courses taken in service schools may be given credit on the basis of an 
evaluation which determines that they are of university level. Any credit for military experience will 
be given only upon request. Records verifying such experience must be filed with the Office of 
Admissions. 

Credit for Extension and Correspondence Courses 

The maximum amount of credit through correspondence and extension courses which may be 
allowed toward the bachelor's degree is 24 units, if otherwise applicable, of which not more than 
12 may be transferred from another college or university. 

Credit by Advanced Placement 

Students who have successfully completed courses in the advanced placement program (defined 
as receiving a score of 3, 4 or 5) shall be granted credit toward graduation, advanced placement 
In the university's sequence courses, and credit for curriculum requirements. 

Credit by Examination 

Students may be granted credit for a course toward graduation and to meet curriculum requirements 
by the satisfactory completion of a challenge examination in that course requirement. The examina- 
tions are to be comprehensive and administered by the department In which the course Is offered. 
Well In advance of the challenge examination the student will secure written approval of his major 
adviser and the chairman of the department in which the course is offered. Upon the successful 
completion of the examination, the notation on the permanent record of the student will be made 
as "CR" for the course. "CR" Is to indicate credit for the course with a passing grade. Upon failure 
of the examination, the notation on the permanent record of the student will be made as "No CR" 
for the course. Credit by examination may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence requirements. 
The challenge examination for any course may be attempted only once. A maximum of 30 credits 
can be earned by challenge examination. Including those achieved by advanced placement. 

College Level Examination Program 

Operating under an interim policy. Cal State Fullerton may grant credit and advanced standing based 
upon examination results from the College Level Examination Program of the College Entrance 
Examination Board using as minimum standards: 

General Examinations 

1. That the student achieve a score at or above the 50th percentile, college sophomore norms. 

2. That no unit credit be granted for any test In the general examinations, but that six units of 
general education requirements be waived for each test completed with the appropriate score. 

Subject Examinations 

1 . That the student submit a score at or above the 50th percentile of those in the norming group 
who earned a mark of C or better. 

2. That equivalency to Cal State Fullerton courses be determined by the appropriate academic 
department in conjunction with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

3. That university credit shall have not been previously earned in the courses in question. 

In no case will credit so awarded count towards residence credit. 


908—1 10 490 


REGISTRATION 


51 


Orientation 

Various op|X)rtunities are provided for new students to obtain information relating to academic 
programs, student services and activities, and other aspects of university life. Information about 
specific programs will be published separately. 

Registration 

Class Schedule: A complete listing of courses offered will be found in the class schedule published 
prior to the start of each semester. This publication, which may be purchased in the Titan Bookstore 
for a nominal charge, also states detailed information pertaining to the semester including class 
enrollment and fee payment procedures. 

It is important that each student familiarize himself not only with the academic policies stated in the 
catalog but also with the requirements and procedures in the class schedule as both are used in the 
selection of classes for the semester. 

Course Selection: Cal State Fullerton believes its students have the intelligence and capability to plan 
their schedules each semester and to make a selection among available sections of a course. Such 
matters are the responsibility of the student and permit him to develop an individualized class 
schedule for each semester to meet the student's academic program requirements as well as his own 
unique personal requirements (study, work, etc.). 

Course selection should be based on an adviser-approved formal academic program, course descrip- 
tions in the current catalog (Including course prerequisites), and courses offered as listed in the 
semester class schedule. With this information each student should be able to determine courses 
needed, courses available, and eligibility for enrolling In them. The study list resulting from such an 
appraisal forms the basis for completing the official program card which is used in registration. 
Registration: Registration is made up of two steps — class enrollment and fee payment. At registration, 
every student Is required to file a program card with the Office of the Registrar. The filing of a 
program card by the student and its acceptance by the university obligates the student to perform 
the designated work to the best of his ability. All undergraduates are urged to declare a major at 
the earliest practicable time and not later than at the time they have completed 60 units of college 
work. 

It Is emphasized that registration does not become official until fees have been paid. 

Computerized Records System 

The student personnel records system, including the registration process, is computer based. This 
means that records and reports are produced from an information data file maintained In the 
university Computer Center. It is a fact of life in a large institution such as Fullerton that use of the 
computer is essential. Thus, there Is a requirement for data cards, code numbers, student file numbers 
and for meeting precise criteria for data Input and stringent deadlines. All of this introduces an 
element of the impersonal in the student records system. Despite these conditions, every effort is 
made to provide courteous, efficient and personalized service to students and the entire university 
community. To assist in providing this service, students are urged to be extremely careful and 
accurate In preparing data cards, especially the official program card and change of program card, 
for entry into the information file. Accurate input of information will assure each student of error-free 
records. 

Late Registration 

The last day to register late each semester will be announced in the class schedule. Late registrants 
will find themselves handicapped in arranging their programs and must pay a $5 late registration fee 
in addition to regular fees. 

Changes in Program 

Each student is responsible for the program of courses he lists when he registers. Changes may not 
be made thereafter without the filing of a change of program (add-drop) form in the Office of the 


tl9— 1 10 47S 


52 Fee Schedule 


Registrar following procedures announced in the class schedule. 

Failure to file an official change of program request In the case of dropped classes may result In a 
penalty mark being recorded. Through the fourth week of instruction in the semester no record of 
enrollment is made of dropped classes. After four weeks students are expected to complete all 
courses in which they are enrolled. However, for reasons of ill health or reasons involving other 
serious and unforeseen problems, the student may drop a class or classes and receive a W (With- 
drawal) or F (Failure) by obtaining the signature of the professor (s) involved and filing the change 
with the registrar on the form provided. 

No classes may be dropped during the last four weeks of Instruction, although complete withdrawal 
from the university is still possible (See page 60). 

Concurrent Enrollment 

A student enrolled at the university may enroll concurrently for additional courses at another 
Institution only with advance written approval from the student's academic adviser on official forms 
filed in the Office of the Registrar. Permission will not be granted when the study load In the 
proposed combined program exceeds the units authorized at this university. 

Auditors 

A properly qualified student may enroll In classes as an auditor. The student must meet the regular 
university admission requirements and must pay the same fees as other students. An auditor may 
not change his registration to obtain credit after the last date to add courses to the study list. An 
auditor Is not permitted to take examinations In the course. 

Handicapped Students 

Students physically handicapped who require assistance should contact the Office of the Registrar 
prior to the announced semester registration period so that special arrangements for them can be 
made. 


VETERANS 

Cal State Fullerton is approved by the Bureau of Readjustment Education, State Department of 
Education, to offer programs to veterans seeking benefits under state and federal legislation. All 
students seeking veterans' benefits must have a degree or credential objective. 

Applications for benefits should be filed well In advance of the semester in which the veteran plans 
to use these benefits in order to have the authorization at the time of registration. 

SELECTIVE SERVICE 

Male students requiring certification of their student status may request the Office of Admissions and 
Records to submit the appropriate forms to their draft board. 

Undergraduate students shall normally be enrolled for 1 2 units a semester to be considered full time. 
Graduate students enrolled for nine units of study may be considered full time provided at least three 
units are 5(X)-level courses. 

All students are advised that by enrolling each consecutive term at the minimum level to qualify for 
full-time certification they may not achieve the degree and credential programs within the time limit 
allowed by the Selective Service System. 

RESERVE OFFICERS' TRAINING CORPS 

Cal State Fullerton does not have a Reserve Officers' Training Corps program. However, a two-year 
program is available to eligible male students through cooperation with the University of Southern 
California where an Air Force ROTC program Is conducted. For complete information, write the 
Professor of Aerospace Studies, University of Southern California, Los Angeles 90007. 

FEE SCHEDULE, 1972-73 

Tuition is not charged to legal residents of California. The following are the fees and expenses 
currently assessed. 


223—1 10 495 


Fee Schedule 53 


All Students 

Application fee (nonrefundable) 

Payable by check or money order at time of applying $20 

Materials and Service fee: Semester 

Fewer than 4 units $39 

At least 4 but fewer than 8 units $44 

At least 8 but fewer than 1 2 units $49 

12 or more units $59 

Fewer than 8 units or 

8 units more 

Facilities fee $ 3 $ 3 

Associated Students fee $10 $10 

University Union fee $ 4 $ 8 

Nonresidents 

Nonresident tuition fee (in addition to fees required of resident students, except for enrollment in 
extension or summer session) 

15 or more units, maximum $555 

Fewer than 15 units, per unit $37 

Per academic year $1,110 

Foreign-Visa Students 

Nonresident foreign-visa students (in addition to fees required of resident students) 

15 or more units, maximum $555 

Fewer than 15 units, per unit $37 

Per academic year $1,110 

Summer Session 

Per summer semester unit $24 

Associated Students fee $ 3 

University Union fee $ 4 

Extension Fees 

Per Unit or Fraction of Unit $19 to $38 

Other Fees or Charges 

Late registration fee (in addition to other fees listed above) $5 

Check returned from bank for any cause $2 

Transcript fee $1 

Failure to meet administrative required appointment or time limit $2 

Auditors pay the same fees as others. 

Fees are subject to change by the Trustees of the California State University and Colleges without 
advance notice. 

Refund of Fees 

Upon withdrawal from the university, the materials and service fee may be refunded if written 
application for refund, on forms provided by the university, is submitted to the registrar not later 
than 14 days following the day of the term that instruction begins; provided that the amount of $10 
shall be retained to cover the cost of registration. Late registration fees, change of program fees and 
application fees are not refundable. 

The entire fee may be refunded if a student is unable to continue his registration because of a 
university regulation or because of compulsory military service. Application for refund under such 
circumstances may be made at any time before the date when the student received any academic 
credit for the courses for which he is registered. 

No refund of fees will be given if the unit load of the student is reduced to a lower material and 
service fee category. 


226—1 10 SIO 


54 Fee Schedule 


Parking Fees 

Semester pass (nonreserved spaces): 

Regular and limited students $13.00 

Coin operated gate, per admission 25 

Summer session, each six-week period 5.00 


Typical Student Expenses 

Typical school year budgets for California residents living at home or making other housing arrange- 
ments will vary widely. It Is estimated that, including an $800 yearly allowance for room and board, 
the cost will approximate $1,600. Nonresident students must also allow for nonresident tuition. 


m—\ 10 519 





57 

RECORDS AND REGULATIONS 


ENROLLMENT DEFINITIONS AND REGULATIONS 

Unit of Credit 

Each semester unit represents three hours of university work per week for one semester. Courses 
are of three types: 

(1 ) Lecture — one hour in class plus two hours of study. 

(2) Activity — two hours of class plus one hour of study. 

(3) Laboratory — three hours in class. 

Some courses may combine two or more of these types. All required courses carry unit credit. 

Classification in the University 

Undergraduate students who have completed 0-29)^ semester units of work are classified as fresh- 
men, 30-59)^ semester units as sophomores, 60-89j^ semester units as juniors, and 90 or more as 
seniors. 

Maximum Number of Course Units 

Undergraduate students' requests to carry units beyond 18 (19 for engineering majors) must be 
approved by the student's adviser and the department chairman of the major. If such requests are 
denied, appeals may be made to the appropriate school dean. Undeclared majors must receive the 
approval of the director of academic advisement to carry over 18 units of work. The minimum 
full-time load is 12 units. 

A student whose academic record justifies a study list in excess of the normal may request to be 
allowed to carry extra units. Request forms may be obtained from the Office of the Registrar and 
are submitted during the first week of instruction. In general, only students with superior academic 
records are allowed to enroll for more than the maximum unit load. In addition, the need to carry 
an overload must be established. Factors such as time spent in employment or commuting, the nature 
of the academic program, extracurricular activities and the student's health should be considered 
In planning a study load. Students who are employed or have outside responsibilities are advised 
to reduce their program of study. 

The minimum full-time program of study for graduate students is defined in the "Graduate Policies 
and Procedures" section of this catalog. 

Initial Class Meeting 

It Is important that students attend the first meeting of a class. In closed classes students who are 
absent from the first meeting without notification of the Instructor or departmental office within 24 
hours may be denied admission to the class. Instructors are privileged to deny admission to absentees 
in order to admit any persons on waiting lists In their places. Students who are denied admission 
to class must file a drop request card with the Office of Admissions and Records. 

Undergraduate Students Taking Graduate Level Courses 

Graduate level (500) courses are organized primarily for graduate students. Undergraduate students 
may be permitted to enroll in a graduate level (500) course if: 

1. They are within nine units of completion of graduation requirements, or 

2. They are exceptionally qualified seniors whose undergraduate work in the related field or fields 
has been of 3.5 grade-point average or better, and whose cumulative overall grade-point 
average is at least 3.25. 

Such cases shall require specific approval by the instructor and also chairman of the department or 
dean of the school in which the course is offered and by the chairman or dean of the student's major 
department or school. 

Graduate level (5(X)) courses taken under 1. above may be applied to a graduate program If 
approved under graduate studies policies. 


23S-1 10 MO 


58 Records and Regulations 

Graduate level (500) courses taken under 2. above may be applied to the undergraduate program 
only. 

GRADING POLICIES 


Grading System 

Satisfactory grade Grade-point value 

A 4 

B 3 

C 2 

CR None assigned 

Unsatisfactory grade 

D 1 

F 0 

Special Grade 

E (Incomplete) 0 

AU (Auditor) (no credit toward degree or credential) None assigned 

W (Passing withdrawal) None assigned 

NC (No credit) None assigned 

NR (No report) 0 


The following chart illustrates the academic bookkeeping involved for the marks of A, B, C, D, F, 
NR, CR and NC. 


Mark 

Units 

Attempted 

Units 

Earned 

Grade 

Points 

Full Credit 

A, B, C 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

D 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No,, must balance 





with B or better 

F 

Yes 

No 

No 

No 

NR (No Report) 

Yes 

No 

No 

No 

Credit (CR) 

No 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

No Credit (NC) 

No 

No 

No 

No 

Totals 

Used 

Counted 

Used 



in 

toward 

in 



CPA 

objective 

CPA 



No Report 

The special grade of NR (No Report) normally is assigned to a student by a professor where there 
is no clear record of class participation on the part of the student or sufficient data for evaluation 
are lacking. Units attempted are charged to the student's record but may be later deducted through 
administrative action. 

Incomplete Work 

A grade of E may be given only when, in the opinion of the instructor, a student cannot complete 
a course during the semester of enrollment for reasons beyond his control. Such reasons are assumed 
to Include: illness of the student, or of members of his Immediate family, extraordinary financial 
problems, loss of outside position, and other such exigencies. In assigning a grade of E, the Instructor 
will file with his department a statement of the specific requirements for completion of coursework. 
Such requirements will not Include or necessitate retaking the course. This statement will also include 
a provisional grade indicating the quality of work completed at that time, and the instructor's 
designation of the time limit allowed for completion of course requirements. Upon later completion 
of the course requirements, or upon expiration of the time limits for completion of course require- 
ments, the instructor shall initiate a change to a grade of A, B, C, D, CR, NC or F. Instructional 
departments will determine procedures for completion of course requirements and assigning grades 


238—1 10 570 


Records and Regulations 59 

for such completed coursework, in those special circumstances where the instructor is no longer 
available. 

Credit/ No Credit 

Each student shall be permitted to select courses in subjects outside of the major requirements on 
a Credit/ No Credit basis. For purposes of Credit/ No Credit, the phrase '"major requirements" can 
be taken to include core plus concentration (or option) requirements in departments using such 
terms, and professional course requirements in teacher education curricula. 

The term "Credit" signifies that the student's performance in the course was such that he was 
awarded full credit toward his degree objective without comment as to the quality level of achieve- 
ment and without further qualification. "No Credit" signifies that the student attempted the course 
but that his performance did not warrant credit toward his objective. The level of work for which 
a "Credit" grade will be given will be determined by the Individual professor for each class. 
However, the level of performance required for a CR grade will be no higher than that now required 
for satisfactory work. At the beginning of each class, the professor will thoroughly explain the amount 
and level of work required for a CR grade. 

The student must declare his intention to take a course on a Credit /No Credit basis when he registers. 
Under no circumstances will he be permitted to change his declaration after the first week of classes 
in any given semester. Any student attempting a course on a Credit/ No Credit basis must meet the 
prerequisites for that course. 

The policy of Credit/ No Credit applies to undergraduate students, non-objective graduate students, 
and to classified graduate students for courses not Included in the approved study plan. 

When a student changes his major field of study to one where he has completed courses on a credit 
basis, such lower division courses shall be included In his major requirements. Upper division 
courses may be Included at the option of the department. 

Crade Reports to Students 

A report of the final grades assigned in classes Is sent to each student at the end of each semester. 
Many students also leave self-addressed post cards for teachers of specific courses to send them 
slightly faster evaluations of their work. 

Examinations 

Final examinations, if required by the instructor, will be given at times scheduled by the university. 
Once established, the final examination schedule may not be changed unless approved by the dean 
of the school. No makeup final examination will be given except for reason of Illness or other verified 
emergencies. 

Grade- Point Averages; Repetition of Courses 

Grade-point averages are calculated by dividing grade points earned by units attempted. Work 
attempted at all Institutions, including Cal State Fullerton, is Included in all-college calculations. Work 
attempted at other institutions will not be included in Cal State Fullerton-only averages. 

When any course is repeated both grades are considered in computing grade-point averages. 
However, successful repetition of a course originally passed carries no additional unit credit towards 
a degree or credential. 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Official transcripts of courses taken at the university are Issued only with the written permission of 
the student concerned. Partial transcripts are not Issued. A fee of $1 for each transcript Issued must 
be received before the record can be forwarded. 

Normally transcripts are available within three working days, except at the end of the semester when 
the student should allow about 10 days after the last day of the semester. 

Transcripts from other institutions, which have been presented for admission or evaluation, become 
a part of the student's permanent academic file and are not returned or copied for distribution. 
Students desiring transcripts covering work attempted elsewhere should request them from the 
institutions concerned. 


60 Records and Regulations 

CONTINUOUS RESIDENCY REGULATIONS 

Good Standing 

"Good standing" indicates that a student Is eligible to continue and Is free from financial obligation 
to the university. A student under academic disqualification, disciplinary suspension or disciplinary 
expulsion is not eligible to receive a statement of "good standing" on transcripts issued by the 
university or on other documents. 

Choice of Catalog Regulations for Meeting Degree Requirements 

A student remaining In continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing on in the same 
curriculum in any California State University or College, In any of the California community colleges 
or in any combination of California community colleges and the California State University and 
Colleges, may, for purposes of meeting graduation requirements, elect to meet the graduation 
requirements of the California State University or College from which he will graduate in effect either 
at the time of his entering the curriculum or at the time of his graduation therefrom, except that 
substitutions for discontinued courses may be authorized or required by the proper college authori- 
ties. 

Continuous Enrollment for Graduate Students 

A graduate student with a degree objective Is expected to maintain continuous enrollment in the 
university (summer sessions and extension excluded) until completion of the degree. If a student 
pursuing an advanced degree finds It Impossible to attend during a certain semester, and is not 
eligible for a leave of absence, as detailed elsewhere in this catalog, he may request permission to 
register In Graduate Studies 700, a Credit/ No Credit course with no units credit, which does not 
require class attendance. A student may not register in Graduate Studies 700 for more than two 
consecutive semesters. 

If a graduate student who has completed student teaching and Is pursuing a standard elementary 
or secondary teaching credential finds that he cannot enroll in courses leading to the credential 
during a certain semester, he may enroll in Credential Studies 701. This course Is a credIt/no credit 
course with no unit credit, which does not require class attendance. Students may not enroll in 
Credential Studies 701 for a third consecutive semester. 

A graduate student who fails to register has severed his connection with the university. 

Leave of Absence 

A student may petition for a leave of absence and if approved may upon his return continue under 
the catalog requirements that applied to his enrollment prior to the absence. Except in the case of 
required military service a leave of absence may be granted for a maximum of one year. Illness and 
compulsory military service are the only routinely approved reasons for a leave of absence. Students 
should realize that an approved leave of absence does not reserve a place for them in the 
university. 

Complete Withdrawal from the University 

Students who wish to withdraw from the university must complete a withdrawal-from-university 
card. See section on refund of fees for possible refunds. No student may withdraw after the date 
shown on the university calendar as the last day of instruction. Complete withdrawal from the 
university Is accomplished by following the procedures for dropping classes (see Change of Pro- 
gram) in addition to procedures for withdrawal. 

STUDENT HONORS 

Dean's List 

Academic achievement is recognized with the publication each semester of a list of students whose 
grade-point average for the previous term has been 3.5 or better. Students are notified in writing 
when they have earned this distinction. Eligibility is based on a minimum of 1 2 units of coursework. 


246—1 10 610 


Records and Regulations 61 


Honors at Graduation 

Honors at graduation have been defined by the Faculty Council in three classifications: 


With honors CPA 3.5 

With high honors CPA 3.85 

With highest honors CPA 4.0 


PROBATION AND DISQUALIFICATION 

Academic Probation 

Academic probation serves to identify and to bring to the attention of appropriate university authori- 
ties a student who is experiencing academic difficulties. 

A student shall be placed upon academic probation if either his cumulative grade-point average or 
his grade-point average at Cal State Fullerton falls below 2.0 (grade of C on five-point scale). The 
student shall be advised of probation status promptly and, except in unusual instances, before the 
end of the first week of instruction of the next consecutive enrollment period. 

A student shall be removed from the probation list and restored to clear standing when he earns 
a cumulative grade-point average of 2.0 (C) in all academic work attempted, and In all such work 
attempted at Cal State Fullerton. 

Academic Disqualification 

A student on academic probation shall be subject to academic disqualification If: 

1. As a lower division student (fewer than 60 semester hours of university work completed) he 
falls 15 or more grade points below a 2.0 (C) average on all university units attempted or in 
all units attempted at this institution. 

2. As a junior (60 to 89!^ semester hours of university work completed) he falls nine or more grade 
points below a 2.0 (C) average on all college units attempted or in all units attempted at this 
institution. 

3. As a senior (90 or more semester hours of college work completed) he falls six or more grade 
points below a 2.0 (C) average on all university units attempted or in all units attempted at 
this Institution. 

A graduate student (unclassified or classified) shall be disqualified if he falls below a 2.0 (C) average 
in all units attempted at this institution as a graduate student. 

Student Conduct 

The university properly assumes that all students are in attendance to secure a sound education and 
that they will conduct themselves as mature citizens of the campus community. Compliance with 
all regulations of the university is therefore expected. If, however, on any occasion a student or an 
organization is alleged to have compromised accepted university policies or standards, appropriate 
judiciary procedures shall be initiated through the established university judicial process. Every effort 
will be made to encourage and support the development of self-discipline and control by students 
and student organizations. The dean of students, aided by all members of the faculty and advised 
by the Student Affairs Committee of the faculty, is responsible to the President of the university for 
the behavior of students In their relationships to the university. The President in turn Is responsible 
to the Chancellor and the Trustees of the California State University and Colleges who themselves 
are governed by specific laws of the State of California. 

Students have the right to appeal certain disciplinary actions taken by appropriate university authori- 
ties. Regulations governing original hearings and appeal rights and procedures have been carefully 
detailed to provide maximum protection to both the individual charged and the university commu- 
nity. Information about the operation of the judicial system involving student discipline may be 
obtained In the Office of Judicial Affairs. 

Debts Owed to the University 

From time to time the student may become Indebted to the university. This could occur, for example, 
when the student fails to repay money borrowed from the university. Similarly, debts occur when 
the student fails to pay library fees, or when the student fails to pay for other services provided by 


230-1 10 630 


62 Records and Regulations 

the university at the request of the student. Should this occur, Sections 42380 and 42381 of Title 5 
of the California Administrative Code authorize the university to withhold "permission to register, 
to use facilities for which a fee is authorized to be charged, to receive services, materials, food or 
merchandise or any combination of the above from any person owing a debt" until the debt is paid. 
For example, under these provisions the university may withhold permission to register, and may 
withhold other services such as grades and transcripts. If a student feels that he or she does not owe 
all or part of a particular fee or charge, the student should contact the business office. 

RIGHT OF PETITION 

Students may petition for review of certain university academic regulations when unusual circum- 
stances exist. It should be noted, however, that academic regulations when they are contained In 
Title 5, California Administrative Code, are not subject for petition. 

Petition forms are available in the Office of Admissions and Records and must first be reviewed and 
signed by the student's adviser. Action will then be taken on the petition and the student will be 
notified of this decision. A copy of the action will also be placed in the student's folder in the Office 
of the Registrar. 

RIGHT OF ACADEMIC APPEAL 

The student who believes he has been graded capriciously or treated with obvious prejudice by 
faculty or administrators may initiate steps for an academic appeal. In all cases the student should 
first make an effort to resolve the issue by consulting the faculty or administrator concerned. If the 
issue cannot be resolved the student should consult with the dean of students or director of judicial 
affairs. 




11 s 















DEGREE REQUIREMENTS 


S53— 1 n S 





\ 


1 


67 

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR'S DEGREE 


A student is eligible for graduation if he is in good standing and fulfills the following requirements: 

/. Genera! Education 

To be eligible for a baccalaureate degree from Cal State Fullerton, the student shall have completed 
a minimum of 45 semester units of general education courses selected in accordance with the pattern 
designated below. Such courses may be lower division courses or upper division courses for which 
the student qualifies. 

/. Natural Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of two courses, one from each of two fields which shall 
Include the following: biological sciences, chemistry, earth sciences, physics and physical science. 

if. Soda! Sciences Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which shall 
include the following: anthropology, economics, geography, history, political science, psychology 
and sociology. 

Note:0\ the courses taken to meet the requirements In U.S. history, Constitution, state and local 
government (California Administrative Code, Section 40404), a maximum of three units may be 
applied for credit in Section II. 

III. Arts — Humanities Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which shall 
Include the following: art, drama, language (English, Intermediate or advanced courses in foreign 
languages), literature (American, comparative, English, foreign), music, philosophy and speech. 

IV. Basic Subjects Minimum: nine units 

The student shall select a minimum of three courses, one from each of three fields which shall 
include the following: computer science, elementary foreign languages, health education, math- 
ematics, oral communication, physical education, reading, statistics and writing. 

V. Genera! Education Electives 

The student may fulfill any remaining units required for general education by selecting any 
undergraduate course offered by the university for credit except courses which apply to the student's 
major or credential program. Transfer students certified under provisions of California Administra- 
tive Code, Title V, as having met the 40-unit minimum general education requirements will be 
required to complete five additional units in general education selected from two or more sections, 

I - V above. 

2. Statutory Requirements in American Institutions and Values 

In addition to general education-breadth requirements California Administrative Code, Section 
40404, states that for graduation the student Is required "to demonstrate competence in the Constitu- 
tion of the United States, and In American history Including the study of American institutions and 
ideals, and of the principles of state and local government established under the Constitution of this 
state." To meet this requirement, the student may select the following alternatives: (1) pass a 
comprehensive examination in these fields, (2) pass Political Science 1(X) and a course in U. S. 
history, 3) pass a combination of Political Science 3(X) and History 170A or 170B. Coursework 
completed to satisfy Section 40404 may be applied in the social sciences area of general education 
to a maximum of three units. 


»i-i a 45 


68 Bachelor's Degree 

3. Electives 

After fulfilling the requirements in general education, American institutions and values, and a specific 
major (and possibly a minor), each student Is free to choose the rest of the courses needed to 
complete the 1 24 semester units required for graduation. Different majors vary considerably In both 
the number of units they require in their own and related fields. They also vary considerably in the 
amount of latitude or choice they permit in selecting courses to satisfy the major requirement. The 
general education requirement encourages great freedom of choice within the broad categories of 
the natural sciences, social sciences, arts and humanities, and basic subjects. Students at the univer- 
sity use their electives to broaden their general educations, deepen some aspect of their specialties, 
pursue work In related fields, and satisfy curiosities and enthusiasms for particular subjects or areas 
of interest. 

4. Units 

(a) Total units 

A minimum of 124 semester units is required for graduation with a bachelor of arts degree. 
The Bachelor of Science In Engineering requires a minimum of 132 semester units. 

(b) Upper division units 

Completion of a minimum of 40 units of upper division credit is required. 

(c) Resident units 

Completion of a minimum of 24 semester units in residence is required. At least one-half of 
these units must be completed among the last 20 semester units counted toward the degree. 
Extension credit, or credit by examination, may not be used to fulfill the minimum residence 
requirement. 

5. Scholarship 

(a) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted, including those 
accepted by transfer from another institution. 

(b) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units in the major. 

(c) A grade-point average of 2.0 or better is required on all units attempted at California State 
University, Fullerton. 

6. Major 

Completion of all requirements for a major as specified by appropriate university authority is 
required. 

7. Multiple Majors and Second Baccalaureate Degrees 

Second majors 

Within the units required for the baccalaureate It is possible for a student to complete the 
requirements for more than one major within a degree program when the additional major Is 
within the degree program for the first major. The student shall declare the additional major 
with the appropriate department not later than the beginning of the student's final year of study. 
The completion of additional majors will be noted at the time of graduation by appropriate 
entries on the academic record and on the commencement program. 

Second baccalaureate 

(a) First degree completed elsewhere, second at Cal State Fullerton 

Students seeking a bachelor's degree from Cal State Fullerton after having received a 
baccalaureate from another institution may qualify for graduation with the approval and 
recommendation of the faculty upon completion of the following: 

(1) general education requiremments 

(2) all requirements in the major field of study 

(3) residence and scholarship requirements 

(b) Two baccalaureates from Cal State Fullerton 

A student completing a baccalaureate program at Cal State Fullerton will have completed 
the general education, residence, and scholarship requirements. With the approval and 
recommendation of the faculty, he may qualify for a second baccalaureate under the 
following circumstances: 


ass—l 11 65 


Bachelor's Degree 69 

(1 ) The second field of study is offered in a different program (e.g. bachelor of arts to 
bachelor of science) 

(2) At least 24 units are earned in residence beyond the requirements for the first degree 

(3) All requirements of the major are fulfilled 

Units included in second baccalaureate programs may not apply to graduate degrees 
or credential programs. 

8. Minor 

Completion of a minor field is not required for the baccalaureate degree at this time. 

9. Graduation Requirement Check 

A candidate for graduation should file an application for a graduation requirement check In the 
Office of the Registrar during registration for the semester prior to the semester in which he expects 
to graduate (please refer to the current schedule of class for the deadlines applied to requesting and 
returning graduation checks). A senior should have completed at least 100 units (including the 
current work in progress) and a substantial portion of his major requirements before requesting a 
graduation check. If the candidate does not complete the requirements in the semester indicated, 
he must file a change of graduation date in the Office of the Registrar. The original graduation check 
is valid as long as a student is in continuous attendance and is completing the major under which 
the graduation check was requested. 

W. Approval and Recommendation by the Faculty of the University 


SW-l 


11 7S 




-i' 





71 


THE PROGRAM OF MASTER'S DEGREES 


Master's degree programs offered at Cal State Fullerton are listed on page 89 and are described in 
the appropriate section of this catalog under "University Curricula." Program descriptions and 
additional information are contained in the Graduate Bulletin, copies of which are available in the 
Office of Admissions and the Graduate Office. 

Master's degrees in other areas are under consideration and will be announced when approved. 

STANDARDS FOR GRADUATE STUDY 

Graduate study deals with more complex ideas and demands more sophisticated techniques, search- 
ing analysis, and creative thinking than undergraduate study. The research required is extensive in 
both primary and secondary sources and the quality of writing expected is high. The student is 
advised to consider these factors when deciding upon the amount of coursework to be undertaken 
during any one semester. 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE MASTER'S DEGREE 

General requirements for the master's degree include a study plan consisting of a minimum of 30 
semester units of approved upper division and graduate (500-level) coursework taken after the 
baccalaureate and completed with a 3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. The coursework should 
normally be completed within five years (see "Time Limit for Completion"). For specific require- 
ments of particular programs, please see the descriptions elsewhere in this catalog. 

In the degree program: 

1 . Not less than 24 semester units shall be completed in residence. 

2. Not less than 15 semester units shall be in graduate (500-level) courses. 

3. Not more than six semester units shall be allowed for a thesis if a thesis is required. 

4. Six shall be in related fields outside the department or concentration. 

Some type of final evaluation, near the end of the student's work toward his master's degree, is 
required. It may be a thesis, a project, a comprehensive examination, or any combination of these. 
Each student's program for a master's degree (including his eligibility, classified status, candidacy, 
and award of the degree) must be approved by the school or department adviser, and/or graduate 
program adviser, the school or department committee, and the dean of graduate studies. 

GRADUATE REGULATIONS 

The following are in addition to other policies and procedures applying to both undergraduates and 
graduates described elsewhere in this catalog and in the appropriate class schedule. Requirements 
of individual programs are shown in the appropriate sections of this catalog. Also, individual schools 
and departments may have established particular rules governing programs offered. 

Students are advised to consult the Graduate Bulletin for detailed instructions concerning steps in 
the master's degree program. It Is the student's responsibility to initiate the requests for classified 
status, advancement to candidacy, and for a graduation check at the appropriate times. The deadline 
for requesting the graduation check appears in the official calendar for each semester. 

Since all policies and procedures are subject to change, by appropriate authority, students should 
consult class schedules and other official announcements for possible revision of policies and 
procedures stated herein. 

Admission With Graduate Standing: Unclassified 

For admission with graduate standing as an unclassified graduate student, a student shall have 
completed a four-year college course and hold an acceptable baccalaureate degree from an accred- 
ited institution; or shall have completed equivalent academic preparation as determined by the 
appropriate authorities; and must satisfactorily meet the professional, personal, scholastic, and other 
standards for graduate study, including qualifying examinations, as the appropriate authorities may 
prescribe. 


274—1 11 no 


72 


Master's Degree 

Admission with unclassified graduate standing does not constitute admission to a graduate degree 
program. Duration of unclassified graduate standing may be determined by appropriate authority. 

Admission to Graduate Degree Curricula: Classified 

A student who has been admitted in unclassified graduate status may, upon application to the dean 
of graduate studies and recommendation by the appropriate school or department authorities, with 
subsequent approval by the dean of graduate studies, be admitted to an authorized graduate degree 
curriculum as a classified graduate student. He must satisfactorily meet the professional, personal, 
scholastic, and other standards for admission to the graduate degree curriculum, including qualifying 
examinations, as the appropriate authorities may prescribe. Only those applicants who show pro- 
mise of success and fitness will be admitted to graduate degree curricula, and only those who 
continue to demonstrate a satisfactory level of scholastic competence and fitness, as determined by 
the appropriate authorities, shall be eligible to continue in such curricula. Students whose perform- 
ance in a graduate degree curriculum is judged to be unsatisfactory may be required to withdraw 
from ail graduate degree curricula offered. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

A student who has been classified (as above) may, upon application and with subsequent approvals, 
be advanced to candidacy, following the satisfactory completion of a minimum of 12 units of 
coursework on the approved study plan. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 in all coursework 
on the study plan is required; other scholastic, professional and personal standards, the passing of 
examinations, and other qualifications, may be prescribed. 

Admission From Nonaccredited Schools 

A student who is a graduate of a nonaccredited school must apply for admission as an undergraduate 
to complete requirements for a bachelor's degree from this institution. However, once admitted, a 
student in this category who gives evidence of unusual promise and superior background may 
petition the school or department concerned for reclassification as an unclassified graduate student, 
and if the petition is granted he may then proceed in the graduate program. 

Residence Requirement 

A student is considered to be in residence when registered during regular semesters. Of the minimum 
of 30 semester units of approved coursework required for the master's degree, not less than 24 shall 
be completed in residence. Credit in summer sessions may be substituted for regular session unit 
requirements on a unit for unit basis. Extension credit or credit by examination may not be used to 
fulfill the minimum residence requirement and is not normally acceptable as part of the six units of 
approved transfer work permitted. 

Election of Curriculum Requirements 

A student remaining in continuous attendance in regular sessions and continuing in the same 
curriculum may elect to meet the degree requirements in effect either at the time of his classification 
or at the time of the completion of degree requirements, except that substitutions for discontinued 
courses may be authorized or required by the proper authorities. 

Continuous Enrollment 

A graduate student with a graduate degree objective is required to maintain continuous enrollment 
during regular semesters (summer sessions excluded) until award of the degree. Enrollment in 
extension classes does not satisfy this requirement. 

A graduate student who falls to register has severed his connection with this Institution and with the 
school or department of his graduate degree program. If he wishes to resume his studies, he must 
reapply for admission to Cal State Fullerton and to his degree program. The policy is designed to 
eliminate the need for readmission, provide opportunity for continuous use of facilities, including 
the Library, and assure the development of an Integrated program, adequately supervised, and 
effectively terminated within the time limitations allowed by regulations. 

Students who may have completed all coursework, but who may not have satisfactorily completed 
a comprehensive examination or other requirement, must maintain continuous enrollment. 

If a student pursuing an advanced degree finds it Impossible to attend during a certain semester, he 


S7»-l 11 135 


Master's Degree 73 

may request permission to register in Graduate Studies 700, a credit/ no credit course with no units 
of credit, which does not require class attendance. Registration in Graduate Studies 700 will normally 
be restricted to graduate students who have been classified or who are in a prescribed prerequisite 
program for a specific graduate degree. A student may not register in Graduate Studies 700 for a 
third consecutive semester. 

Applicability of Courses Taken During Summer Sessions 

Cal State Fullerton normally conducts two six-week summer sessions. Appropriate courses taken 
during the summer sessions may be applied to a graduate degree program, providing the courses 
are approved in advance by the proper authorities. Since the funding of graduate work during the 
summer months does not include the necessary advisement and supervision, appropriate advisers 
and committees may not be available. 

It should be noted that enrollment in a summer session does not constitute admission to this 
institution (matriculation). Any student desiring a master's degree must be admitted to a regular 
semester (fall or spring) and is expected to be enrolled continuously until award of the degree (see 
"Continuous Enrollment"). 

Grade-Point Average Standards 

The required CPA for admission \o a master's degree program (classified status) varies, depending 
upon the particular program. Consult school or department descriptions of programs elsewhere in 
this catalog and in the Graduate Bulletin. However, a student must have earned a 3.0 average in 
all postbaccalaureate coursework taken at this university plus such transfer courses as are applied 
to his study plan. Exception to this rule may be granted by a school or department in response to 
a student petition only if it is evident that courses whose grades are not to be computed in the GPA 
are inapplicable and inappropriate to the degree program. 

The 30 semester units of approved coursework required for the degree must be completed with a 
3.0 (B) minimum grade-point average. If a student approaches the completion of the degree 
requirements with less than a 3.0 average, he may request a change in his study plan to add no more 
than six units of coursework in order to achieve at least a 3.0 average (see "Changes in Study Plan," 
as follows). If a student's average at any time falls below such a level that it cannot be raised to 
a 3.0 within the prescribed limits of coursework, he has in effect withdrawn himself from his master's 
program. 

Students applying for admission and declaring the objective of a Master of Business Administration 
are required to submit the test scores from the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business 
(Educational Testing Service). 

Students declaring other graduate degree objectives will not be required to submit test scores for 
admission. However, test scores are required for admission to classified status in many of the 
master's degree programs. See program descriptions in this catalog for the types of tests required. 
The Graduate Record Examinations are nationally administered and are given only a few times a 
year on specified dates. A current list of these dates Is available at the Office of Counseling and 
Testing, school and department offices and the Graduate Office. The student must make written 
application for the tests on a form available at the above offices which must be submitted to the 
particular testing service office by the applicable deadline. Since test results are measured against 
those of students who normally take the tests In their senior year and since they are required before 
the student can become a classified student, the taking of the tests should not be deferred. 

Limitation on Preclassification Coursework 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at Cal State Fullerton prior to classified status 
may be applied to a student's master's degree study plan. Any acceptable transfer work is excluded 
from the nine units permitted. Students who receive postgraduate credit for courses taken during 
their final semester as a senior may accumulate as many as 12 units. 

Inapplicable Courses 

Courses numbered 100 to 299 and in the 700 series cannot be applied toward a master's degree. 
Courses numbered 300 to 399 do not give graduate credit unless Included on an approved graduate 
study plan. 

Courses taken to meet baccalaureate degree requirements, or postgraduate coursework taken to 


284—1 II 160 


74 Master's Degree 

satisfy quantitative or qualitative deficiencies cannot be applied toward a master's degree. Credit by 
examination is not acceptable. 

Workshop, extension, and institute coursework offered either at this institution or by other colleges 
or universities is not normally acceptable as part of a master's degree study plan. A student who 
desires to utilize such coursework must obtain approval from the school or department faculty 
adviser, and/or graduate adviser, the graduate committee, and from the dean of graduate studies. 
When such coursework has been taken elsewhere, the student should provide evidence that the 
college or university concerned would consider such coursework acceptable toward a comparable 
graduate degree. Any such courses offered by other institutions, but which are not acceptable for 
their own graduate degrees, may not be accepted by this university for a graduate degree. 

Also see the sections following on "CR, S or P Grades" and "Time Limit for Completion." 

CR, S or P Grades 

Any course taken at this university with a grade of CR, P, S or similar cannot be accepted on a 
master's degree study plan. 

A course taken at another college or university with a grade of CR, P, S or similar cannot be accepted 
on a master's degree study plan unless such a course with such a grade is acceptable at that college 
or university for a graduate degree. 

Declassification 

Graduate students in classified graduate status may be declassified upon the recommendation of the 
school and/or department, reverting to unclassified status, when one or more of the following 
conditions exist: 

1 . The student's request for declassification is approved by his graduate committee. 

2. The student fails to maintain the grade-point average required in the master's degree program. 

3. The student's professional performance is judged to be unsatisfactory by other criteria estab- 
lished by the school or department. 

4. The student fails to petition for an extension of the time limit. 

Time Limit for Completion 

All coursework on the master's degree study plan should normally be completed within five years, 
except that, upon petition to the Graduate Office, two additional years may be allowed. The 
university, at its option, may further extend the time for students who pass a comprehensive 
examination in the relevant course. Requests to take such comprehensive examinations should be 
made to school or department graduate studies committees. 

When an examination is administered, a report of successful completion will be made to the dean 
of graduate studies. The grade received on the original course will be used on the master's degree 
study plan, rather than the CR grade used for challenge examinations. 

The following shows the dates of expiration of courses according to the five-year limitation: 
Courses taken in Will expire in 

1967 1972 

1968 1973 

1969 1974 

1970 1975 

1971 1976 

1972 1977 

1973 1978 

The five-year period is computed as being the time between the actual date of completion of the 
earliest course and the month the degree is granted. 

Changes in Study Plan 

The student must complete the courses shown on his approved study plan on file in the Graduate 
Office and in the school or department office with at least a 3.0 (B) grade-point average. If a student 
wishes to make a change in his study plan, he should file the appropriate form (copies available 
in the Graduate Office, schools and departments) in the school or department of his master's degree 


292—1 11 200 


Master's Degree 75 

prior to registration. The recommendation for a change must be signed by his adviser. No course 
for which a grade has been assigned may be removed from a study plan. 

Minimum Full-Time Course Load 

Ordinarily, nine units of coursework a semester shall constitute a minimum full-time program for 
graduate students, provided at least three units are in 500-level or higher courses. 

Maximum Course Unit Load 

Twelve units is considered to be a maximum course load for graduate students, but, on the approval 
of an adviser, in exceptional cases, a student may take more. 

Theses and Projects 

When a thesis is required, the approved original copy, in the approved binding, and a microfilm of 
it, must be deposited in the Library. An abstract, of not more than 150 words, must accompany the 
thesis, and will be published in the journal. Master's Abstracts. Arrangements for the binding, 
microfilming and publication of the abstract must be completed by the last day of classes of the 
semester in which the degree is to be granted and are made through the Titan Bookstore. The current 
fee (subject to change) for microfilming, publication of the abstract, and the archival copy Is $20. 
The fee (subject to change) for binding is $8.50, plus $1 for postage. 

When a project Is required, it will be filed with the school or department of the degree program. 
Some record of the project, or the project Itself, Is preserved in the school or department and, when 
appropriate, in the Library. When the school or department recommends, a project or its written 
record may be treated as a thesis. 

The thesis and where appropriate the project must conform in matters of style and format to the 
rules in "Thesis Procedures and Regulations," duplicated instructions available in school or depart- 
ment offices, the Graduate Office, and the Library Reference Room. Since adherence to these rules 
must be checked and approved, and valuable assistance can be given with problems associated with 
Illustrations, etc., students are advised to consult the Library adviser (in the Reference Room) well 
in advance of the final typing of the thesis. In addition, schools and departments have adopted 
particular form books and/or style sheets, which are to be followed in matters of documentation 
and bibliography (consult Graduate Office, or appropriate school or department). 

It is the student's responsibility to become acquainted with the appropriate rules and regulations and 
to make all necessary arrangements for the typing of the thesis. Including instruction of the typist, 
if other than himself. Adequate time should be allowed for reading and criticism by the adviser, the 
committee members, and the librarian, for revisions, as needed, and for completion of the final 
edition of the thesis, including approvals. 

The deadline for submission of the completed thesis to the adviser and committee is six weeks in 
advance of the last day of classes of the semester In which the student hopes to be awarded the 
degree, unless other arrangements are made with the school or department. The deadline for 
depositing the approved original copy of the thesis in the Titan Bookstore and making the arrange- 
ments for binding, microfilming and publication of the abstract, is the last day of classes of the 
semester in which the degree is to be awarded. If a student's program requires a thesis, or if the 
project has been determined to be regarded as a thesis, the master's degree cannot be awarded 
unless the notification that the student has completed this final step is received by the dean of 
graduate studies. 

Graduate Assistantships, Fellowships, and Financial Aids 

There are a limited number of appointments as graduate assistants available to outstanding graduate 
students who are working In graduate degree programs. These may pay up to $1,250 per semester. 
If interested, consult the chairman of the department in which degree study is being taken. Teaching 
fellowships are not currently available. 

The State of California each year awards a certain number of graduate fellowships (payment of fees 
only). Qualified students who are residents of California may make application for these through 
the Financial Aid Office. 

For information concerning other financial aids and part-time placement services, see pages 32 and 
35, respectively. 


297-1 II 22S 


76 Master's Degree 

International Study 

Cal State Fullerton participates in the California State University and Colleges' program of study 
abroad. Under this program, limited studies taken at designated foreign universities, when arranged 
in advance, may be applied toward the requirements of a degree awarded by Cal State Fullerton. 
It Is important that plans be completed several months before starting such a program. For details 
consult the foreign student adviser. 

Second Master's Degree 

A graduate student desiring to work for a second master's degree at Cal State Fullerton must request 
permission from the school or department concerned and the Graduate Council in order to apply 
for admission for a second master's degree program (in unclassified status) . If the request is granted, 
the student must as a minimum satisfy all prerequisites and all requirements of the new degree 
program. Approval of classified status for the second degree v/ill be given only after the first degree 
has been awarded. 

Postgraduate Credit 

If a graduate student has not, while an undergraduate, received permission to consider coursework 
which was not required for the baccalaureate as postgraduate, he may petition for such credit to 
be granted retroactively. Petitions for postgraduate credit are filed in the Office of Admissions and 
Records. 

If approval is given by the appropriate school or department graduate adviser and university commit- 
tees, such coursework may be included as a part of the student's study plan, within existing 
regulations concerning applicable coursework and requirements for the degree. See "Inapplicable 
Courses." 

Enrollment in 500-Level Courses by Seniors 

Under certain circumstances, a senior may take a 500-level course. If he is within nine units of 
graduation, he may not receive postgraduate credit for such courses. He must have a minimum 
grade-point average of 3.25 overall and of 3.5 In the field or fields of his intended graduate program, 
and the specific approval of the chairman of the department or dean of the school in which the 
course Is offered and the chairman or dean of the student's major department or school. 

If he /5 within nine units of completion of graduation requirements and if he has the approval of the 
appropriate chairmen or deans, as above, he may petition for postgraduate credit for these units as 
provided under "Postgraduate Credit." 





■t ' ^---vc /■, ‘i' ; ■ " , " 

■ ^- - -s '" . ’ '' ' 

'’• ' ■ . ... 




■' ; . ■ • :y>;. 





ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 



81 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 


Choosing an Undergraduate Major 

Every student is expected to choose a major or field of concentration by the beginning of the junior 
year. The majors currently offered at this university are described in the next sections of this catalog. 
Most major requirements allow students the freedom to take a number of courses in fields other than 
in their majors or closely related fields. 

Lower division students who are uncertain about their primary vocational goals or educational 
Interests may, and probably should, enroll as undeclared majors. Then, and during their freshman 
and sophomore years, such students should explore the possibilities open to them that will meet their 
interests and potentialities. To help students in their searching and selecting, the university has 
available a number of useful resources: an Office of Academic Advisement; orientation programs 
that are given every year; a variety of counseling and testing services provided by the Counseling 
and Testing Centers; and the different department and school offices for information and advice on 
particular fields, their programs of study and later work opportunities. There also is a collection of 
college and university catalogs available In the Library. Additionally, there are a growing number 
of student organizations on the campus that are organized In terms of disciplinary and professional 
interests. The Placement Center also has much useful information on vocations and specific work 
opportunities. 

Most students have general Ideas about some subjects in which they might like to major, and almost 
all students are aware of the fields in which they do not wish to major. The task of selecting a major 
(and often a minor or other complementary specialization) then becomes one of crystallizing these 
earlier ideas on the basis of experiences in specific courses, discussions with other students and 
faculty, etc. Before commitment to a specific major, students should be sure that they have not 
rejected a field of study because of some wrong preconceptions or inaccurate information. Students 
also should not overlook interests and potentialities that they previously may not have discovered. 
The option of taking a limited number of courses on a Credit/ No Credit basis often will be helpful 
in these pursuits. 

Students, however, must be very careful to plan freshman or sophomore programs which will permit 
their entering or taking advanced courses in fields they think they may want to be their majors. Such 
students should check such major requirements as mathematics, chemistry, foreign language, etc. 
which must be taken before the junior year or perhaps even begun during the freshman year. 
Students anticipating graduate or professional study In a certain field should exercise special care 
in planning their undergraduate programs, and they should seek faculty counseling in the fields 
concerned. Such choices do not have to be made during the first two years, and may or may not 
be made during the second two. However, careful and advance examination of the possibilities of 
graduate or professional study often will be helpful to students who have fairly clear ideas of the 
educational and vocational objectives they would like to seek. 

Students also should be careful about concentrating so heavily In a particular field that they cannot 
change majors to a different field should they wish to do so. A growing number of our students come 
to the campus with no clear idea of the field in which they would like to major. Such students, and 
others whose goals and objectives have not yet firmly crystallized, will have opportunities to take 
courses in various fields and make up their minds during their lower division work. They should, 
however, take full advantage of the opportunities that exist on and outside the campus to learn more 
about available fields of study and occupational fields. 

Planning a Major Program 

When students have selected a major field, they should study carefully all the requirements which 
are specified in this catalog under their chosen degree program. Then they should make a tentative 
semester by semester plan for completing the requirements, with careful regard for courses which 
are prerequisite to others. They should discuss this plan with their major advisers who will be able 
to help them with any problems. 

In addition to courses in the major department, related courses in other fields and supporting courses 
in basic skills also may be required. These, too, should be included in the tentative semester by 
semester plan. These auxiliary requirements are described in the degree program for each major. 


30a-l 11 28S 


82 Academic Advisement 


Some departments require placement tests prior to admission to classes. The time and place for such 
tests is given in the class schedule, often before registration. Students should purchase a copy of the 
class schedule at the Titan Bookstore well before registration for classes begins. 

Choosing Genera! Education Courses and Electives 

In keeping with the liberal arts tradition, the university requires its graduates to have sampled a 
variety of disciplines as part of their general education. The broad categories of general education 
courses are presented in the catalog section on "Graduation Requirements for the Bachelor's 
Degree". Through these requirements students are introduced to the worlds of values, ideas, and 
beauty, to mankind and his problems, to the natural world in which man lives, and to skills essential 
for scholarship. 

To many students the selection of general education courses and electives poses many difficult 
choices. With well over 2,700 classes to choose from and over 50 fields of specialization that can 
be sampled, some demanding decisions must be made. Various aids or resources are available. 
Among these are: this catalog and the class schedule with their descriptions of regular and new and 
experimental courses; informal consultations with other students and faculty members; and advisers 
in the Office of Academic Advisement. 

The reasons for selecting particular general education courses and electives Include; the need to 
explore potential major or vocational interests; curiosity about or enthusiasm for a particular subject; 
the desire to clarify thinking and values on problems and issues of personal and social significance; 
the urges to broaden and synthesize work in a specialization with perspectives and skills from other 
fields; and desires to deepen understanding and improve skills for such central human activities as 
personal relationships, family and community life, citizenship activities, and leisure pursuits. Other 
kinds of reasons Include the interests in experiencing the varying approaches and teaching methods 
of different, talented teachers or of sharing learning experiences with friends. 

Change of Major, Degree or Credential Objective 

A student who wishes to change his major, degree, or credential objective must obtain the required 
form In the Office of Admissions and Records. Such a change is not official until the form has been 
signed and filed in the Registrar's Office. A student should be aware that he will be responsible for 
the requirements for the new choice of major, degree, or credential that are in the catalog In effect 
at the time he files a change. 

Communication Skills 

Skills In written, oral, and gestural communication are important tools and marks of well educated 
men and women. Great competencies in both articulation and advocacy are arts well-worth attain- 
ing for living effective, full and civic lives and for achieving excellence in vocational careers. 

A variety of experiences at the university provides opportunities to practice and develop communi- 
cations skills. The acts of written and oral expression also serve to consolidate, synthesize, and 
develop thinking and personality. 

Students will be required to demonstrate, in all classes where written expression Is appropriate, their 
ability to write clearly and correctly about the materials of the course. Ability of a student to 
demonstrate writing proficiency shall be used as a part of the final grade determination In any course. 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

Each undergraduate student Is assigned an adviser who will help the student plan an academic 
program. The adviser is a resource person who can provide valuable information and suggestions 
and who can assist the student to find the most desirable ways to meet the requirements for 
graduation and for his major or credential. Although the adviser Is consulted, the final choice of 
courses and the responsibility for the program lies with the student himself. 

Academic program advisers are able to offer better advice when consulted if students come pre- 
pared with lists of courses they already have taken and their own copies of transcripts from colleges 
previously attended (If students are new to Cal State Fullerton). 

An undergraduate student who has declared a major will be assigned an adviser by the chairman 
of his major department. Those seeking a credential will also be assigned a professional adviser by 
the School of Education. Students who have not yet decided upon a major (undeclared majors). 


314—1 11 310 


Preprofessional Programs 83 

or who are not seeking a degree will be advised in the Office of Academic Advisement. 

Graduate students will be assigned a major adviser in their fields of specialization, except in educa- 
tion where all will have a professional adviser from the School of Education. Those students seeking 
a credential for teaching in secondary schools will be assigned both a professional and a major 
adviser. 

In the School of Engineering, each student will be assigned an adviser by the dean of the school and 
is expected to meet with that adviser at least once a semester. He is required to file an adviser- 
approved program plan before the beginning of the second semester of the junior year. 

PREPROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS 

The academic programs of the university provide appropriate preparation for graduate work in a 
variety of fields. Students who have made tentative decisions about institutions In which they may 
wish to pursue graduate work should consult the catalogs of those graduate schools as they plan 
their undergraduate programs. Students planning to undertake graduate work should supplement 
their undergraduate programs by anticipating language requirements at major graduate schools and 
by intensive work in areas of special relevance to their intended graduate work. Professional schools 
In many universities either require or recommend that applicants complete four-year programs for 
admission. Although the professional schools do not always require a bachelor's degree, they 
generally encourage basic preparation and a broad general education leading to that degree before 
beginning specialization. 

The university offers a number of professional programs through the master's degree. These include 
programs in the fine arts, business administration, communications, education, engineering, health 
education and physical education and recreation, library science, public administration, and speech 
pathology-audiology. Students Interested In preparing for professional careers in these areas, either 
here or in other educational Institutions, are encouraged to seek assistance and guidance from our 
faculty members in these fields. 

Paramedical Health Sciences 

(Dental Technician, Nursing, Occupational Therapy, Optometry, 

Physical Therapy, Podiatry) 

Although no specific bachelor's or master's degree program Is available in the professional areas of 
dental technician, nursing, occupational therapy, optometry, physical therapy, podiatry, academic 
preparatory courses for these professions are given in the science departments. Students should 
register their specific interest preference in either the Office of the Vice President for Academic 
Affairs or the department offices in biological science or chemistry. 

Prelegal Preparation 

Students planning to enter law school may elect any one of several majors. In general, the better 
law schools require that an applicant hold a baccalaureate degree. Although there Is no uniform 
prelegal course of study or specific university major required, it is recommended that prospective 
law students prepare themselves in such fields as English, American history, economics, political 
science (particularly the history and development of English and American political institutions) and 
such undergraduate courses as judicial process, administrative law, constitutional law and interna- 
tional law, philosophy (particularly ethics and logic), business administration, anthropology, psy- 
chology and sociology. 

The major chosen and many of the courses selected should demand a high level of performance 
In reading difficult material, understanding abstract and complex concepts, and speaking and writing 
clearly and persuasively. Prelegal students are advised to take the minimum program to meet the 
requirements of their chosen major and courses beyond the introductory survey level In other 
selected fields. A distribution of course sequences among the social sciences, the natural sciences 
and the humanities Is desirable. Students with interests in becoming lawyers should contact the 
Prelaw Society. Some faculty members In the School of Business Administration and Economics and 
the Department of Political Science also can provide advice and assistance. 

Premedical-Predental Committee 

Student counseling with respect to preprofessional programs in medicine, dentistry and other health 
sciences as well as professional school admission problems are the concern of this committee. (See 


84 Preprofessional Programs 

membership listing, page 429.) All students wishing to prepare for dental or medical careers should 
register in the Office of the Academic Vice President for Academic Affairs or either the department 
offices in biological science or chemistry. 

Premedical Preparation 

Medical schools are currently seeking applicants with as broad and liberal an educational experience 
as possible. They recommend that applicants pursue collegiate major programs which are of vital 
interest to the student. However, all medical schools require a basic minimal training In the natural 
sciences and the premedical-predental committee upon review of these admission requirements 
recommends the following coursework which satisfies this minimum training: 
one year of English 

three semesters of biology (Including embryology and genetics) 

one year of general chemistry 

one year or organic chemistry with laboratory 

one year of college physics with laboratory 

one year of calculus 

Most medical school applicants complete a baccalaureate degree program prior to beginning their 
medical training. However, applications to medical school are processed normally at the termination 
of the sixth semester (junior year) . The medical college admission test, required of all medical school 
applicants, is taken normally during the spring of the sixth semester (junior year). The prospective 
medical school applicant should therefore normally plan to complete the above natural science 
minimal requirements by the end of the junior year. Thus he should begin general chemistry in his 
freshman year in order to satisfy the prerequisite requirements for the advanced courses In chemis- 
try. 

Since medical school admissions are limited, the best prepared applicants are likely to have an 
advantage. Many medical schools recommend certain courses in the natural sciences In addition 
to those listed above In the minimal requirements. 

The prospective applicant is advised to consult the catalogs of those medical schools to which he 
anticipates applying for additional recommended preparatory subjects. He is further advised to 
consult a member of the Premedical Committee for assistance in planning his total collegiate 
program and to obtain copies of optimal programs from the chairman of the Premedical Committee. 

Medical Technology 

A concentration In medical technology is available under the B.A. in Biological Science program. 
Students Interested in pursuing this field of study should select appropriate paramedical courses as 
electives In their study plan. 

A concentration in medical technology Is also available under the M.A. In Biology. Students electing 
this must take as part of their course requirements Biological Science 51 4A-E (6 units) . These courses 
are open only to students who are M.A. candidates In the medical technology concentration and 
they are given at an approved cooperating hospital laboratory school. For further details consult the 
coordinator of medical technology in the Department of Biological Science. 

Social Welfare 

Full preprofessional training usually consists of two years of graduate training leading to the degree 
of Master of Social Welfare. Students who plan to seek employment In social work or social welfare 
after the completion of their B.A. degrees should prepare themselves In the fields of psychology 
(particularly child and adolescent psychology), sociology, anthropology, political science, econom- 
ics and research methods in social science. 

Students who intend to enter a professional school following undergraduate training should learn 
about the specific prerequisites for admission to the graduate school of their choice. Ordinarily a 
major in one of the social sciences, and some additional work in at least several other social sciences. 
Is recommended. 

Pretheological 

Students who might be interested in pursuing careers in counseling, social work, the teaching of 
religion, and the ministry and associated fields should take some courses In religion, psychology. 


a27— 1 11 375 


Preprofessional Programs 85 

anthropology, sociology, philosophy, education, communications, history, English, speech com- 
munication and a foreign language. Students desiring assistance and counseling regarding advanced 
work or professional careers may seek help from the faculty in the Department of Religious Studies. 


387—1 11 373 



UNIVERSITY CURRICULA 


3»-l n 380 







I 










r' 



89 

UNIVERSITY CURRICULA 


DEGREE PROGRAMS 

California State University, Fullerton offers the following baccalaureate degree programs which are 


described on the pages listed: 


Page 

B.A. American Studies 248 

B.A. Anthropology 252 

B.A. Art 99 

B.A. Biological Science 258 

B.A. Business Administration 138 

B.A. Chemistry 269 

B.A. Communications 281 

B.A. Comparative Literature 289 

B.S. Computer Science 165 

B.A. Earth Science 380 

B.A. Economics 144 

B.S. Engineering 211 

B.A. English 294 

B.A. Ethnic Studies 245, 277 

B.A. French 303 

B.A. Geography 316 

B.A. German 303 

B.S. Human Services * 


Page 


B.A. History 322 

B.A. Latin American Studies 333 

B.A. Liberal Studies ** 

B.A. Linguistics 334 

B.A. Mathematics 342 

B.A. Music 116 

B.M. Music 117 

B.A. Philosophy 350 

B.S. Physical Education 231 

B.A. Physics 354 

B.A. Political Science 359 

B.A. Psychology 369 

B.A. Religious Studies 376 

B.A. Russian Area Studies 379 

B.A. Sociology 387 

B.A. Spanish 303 

B.A. Speech Communication 392 

B.A. Theatre Arts 125 


M.A. Anthropology 

M.A. Art 

M.A. Biology 

M.B.A. Business Administration 

M.A. Chemistry 

M.A. Communications 

M.A. Comparative Literature 

M.A. Economics 

M.S. Education (with emphasis in ele- 
mentary education, reading, school ad- 
ministration, school counseling or 

special education) 

M.S. Engineering 

M.A. English 

M.S. Environmental Studies 

M.A. French 


M.A. Geography 

102 M.A. German 

259 M.A. History 

141 M.S. Library Science 

272 M.A. Linguistics 

285 M.A. Mathematics 

290 M.A. Music 

145 M.S. Physical Education 

M.A. Political Science 

M.A. Psychology 

M.P.A. Public Administration. 

176 M.A. Social Sciences 

215 M.A. Sociology 

297 M.A. Spanish 

*** M.A. Speech Communication 

304 M.A. Theatre Arts 


The following master's degree programs are offered: 

Page 
252 


Page 
. 316 
. 304 
. 323 
. 409 
. 334 
. 345 
. 118 
. 233 
. 360 
. 370 
. 363 
. 386 
. 387 
. 304 
. 397 
. 129 


The university Is accredited by the California State Board of Education and the National Council for 
Accreditation of Teacher Education (in elementary education, secondary education, special educa- 
tion, and speech and hearing audiology) for programs leading to the credentials listed under Teacher 
Education. 

* For information concerning this new degree consult the Interdisciplinary Center. 

** For information concerning this new degree consult Dr. Norman Townshend-Zellner. 

*** For inforn^tion corKerning this new degree consult the director of the program. 


IB-1 11 400 


90 Subject Finder 


SUBJECT FINDER 

The listing of degree programs does not include all of the fields or subject matter areas in which 
some courses currently are being offered at Cal State Fullerton. Additionally, different colleges and 
universities differ in the names they assign to degrees, curricular programs, and the academic units 
offering courses. The following "subject finder" lists some of the most commonly used terms for 
fields with information on where courses or programs on these subjects can be located at Fullerton 
and in this catalog. 

Subject 

Accounting 146 

African Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies, Anthropology, Geography, History, Political 
Science) 

Afro-American Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies) 246 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 246 

American Studies 248 

Anthropology 251 

Art 99 

Art Education Ill 

Aslan Studies (See Anthropology, Comparative Literature, Geography, History, Political 
Science) 

Astronomy 258 

Behavioral Sciences in Education 178 

Biological Science 258 

Business Administration 138,148 

Chemistry 266 

Chicano Studies 277 

Classics (See Comparative Literature, History and Latin) 

Communications 281 

Comparative Literature 289 

Computer Studies (See Engineering, Mathematics, Quantitative Methods) 165 

Dance 1 1 2 

Drama (See Theatre) 125 

Drama Education (See Theatre Education) 134 

Earth Science 293, 380, 

382 

Economics 144, 151 

Education 171 

Behavioral Sciences in Education 171 

School Administration/Social Foundations/ Reading 184 

Teacher Education 191 

Engineering 209 

English 293 

English Education 301 

Environmental Studies 301 

Ethnic Studies (See Afro-Ethnic Studies and Chicano Studies) 277 

Finance 154 

Folklore (See Anthropology and Comparative Literature) 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 303 

Foreign Languages Education 305 

French 305 

Geography 315 

Geology 321,380 

German 307 

Graduate Studies 94 

Health Education.. 231,234 

Hebrew 310 

History 321 

Interdisciplinary Center 330 

International Relations (See Political Science, Economics, History) 


339-1 11 419 


Subject Finder 91 

International Study 94 

Italian 310 

Journalism (See Communications) 

journalism Education 289 

Latin 310 

Latin American Studies 332 

Law (See Political Science, Management) 156 

Library Science 409 

Linguistics 334 

Management 1 56 

Marketing 1 58 

Mathematics 342 

Mathematics Education 380,383 

Meteorology 349 

Medical Biology Courses 266 

Mexican-American Studies (See Chicano Studies) 

Music 114 

Music Education 124 

Mythology (See Anthropology and Comparative Literature) 

Native American Studies 349 

Nature Interpretation 384 

Oceanography 266, 350 

Philosophy 350 

Photography (See Art and Communications) 

Physical Education 231,235 

Physical Science 353 

Physics 354 

Political Science 359 

Portuguese 31 1 

Psychology 369 

Public Administration (See Political Science) 

Public Relations (See Communications) 

Quantitative Methods IbO 

Radio (See Theatre and Communications) 

Reading 187 

Recreation 231,241 

Religious Studies ^76 

Russian 31 1 

Russian Area Studies 379 

Sanskrit (See Linguistics) 

School Administration 18^ 

Science Education 380, 384 

Social Foundations of Education 187 

Social Sciences 

Social Welfare 

Social Work (See Social Welfare) 

Sociology 387 

Spanish 313 

Speech (See Speech Communication) 

Speech Communication 

Speech Education 

Sports (See Physical Education) 

Statistics (See Mathematics and Quantitative Methods) 160,372 

Student-to-Student Tutorial 

Swahili 315 

Teacher Education 

Technological Studies 

Television (See Theatre and Communications) 125,281 

Theatre 125 

Theatre Education 1 3^ 


*6—1 II 425 


92 


Genera! Course Numbering Code 


COURSE DESCRIPTIONS 

Course descriptions briefly describe the content or subject matter to be covered and provide 
additional information on units of credit, the level of instruction (general course numbering code), 
prerequisites, and the type of course (lecture, laboratory, activity, seminar, and individually super- 
vised work). Information on specific offerings of courses (times, rooms, instructors) will be found 
in the class schedule which is printed in advance of the fall and spring semesters. Information on 
additional (new, special, or experimental) courses for each semester also can be found in these class 
schedules. 

Some of the courses listed in the catalog are not taught every year. Many are taught once only every 
year. Others are taught every semester, and often in many sections. Advance Information regarding 
the plans for offering particular courses may be obtained from the offices of the departments teaching 
them. 

The forms and methods of teaching vary widely in specific classes, depending on the subject matter 
and purposes and the particular instructor and students. The more traditional methods of lecturing, 
discussion, laboratory work, and Individually supervised research or projects increasingly are being 
supplemented by such learning resources as group and individual exercises, television, and films and 
records, videotaping, and the use of the computer. Modern specialized facilities and equipment are 
used In many courses in different fields. These include: laboratories for teaching the sciences; studios 
for teaching the fine arts; a small museum and archaeology/ physical anthropology laboratory; a 
variety of facilities for teaching communications; a language laboratory for teaching foreign lan- 
guages and linguistics courses; a speech and hearing clinic; and the Tucker Wildlife Sanctuary. 

Cal State encourages experimentation and innovation In teaching and welcomes a diversity of 
approaches. Increasingly, and with growing help from students, efforts are being made on the 
campus to examine and evaluate and improve the learning experiences in some classrooms in more 
scholarly ways. Students also are being provided more opportunities to learn through teaching 
experiences in activities such as tutoring and organizing and conducting courses in the Experimental 
College. 

SCHEDULES 

A new class schedule is published in advance of the fall and spring semesters. This general, university 
schedule contains not only detailed information on times, places, and Instructors for specific courses 
but also materials on registration, new courses that are not In the catalog, the times for final 
examinations, and many other useful items for course and program planning. The class schedule may 
be bought at the Titan Bookstore. Separate and free schedules are provided for the summer sessions 
and extension programs: these may be obtained from the office of the Dean of Continuing Education. 
The Experimental College of the Associated Students also distributes a schedule in advance of Its 
programs of course offerings. 

GENERAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

100-299 Lower division courses of freshman and sophomore level, but open also to upper division 
students. 

300-399 Upper division courses of junior and senior level, which do give graduate credit unless 
included on an approved graduate study plan (such as a credential or graduate degree 
program) for a specific graduate student. 

400-499 Upper division courses of junior and senior level which give graduate credit when taken 
by a graduate student. (Note limitations in specific graduate programs.) 

500-599 Graduate courses organized primarily for graduate students.* 

700-799 Graduate professional courses in the postgraduate program, not applicable to graduate 
degrees. 


* Note exceptions on page 57. 


M6— 1 11 470 


Independent Study 93 

DEPARTMENTAL COURSE NUMBERING CODE 

Because of the differences in the organization and content of the various disciplines and professions, 
there is no uniform, reasonable way of numbering courses that would be equally useful for all fields 
of knowledge. Some of the departments explain the logic of their own course numbering system in 
this catalog. 

In general It may be assumed that increases in class (freshman, sophomore, junior, senior, or 
graduate) and certainly division level (lower, upper, graduate) correlate with more difficult and 
challenging academic work. Sometimes, however, disciplines organize their course numbering partly 
In terms of criteria other than degree of difficulty: e.g. anthropology numbers its area courses In the 
3(X)'s and its theoretical or institutional courses in the 4(X)'s. It should be noted, too, that some 
students find introductory courses to be more demanding than advanced, specialized courses: in 
such courses, a more comprehensive approach and the first exposure to new ways of thinking may 
be harder for some individuals than covering a smaller, more familiar area, in much greater detail. 

SPECIAL COURSE NUMBERS 

For uniformity, certain types of courses have been listed by all departments and schools with the 
same numbers: 499 and 599 are used for undergraduate and graduate "independent study"; 196 or 
496 for "student-to-student tutorials"; 597 for a graduate "project"; and 598 for a graduate "thesis." 
The course numbers for senior seminars are not so uniform but they tend to be numbered 485, 490, 
491, or 495. 

EXPLANATION OF COURSE NOTATIONS 

Certain notations are uniformly used in the course descriptions in the catalog. 

1 . The figure in parentheses following the course title indicates the number of semester units for the 
course. Courses offered for varying units are indicated as (1-3) or (3-6). 

2. A course description such as Anthropology 453 (3) (Same as Geography 453) indicates that: the 
same course Is "cross-listed" by both departments, i.e. a student can choose to take the course 
and count it as either an anthropology ora geography course; the complete course description 
will be found with the geography courses; and probably the instructor will be a member of the 
Geography Department. For this same cross-listed course, the Geography Department will indi- 
cate after the course description "(Same as Anthropology 453)." 

3. A notation such as (Formerly 433) following the course title and the number of units Indicates 
the same course previously was numbered 433. 

PREREQUISITES 

Students are expected to meet stated prerequisites for all courses. However, in exceptional cases, 
and at the discretion of the division in which the course is taught, students may be allowed to meet 
prerequisites by examination. 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Under the Independent study program, the upper division student can pursue topics or problems 
of special interest beyond the scope of a regular course under the supervision of a faculty adviser. 
The work is of a research or creative nature, and normally culminates in a paper, project, compre- 
hensive examination, or performance. Before registering, the student must get his topic approved 
by the professor who will be supervising independent study. The catalog numbers for Independent 
study in departments are 499 and 599. Independent study courses may be repeated. A student 
wishing to enroll in more than six units of independent study in any one semester must have the 
approval of his major adviser and of the chairman of the department (s) in which the Independent 
study is to be conducted. 

international study courses 

Cal State Fullerton students under the California State University and Colleges International Study 
Programs register concurrently at Cal State Fullerton and at the host institution abroad, with credits 


3S0-1 II 400 


94 StudenMo-Student Tutorials 


assigned to the student which are equivalent to courses offered at Cal State Fullerton. Undergraduate 
students who discover appropriate study opportunities at the host institution but no equivalent 
course at Cal State Fullerton may use Independent Study 499 and International Study 292 or 492. 
Graduate students may use Independent Graduate Research 599 and International Study 592. 

292 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-6 lower division units) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of the California State University and 
Colleges. 

492 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 upper division units; maximum 12) 

Open to students enrolled in California State University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken in a university abroad under the auspices of the California State University and 
Colleges. 

592 Projects in Study Abroad (Subject): (1-3 graduate units; maximum 12) 

Open to students enrolled In the California University and Colleges International Programs. Study 
undertaken In a university abroad under the auspices of the California State University and 
Colleges. 

GRADUATE STUDIES 700 

A credit/no credit course with no (0) units of credit, which is designed to ensure continuous 
registration for those graduate students with an advanced degree objective who find that they are 
unable to enroll In regularly offered coursework. This course does not require class attendance. 
Permission to register in Graduate Studies 700 must be given by appropriate university authorities. 
A student may not register in Graduate Studies 700 for a third consecutive semester. 

Students are reminded that units In a 700-level course may not be applied toward fulfillment of 
requirements for an advanced degree. 

STUDENT-TO-STUDENT TUTORIALS 

The university has begun a program of experimentation with and development of "student-to- 
student tutorials." One of the fastest and profoundest ways to learn is to teach. The "student-to- 
student tutorial" will provide a formal way to encourage students to learn through teaching. It will 
expand significantly the opportunities for students to have meaningful experiences as teachers. At 
the same time, It greatly will increase the amount of tutoring available and will extend tutoring to 
all of the kinds of students who need and want tutorial assistance. 

Students electing to be tutors not only will increase their mastery of particular subject matters but 
also will have practice In developing their communication, cooperation and interpersonal relation- 
ship skills. Most important adult roles and jobs also involve a teaching dimension and the tutorial 
experience will provide opportunities to develop awareness of teaching problems and competence 
in teaching techniques. 

Each department will decide whether or not It wishes to offer this course. Departments choosing 
to offer the student-to-student tutorial course will follow the rules listed In the following course 
description. 

The course number will be 196 or 496, and one to three units of credit can be given for each course. 
Prerequisites: A 3.0 or more grade-point average and/or consent of instructor and simultaneous 
enrollment in the course or previous enrollment In a similar course or Its equivalent. The tutor and 
his tutee or tutees will work In mutually advantageous ways by allowing all involved to delve more 
carefully and thoroughly Into the materials presented In this specific course. One to three students 
may be tutored by the tutor unless the instructor decides that special circumstances warrant Increas- 
ing the usual maximum of three tutees. Three hours of work are expected for each unit of credit, 
and this work may Include, apart from contact hours with tutees, such other activities as: tutorial 
preparations; consulting with instructors; reporting, analysis and evaluation of the tutorial experi- 
ences; and participation in an all-university orientation and evaluation program for tutors. A max- 
imum of three units can be taken each semester and nine units of any combination of 196 and 496 
for an undergraduate program. This course must be taken as an elective and not counted toward 
general education, major or minor requirements. The course can be taken on a credit/ no credit basis 
by the tutor. Requests for tutors must be initiated by tutees and can be initiated up until the official 
university date for dropping a class with a W. Tutors electing to respond to such requests will receive 
credits at the end of the semester and can register in the course until the official university date for 


3S6-1 11 sao 


Student-to-Student Tutorials 95 


dropping a class with a W. Both tutors and tutees must submit written reports, analyses and 
evaluations of their shared tutorial experience, and both must participate in an all-university orienta- 
tion program as well as in any conferences or critiques that the instructor of the course may require. 
Further information can be obtained from the department in which the student is interested In 
"student-to-student tutorials." 


356-1 11 520 



THE ARTS 


3S»-1 11 SOS 











99 


SCHOOL OF THE ARTS 

Dean: J. Justin Gray 


DEPARTMENT OF ART 

FACULTY 
Gerald Samuelson 
Department Chairman 

Alvin Ching, Robert Camming, Darryl Curran, Naomi Dietz, Henry Evjenth, Robert Ewing, Dextra 
Frankel, Carmel Goode, Raymond Hein, Thomas Holste, George James, G. Ray Kerciu, Thomas 
Klobe, Donald Lagerberg, Michael Lee, Clinton MacKenzIe, John Olsen, Robert Partin, Jerry 
Rothman, David Sanford, Victor Smith, Jon Stokesbary, Howard Warner 
The Department of Art offers a program which includes the several fields of art history, theory and 
appreciation; drawing, painting, sculpture; design and crafts; and art education. The broadest objec- 
tive of the program is to contribute to the intellectual, social, and creative development of the student 
as he prepares for citizenship in a democratic society. More specifically, the art program provides 
opportunities for students: ( 1 ) to develop a knowledge and understanding of those general principles 
of visual organization and expression basic to all forms and fields of art; (2) to develop a critical 
appreciation and understanding of historical and contemporary art forms through a study of these 
principles as they relate to the range of artistic production of mankind; (3) to use these general 
principles as a means to express more clearly their ideas, thoughts, and feelings In the creation of 
visual forms; (4) to develop those understandings and skills needed to pursue graduate studies in 
the field, to teach art In the schools, or to qualify for a position in business and industry as an art 
specialist. 

Undergraduate curricula leading to the bachelor of arts degree have been designed to meet the 
specialized needs of the following groups: (1 ) students who wish to study art as an essential part 
of their personal and cultural development; (2) students seeking preprofessional preparation In art; 
and (3) students planning to teach art in grades K-12. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree with a major in art, students must have a C average In all 
courses required for the degree. No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major 
courses in which a grade of D is obtained. As is customary, the Art Department reserves the right 
to hold projects completed by a student for class credit for a period of three years. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART 

Three course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students 
working for the bachelor of arts degree with a major In art. 

In the development of specific course offerings which make up these programs, it has been the 
concern of the art faculty to see that each program contains: (1 ) basic courses in art history, theory, 
appreciation, and studio practice which have as their primary focus the study of those general 
principles of visual organization and expression underlying all fields of art: (2) more specialized 
courses which provide for adequate preparation in depth In a single field of art. The teaching of art 
history, theory, and criticism is not confined to courses bearing that title. Rather, each studio course 
involves theory as well as the practice of art. Includes as part of its content the study and reference 
to related historical art forms, and has as part of its purpose the development of those critical abilities 
which are necessary to a valid evaluation and appreciation of the art expressions of man. 

Plan I provides for an emphasis in the area of art history, theory, and appreciation and Is particularly 
recommended for those students who wish to pursue graduate studies in art history or museology. 
Plan II is designed for those students who prefer a studio-type program with a preprofessional 
orientation and an area of specialization selected from the following: (1 ) drawing and painting; (2) 
Printmaking; (3) sculpture; (4) crafts; (5) ceramics; (6) graphic design; (7) Illustration; (8) environ- 
mental design; or (9) creative photography. 

Plan III Is for those students who wish to meet the requirements for single subject instruction (Ryan 
Act) for teaching art in grades K-12. 

Plans I and II require a minimum of 60 units in art or approved related courses with a minimum of 


100 Art 


30 units of upper division in art. Plan III requires a minimum of 55 units of art including a minimum 
of 31 units of upper division art. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree (see page 67) . Students following Plan III also must meet 
any specific requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of 
Education). 


PLAN I: ART HISTORY EMPHASIS Units 

Preparation for the Major: Art history 201 A,B (6 units) ; 6 units of studio courses; approved 
electives (12 units) in art, anthropology, drama, foreign languages, history, literature, 

music or philosophy 24 

The Major: Art history (36 units) including one course from each of the following six 
groups: 301-302; 411-412; 421-422; 431-432; 451-452; 461-462-471; six courses in not 
more than three of the above groupings and three courses (9 units) of approved 

electives 36 

Reading knowledge of one modern foreign language 


PLAN II: STUDIO EMPHASIS 


Drawing and Painting 

Preparation for the Major: 201 A, B; 107A,B; 103; 104; 117A,B,C; 207 A, B; and 3 units 

of electives. (Recommended electives: Art 21 6A or 247A) 30 

The Major: Art 307 A,B; 31 7A,B; 487A,B or C (6 units); 6 units of upper division art history; 

and 6 units of electives in art 30 

Printmaking 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B, 107A,B, 247, 117A,B,C, 103, 104 and 6 units of 

electives 30 

The Major: 6 units of upper division art history, Art 347 A,B, 487D (6 units), 307 A, 31 7A 

and 6 units of electives in art 30 

Sculpture 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A,B, 107 A,B, 103, 104, 216A,B, 117A,B,C, and 205A 30 

The Major: 6 units of upper division art history. Art 316A,B, 486 (6 units), 336A,B, and 

6 units of electives in art 30 

Crafts 

Preparation for the Major: An 201 A, B, 123A, 107A,B, 103, 104, 205A and 6 units selected 

from Art 106A, 205B, 21 6A or 1 17A,B,C 30 

The Major — General Concentration: 6 units of upper division art history. Art 305 A, 31 5 A, 

325A, 355A or 365A and 12 units selected from Art 305B, 31 5B, 31 6A, 325B, 338A, 

485A, 485B, 485C or 485D or 485E 30 

The Major— jewelry /Metalsmithing Concentration: 6 units of upper division art history. 

Art 305A, 315A,B, 325A,B, 3 units selected from Art 305B, 355A, 365A or 338A and 

6 units selected from Art 485A or 485C 30 

The Major — Textile Concentration: 6 units of upper division art history. Art 355A,B, 

365A,B, 6 units selected from 355B, 365B, 485D, or 485E and 6 units of electives in 

art 30 

Ceramics 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201A,B, 107 A,B, 103, 104, 106A,B, 117A,B,C and 3 units 

of electives 30 

The Major: 6 units of upper division art history. Art 306A,B, 484 (6 units), 406A,B and 

6 units of electives in art 30 

Graphic Design 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201 A, B, 107 A,B, 103, 104, 123A, 117A,C,D, 223A,B 30 

The Mayor 6 units of upper division art history. Art 323A,B, 483A (6 units), 338A, 317A, 

363A, 3 units selected from Art 338B, 31 7B or 363B and 6 units of electives in art 30 


367—1 11 575 


Art 101 

Illustration Units 

Preparation for the Major: Art 201A,B, 107A,B, 103, 104, 123A,B, 117A,C,D, 223B 30 

The Major: bun\\s of upper division art history. Art 363 A, B, 483C (6 units), 317A,B, 323 A, 

3 units selected from Art 338A, 307 A, 487B 30 

Environmental Design 

Preparation for the Major: Kx\ 201 A,B, 107A,B, 103, 104, 123B, 213A,B and 3 units of art 

electives 30 

The Major — Interior Space Planning Concentration: 6 units of upper division art history. 

Art 313A,B, 483B (6 units), 453A and 10 units selected from Art 323A, 333A,B, 355A, 

363A, 365A, 453B, 483D 30 

The Major — Environmental Design Concentration: 6 units of upper division art history. Art 

333A,B, 483C (6 units), 323A, 453A,B, and 3 units of electives in art 30 

Creative Photography 

Preparation for the Major: 201 A, B, 103, 104, 107A,B, 117A,C,D, 247A and 6 units of 

electives 30 

The Major: 6 units of upper division art history. Art 338A,B, 489 (6 units), 347A and 9 

units selected from 323A, 363A, 307A or 347B 30 

PLAN III: TEACHING EMPHASIS 

Single Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 
(Qualifies for teaching Art in grades K-12) 

Preparation for the Major: Art 103, 104, 107A,B, 117A,B,C, 201 A, B and 205 A 24 

The Major: Art 305A, 310A,B, 323A, 338A, 380, 412, 441 and 7 units of electives in art 31 

Professional Preparation: 

Art Ed 442 4 

Education coursework 5 

Student teaching (one semester full time) 15 

Program requirements: 


1. Assignment by the Art Department chairman to a faculty adviser in art education. 

2. Fulfill credential requirements listed in this catalog within the School of Education for the 
curriculum pertinent to the Ryan Act provisions. 

3. Meet the requirements listed under Plan III, Teaching Emphasis for the bachelor's degree in 
art. 

4. Completion of major and education course requirements prior to enrolling In student teaching. 

5. Art 380, 441, and Art Ed 442 are recommended for concurrent enrollment in the semester just 
prior to student teaching. 

6. Admission to teacher education through the School of Education is required prior to enrollment 
In Art Ed 442 and student teaching. 

7. Acceptance for student teaching is based on candidate quotas, a review of a candidate's 
portfolio of art work, and evidence of success in university coursework completed. 

8. Recommendation by the faculty adviser in art education. 

Upon completion of the above program and the bachelor of arts degree, the student Is eligible for 
a partial credential, which meets state requirements for teaching in grades K-12. Within a specified 
period of time from the beginning of a teaching assignment, 30 units of coursework must be 
completed at an accredited college or university to qualify for a full credential. Credentials are issued 
from the institution where this unit requirement has been completed. 

Fifth Year Credential Program: Units 

This program is designed to meet the 30 unit Ryan Act requirement for the full credential 
authorizing single subject instruction in grades K-12. Emphasis is placed on an in- 
depth program in one of three possible course options. 

Drawing and Painting Option: Art 207 A,B, 307 A,B, 317A,B, 347 A, 487 and 6 units of 


adviser-approved electives in art 30 

Crafts and General Art Option: Art 106A,B, 21 6A, 307 A,B, 31 5A, 330, 347A and 6 units 

of adviser-approved electives in art 30 

^^otography and General Art Option: AxX 307A,B, 31 7A, 330B, 443A,B, 489 (6 units) and 

6 units of adviser-approved electives in art 30 


371—1 11 wo 


102 Art 


Multiple Subject Instruction — Ryan Act 

The following three courses are recommended for all students intending to teach in the elementary 
schools in multiple subject classrooms: 

Units 


Art 380 3 

Music 333 3 

Theatre 402 3 


9 

The following additional list of courses would be strongly recommended for any student who wishes 
to expand his knowledge in any or all of the arts: 

Art 100, 101, 103, 104, 107 A, 201 A, B, 310A,B, 320, 330, 340, and 380 
Dance 135A,B 

Music 111A,B, 184A,B, 251, 281A,C,E,C, 283A, 381 A,B, 435 
Theatre 100A,B, 211, 263A, 276A, 277, 370A,B, 402, 403, 41 1C 

MINOR IN ART FOR THE BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

A minimum of 24 units is required for a minor in art for the bachelor of arts degree of which a 
minimum of 10 units must be in upper division courses. Included in the program must be a basic 
course in each of the following areas: (1 ) art history and appreciation; (2) design; (3) drawing and 
painting; and (4) crafts. Those students planning to qualify for a standard teaching credential with 
specialization in elementary or secondary teaching and art for a minor must obtain approval from 
the Art Department for the courses selected to meet the upper division requirements for a minor 
in art. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ART 

The program of studies leading to the master of arts degree in art provides a balance of theory and 
practice for those who desire to teach art or wish to develop a sound basis for continued advanced 
work in this field. The program offers each student the opportunity to expand his intellectual and 
technical resources and to acquire greater richness and depth in terms of creative understanding and 
achievement in one of the following areas of concentration: (1) drawing and painting (including 
printmaking); (2) crafts (including ceramics); (3) design; and (4) sculpture. 

Prerequisites for the Program 
Prerequisites to the program include: 

1. An undergraduate major in art or 24 units of upper division art including at least 12 units of 
upper division study in the elected area of concentration with a GPA of 3.0 or better; 

2. Portfolio review — before any units may apply to the approved study program for the degree, 
the student must arrange for a faculty committee evaluation of the student's background, 
including a statement of purpose by the student, and review of creative work. Portfolio review 
dates are May 1 for the following fall semester, and December 1 for the following spring 
semester of each year. Arrangements may be made through the Art Office to meet these 
deadlines. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the student's graduate commit- 
tee of which 15 must be 500-level courses. The 30 units are distributed as follows: 


Units 

1. 5(X)-level courses in art 15-21 

A. Core courses in art, history, philosophy, analysis and criticism (9) 

Art 5(X)A, Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Art 500B, Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Art 481, Special Studies in Art History, or substitute of a 400-level art 

history course or Philosophy 311, Aesthetics, on the recommendation 
of the major adviser (3) 

B. Coursework in the area of concentration selected from one of the follow- 

ing areas: drawing and painting; crafts; design; sculpture (6) 


3a>-l 11 640 


Art 


103 


C. Project or thesis (3-6) Units 

2. Additional courses 9-12 

A. 500- and/or 400-level courses in art to extend the student's field in depth (6) 

B. 500-, 400- and/or 300-level courses, either in courses outside the Art 

Department and related to the student's special area of interest, or in 
courses within the Art Department but outside the area of concentra- 
tion, to expand the student's field in breadth (3-6) 


Total 30 


All courses must be completed with a B average, and all courses in the area of concentration must 
be graded B or better. The Department of Art requires the candidate for the Master of Arts in Art 
degree to exhibit his or her project in the department upon completion of the Master of Arts in Art 
degree and the art faculty reserves the right to retain an example from the student's master's exhibit 
for the university collection. 

For further information, consult the Department of Art. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ART COURSES 

100 Exploratory Course in Art (3) 

Exploration and creative use of a variety of art materials, processes, and concepts. Field trips 
required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of the Art Department. (6 hours 
activity) 

101 Introduction to Art (3) 

A course for the general student designed to develop an understanding of historical and contempo- 
rary art forms. Illustrated with examples of painting, sculpture, architecture, and design. Field trips 
required. Not open to art majors for credit except by permission of the Art Department. 

103 Two-dimensional Design (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as related to a two- 
dimensional surface. (6 hours activity) 

104 Three-dimensional Design (3) 

The inventive use of materials, tools, and elements of plastic organization as related to three- 
dimensional form. (6 hours activity) 

106A,B Beginning Ceramics (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A basic course in the study of form as related to ceramic materials, tools, 
processes, and concepts. (6 hours activity) 

107 A,B Beginning Drawing and Painting (3,3) 

Beginning work In the creative use of the materials of drawing and painting with emphasis on visual 
concepts, use of medium, individual exploration, and growth, planning and craftsmanship. 107A 
emphasizes drawing; 107B emphasizes painting. (9 hours laboratory) 

111 Fundamentals of Art (3) 

A comparative study of the elements of plastic organization in relation to personal and cultural 
aesthetic expression and concepts. Fundamental art Ideas, problems of organization and struc- 
ture, and terminology. Field trips required. 

117A,B,C Life Drawing (1,1,1) 

Drawing from the live model. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

123A,B Descriptive Drawing (3,3) 

An intensive study of traditional and contemporary drawing techniques and theories. Emphasis in 
123A on representation of nature forms and in 123B on manmade and mechanical forms Includ- 
ing linear perspective. (9 hours laboratory) 

201 A,B Art and Civilization (3,3) 

A comparative survey of the basic ideas, forms, and styles of the visual arts as they developed In 
various cultures from prehistoric time to the present day. 

205A Beginning Crafts (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of craft 
concepts, processes and materials as they relate to the development of aesthetic forms based 
on function. (6 hours activity) 


3ffi— 1 12 29 


104 Art 


205B Beginning Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. Art 104 may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of 
woodworking concepts and processes as they relate to the development of wood Into aesthetic 
form based on function. (6 hours activity) 

207 A, B Drawing and Painting (Experimental Methods and Materials) (3^) 

Prerequisites: Art 117A,B, Art 107A,B or the equivalents. An intensive study of traditional and 
contemporary methods and materials as they relate to current approaches in drawing and 
painting. (9 hours laboratory) 

213A,B Beginning Interior Design (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104 or equivalents, and Art 123B. An introduction to design theory and 
communication skills related to the Interior design field. A — Emphasis on architectural terminol- 
ogy, plans and elevations, and graphic symbols. B — Emphasis on material analysis and lighting. 
(6 hours activity) 

216A,B Beginning Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 104. An introductory course in sculpture with emphasis on the creative use of wood 
and metal, power equipment and hand tools. (6 hours activity) 

223A,B Lettering, Typography and Rendering (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 103. A study of the history, design and use of letter forms Including techniques for 
rough and comprehensive layouts and the use of both hand-lettered forms and handset type. 
(6 hours activity) 

247 Beginning Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 107A,B. An Introductory course of all printmaking forms to include litho, etching, 
woodcut and serigraphy. (6 hours activity) 

286 Design for the Theatre (3) 

(Same as Theatre 286) 

301 Ancient Art (3) 

A study of the developments in art from the Paleolithic to the period of late antiquity. 

302 Medieval Art (3) 

A study of the developments in art from the period of late antiquity through the Gothic. 

305A Advanced Crafts (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205A. Study and evaluation of craft concepts, processes, and materials as they relate 
to the development of utilitarian and aesthetic form. (9 hours laboratory) 

305B Advanced Crafts: Wood (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 205B. A study and evaluation of craft concepts and processes as they relate to the 
development of wood into utilitarian and aesthetic form. (9 hours laboratory) 

306A,B Advanced Ceramics (33) 

Prerequisite: Art 106A,B. Further experiences In the study and evaluation of form as related to the 
creative use of ceramic concepts and materials including design, forming, glazing, and firing. (6 
hours activity) 

307 A,B Drawing and Painting (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 117A,B,C, 107A,B, 207 A,B or equivalents. The study, evaluation and creative use 
of the concepts and materials of drawing and painting with emphasis on Individual exploration, 
growth, planning and craftsmanship. (9 hours laboratory) 

310A,B Drawing and Painting: Techniques and Approaches for the Classroom Teacher 
(33) 

Prerequisite: Art 100. The study and development of painting and drawing materials and approaches 
as they relate to elementary and secondary education. (6 hours activity) 

313A Interior Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 123A,B. Aesthetic and economic considerations involved In the visual 
organization of the environment in relation to human needs with emphasis on Interior space 
planning. (6 hours activity) 

313B Interior Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 313A. Aesthetic and economic considerations Involved in the visual organization 
of the environment in relation to human needs with emphasis on professional practice Including 
material analysis and business procedures. (6 hours activity) 

315A,B Jewelry (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. Design and creation of 
jewelry. (9 hours laboratory) 


aOB-l 12 4S 


Art 105 


316A,B Sculpture (33) 

Prerequisites: Art 104 and 21 6A. (9 hours laboratory) 

317A,B Advanced Life Drawing (3,3) 

Prerequisite: three units lower division life drawing. Drawing and painting from the live model. (9 
hours laboratory) 

320 Paper: Structural and Decorative Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 104. An exploration of the structural and decorative aspects of construc- 
tion with paper, emphasizing three-dimensional design. Such techniques as papier mache, paper 
sculpture, paper folding and pap>er applique will be considered through a variety of paper 
surfaces. (6 hours activity) 

323A,B Graphic Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103 and 223A. Development and projection of ideas In relation to the technical, 
aesthetic, and psychological aspects of advertising art. (6 hours activity) 

325A,B Metaismithing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 205A and 305A. Art 305A may be taken concurrently. A study and evaluation of 
fundamental metaismithing concepts, processes and materials as they relate to the aesthetic 
development of utilitarian forms, raising, silversoldering, forging, casting, engraving, chasing and 
repousse'! (9 hours laboratory) 

326A,B Ceramic Sculpture (3,3) 

Development of basic ceramic technology Into Individual sculptural forms and techniques. (6 hours 
activity) 

329A,B Art and Technology (3,3) 

Creative activity in the context of modern technology. (9 hours laboratory) 

330 Textile Design: Threads and Fibers, Non-woven Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or 205A or B, or consent of instructor. Concepts and processes of design 
as they relate to non-loomed structures, to include macrame, crochet, stitchery and knitting. (6 
hours activity) 

333A,B Environmental Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 and 123A,B. Planning and designing of projects in relation to the techno- 
logical, psychological and social aspects of contemporary society. (6 hours activity) 

336A,B Casting Techniques and Theories of Cast Sculpture (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Art 31 6A. Projects in various waxing molding and metal casting techniques. Media with 
emphasis on aluminum and bronze and the lost wax process. (9 hours laboratory) 

338A Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 103 or Its equivalent. Exploration of the photographic media as a means of personal 
expression. Historical attitudes and processes are discussed in relationship to new materials and 
contemporary aesthetic trends. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

338B Creative Photography (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A. Further exploration of the photographic medium as a means of personal 
expression. Historical and new processes introduced as a vehicle toward the individual student's 
personal goal. Field trips required. (9 hours laboratory) 

340 Ceramics: Techniques for the Classroom Teacher (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 100. Beginning work in the creative use of hand building processes, and glazing of 
ceramic ware. Related Information on decorating processes, drying and firing kilns as they apply 
to appropriate teaching levels. Historical development of ceramics as it relates to various cultures. 

341 Art of India (3) (Formerly 441) 

A study of the art of India and its impact on the cultures of Southeast Asia, with an emphasis on 
Buddhist and Hindu monuments. Schools of miniature painting and the art of Muslim India 
included. 

347A Printmaking (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 247, and 1 17A,B,C. Development of concepts and exploration of materials 
involved In printmaking including etching, woodcut, aquatint, monoprint and serigraphy. (9 
hours laboratory) 

347B Printmaking — Lithography (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 107A,B, 247, and 1 1 7A,B,C. Development of concepts and exploration of materials 
and techniques Involved in lithography printing. (9 hours laboratory) 


303-1 U 65 


106 Art 


350A,B Painting for Non-Art Majors (3,3) 

Opportunities for students with little or no background in art to work creatively with various painting 
media both indoors and outdoors. Not open to art majors. (9 hours laboratory) 

355A,B Textile Design and Construction: Fabric Printing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107A or B or consent of instructor. Concepts and processes of design as they 
relate to fabric surfaces with emphasis on various printing and dyeing techniques. (6 hours 
activity) 

360 Elementary School Crafts (2) 

Studio activities and techniques of crafts appropriate to the elementary school. Strongly recommend- 
ed for elementary teaching credential candidates. (4 hours activity) 

363A,B Illustration (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 107 A,B and 117A,B,C. Development and projection of ideas relative to the 
needs of story, book, and magazine, and film illustration. (6 hours activity) 

365A,B Textile Design and Construction: Weaving (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, Art 104 or 205A,B or consent of instructor. Concepts and processes of design 
as they relate to fabric construction with emphasis on various weaving techniques. (6 hours 
activity) 

380 Art and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 100 or equivalent. The study and evaluation of art concepts, materials, and 
processes as they relate to and promote child development. (6 hours activity) 

401A,B Criticism of the Arts (3,3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts. Other majors by consent of 
instructor. 401 A is prerequisite to 401 B except by consent of instructor. Criticism which in the 
first semester will develop criteria and vocabulary applicable to criticism in the visual and 
performing arts through lectures, readings, discussions, and attendance at exhibits and perfor- 
mances. Emphasis on oral and written skills In the communication of artistic concepts and critical 
evaluations. Second semester emphasizes practical aspects of writing newspaper reviews and 
speculative essays based on musical concerts, dramatic productions, and exhibits of visual arts. 

406A,B Ceramic Analysis (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A,B and 306A. An introduction to the physical and chemical aspects of ceramic 
materials. Study and evaluation of ceramic materials as they are related to the development of 
the ceramic art form. (6 hours activity) 

411 Foundations of Modern Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting and sculpture of the Realism, Impressionism, Post Impressionism periods. 

412 Art of the 20th Century— 1900 to Present (3) 

Fundamentals of modern painting, graphics and architecture. 

421 Oriental Art: China (3) 

A study of the historical development of the arts of China and their relation to Chinese philosophy 
and culture. 

422 Oriental Art: Japan (3) 

A study of the historical development of the arts of Japan and their relation to Japanese philosophy 
and culture. 

426 Glass Forming (3) 

Prerequisites: Art 106A,B, 306A, and consent of instructor. A course in the chemistry, handling and 
manipulation of glass and its related tools and equipment for the ceramic artist. (6 hours activity) 

431 Renaissance Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Renaissance period. Lectures, discus- 
sion and field trips. 

432 Baroque and Rococo Art (3) 

Basic problems of painting, sculpture and architecture of the Baroque and Rococo period. Lectures, 
discussion and field trips. 

441 Studio Problems in Secondary Art Education (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in art or consent of instructor. Advanced individual studio problems 
with projects related to specific learning experiences in Art Education at the secondary school 
level. (6 hours activity) 

443A,B Film Making (3,3) 

Development of film as a visual art form. 


401—1 12 lOS 



mi 



Art 109 


451 Oceanic Art (3) 

An introductory survey of the styles of the aboriginal people of the following regions: Australia, 
Melanesia, Micronesia, Polynesia and Indonesia. 

452 Art of Sub-Saharan Africa (3) 

An introduction by region and tribal group to the art forms of West Coastal Africa and the Sudan, 
Niger River kingdoms, Yoruba kingdoms, Cameroon chieftainships. Congo tribes. Central Africa 
and East Coastal Africa. 

453A,B Display and Exhibition Design (2,2) 

A course in the appropriate and creative use of materials, processes, and design concepts as they 
relate to the sjaecial problems involved in the planning and preparing of displays, exhibits, bulletin 
boards, wall cases, and art portfolios. (More than 6 hours laboratory) 

461 Art of North American Indian (3) 

An introduction to the art forms and style groupings of the following American Indian groups: Eskimo, 
Pacific Northwest, California, Eastern Woodlands, Mound Builders, Southwestern and Northern 
Mexico. 

462 Art of Mesoamerica (3) 

An introduction to the art and architectural forms of Mesoamerica from the early, formative stages 
to the Spanish Conquest. 

471 Art of Central and South America (3) 

An introduction to the art styles and cultural regions of Central America and South America. 

481 Special Studies in Art History (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Opportunities for intensive study and evaluation in one area of 
art history and appreciation. 

483 Special Studies in Design (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the design areas listed below. 
Each area listed may be repeated to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than 3 units of credit 
may be obtained in any one area in a single semester. 

483a Graphic Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483b Interior Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483c Design and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

483d Display Design (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

483f Film Making (2 hours activity for each unit) 

484 Special Studies in Ceramics (1-3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in ceramics. Course may be repeated to a 
maximum of 12 units, but not more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area 
in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485 Special Studies in Crafts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units in designated area or consent of instructor. 
Opportunity for intensive study in the craft areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated 
to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one 
area in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

485a Jewelry 
485b General Crafts 
485c Metalsmithing 

485d Textile Design — Weaving, Threads and Fibers 
485e Textile Design — Fabric Printing 

486 Special Studies in Sculpture (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Art 316A,B and consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study in the following 
sculptural processes. May be repeated to a maximum of 1 2 units but no more than three units 
of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

486a Modeling and Fabrication 


406— 1 12 12S 


110 Art 

486b Casting 

487 Special Studies in Drawing and Painting and Printmaking (1-3) 

Prerequisite: a minimum of six upper division units and consent of instructor. Opportunity for 
intensive study in the drawing and painting areas listed below. Each area listed may be repeated 
to a maximum of 12 units, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one 
area in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 


487a 

Painting 

487b 

Life Drawing 

487c 

Drawing 

487d 

Printmaking 

488A,B 

Advanced Scene Design (3^) 


(Same as Theatre 488A,B) 

489 Special Studies in Creative Photography (1-3) 

Prerequisite: Art 338A,B. Advanced projects in photography as a means of personal expression. May 
be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained 
in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each unit) 

500A Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Selected advanced problems and issues in art. Emphasis is on intellectual clarification and verbal 
articulation of individual intent as an artist. Each student will develop oral and written material 
in support of his master's project. 

5008 Graduate Seminar in Major Field (3) 

Prerequisite: Art 5(X)A. Directed research in the area of major emphasis. Each student will develop 
oral and written material on historical backgrounds and developments in art as they relate to his 
intent as an artist (stated in Art 500A) and in support of his master's project. 

502 Seminar in Contemporary Art (3) 

Selected advanced problems and directed research in relation to the contemporary art form. 

503 Graduate Problems in Design (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in the design areas listed below. May be repeated to a maximum 
of 12 units in each area, but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in any one area 
in a single semester. 

503a Graphic Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503b Interior Design (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503c Design and Composition (2 hours activity for each unit) 

503d Display Design (More than 3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

503f Film Making (2 hours activity for each unit) 

504 Graduate Problems in Ceramics (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development and 
evaluation of individual projects in ceramics. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no 
more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for each 
unit) 

505 Graduate Problems in Crafts (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of individual projects in the crafts areas listed below. May be repeated to a maximum 
of 1 2 units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours 
activity for each unit) 

505a Jewelry 
505b General Crafts 
505c Metalsmithing 

505d Textile Design — Weaving-Threads and Fibers 
505e Textile Design — Fabric Printing 


«»— 1 U 145 


Art 111 


506 Graduate Problems in Sculpture (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive study with emphasis on planning, development, and 
evaluation of Individual projects in sculpture. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but 
no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (2 hours activity for 
each unit) 

507 Graduate Problems in Drawing and Painting (1-3) 

Prerequisite: 12 units of upper division drawing and painting. Intensive study with emphasis on 
planning, development, and evaluation of individual projects in the drawing and painting areas 
listed below. May be repeated to a maximum of 12 units but no more than three units of credit 
may be obtained in a single semester. (3 hours laboratory for each unit) 

507a Painting 
507b Life Drawing 
507c Drawing 
507d Printmaking 

597 Project (3-6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A and 500B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student's 
graduate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 597 on approval of Instructor. 
Development and presentation of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond regularly 
offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisites: Art 500A and 500B, written consent of instructor and recommendation of the student's 
graduate committee. Art 500B may be taken concurrently with Art 598 on approval of instructor. 
Development and presentation of a thesis In the area of concentration beyond regularly offered 
coursework. No more than three units may be taken In any one semester. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in art with consent of department chairman and written consent of 
instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


ART EDUCATION COURSES 

332 Industrial Arts for Elementary Teachers (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 41 1 or consent of Instructor. Creative selection, organization and use of materials 
and tools in construction activities. Includes correlation experiences with the social studies, 
science, and other units of work. (4 hours activity) 

370A,B Art Activity (2,2) 

Opportunities to observe, analyze, and evaluate child growth in and through creative art experi- 
ences. (4 hours activity) 

429A,B Arts and Crafts for Teaching Exceptional Children (2,2) 

Methods of using a variety of art materials and processes with emphasis on those experiences which 
meet the needs of retarded or handicapped children. (4 hours activity) 

442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (4) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, admission to teacher education, senior standing or consent of 
instructor. See pages 197-198 under Secondary Education for description of standard teaching 
credential program. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruction for 
teaching art in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching of students presenting 
majors in art for the standard teaching credential. The student who has not had teaching 
experience must register concurrently in Educ 449. 

749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 206 for description and prerequisites. 


41»-1 12 160 


112 Dance 


DEPARTMENT OF DANCE 

FACULTY 
Frank Hatch 
Department Chairman 
Masami Kuni, Miriam Tait 

PART-TIME 
John Dougherty 

The program of studies in the Department of Dance provides training in each of the related aspects 
of dance such as its history, theory, composition (including space forming and choreography), and 
the technics of movement leading to dance performances and productions. The curriculum is 
designed in accordance with the following three objectives: (1 ) to prepare the student who wishes 
to enter dance as a profession, either in teaching, choreography, or performance; (2) to provide 
for the general university student the opportunity for a personal Involvement in dance as an art form 
and as a basic movement experience; (3) to offer curricular experiences in dance for the student 
who is majoring in fields of study that are closely related to dance such as art, music and theatre. 
A major in dance Is not offered at this time. Refer to the Department of Theatre which offers both 
the B.A. and M.A. degrees with areas of concentration in dance. 


DANCE COURSES 

101 Introduction to Dance (2) 

Historical and aesthetic approach to dance as an art form, to provide student with basic knowledge 
and aesthetic values in ballet, modern dance, educational dance, theatrical dance as well as 
ethnic dance. Field trips. 

105 Eurythmics for Teachers (1) 

Designed to teach and develop the rhythmic sense and ability of the students with the method of 
Eurythmics by Jaques Dalcroze and the rhythm-training method of Rudolf Bode. Recommended 
for students of dance, music, theatre and art as well as education. (2 hours activity) 

125A,B Improvisation (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 125A is prerequisite for Dance 125B. Theory and practice of improvisation in 
movement. The student will be taught to overcome inhibitions, to move freely and naturally and 
to improvise imaginatively in movement. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

135A,B Movement and Rhythm (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A is prerequisite for 135B. Designed to equip the student with higher kines- 
thetic and kinetic ability. Basic movement experience for dance, drama, art, music as well as the 
general student. (4 hours activity) 

140 Dance Activities (1) 

A physical activity experience in dance activities with a student in an educational setting and under 
the direction of an instructor who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. May be repeated for credit. 

210 Creative Dance for Children (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 and 135A,B. Designed not only for the student who is going to teach 
children how to create dance, but also for the student who is going to be a dance creator. Basic 
dance subjects in relation to the growth of children from 5 to 17 years of age. How to make a 
dance motif and how to compose simple dances. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

221A,B Fundamentals of Classic Ballet (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A,B, Movement and Rhythm. Fundamental structure and technique of 
classic ballet, based on Cecchetti method. Designed for students who aim to be professional 
performers or choreographers on stage, film and television. (4 hours activity) 

227A,B Space Forming in Dance (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A,B. 227A is prerequisite for 227B. Theory of space and principle of space 
forming to train students to understand spacial movement, so that they can master movement 
on stage, stage design and the basic skills of choreography. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 


42S— I IS 810 


Dance 113 


245A,B Mime and Pantomime (2,2) 

Prerequisite: 245A is prerequisite for 245B. Theory and practice of mime and pantomime for drama, 
dance and education (expression and gesture). Historical and contemporary knowledge and 
techniques with emphasis on individual development of creative skill In mime and pantomime. 
(4 hours activity) 

255 Jazz Dance (2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 101 and 135A,B. Designed to the basic rhythm of jazz and to equip the students 
with the technique of classic and modern jazz dances. (4 hours activity). 

311A,B Elements and Forms of Dance Composition (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A,B and 227A,B. 311 A is prerequisite to 31 IB. Basic forms and elements of 
dance composition will be offered; Simultaneous Symmetry, Alternate Symmetry, A-Symmetry, 
Simple Contrast, Compound Contrast, Balance and Unbalance, 4-units Rule, 6-units Rule, Rondo, 
Canon. Dances in which these rules must be applied will be composed by the student. (2 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

331 A,B Character Dance for Theatre (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A,B or consent of instructor. Basic Character Dances such as Mazurka, 
Czardas, Friska, Polonaise, Fandango, Tarantella, along with the Court Dances such as Minuet 
and Galllard. Forms and techniques as well as costume and accompanying music will be included 
In each character style. Designed for students who aim to be professional performers or choreog- 
raphers on stage, film and television, as well as for actors and directors of theatre. Helpful for 
schoolteachers who direct dance production and theatre production. (4 hours activity) 

335 Afro-American Dance (2) 

Study of primitive and tribal rhythm Including jazz and other derivational dances of Africa. (1 hour 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

358 Philosophy and Methodology of Educational Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 125A,B and Dance 311A,B or consent of Instructor. A short history of dance 
education; principles and objectives of modern educational dance and the methodology to meet 
these objectives; principle and structure of curriculum for educational dance. 

374A,B Dance Theatre and Production (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Dance 135A,B and 227A,B or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of creative and 
expressive movement in relation to the theatre and dance production. (More than 9 hours 
production) 

401A,B Criticism of the Arts (3,3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts. Other majors by consent of 
Instructor. 401 A Is prerequisite to 401 B except by consent of Instructor. Criticism which In the 
first semester will develop criteria and vocabulary applicable to criticism in the visual and 
performing arts through lectures, readings, dicussions, and attendance at exhibits and perfor- 
mances. Emphasis on oral and written skills in the communication of artistic concepts and critical 
evaluations. Second semester emphasizes the practical aspects of writing newspaper reviews and 
speculative essays based on musical concerts, dramatic productions, and exhibits of visual arts. 

437 Music for Dance (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 374A,B or consent of instructor. Designed to give knowledge and technique 
of accompanying dance. In order to be able to conceive or compose music (Including electronic 
music) for creating dance and dance drama; and to give knowledge and understanding of the 
structure and rhythm of dance and its relation to music for music students who are interested 
in composing music for dance. 

441 Seminar in Ethnic Dance as Culture Phenomena (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. A study of the mutual influence and relation between the religion, 
living form, habits and economical-political-geographical environment and dance form (includ- 
ing music and costume) of the major ethnic groups of the world. 

450 Creative Dance for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 135A,B and 358, or consent of instructor. Study and analysis of creative dance 
and its relation to dance education in elementary and secondary schools. Recommended for 
students of dance, theatre, music and art as well as practicing teachers. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours 
activity) 


114 


Music 


474 Special Studies in Dance Theatre Production (1-3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 374A,B or equivalent and consent of instructor. Opportunity for intensive study 
in theory and practice in dance theatre and production. May be repeated to a maximum of eight 
units but no more than three units of credit may be obtained in a single semester. (More than 
3 hours production per unit) 

476A,B History of Dance (3,3) 

History of dance from primitive times to the present. Covers development of dance in Europe, the 
Orient, Asia, America (including American Indian) in its general relation to culture history. 
477 Dance Aesthetics (3) 

Prerequisites: Dance 101 and 374A,B and/or consent of instructor. Philosophical as well as theoreti- 
cal knowledge of dance as an art form. A study of the processes of dance creation, movement 
and image; the problems of music accompaniment in dance, and dance as an art form of 
metaphysical beauty. 

482 Ethnic Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced preparation and/or experience in dance or consent of instructor. Theoretical 
and practical study of folk, square and social forms of dance in terms of cultural and environmen- 
tal influences (includes geography, music, costumes, customs. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

484 Contemporary Dance Technique (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 140, Dance 135A or equivalent. Study of theories, approaches, and techniques of 
contemporary dancers. Emphasis is on development of individual technique In dance. (2 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

486 Choreography (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 140, Dance USA or equivalent. Theoretical and creative aspects of choreography. 
Application and analysis of elements of choreographic form. Composition of solo and group 
dances. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Directed reading, reports, creation and performance according to predetermined arrangements with 
instructor and department chairman. 

585 Seminar in Educational Dance (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Discussion and analysis of principle, forms and methods of dance 
education in the world. Survey of the literature relating to dance education. 

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

FACULTY 
Leo Kreter 

Department Chairman 

David Berfield, Carole Chadwick, Andrew Charlton, Eugene Corporon, Hugh Ellison, John Farrer, 
Rita Fuszek, Kenneth Goldsmith, J. Justin Cray *, Burton Karson, Joseph Landon, Gary Maas, 
Donal Michalsky, Benton Minor, Jane Paul, Patricia Roycroft, Daniel Scott, Robert Stewart, 
Howard Swan, David Thorsen, Cary Unruh, Rodger Vaughan 

PART-TIME 

Naoum Benditzky (Violoncello), Kalman Bloch (Clarinet), Nina de Verltch (Violoncello), M'lou 
Dietzer (Piano), Bonnie Farrer (Piano), Pamela Goldsmith (Viola, History), Jay Crauer (String 
Bass), Su Harmon (Voice), Cornel Imry (Guitar), Todd Miller (French Horn, Percussion), 
Frederick Moritz (Bassoon), Donald Muggeridge (Oboe), Raymond Nowlin (Bassoon), Harvey 
Pittel (Saxophone), Dorothy Remsen (Harp), Leona Roberts (Voice), Michael Sells (Voice), 
Charles Shaffer (Organ), Dennis Smith (Trombone, Tuba), James Stamp (Trumpet), Susan 
Stockhammer (Flute), Earle Voorhies (Piano) 

The Department of Music offers courses in music for both majors and non-majors. The fundamental 
purpose of the music major curriculum leading toward the baccalaureate degree is to provide the 
necessary training in each of the related aspects of music such as Its history and literature, theoretical 
studies, and musical performance. Such a program of studies is based on the need to provide serious 
students with a core curriculum which will prepare the individual in such areas as (a) the knowledge 
of the history and relationships of music as an art form, (b) a comprehensive and analytical 
understanding of musical literature, (c) a working knowledge of music theory and structure, (d) 

* University administrative officer. 


434—1 IS 270 


Music 115 


a high degree of competence in a performing field, an (e) a specialization within the major. 

The music program is designed to educate: 

1 . Students in general, in terms of composite minors, music minors, or broad offerings in the 
humanities or liberal arts. 

2. Students preparing to teach in the elementary and/or secondary schools, with a major field 
concentration in music (special music teachers). 

3. Students preparing to teach in the elementary schools with a major field concentration in music 
(classroom teachers). 

4. Students preparing to teach in the community colleges and four-year colleges with a major field 
concentration in music. 

5. Students other than music majors preparing to teach as classroom teachers in the elementary 
schools. 

6. Students seeking undergraduate preparation for other vocations in music, normally requiring 
advanced training. 

REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

1 . Proficiency examinations In basic piano, voice, theory, literature and performance will be given 
to all music majors at the time of entrance to the university. Demonstrable proficiency in the 
piano and voice placement examinations will satisfy the requirement in piano and voice 
proficiency (see 5d and 7 following). Students deficient in any of the above areas will be 
advised to take additional work. 

2. Music majors will be expected to declare a principal performance area with the approval of 
the faculty adviser. It will be expected that each student will demonstrate satisfactory progress 
within this principal performance area, culminating in the successful presentation of a senior 
recital before he may be approved for graduation (see Mu 498). With the written approval 
of the coordinator of the principal performance area, the recital requirement may be fulfilled 
by conducting, composition, lecture, or any combination of these with performance. 

3. All music majors are required to participate in a major performance group (band, orchestra, 
opera or chorus) each semester of the regular school year (minimum: B.A. six semesters, B.M. 
eight semesters) . Students who declare wind or percussion as their principal performance area 
must register for band (and/or orchestra. If designated by the instrumental coordinator); string 
majors must register for orchestra; and voice majors must register for chorus (or opera if 
designated by the choral-vocal coordinator) . A music major whose principal performance area 
is piano or organ shall be assigned to an appropriate performance group by his faculty adviser. 

4. All music majors whose principal performance area Is an orchestral instrument or piano are 
expected to take part in small ensembles for a minimum of two semesters. 

5. The principal performance area for the major in music requires work In applied music, as 
follows: 

a. Piano, voice and instrumental majors must complete a minimum of eight semesters (six 
semesters B.A.) of applied music in the principal performance area. 

b. A composition major must complete eight units of applied music in a principal performance 
area. If he attains the 3(X)-level of competency before completing the maximum of eight units 
allotted for this study, he may use the remainder of these units as music electives. The 
composition major must also complete six units of composition culminating in the successful 
presentation of a senior recital of his own compositions. 

c. Choral or Instrumental conducting majors must complete a minimum of eight semesters (six 
semesters B.A.) of applied music in the principal performance area. In addition to a mini- 
mum of six units in conducting. 

d. All music majors will take the piano proficiency examination during the junior year. This 
requirement may also be satisfied by successful completion of Mu 282B. 

6. Senior transfer students entering Cal State Fullerton with a major in music, or graduate students 
in music entering to complete credential requirements are expected to complete a minimum 
of one semester of successful upper division work in music before they may be approved for 
directed teaching. Required courses and competencies expected of all the university music 
majors must be satisfied before endorsement by the faculty committee for acceptance in the 
credential program. 


43»-l It tss 


116 Music 


7. All credential candidates are required to pass functional examinations in piano and voice (in 
addition to the piano proficiency described in 5d above) before being approved for admittance 
to teacher education. This requirement may also be satisfied by successful completion of Mu 
382 and 283B. 

8. All music majors will be expected to attend a weekly departmental recital hour in conjunction 
with their study of applied music. 

9. Any exception to a departmental requirement must be made by petition. 

MUSIC DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The Department of Music offers a variety of courses and programs leading to baccalaureate and 
graduate degrees in teaching and the professions. The baccalaureate degree may be earned in two 
degree patterns. Within these patterns, a student will normally pursue an emphasis in applied music, 
composition, conducting, music education, pedagogy or music history, theory and literature. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC 

This degree is designed as a balanced program In music history, theory and literature providing 
suitable preparation for advanced degrees in theory, literature or musicology and basic preparation 
for advanced study in other fields, such as musical acoustics, music therapy, ethnomusicology, 
library science in music and music in industry and recreation. 

The Bachelor of Arts in Music shall consist of no fewer than 55 units, of which at least 29 shall be 
in the upper division. The following minimum requirements are basic to this degree objective: 

Music Requirements 


Lower Division Units 

Music Theory (Mu 111A,B, 211) 9 

Music Literature (Mu 251) 3 

Applied Techniques (Ensemble 4, principal performance area 4) _8 

20 

Upper Division 

Music Theory (Mu 316, 320, 321 A, 422A) 9 

Music History and Literature (Mu 351 A, Mu 352A,B) 9 

Applied Techniques (Ensemble 2, principal performance area 2) 4 

Elective courses in music history and literature 13 

Total 

Grand Total 55 

Allied Requirements 

Music History, Theory and Literature Emphasis Units 

1. An academic minor, with approval of the faculty adviser 20 


2. Foreign language, preferably German, to be satisfied by one of the following: 

a. four years study of foreign language at the secondary school level, 

b. a pass examination given by the Department of Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures, or 

c. completion of the second semester of the beginning university course in foreign 
language. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MUSIC— MUSIC EDUCATION OPTION 

This program Is designed to provide in-depth preparation for teaching in the public schools under 
the provisions of the Teacher Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970 (Ryan Act). 

The degree shall consist of no fewer than 55 units In music of which at least 29 shall be in the upper 
division. The following minimum requirements are basic to this degree objective: 


443—1 IS 31S 


Music 


117 


Lower Division Units 

General education 45 

Music 

Music theory (Mu 211) 9 

Music literature (Mu 251) 3 

Applied techniques (Ensemble 4, Principal Performance 4) 8 

Lower division total in music 20 

Upper Division 

Music 

Music theory (Mu 320, Mu 321 A) 5 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 A, B) 6 

Applied techniques (Ensemble 3, Principal Performance 2) 5 

(Competency exam to achieve 300-level minimum) 

Specialization in the major 19 

Voice-Choral Specialization: 


Mu 281 (4), Mu 354 (2), Mu 390 (2), Mu 391A,B (4), Mu 316 (2), Mu 361D (1), 
Mu 457 (2), Mu 453 (2), electives (2) 

Instrumental Specialization: 

Mu 391A (2), Mu 392A,B (4), Mu 281 (6), Mu 422A (2), Mu 323A (2), Mu 353 (2), 
electives (1) 

Genera! Music Specialization: 

Mu 281 (4), Mu 333 (3), Mu Ed 435 (3), Mu 316 (2), Mu 392A (2), Mu Ed 445 (2), 
Electives (3) 


Upper division total in music 35 

(Mu 299 and 399 — Clinical Practice — are recommended as a corollary to Mu 271, 281 
and/or Mu 391, 392) 

Professional Education 

Mu Ed 442 (4) — professional education courses 9 

Student teaching, full-time 15 

Grand total 124 


Competency examinations are required for the degree and credential; 

Prior to Junior Level: 

History and literature 
Theory 

Prior to Student Teaching: 

Keyboard functional 
Voice functional 
Senior recital 

Bachelor of Music 

This degree program is for the development of persons specializing In performance and applied 
music techniques.* 

The music major, professional degree program, shall consist of no fewer than 70 semester units, of 
which at least 32 shall be in the upper division. The following minimum requirements are basic to 
this degree objective: 

Lower Division Units 

Music theory (Mu 111A,B, 211) ^ 

Music literature (Mu 251) ^ 

Principal performance area ^ 

Major performance ensemble ^ 

Applied techniques (by advisement) 

Total 24 


* This program can prepare the student for a teaching career as a music specialist in the public elementary or secondary schools 
of California. The music education emphasis is a five-year program leading toward the Standard Teaching Credential. Holders 
of this credential may teach music in either or both secondary and elementary public schools of California. For complete 
professional education requirements, see School of Education section. Students must complete Mu Ed 442 before admission to 
student teaching. 33o 


118 Music 


Upper Division Units 

Music theory (Mu 316, 320, 321A, 422A) 9 

Music history and literature (Mu 351 A,B) 6 

Principal performance area 4 

Major performance ensemble 4 

Specialization in the major (by advisement) ^ 

Total 46 

Total, lower and upper division 70 


Minor in Music 

The minor in music may be used as an appropriate area of study by persons whose majors are in 
other fields, or may be used to satisfy minor field requirements for elementary or secondary teaching 
credentials. A maximum of 1 2 units from the lower division may be Included in work counted toward 
the music minor. The music minor requires a minimum preparation of 20 units. 


Composite of Lower Division and Upper Division Units 

Theory of music (selected from Mu 101, 111A,B, 211 or any 300- or 400-level theory 

classes for which student Is qualified) 6 

Music history and literature (Mu 100, 251, 350 or courses at the 4(X)- or 500-level for 

which student is qualified) 5-6 

Applied techniques (Including ensemble, conducting, piano or voice, orchestral Instru- 
ments, and principal instrument or voice) 8-9 

Total 20 


Note: Students expecting to use the minor for teaching must complete four units of Mu 281 a-d 
and/or Mu 381 A,B Orchestral Instruments, and a minimum of two units In an ensemble appropri- 
ate to their area of specialization. 

Master of Arts in Music 

The program of studies leading to the Master of Arts In Music provides advanced studies in breadth 
as well as In an area of graduate specialization. The program is further intended to provide advanced 
coursework with a suitable balance in such music studies as theory, composition, history, literature 
and advanced applied techniques and music education. There are suitable graduate specializations 
in the areas of history and literature and performance. 

The Master of Arts In Music is especially designed for teachers and supervisors of music; persons 
intending to specialize in applied fields In the pursuit of occupational goals; Individuals preparing 
for college teaching; and persons intending to p^jrsue advanced degrees beyond the master's level. 

Prerequisites 

The student must have a baccalaureate degree with a major in music (or the equivalent of a major, 
i.e., 29 upper division units in music). Opportunity is given the student to remove deficiencies by 
taking certain prescribed courses. Such courses cannot be applied to the master's degree program. 
The student must also take the aptitude and advanced music tests of the Graduate Record Examina- 
tion and pass the graduate music placement-proficiency examinations. 

Study Plan 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study, no more than nine of which shall be outside 
the field of music, and at least 15 of which must be in 500-level courses In the major. The student 
will take Mu 500 (Introduction to Graduate Studies in Music, 2 units) within the first nine units 
included on the study plan in his program. The degree program offers two options: Option I In 
History and Literature, or Option II in Performance. A thesis or project is required in both options. 
In addition, in Option I the program will include at least six units of study outside the field of music, 
but supportive to the program. Each program is individually designed in conference with the adviser. 
For further information, consult the Department of Music. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


495—1 12 375 


Music 119 


MUSIC COURSES 

100 Introduction to Music (3) 

A basic approach to listening to music with understanding and pleasure through a general survey 
of musical literature representative of various styles and performance media. Music will be 
related to other arts through lectures, recordings, and concerts. Closed to music majors. 

101 Music Theory for Non-Music Majors (3) 

Basic theory and practical applications to further understanding of basic music principles and to 
improve music performance and listening skills. Includes sightsinging and relationship to key- 
board and simple melodic instruments. Closed to music majors. 

111A,B Music Theory (3,3) 

A year course covering diatonic harmony and musicianship. Includes scales and intervals, triads and 
their inversions, harmonizations, nonharmonic tones, modulation and dominant seventh chords. 
Practical applications, to Include sightsinging, dictation and keyboard harmonizations. (2 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

171, 271, 371, 471 Individual Instruction (1-2) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual study with approved instructor with emphasis on 
technique and repertoire. Music majors must register for a minimum of one unit per semester. 
Performance majors approved by jury recommendation should register for two units per semes- 
ter. jury examination required. May be repeated for credit. 

172 Piano Class for Piano Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Group instruction In basic pianistic technique and repertoire. 
May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

173 Voice Class for Voice Majors (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Croup Instruction in basic vocal technique and repertoire. 
May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

182A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (1,1) 

Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose major performance instrument is not piano. 
(2 hours activity) 

183 Voice Class for Non-majors (1) 

Beginning and elementary techniques in singing for the non-music major. May be repeated for credit. 
(2 hours activity) 

184A,B Piano Class for Non-Majors (1,1) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101. Beginning and elementary Instruction in basic piano techniques for the non- 
music major. (2 hours activity) 

199 Clinical Practice in Major Performance (1) 

Observation, experimentation, clinical practice of instrumental and/or choral music In applied field 
situations, as in public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 161 recommended. (2 hours 
activity) 

211 Chromatic Harmony (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 1 1 1 B or equivalent. A continuation of Mu 1 1 1 A,B with emphasis on the chromatic 
harmonic practice of the 18th and 19th centuries. Includes secondary dominants; ninth, eleventh, 
and thirteenth chords; sequence, and chromatically altered chords. Practical applications to 
Include sightsinging, melodic and harmonic dictation, and keyboard practice. Required of all 
music majors. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

251 Survey of Musical Literature (3) 

An Introductory course required of majors in the study of the literature of music in Western 
civilization. Open to minors and qualified students by consent of instructor. Students should be 
able to read music as a part of the analysis of form, design and style. (3 hours lecture, 1 hour 
laboratory) 

28la-g Orchestral Instruments (1) (Formerly 281a-d) 

281a,c,e, and g are required of all music credential candidates. Instrumental music candidates 
are required to take two additional units selected from Mu 281b, d, or f. (2 hours activity) 

281a String Instruments (1) 

Specialization on violin and viola. Violin and viola majors substitute Mu 281b for this course. 

281b String Instruments (1) 

Specialization on cello and string bass. Cello and bass majors are exempt. 


45»-l 12 38S 


120 Music 


281c Brass Instruments (1) 

Specialization on trumpet and French horn. Trumpet and French horn majors substitute 281 d for 
this course. 

281d Brass Instruments (1) 

Specialization on trombone, baritone and tuba. Trombone and tuba majors are exempt. 

281e Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Specialization on clarinet and flute. Secondary emphasis on saxophone. Clarinet and flute majors 
substitute 281 f for this course. 

281f Woodwind Instruments (1) 

Specialization on oboe and bassoon. Oboe and bassoon majors are exempt. 

281g Percussion Instruments (1) 

Specialization on the snare drum and mallet-played instruments with related work on other 
standard percussion instruments. Special consideration given to typical problems encountered 
with percussion in the public schools. Percussion majors are exempt. 

282A,B Piano Class for Music Majors (1J) 

Prerequisite: Mu 182B or placement by instructor. Designed to meet music major minimum piano 
proficiency requirements for degree. Fundamentals of keyboard technique for students whose 
major performance field is not piano. Not required for piano majors. (2 hours activity) 

283A,B Voice Class (1,1) 

Prerequisite: placement by coordinator. Recommended for credential candidates. Not required for 
voice majors. (2 hours activity) 

299 Clinical Practice in Instrumental and Vocal Techniques (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of Instrumental and vocal techniques classes, as In public and 
private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 271 or Mu 281 recommend^. (2 hours activity) 

316 16th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 or consent of instructor. Sixteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and four 
parts, covering motet, canon, double counterpoint. Required of all music majors pursuing the 
B.M. degree. 

318 18th-Century Counterpoint (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 316 or consent of instructor. Eighteenth-century counterpoint in two, three and four 
parts, covering invention, canon, double and triple counterpoint and fugue. 

320 20th-Century Harmony (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211. A survey of the harmonic practices of the 20th century with emphasis on 
written exercises In the various styles. Practical applications to Include sightsinging, keyboard 
practice, and dictation. Required of all music majors. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

321A,B Form and Analysis (3,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. A — Analysis of structural elements of music such as 
motive, phrase, and period; binary, ternary, rondo, sonato allegro and larger musical forms in 
representative musical works. Required of all music majors. B — Continuation of A, with emphasis 
on larger musical works. 

323A,B Orchestration (2,2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 320, 321 A or consent of instructor. Writing and analysis of orchestral music. 

333 Music and Child Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 101 or equivalent or successful completion of proficiency test. Study of the relation- 
ship of music to child growth and development, with emphasis on the child from 5 to 12. 

341 Survey of the Symphony (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of symphonic 
music from the 18th through the 20th centuries, with special emphasis on the relationships 
between musical composition and the general artistic temper of historical periods. For non-music 
majors only. 

342 Survey of the Concerto (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of the concerto 
from the 1 7th century to the present. The nature of the soloist and the social display of virtuosity 
will be considered. For non-music majors only. 

343 Survey of Choral Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. A study of choral music through the ages, from 
Gregorian Chant to contemporary forms, concentrating on choral works of the great composers 
of the Baroque, Classical and Romantic eras. For non-music majors only. 


Music 121 


350 Music in Our Society (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 100 or consent of instructor. Designed to increase interest and an understanding 
of music in its relation to our general culture. A sociological approach which includes musical 
criticism and journalism, concert life, audience psychology, and the political/religious/business 
aspects of the American musical scene. 

351A,B History and Literature of Music (34) 

Prerequisite: Mu 251. A — A study of the history and literature of music from early Creek beginnings 
through the Renaissance. B — A study of the history and literature of music covering the Baroque, 
Classic, Romantic period and the 20th century. Required of all music majors. 

352A,B History and Literature of Music from 1600 to the Present (34) 

Prerequisite: Mu 21 1 and Mu 251, or consent of instructor. A — Historical and stylistic study of music 
in the Baroque and Classic periods. B — Historical and stylistic study of music In the Romantic 
period and the 20th century. Music 352A,B are open to all music majors and may be used to 
replace the 351 B music history requirement. If used to fulfill the music history requirements within 
the Music Department, both the A and the B sections of Mu 352 must be completed by the 
student. This course Is recommended to all music majors who intend to continue music study 
at the graduate level. 

353 Survey of Instrumental Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 392A. Through examination and analysis of multiple examples of the repertory, this 
course is designed to develop skills in the practical use of instrumental literature for performance 
In secondary schools and community colleges. 

354 Survey of Public School Choral Music Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 A. Thorough examination and analysis of multiple examples of choral repertoire 
suitable for junior and senior high choruses. 

361a-f Major Performance Ensemble (1) 

The study and performance of standard and contemporary music literature. Public concerts on 
campus and in the community are Included in the scheduled activities each semester and 
participation is required. A concert tour may be included by some groups. (More than 3 hours 
major production.) May be repeated for credit. 

361a Symphony Orchestra (1) 

Open to all university students and qualified adults In the community by audition or consent of 
instructor. 

361b University Choir (1) 

Open to ail university students with consent of instructor. 

361c University Concert Band (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. 

361d Opera Theatre (1) 

Study of roles and representative excerpts from standard and contemporary operas and the basic 
musical, dramatic and language techniques of the musical theatre. Performance of operatic 
excerpts and complete operas. (More than 3 hours major production) 

361e University Singers (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced voice students or those accepted by audition. 

361f University Wind Ensemble (1) 

Membership restricted to advanced wind and F)ercusslon students or those accepted by audition. 

362A Wind Ensemble-Jazz Ensemble (1) 

Open to qualified students by audition or consent of Instructor. Public performances on campus and 
in the community are scheduled each semester. 

362B Wind Ensemble — Varsity Band (1) 

Open to all university students with consent of instructor. Varsity Band provides music for Titan 
football and basketball home games. Concurrent enrollment in Mu 361c is recommended. 

363 Chamber Music Ensembles (1) 

Open to ail qualified wind, string, or keyboard students. Various ensembles will be form^ to study, 
read, and to perform representative chamber literature of all periods. (2 hours activity) 

3B1A Survey of Orchestral Instruments (2) 

A general survey of orchestral Instrument practices for elementary credential candidates. (4 hours 
activity) 


4trr — 1 u 436 


122 


Music 


381 B Survey of Recreational Instruments (2) 

A general survey of recreational instrument practices for credential candidates. (4 hours activity) 

382 Piano Class (1) 

Prerequisite: placement by instructor. Designed to meet functional piano requirements for credential 
candidates. (2 hours activity) 

386 Piano Accompanying (1) 

Prerequisite: by audition only. The study and performance of piano accompaniments for instrumen- 
talists, vocalists, and ensembles. Participation in rehearsals, recitals, and concerts required. (2 
hours activity) 

387 Church Service Playing (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 211 or consent of instructor. Transposition and improvisation of interludes and 
playing of hymns, chants and accompaniments. Includes characteristics of services of various 
denominations and a survey of suitable organ literature. Can be repeated for credit. 

390A^B,C Diction for Singers (1,1,1) 

Prerequisite: sophomore standing or consent of instructor. Study of proper singing diction; may not 
be considered a substitute for formal language study. Examples from standard vocal literature 
explained through the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet. A — Italian, English. B — Ger- 
man. C — French. 

391A,B Choral Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: one semester of voice class or consent of Instructor. A — Principles, techniques, and 
methods of conducting choral groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 hours activity) 
B — Continuation of 391 A Including laboratory work with class and vocal ensembles, using 
standard choral repertoire. (4 hours activity) 

392A,B Instrumental Conducting (2,2) 

Prerequisite: two courses from 281 a-g or consent of instructor. A — Principles, techniques, and 
methods of conducting orchestral and band groups. Required of all music education majors. (4 
hours activity) B — Continuation of 392A, Including laboratory experience in conducting Instru- 
mental groups, using standard instrumental literature. (4 hours activity) 

399 Clinical Practice in Conducting (1) 

Clinical practice and field applications of concepts, materials, and procedures as applied to field 
situations, as In public and private schools. Co-enrollment in Mu 391 A or 392A recommended. 

401A,B Criticism of the Arts (3,3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts. Other majors by consent of 
Instructor. 401 A Is prerequisite to 401 B except by consent of Instructor. Criticism which in the 
first semester will develop criteria and vocabulary, applicable to criticism in the visual and 
performing arts through lectures, readings, discussions, and attendance at exhibits and perfor- 
mances. Emphasis on oral and written skills In the communication of artistic concepts and critical 
evaluations. Second semester emphasizes the practical aspects of writing newspaper reviews and 
speculative essays based on musical concerts, dramatic productions, and exhibits of visual arts. 

422A,B Composition (2,2) (Formerly 322A,B) 

Prerequisites: Mu 316, 320 and 321 A or consent of instructor. A — Ear training, analysis of smaller 
forms, simple composition of two- and three-part song form styles. B — Analysis and writing of 
more complex musical forms. 

450 History and Literature of Instrumental Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. The development of instruments and instrumental 
forms from the Middle Ages to the present, with emphasis on the analysis of compositional 
techniques and stylistic development. (3 hours lecture and discussion, 1 hour listening) 

451 History and Literature of Vocal Music (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. A study of solo and ensemble vocal literature, 
including opera, from the Middle Ages to the present, with emphasis on the analysis of composi- 
tional and vocal techniques and stylistic development. (3 hours lecture and discussion, 1 hour 
listening) 

453A,B Choral Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Mu 391 A or equivalent and 351 A,B. A — The study of choral literature from the 
Medieval, Renaissance and Baroque eras analyzed in historical perspective. Appropriate per- 
formance practices will be examined. B — Continuation of A with representative examples from 
the Classic, Romantic and Contemporary eras. 


47»-l 12 4a0 


Music 123 


454A,B Piano Literature and Interpretation (2,2) 

Prerequisite: 351 A, B and junior level piano standing or consent of instructor. Study and performance 
of representative styles and schools of piano literature, with particular reference to solo and 
ensemble repertoire. A — Concentration on contrapuntal forms, sonatas, and variations. B — 
Concentration on concerti, character pieces, fantasies, suites, and etudes. 

455 Instrumental Chamber Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Open to all music majors, or to non-majors by consent of instructor. Members of the class will be 
grouped into ensembles for demonstration purposes. Emphasis will be placed on the stylistic 
differences required in performing works of all periods. 

456 Opera Literature and Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. Study of all periods and nationalities, including 
stylistic and historical connotations. 

457A Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390B or consent of instructor. Study and performance of German Lieder with 
representative examples of periods and styles. 

457B Song Literature and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 390A or consent of instructor. Study and performance of Italian, French, Russian, 
English and American art songs, with representative examples of periods and styles. 

458 Collegium Musicum Practicum (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. The study and performance of rare and old music, 
both instrumental and vocal. Techniques of musical research will be applied. Students should 
be comp)etent performers. 

467A,B Piano Pedagogy (2,2) 

Prerequisite: junior piano standing or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of piano pedagogy, with 
reference to individual and group Instruction. A — Survey of materials and methods for beginning 
and intermediate students. Supervised teaching. B — Survey of methods of teaching advanced 
technique and repertoire. Physiology and psychology of working with advanced pianist. Super- 
vised teaching and recital preparation. 

468 Vocal Pedagogy (2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of vocal pedagogy with refer- 
ence to studio and public school teaching, with consideration of physiology and acoustics as they 
apply to singing. A survey of methods of teaching voice. 

498 Senior Recital (1) 

Prerequisite: 371 -level (471 -level for performance majors) and consent of instructor. Intensive 
preparation and presentation of representative works In the principal performance area. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Study of a special topic In music selected in consultation with the instructor and carried out under 
his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Music (2) 

Required of all graduate music majors. Study of basic bibliography, literature, and research tech- 
niques and materials useful In graduate music study. 

522 Contemporary Techniques of Composition (2) 

Advanced techniques of composition, as applied to the student's area of graduate specialization. 

523 Advanced Orchestration (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 323B. Analysis and practice of traditional and contemporary orchestration tech- 
niques. Scoring of music for large ensembles such as orchestra, band, chorus and orchestra, or 
band and orchestra. 

551 Seminar in Music of the Medieval Period (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A detailed study of the music forms, structures and styles from 
5(X) to 1450. Detailed analysis of important representative works as well as the contributions of 
individual composers and theoretical writers. 

552 Seminar in Music of the Renaissance (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A comprehensive study of the forms, styles, and developmental 
characteristics of music between 1450 and 1600. Detailed analysis of selected works by repre- 
sentative composers and theoretical writers. 

553 Seminar in Music of the Baroque Period (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A,B or consent of instructor. Muscal forms, styles, and performance practices 
of the Baroque period. Detailed analysis of significant representative works. 


4S3— 1 U 519 


124 Music 


554 Seminar in Music of the Classic Period (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. A study of the history and literature of music from 
approximately 1750 to 1900. Detailed analysis of important representative works. 

555 Seminar in Music of the Romantic Period (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An intensive study of the structure and development of music 
in the 19th century. Detailed analysis of important representative works. 

556 Seminar in 20th-Century Music (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 351 A, B or consent of instructor. Developments in the music of western Europe and 
the western hemisphere since 1890. Intensive study of contemporary music and Its structure. 

557 Seminar in Musicology (2) 

Prerequisite: at least two courses from Mu 551-556 and consent of instructor. Detailed Investigation 
and systematic analysis of specific developments in musicology including exercises in transcrip- 
tions from old notations and historical Investigations prepared by members of the seminar. 

558 Collegium Musicum (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced studies in the performance of rare and old music. (See 
Mu 458 for general description.) May be repeated for credit. 

571 Individual Instruction (1) 

Prerequisite: jury recommendation. Individual Instruction with approved instructor with emphasis 
on performance techniques and repertory. Minimum of one unit must be taken per semester. 
Required of all graduate students whose terminal project Is the graduate recital. 

591 Advanced Choral Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 391 B, conducting experience, or consent of instructor. Advanced problems in 
choral conducting techniques, with emphasis on laboratory work with student groups and in 
concert conducting. (4 hours activity) 

592 Advanced Instrumental Conducting and Interpretation (2) 

Prerequisite: Mu 392B, keyboard facility for score reading and consent of Instructor. Advanced study 
of conducting techniques through assignments with the university symphony. Interpretive prob- 
lems of each period covered in lectures. (4 hours activity) 

597 Project (3) 

Systematic study and report of a significant undertaking in the area of musical composition, musical 
performance, or other related creative activity. A written critical evaluation of the work or activity 
will be required. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Individual Investigations of specific problems in the area of concentration by candidates for the M.A. 
degree. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing In music and permission of instructor. Research and study projects 
In areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written reports required. 


MUSIC EDUCATION COURSES 

435 Music in the Modern Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 333 or consent of instructor. A survey of 20th-century materials and techniques, 
of recordings for creative movement to music, and of basic conducting techniques for song 
leading In the elementary school. Adaptation of materials for use In classroom music. 

442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (4) 

Prerequisite: completion of all competency requirements in music, senior standing and admission 
to Teacher Education. History, principles of public education, grades K-12, with special emphasis 
on music. Philosophy, methods, materials and procedures for organizing and teaching music in 
elementary and secondary schools. 

444 Administration, Materials and Arranging for the Marching Band (3) 

Prerequisite: Mu 323A or consent of Instructor. A study of techniques, materials, administration and 
arranging for marching band. Includes charting for the football field, parade activities, and 
practical experience In the scoring of music for marching band with particular emphasis on the 
needs of school bands. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 


487—1 12 53S 


Theatre 1 25 


530 Practicum of Research in Music Education (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music; completion of Mu 500. Research techniques and proce- 
dures in music education. Students will be required to complete a creative project or research 
paper. 

531 Foundations of Music Education (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in music; completion of Mu 500. Study of the philosophical and 
historical bases which have influenced music education in the United States. Identification of 
philosophic frames of leading educators, past and present. Contemporary issues and trends 
which affect the teaching of music in the schools. Prerequisite for all music education courses 
at the graduate level. 

532 Seminar in Music Education (2) 

Studies in the trends and application of educational theory in relation to the teaching of music in 
the public schools. 

544 Curriculum Planning and Construction in Music (2) 

Principles and practices of curriculum planning in music education, with special reference to the 
public elementary, junior and senior high school. Required of majors who intend to complete 
supervision credential. 

545 Supervision and Administration of Music in the Public Schools (2) 

Open to music education majors with teaching experience. Philosophy, principles and practices of 
supervision of music in the public elementary and secondary schools. Emphasis on modern 
principles of leadership, types of services, organization, management and evaluation of programs 
of instruction. Required of candidates for supervisory credential. 

749 Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Prerequisite: Mu 441, 442, 443 and Educ 449. See page 206 for description. 

DEPARTMENT OF THEATRE 

FACULTY 
Alvin Keller 
Department Chairman 

Terl Allen, Ronald DIeb, Edwin Duerr, R. Terry Ellmore, Donald Henry, Dean Hess, Thomas Laga, 
La Nor Lolllch, R. Kirk Mee, S. Todd MuffattI, Dwight Odie, jerry Pickering, Robert Renee, 
Marguerite VanderHoek, Darrell Winn, James Young,* Allen Zeltzer * 

The Department of Theatre program Includes the several fields of playwriting, oral interpretation, 
acting-directing, technical theatre, theatre history and theory, radio-television and dance. Specifi- 
cally, the coursework is arranged to provide opportunities for students (1 ) to develop an apprecia- 
tion for the theatre; (2) to become aware, as audience or participants of the shaping force of the 
theatre In society; (3) to improve the understandings and skills necessary for work in the theatre 
as a profession; (4) to prepare for teaching theatre; and (5) to pursue graduate studies. 

Theatre majors must maintain a 2.5 grade-point average in their major for graduation. In addition 
to course requirements, all students will usher for major productions at least once a semester and 
are required to enroll for one unit of Theatre 478 each semester. 

bachelor of arts in theatre arts 

Course programs have been planned to meet the individual needs and interests of students working 
for the Bachelor of Arts in Theatre Arts. 

Plan I is for those who wish to study theatre as a cultural contribution or who wish to pursue graduate 
degrees in theatre with emphasis in theatre history and theory. It is strongly recommended that 
students electing this plan support the major with approved electives from art, theatre, music, foreign 
languages, literature, philosophy or speech. 

Plan II is designed to develop the necessary competency for pursuing theatre as a profession, or for 
pursuing graduate degrees in theatre with an emphasis in an area of concentration other than history 
of the theatre. Areas of concentration are: playwriting; acting; directing; oral Interpretation; radio- 
television; technical theatre and dance. 

Pl^n III meets the requirements of the teaching credential with specialization In secondary or 
community college teaching. Option I: Single Subject Credential— B.A. Degree; Option II: Single 

University administrative officer 


4M— 1 IS 570 


126 


Theatre 


Subject Credential — B.A. Degree and Continuous Fifth Year. 

In addition to the requirements listed below for the major, students must meet the other university 
requirements for a bachelor of arts degree. Students following Plan III also must meet any specific 
requirements for the desired teaching credential (see section in catalog for School of Education). 
Those students who plan to work on the M.A. degree as well as the credential should see the 
chairman of the Department of Theatre. 

PLAN I; THEATRE HISTORY AND THEORY EMPHASIS 

Lower Division: 100A,B, Introduction to the Theatre (6); Theatre 263A, Begin- 

ning Acting (3); Theatre 276A, Stagecraft (3); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals 
(3) or Theatre 285 A, Theatrical Makeup (2); Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation (3) 17-18 

Upper Division: Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, 

World Theatre (12); Theatre 477 A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6); 

Theatre 472, American Theatre (3); electives (3 units) 27 

PLAN II: PROFESSIONAL EMPHASIS IN AN AREA OF CONCENTRATION 

Lower Division: SdiTwe as in Plan I, with exception of acting, radio-television, dance and 
technical theatre. 

Upper Division: In one of the following areas of concentration: 

Playwriting — Theatre 364, Seminar in Playwriting (6), or Theatre 364 (3) and Theatre 
383, Television Writing (3); Theatre 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); 

Theatre 468, Experimental Theatre (3); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); 

Theatre 477A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 33 

Oral Interpretation — Theatre 311, Oral Interpretation (3); Theatre 411A,B,C, Oral 
Interpretation of Prose, Poetry, Drama (9); Theatre 414A,B, Reading Theatre (6); 

Theatre 475A,B,C, or D, World Theatre (6); electives selected from the following 
courses: Theatre 386, Stage Lighting; Theatre 472, American Theatre; Theatre 
475A,B,C, or D, World Theatre; Theatre 477 A,B, Senior Seminar in Critical Tech- 
niques (6) 30 

The major in theatre with an emphasis in oral Interpretation requires 25 units In 
supportive courses from related areas such as art, anthropology, comparative 
literature, English literature, linguistics, speech, philosophy to be selected in consul- 
tation with the student's adviser. 

Acting — Lower Division: ThedXxe 100A,B, Introduction to the Theatre (6); Theatre 241, 

Voice Production for the Actor (3); Theatre 251, Body Movement for the Actor 
(3); Theatre 263A,B, Beginning Acting (6); Theatre 276A,B, Stagecraft (6); Theatre 


285A, Theatrical Makeup (2) 26 

Upper Division :lhedXxe 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 363A,B, Inter- 
mediate Acting (6); Theatre 463A,B, Advanced Acting (6); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, 

World Theatre (12); Theatre 480, Television Production and Direction (3) or 

Theatre 382, Television Dramatic Techniques (3); Dance electives (2) 35 

Radio-Television — Lower Division: 'Xheaixe 100A,B, Introduction to the Theatre (6); 

Theatre 241, Voice Production for the Actor (3); Theatre 263A, Beginning Acting 
(3); Theatre 276A, Stagecraft (3); Theatre 277, Costume Fundamentals (3) or 
Theatre 285A, Theatrical Makeup (2); Theatre 211, Oral Interpretation (3) 20-21 


Upper Division: 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 380, Introduc- 

tion to Radio & Television (3); Theatre 381, Radio & Television Announcing (3); 

Theatre 382, Television Dramatic Techniques (3); Theatre 383, Television Writing 
(3); Theatre 480, Television Production and Direction (3); Theatre 475A,B,C or 
D, World Theatre (6); collateral requirements In Communications Department 
(3); six units chosen from advanced courses In directing, acting or technical 

theatre 36 

Directing — Theatre 370A,B, Fundamentals of Directing (6); Theatre 470A,B, Directing 
(8); Theatre 475A,B,C,D, World Theatre (12); Theatre 468, Experimental Theatre 
(3); Theatre 480, Television Production & Direction (3) or Theatre 382, Television 
Dramatic Techniques (3); electives, 6 upper division units in technical theatre.. 38 
Technical Production/ Design Major — The technical theatre major does not divide 
into an upper division or lower division format. Majors will be expected to follow 
unit groupings for a total of 62 units. 


Theatre 


127 


Unit Group /; Basic technical class core to be taken by all majors — 29 units 
Theatre 1(X)A,B Introduction to the Theatre (6) 

Theatre 188 Historical Styles (3) 

Theatre 276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (6) 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Theatre 285 A Theatrical Makeup (2) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 

Theatre 370A Fundamentals of Directing (3) 

Theatre 386 Stage Lighting (3) 

Unit Group II: Choose 3 units 
Theatre 211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

Theatre 263 A Beginning Acting (3) 

Unit Group III: Choose 6 units 
Theatre 475A,B,C,D World Theatre (12) 

Unit Group IV: Choose 24 of the following 36 units 
Theatre 376A,B Advanced Stagecraft (6) 

Theatre 486 Advanced Stage Lighting (3) 

Theatre 387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Theatre 388 Intermediate Scene Design (3) 

Theatre 488A,B Advanced Scene Design (6) 

Theatre 377A,B Stage Costuming (6) 

Theatre 382 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Theatre 450 Theatre Management (3) 

Theatre 480 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Dance — Lower Division: IhedXxe 100A,B Introduction to Theatre (6) 

Dance 101 Introduction to Dance (2) 

Dance 135A,B Movement and Rhythm (4) 

Dance 227A,B Space Forming (6) 

Dance 245A,B Mime and Pantomime (4) 

Two units selected from: 

Dance 125A Improvisation 
Dance 255 jazz Dance 
Two-three units selected from: 

Theatre 277 Costume Fundamentals 

Theatre 285A Theatrical Makeup 26-27 units 

Upper Division: Dance 311A,B Elements and Forms of Dance Composition (6) 
Dance 374A,B Dance Theatre Production (6) 

Dance 476A,B, History of Dance (6) 

Theatre 363A, Intermediate Acting and Characterization (3) 

Theatre 386, Stage Lighting (3) 

Three units selected from the following: 

Dance 331 A, B, Character Dance for Theatre 
Theatre 370A, Fundamentals of Directing 
Theatre 377 A, Stage Costuming 
Dance 450, Creative Dance for Teachers 
Three units selected from the following: 

Theatre 403, Children's Theatre 
Theatre 450, Theatre Management 
Theatre 463A, Advanced Acting 
Theatre 468, Experimental Theatre 
Theatre 470A, Directing 
Dance 474, Special Studies in Dance 
Theatre 486, Advanced Theatrical Lighting 
Six units selected from: 

Theatre 475A,B,C or D, World Theatre 36 units 

plan III: SECONDARY OR COMMUNITY COLLEGE TEACHING EMPHASIS 
L3ptlon I: Single Subject Credential — B.A. 

Lower Division: 

Theatre 100A,B Introduction to the Theatre (6) 

Theatre 211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 


90^-1 IS 610 


128 


Theatre 


Theatre 263A Beginning Acting (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft and Lab 
Theatre 111 Costume Fundamentals (3) 
Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (2) 

Theatre 288 Design for the Theatre (3) 
Total lower division 


(3) 


23 units 


Upper Division: 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 403 Theatre for Children (3) 

Theatre 41 4A Reading Theatre (3) 

Theatre 450 Theatre Management (3) 

Theatre 470A Directing (including labs) (4) 

Theatre 472 American Theatre (3) 

Theatre 475 A, B World Theatre (6) 

Total upper division 28 units 

Grand total for the major 51 units 

The student who returns to finish his fifth year will select a minimum of 30 units from the following 
courses: 

Theatre 401 A, B Criticism of the Arts (6) 

Theatre 402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

Theatre 411 A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Theatre 41 IB Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Theatre 41 1C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Theatre 41 4A Reading Theatre (3) 

Theatre 468 Experimental Theatre (6) 

Theatre 470B Directing (including labs) (4) 

Theatre 475C,D World Theatre (6) 

Theatre 477A,B Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (6) 

Theatre 488A,B Advanced Scene Design (6) 

Theatre 490 Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Theatre 503 Seminar: Theatre for Children (3) 

Note: Those students who plan to work on the M.A. degree as well as the credential should see the 
chairman of the Department of Theatre. 

Option II: Single Subject Credential — B.A. and Continuous Fifth Year 

Lower Division: 

Theatre 1(X)A,B Introduction to the Theatre (6) 

Theatre 211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

Theatre 263A Beginning Acting (3) 

Theatre 276A Beginning Stagecraft (3) 

Theatre 285 Theatrical Makeup (2) 

Total lower division 17 units 

Upper Division: 

Theatre 370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (6) 

Theatre 403 Theatre for Children (3) 

Theatre 41 4A Reading Theatre (3) 

Theatre 450 Theatre Management (3) 

Theatre 470A Directing (including labs) (4) 

Theatre 472 American Theatre (3) 

Theatre 475 A, B World Theatre (6) 

Total upper division 28 units 

Grand total for the major 45 units 

Note: Students electing this option must see the department adviser for credential students. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN THEATRE ARTS 

The Master of Arts in Theatre Arts is designed to provide a program of coordinated graduate studies 
built on the framework of the undergraduate preparation; to provide added incentive for intellectual 
growth reflected in improvement in teaching and professional recognition; and to provide a sound 
basis for continued graduate study in the field of theatre. The student is expected to demonstrate 


Theatre 129 


a high degree of intellectual and creative competence and to demonstrate mastery of one of the areas 
of emphasis in theatre (1) theatre history, (2) dramatic literature and criticism, (3) acting and 
directing, (4) playwriting, (5) technical theatre, (6) oral interpretation, (7) radio and television, (8) 
dance, (9) theatre for children. 

Prerequisites 

In addition to the university requirements, students admitted to this program must have an appropri- 
ate undergraduate major in theatre, with a grade-point average of 3.0 in all upper division work in 
the major, or at least 24 units of appropriate upper division work in theatre, with a CPA of 3.0, before 
being classified. Upon recommendation of the student's graduate committee, additional prerequi- 
sistes may be required prior to classification and the approval of the area of emphasis. Students will 
complete an oral Interview before being admitted to a program of studies. 

Study Plan 

The degree study plan in theatre will Include at least 30 units of adviser-approved graduate studies, 
15 units of which must be In 500-level courses. Each program will have 24 units in theatre. Including 
a core of six units (Theatre 500, Introduction to Graduate Study — which must be taken the first 
semester of graduate study after admission to graduate study; Theatre 597, Project; or Theatre 598, 
Thesis); and six units of adviser-approved supporting courses in related fields either in other depart- 
ments or within the Theatre Department but outside the area of emphasis. Before the degree Is 
granted each student will pass an oral and written examination. 

For further information, consult the Department of Theatre. See also "The Program of Master's 
Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


THEATRE COURSES 

100A,B Introduction to the Theatre (3,3) 

A study of the evolution of theatre, motion pictures, radio and television as composite arts. Emphasis 
Is placed on the historical, dramatic, and production aspects as influenced by different cultures, 
traditions, and technologies. Required of all theatre majors during their freshman year. 

188 Historical Styles for Theatrical Design (3) 

A visual survey through lecture, pictorial sources and field trips of artistic periods throughout the 
ancient and modern world as a cultural foundation for beginning and advanced creative work 
In technical theatre. Consideration of representative artists and architects. 

211 Introduction to Oral Interpretation (3) 

Analysis of selections from prose and poetry, development of voice control, projection of idea and 
emotion studied as the basis for practical application of theories of oral interpretation of literature. 

241 Voice Production for the Performer (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Fundamental techniques, methods, and training to give the actor 
maximum use of his voice in theatre. Correction of speech faults and regional accents. Introduc- 
tion to problems of stage dialects. Study of basic interpretative material. May be repeated for 
credit. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

251 Body Movement for the Actor (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Fundamental work in developing the body as an expressive 
instrument; acquiring of strength, flexibility, relaxation, control. Establishment of an awareness 
of and coordination of relationship of the body to the creative project. May be repeated up to 
six units of credit. (6 hours activity) 

263A,B Beginning Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 263A Is prerequisite to B, or consent of Instructor. Laboratory practice and discussions 
of the form and content of the art of acting. A — Improvisation, action, and motivation and 
behavior. B — Continuation of A and problems In characterization. (6 hours activity) 

272 Understanding Theatre (3) 

A nontechnical survey course for the general student leading to an appreciation and understanding 
of the theatre as a medium of communication and entertainment and as an art form. Field trips 
to certain significant productions. Recommended for non-majors. 


— 8.3097 


sn-« 1 4S 


130 


Theatre 


276A,B Beginning Stagecraft (3,3) 

Prerequisite: 276A is prerequisite to B, or consent of instructor. Study and practice in planning, 
constructing, painting and operating basic scenery for stage and television. Demonstrations and 
practice in the use of tools and standard stage equipment, in reading technical drawings and in 
building scenic items. Students to act as crew for productions. (More than 6 hours activity) 

277 Costume Fundamentals (3) 

Study of the principles and procedures of costuming theatrical and television productions. Practical 
experience in basic construction techniques, organizing and executing duties of the costume 
crew. Designed primarily for non-technical majors within the department and as an introductory 
course for technical majors. (More than 6 hours activity) 

285A,B Theatrical Makeup (2,2) 

Theory and practice in makeup for stage and television. Emphasis on development of individual skill 
in techniques of character analysis, application in pigment, plastic, hair makeup, and selection 
and use of makeup equipment. (4 hours activity) 

288 Design for the Theatre (3) (Formerly Theatre 286) 

Prerequisites: Art 103, 104 or Theatre 276A, or consent of instructor. Study and practice in the basic 
principles of designing scenery for the stage and television. Work in the designing and planning 
of sets for theatre productions. (Same as Art 286) (6 hours activity) 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (3,3) 

History and development of the motion picture as an art form and social influence. A — The motion 
picture from Its origins until 1945. B — The contemporary cinema, from 1945 to present. (Same 
as Communications 290A,B) 

311 Oral Interpretation (3) 

Analysis of various forms of literary material, program planning, culminating in advanced application 
of theories of control of voice and body, and projection of idea and emotion of these literary 
forms to an audience. 

363A,B Intermediate Acting and Characterization (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 241, 251, 263A,B. A is prerequisite to B, or consent of instructor. Emphasis on 
extended and integrated speech and movement problems in characterization. Ensemble acting, 
extensive analysis and exploration and basic television techniques. (6 hours activity) 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: evidence of student's previous interest in creative writing and consent of the instructor. 
Study of superior models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of each 
student's independent work, as it relates to play writing. May be repeated for credit. (Same as 
English 364) 

370A,B Fundamentals of Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisite: A Is prerequisite to B. Consent of Instructor. The study of prerehearsal problems and 
procedures, of the structural analysis of plays, and of composition, picturization, pantomimic 
dramatization, movement, and rhythm on stage and in television. Practice in directing scenes. 
(6 hours activity) 

376A,B Advanced Stagecraft (3,3) 

Study and practice in planning and executing complex scenery and sound for stage and television. 
Special analysis will be placed on new materials and techniques within the field. Construction 
and rigging problems are executed as they appear in production. Students are crew heads for 
department major productions. (More than 6 hours activity) 

377A,B Stage Costuming (3,3) 

A — History of costume for the stage; a chronological study of fashions and textiles of major historical 
periods, methods of costume research, and the means of interpreting historical costume for 
theatrical statement. B — A study of the techniques of designing and constructing costumes of 
various historical periods, with emphasis on creative planning. Practical experience in solving 
advanced problems in costume design, construction, and organization through participation in 
major productions of the department. (More than 6 hours activity) 

380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

The history and development of the broadcasting industry and its impact and influence on our 
society. A study of the basic broadcasting practices, audiences, production and programming. 
(Same as Communications 380) 


Theatre 131 


381 Radio and Television Announcing (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 21 1 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of control room operation. 
Lectures and practice in microphone and camera techniques, commercial announcements; 
interviewing, sportscasting, narration, foreign pronunciation, and continuity. (6 hours activity) 

382 Television Dramatic Techniques (3) 

Prerequisite; consent of instructor. Television techniques and production, designed primarily for 
theatre majors to train the director, actor and designer in the elements of televis^ drama. (6 
hours activity) 

383 Television Writing (3) 

Study of the principles and practices and experience in the writing of scripts and other forms of 
continuity for television. May be repeated for credit. 

386 Stage Lighting (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B or equivalent. Theory and practice In stage lighting and television 
presentations. Emphasis is given to design and the technology for its illumination. (More than 
6 hours activity) 

387 Audio Techniques (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 276A,B or consent of instructor. Theory, procedures, and practice necessary 
to develop and to integrate live and recorded sound into performing arts productions. Emphasis 
given to recording, reproduction and studio techniques. (6 hours activity) 

388 Intermediate Scene Design (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 288. Designing stage sets on paper and in model form for a variety of produc- 
tions and theatres. Work in preparing designs for practical execution as part of an actual produc- 
tion. (6 hours activity) 

401 A,B Criticism of the Arts (3,3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in the School of the Arts. Other majors by consent of 
instructor. 401 A Is prerequisite to 401 B except by consent of instructor. Criticism which in the 
first semester will develop criteria and vocabulary applicable to criticism in the visual and 
performing arts through lectures, readings, discussions, and attendance at exhibits and perfor- 
mances. Emphasis on oral and written skills in the communication of artistic concepts and critical 
evaluations. Second semester emphasizes practical aspects of writing newspaper reviews and 
speculative essays based on musical concerts, dramatic productions, and exhibits of visual arts. 

402 Dramatic Activities for Children (3) 

Theory and practice in the use of creative dramatics, storytelling, puppetry, assembly programs, 
role-playing, and other aspects of dramatics as tools for the teacher, group worker, recreation 
major, and others who work with children. (6 hours activity) 

403 Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 263A, 276A and 370AB or equivalent; or consent of instructor. Theories and 
principles of production in the formal theatre arts for children. Demonstrations of appropriate 
theatrical forms with analysis and evaluation. (6 hours activity) 

411A Oral Interpretation of Prose Literature (3) 

Relevant critical techniques are developed and applied to the study of various types of prose 
literature and to the development of oral Interpretation skills appropriate to these types. 

4118 Oral Interpretation of Poetry (3) 

Relevant critical techniques are developed and applied to the study of various types of poetry and 
to the development of oral Interpretation skills appropriate to these types. 

411C Oral Interpretation of Drama (3) 

Relevant critical techniques are developed and applied to the study of various types of dramatic 
literature and to the development of oral interpretation skills appropriate to these types. 

414A,B Reading Theatre (3,3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Croup and individual oral Interpretation of literature in which 
emphasis is placed upon theatre of the mind. May be repeated for credit with the consent of 
instructor. (6 hours activity) 

450 Theatre Management (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Discussion and practice of the basic elements of public relations 
as applied to theatre with a detailed analysis of various advertising mediums and experimentation 
in their use. A study of the various financial aspects of academic, community, and professional 
theatre operations including practical experience in front-of-the-house management and box 
office operation through the department's public presentations. (6 hours activity) 


977-A 1 S6 


132 


Theatre 


463A,B Advanced Acting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 363 A, B. 463 A is prerequisite to B, or consent of instructor. A study of historical 
theories and techniques of styles of acting as an art form. The first semester will include Greek 
through Renaissance periods and the second semester will include the Neoclassic periods to 
contemporary styles. (6 hours activity) 

468 Experimental Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An activity course in which dramatic principles are applied 
through production of full length and one-act plays using various styles of acting and staging. May 
be repeated up to six units for credit. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

470A,B Directing (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 370A,B or consent of instructor. Readings in theory, analysis of scripts and 
practice in directing plays for their oral and visual value as theatre. (6 hours activity) 

470A,B Directing Lab (1,1) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 370A,B or the consent of instructor. Requires concurrent enrollment in Theatre 
470A,B. A — Each student directs public performances of a one-act play. B — Each student directs 
public performances of two-act plays, or equivalent. (3 hours laboratory) 

472 American Theatre (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. The development of the art of theatre in the United States from colonial 
times to the present day; its place and potentialities as a force in a democratic society. 

475A,B,C,D World Theatre (3,3,3,3) 

Examination of the historical and dramatic evolution of world theatre. A — Ancient Greece and 
Rome, Middle Ages; Italian Renaissance; B — England from 1558-1790; 16th- and 17th-century 
Spain and France; C — 18th- and 19th-century Europe and Russia; 19th-century England; D — 18th- 
and 19th-century America; the Orient; the modern world. Students registering for Theatre 475 
must have completed the requirements for upper division standing. 

477 A,B Senior Seminar in Critical Techniques (3,3) 

Theatre 477A or consent of instructor prerequisite to B. First semester presents an historical survey 
of major critical theories as they apply to theatre. Second semester provides the opportunity to 
apply critical theories to local dramatic productions. 

478 Rehearsal and Performance (1) 

Acting in stage productions, major technical assignments in stage productions, or participation in 
television or theatre for children productions. One unit per semester required of all theatre 
majors. Enrollment on a credit/ no credit basis only. (More than 3 hours production per unit) 

480 Television Production and Direction (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Theory and practice in the production of television programs and 
announcements: the planning, organizing, directing, rehearsing, performing, recording and edit- 
ing of television programs and announcements. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

486 Advanced Theatrical Lighting (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 386 or consent of instructor. The design and technology of lighting. Student will 
be prepared to design for the stage, dance, pageant, display, film and television. Student will do 
at least one major lighting project as part of the course. (6 hours activity) 

488A,B Advanced Scene Design (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 288, or equivalent beginning work in design. Lecture in scene design with 
emphasis on style, ornamentation and illusion leading to practical problems in designing for the 
stage and television. (Same as Art 488A,B) 

491 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 

(Same as Comparative Literature 491) 

492 Film Aesthetics and Criticism (3) 

Prerequisites: Theatre 290A,B and/or consent of instructor. An exploration of the nature of film and 
the film experience through aesthetic and theoretical bases and establishment of a critical basis 
for film evaluation and understanding. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Undergraduate creative or research projects. Open to advanced students with the consent of 
instructor. Student must complete course application form by the end of the seventh week of 
the semester preceding the semester in which the work is to be done. May be repeated for credit. 


531-2 1 115 


Theatre 133 


500 Introduction to Graduate Study in Theatre (3) 

Introduction to methodological problems in graduate research. Location of source materials, includ- 
ing library and original data; research and project design and execution; interpretation of re- 
searches. Must be taken the first semester after admission to graduate study. 

501 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Theatre Theory and Appreciation (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 500. Directed research with emphasis on the relationship between historical 
backgrounds and developments in the theatre and the student's area of concentration. 

503 Seminar: Theatre for Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Theatre 403. Critical study of the historical development, philosophies, theories, tech- 
niques and trends of the art of theatre for children. Research and investigation of problems related 
to the use of materials in educational, community and professional children's theatres. 

511 Graduate Seminar in Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The historical and philosophical backgrounds in the development 
of Interpretation and its relationship to contemporary theory and practice. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research of instructor, this course will offer directed research and 
writing, group discussion, and lectures covering major figures. May be repeated with different 
content for additional credit. (Same as English 571) 

572 Graduate Seminar, Literary Genres (3) (Formerly 573) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. As appropriate to the specialized research and publications of 
instructor, this course will offer directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures 
covering such major literary types as: tragedy, comedy and historical drama. With consent of 
adviser, may be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as English 572) 

576 Production Planning in Theatre Arts (3) (Formerly 572) 

History and philosophy of production problems in theatre arts. Organization of the university theatre 
as it relates to the total university program. Planning of the production within the limitations of 
budgets and physical facilities. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor, student's graduate committee and department executive com- 
mittee. Development and presentation of a creative project In the area of concentration beyond 
regularly offered coursework. May be repeated to a maximum of six units. Student must complete 
course application form by the end of the seventh week of the semester preceding the semester 
in which the work is to be done. 

598 Thesis (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of student's graduate committee. Development and presentation of a thesis 
in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. Student must complete course 
application form by the end of the seventh week of the semester preceding the semester In which 
the work is to be done. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students In theatre with the consent of Instructor and student's graduate commit- 
tee. May be repeated for credit. Student must complete course application form by the end of 
the seventh week of the semester preceding the semester In which the work Is to be done. 


theatre education courses 

^22 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (4) 

Prerequisite: admission to teacher education, senior standing or consent of Instructor. See page 199 
under Secondary Education for description of Standard Teaching Credential program. Objec- 
tives, methods, and materials Including audiovisual instruction for teaching in secondary schools. 

^ Educational Television Production (3) 

Theory and practice In the activities, methods of lesson preparation, and presentation of educational 
television productions. 

Student Teaching in Theatre in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 208 for description and prerequisites. 


S3S-4 1 13S 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 
AND ECONOMICS 


38-2 1 135 





137 

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION AND ECONOMICS 

Dean: Jack W. Coleman 


Department of Accounting: Robert Vanasse, Chairman 
Donald Barnett, Eugene Corman, A. jay Hirsch, Robert Lamden, Glenn Lashbrook, john Williams, 
Dorsey Wiseman, john Woo 
Department of Economics: john Lafky, Chairman 
Maryanna Boynton, john Cayton, Kwang-wen Chu, Franz Dolp, Levern Craves, Sidney Klein, 
Wayne Lancaster, Robert Michaels, Morris Morkre, Cary Pickersgill, joyce Pickersgill, jack Pont- 
ney, Cuy Schick, Norman Townshend-Zellner 
Department of Finance: B. E. Tsagris, Chairman 
Kenneth Daane, Peter Mlynaryk, john Nichols, Dennis O'Connor, Frank Roebuck, Radha Sharma, 
Perry Stickels, Marco Tonietti 
Department of Management: Granville Hough, Chairman 
Fred Colgan, james Conant, Leo Guolo, William Hellwig, Ramchand Kirpalani, Michael Lockareff, 
Leland McCloud, Kent McKee, Richard Mushegain, Forrest Pine, Donald Shaul, Richard Sylvester, 
john Trego, Edgar Wiley 

Department of Marketing: Richard Buskirk, Acting Chairman 
William Bell, Lynn Harris, Raymond johnson, Irene Lange, Robert Olsen, Allan Robarts, Frank 
Roberts, Edward Tauber 

Department of Quantitative Methods: David Stoller, Chairman 
Cary Bloom, Gerald Brown, Wen Chow, Ronald Colman, Ben Edmondson, William Heitzman, 
james Hightower, Marshall McFie, Demetrios Michalopoulos, Phillip Mitchell, Frederick Mueller, 
Herbert Rutemiller, LaVerne Stanton, Donnamaie White 

Academic Objectives of the School 

The faculty of the school believes that it can best optimize its effectiveness in achieving the broad 
educational objective of the university by concentrating its energies on the exploration and teaching 
of relevant concepts, principles and practices. Including interrelationships. Additionally, the faculty 
recognizes the need for integrating and relating the various disciplines into a balanced and thought- 
provoking educational experience for the student. While considerable emphasis must be placed on 
the need for breadth of knowledge and creativity In thought and actions, there must also be emphasis 
on exploration and analysis in some depth of those disciplines most relevant to the business 
profession. These disciplines are recognized to be interrelated and are to be Integrated through the 
application of economics, behavioral and quantitative sciences, systems theories and concepts, 
decision theories, computer sciences, logic, and theoretical and applied research methodology. 

In addition, the faculty of the school has set forth specific objectives for its curriculum and related 
programs. A summary statement of these objectives is as follows: 

1 . Educational and Professional 

Through a study of the various theoretical and practical business and economic models, 
policies and procedures, each student is to be afforded and provided with technical expertise 
in a chosen discipline — accounting, economics, finance, management, marketing, quantitative 
methods and business education — to a depth acceptable to prospective employers for begin- 
ning professional employment. 

2. Human and Ethical 

A major part of effective society and business leadership is related to organization and direction 
of human resources to achieve general and specific goals. Therefore, a knowledge of human 
values — the ethical, psychological and sociological foundation for human behavior is essen- 
tial. This includes an awareness and understanding of the nature of human values, of individual 
goals and the forces which lead to their achievement; the function of leadership in relating 
individual and enterprise goals; the Impact of group dynamics, informal organizations, and 
interpersonal relationships on the administrative process; and the need for a personal code of 
ethics. 


n-t I ISO 


138 Business A dministration 

3. Socioeconomic, Political and Cultural Environment 

Firms do not operate in a vacuum, and information about the external forces and constraints 
which bear on the enterprise comprises a necessary body of knowledge for competent business 
planners and administrators. In particular, development of economic literacy to support rational 
choice; recognition of economic implications resulting from economic policy decisions by 
various levels of government; and a conceptualization of the impact of the various institutions 
on the enterprise and the impact of business leadership decisions on the social system as a 
whole are stressed. 

Undergraduate Program in Business Administration and Economics 

In our ever-expanding, complex society, the managers of tomorrow must be men and women with 
breadth of understanding and vision. Students who concentrate in a special area are encouraged to 
elect courses in other divisions of the university, particularly in the area of the behavioral, social, 
and political sciences, and foreign languages. It is assumed that the first half of their university work 
toward a bachelor's degree represents a required basic education in communication, mathematics, 
a laboratory science, social science and the humanities. Since the understanding of mathematics is 
becoming increasingly important in business and the social sciences, students who contemplate 
enrollment in either business administration or economics are encouraged to take four years of high 
school mathematics. College algebra, or three years of high school mathematics including a second 
course in algebra, will be a minimum prerequisite for entrance to the program. 

If credits for either or both elementary accounting and principles of economics have not been 
earned, it will be necessary to enroll in these courses the first semester of the junior year. 
Students enrolled in the school and working toward a university degree are subject to the general 
requirements of the university as to courses and credit hours required for graduation. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The degree requirements are as follows: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 50 semester credit hours in business administration and economics 
courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics, of which 35 semester credit 
hours must be upper division courses. 

2. Completion of at least six of the 12 units of concentration and 15 of the last 24 units are required 
in residence in the School of Business Administration and Economics for the B.A. degree. 

3. Completion of the required core courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

4. Completion of 12 semester credit hours of required courses in an area of concentration to be 
selected by the student. 

5. Completion of at least 62 semester credit hours in areas other than business administration. 
Students may elect to apply economics core courses outside the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics to fulfill this requirement. 

6. Students must attain at least a 2.0 grade point average (C average) in all university work attempt- 
ed, in all courses taken in the School of Business Administration and Economics, and in his area 
of concentration. 

CORE: The business administration and economics courses listed below are required of all students 
majoring in business administration: 


Lower Division: Units 

Eco 200A,B or 210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acc 201 A,B Elementary Accounting 6 

QM 265 Computer Methods 3 

Upper Division: 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory or Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeco- 
nomic Theory! 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Man 341 Organization and Management Theory 3 

Man 346 Business Law 3 


t Students should ascertain departmental requirement. 


J7-* 1 *15 


Business Administration 139 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 360 Mathematical Methods in Business and Economics or QM 363 Manage- 
ment Sciences* 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Man 449 Seminar in Business Policies** 3 


3a-39 

AREAS OF CONCENTRATION FOR MAJORS IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

A student in business administration should select an area of concentration by the second semester 
of the junior year and take the required courses in the area. 

Accounting 

301 A, B Intermediate Accounting 

302 Cost Accounting 

And at least one of the following courses: 

308 Federal Income Tax 

401 Advanced Accounting 

402 Auditing 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems 
Economics 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 
320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 
Economics Elective, 400-level 
Management 446 Managerial Economics 


Finance 

331 Financial Analysis 

And at least three additional courses offered by the Finance Department 

Management 

In consonance with university and school objectives, the major goals of the Management Depart- 
ment are to: 

1. Provide students with foundational competence In the utilization of the factors of production. 

2. Develop in each student an understanding of the theory and practices needed for successful 
performance in managerial and staff positions in business, government and the community. 

3. Provide students with a knowledge of human values — the ethical, psychological and sociologi- 
cal foundation for human behavior, and the impact of group dynamics, informal organizations, 
and interpersonal relationships on the administrative process. 

Students with an area of concentration in management must choose one of the four following 
emphases: 

'Administrative Management Emphasis: Designed for students interested in all aspects of business or 
•n general supervision of organized activity. 

342 Production Operations 

343 Personnel Management 
AAA Management of Systems 

446 Managerial Economics or AA7 Management Decision Games 
^porations Management Emphasis: Designed for students who have interest in and aptitude for 
^3naging new projects and production operations in both manufacturing and non-manufacturing. 
342 Production Operations 

445 Advanced Production Operations 

340 Fundamentals of Behavioral Science for Management or 343 Personnel Management 

446 Managerial Economics or 447 Management Decision Games 

^ ^Students taking quantitative methods as their area of corKentration will take QM 363, Management Science. 

** Students taking business economics as their area of concentration will take Eco 410, Government and Business— in lieu of Man 
^9, Business Policies. 


140 


Business Administration 


Industrial Relations Emphasis:* Designed for students interested in industrial relations or in manag- 
ing labor unions as organized enterprises. 

343 Personnel Management 
444 Management of Systems 

441 Labor-Management Relations 

442 Labor Law 

Behavioral Science for Management Emphasis:* Designed for students interested in interpersonal 
relations and group leadership opportunities in all organizations but specifically found in manpower 
management, small business, hospital and welfare administration, and organizations carrying out 
social change. 

340 Fundamentals of Behavioral Science for Management 
343 Personnel Management 

443 Dynamics of Individual, Interpersonal, and Croup Behavior for Management 

444 Management of Systems 

Marketing 

353 Marketing Administration 
452 Marketing Research 

459 Marketing Problems 
A minimum of one of the following courses: 

352 Principles of Retailing 

354 Principles of Advertising 

355 Credit and Credit Administration 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing 

357 Industrial Purchasing 

358 Physical Distribution 
454 Advertising Problems 

457 Quantitive Marketing Analysis 

458 International Marketing 

Quantitative Methods 

The objective of the Quantitative Methods Department is to prepare the student to utilize quantita- 
tive information and methods effectively in evaluating alternatives and making decisions. Emphasis 
is placed on the theory and practice of quantitative methods, especially those topics contributed by 
the disciplines of computer science, operations research and statistics. 

Students with a quantitative methods concentration are required to take Math 150A,B, Calculus,! 
QM 461, Advanced Statistics, and at least three courses in a study plan approved by the student's 
adviser. These courses may include any of the following, as well as approved courses in other 
disciplines. 

Computer Science 

364 Computer Logic and Programming 

382 Information Structures and Machine Language Programming 
446 Computer Programming Theory 

464 Information Retrieval and Natural Language Processing 

484 Computer Assisted Instruction 

485 Programming Systems and Programming Language Processing 

486 Automata Theory 

487 Artificial Intelligence 
Operations Research 

448 Digital Simulation 

465 Linear Programming 

466 Nonlinear Programming 

490 Stochastic Process Models in Business and Industry 

• The student must complete two of the following collateral courses for this emphasis; 

Speech Communication 324 Dynamics of Small Croup Discussion 
Speech Communication 333 Communication in Business and Industry 
Psychology 351 Social Psychology 
Sociology 473 Complex Organizations 

t Quantitative methods concentration students shall substitute QM 363 for QM 360 in their business core. Math 150A,B may be taken 
with the credit/no credit option. 


Business Administration 141 


Statistics 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications 

467 Statistical Quality Control 

469 Reliability Statistics 

475 Multivariate Analysis 

A student majoring in quantitative methods may also elect to minor in computer science. For details 
concerning the Bachelor of Science in Computer Science and the minor in computer science see 
page 165. 

BUSINESS EDUCATION 

Students who wish to major in business administration in preparation for a career as a secondary 
school teacher in business subjects must meet the requirements of the School of Business Administra- 
tion and Economics and the secondary school teacher education program including the require- 
ments for the proper credential as outlined in the catalog. 

The requirements for a major in this area are as follows: 

1. The core requirements as set forth for all business administration majors, page 138. 

2. Twelve hours of advanced work in one of the six areas of concentration: 

a. Accounting 

b. Economics 

c. Finance 

d. Management 

e. Marketing 

f. Quantitative methods 

3. Meet the school's minimum requirement of 50 credit hours in business administration and 
economics courses. 

4. A maximum of 12 credit hours in the secretarial field, including those applied as electives, may 
count toward the degree in business administration and economics. t 

5. Completion of at least 62 credit hours in areas other than business administration and econom- 
ics are required for the degree. 

Education courses required for a credential will be detailed by the School of Education. 

The requirements for a minor in this area are as follows: 

Units 

Eco 200A,B or 210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acc 201 A, B Elementary Accounting ^ 

QM 264 Computer Programming ^ 

One of the following: 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing ^ 

Fin 330 Business Finance ^ 

Man 346 Business Law ^ 

QM 265 Computer Methods ^ ^ 

Educ 442 Teaching Business in Secondary School 2 

+ Electives ^ 

23-24 


master of business administration 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully "The Program of Master s Degrees, 
page 71, and consult the Graduate Bulletin, particularly the "Steps in the Master's Degree Program." 
Note: The School of Business Administration and Economics requires that a student be classified in 
order to enroll in graduate courses (500-level) or receive prior permission from the associate dean, 
graduate programs in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

t The university does not offer work in secretarial training, typewriting, or business machines. Consult the dean of the School of 
Business Administration and Economics to arrange for transfer of approved courses to satisfy these r^uirements. 

X A maximum of six units of secretarial courses, including those applied as electives, may count toward the minor in business 
education. 


142 


Business Administration 


Programs of Study 

The School of Business Administration and Economics offers two plans for the M.B.A. degree. 
Plan I is a broad, integrated program designed primarily for students with an undergraduate degree 
in a field other than business administration. To insure breadth in the program, the student is not 
permitted to take more than nine units in any one functional area. 

Plan II is an integrated program allowing some concentration in an area of specialization. Under this 
plan the student is required to complete 12 units in an area of concentration. It is designed primarily 
for students with baccalaureate degrees in business administration. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Business Administration 
degree follow: 

Admission as an Unclassified Graduate Student 

1. Apply for admission to the university in unclassified graduate status and declare the objective 
to be an M.B.A. Plan I or an M.B.A. Plan II. If the student specifies the M.B.A. Plan II, he must 
also specify his area of concentration. This must be accomplished at the Office of Admissions 
and Records before the dates established in the college calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the M.B.A. program and secure informal advisement from the Graduate 
Office of the School of Business Administration and Economics. The informal advisement 
should occur at least three weeks prior to your first registration, but in any event during the 
first semester of work. 

3. Complete the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business with a minimum score of 450. 

Admission to Classified Graduate Status 

Admission to classified status in the graduate program of the School of Business Administration and 
Economics, California State University, Fullerton requires: 

1 . A bachelor's degree from a fully accredited college or university. 

2. A least a 2.75 CPA on the last 50 percent of coursework at the undergraduate level.* 

3. Completion of the Admission Test for Graduate Study in Business with a minimum score of 
450. 

4. Completion of all prerequisite courses within a seven-year period prior to being classified with 
an overall CPA of 3.0 and with no grade lower than a C. 

5. Satisfactory completion of a classification test on prerequisite courses. 

6. Application for classified status in the office of the dean of graduate studies. 

7. Approval by the associate dean, graduate programs. School of Business Administration and 
Economics and the dean of graduate studies. 

PLAN I 

Prerequisites 

Units 


QM 265 Computer Methods ** 3 

Acc 300 Accounting Fundamentals 3 

Eco 300 Basic Economics 3 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Man 341 Organization and Management Theory 3 

Man 346 Business Law 3 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Total 24 


• Students not meeting this grade-point criteria may elect to be evaluated on the 60 sequential semester units, or equivalent, 
immediately preceding application for classified status, provided that these 60 units are approved by the School of Business 
Administration and Economics. A 3.0 CPA is required on these 60 units. 

•• Math 120, Elementary Probability, and QM 264, Computer Programming, will satisfy the mathematics and programming require- 
ments of QM 265, respectively. 


Business Administration 143 


Curriculum 

Candidates under the M.B.A. Plan I Program are required to complete 30 units of which 6 units are 
electives. The required 24 units under this option are: 

Required Courses 

Acc 500 Seminar in Industrial Accounting! 

Acc 501 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 

Eco 510 Competition, Monopoly and Public Policy 

Eco 512 Comparative Economics Seminar 

Fin 532 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 

Man 544 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 

Mar 551 Seminar in Marketing Problems 

QM 560 Operations Research or 

QM 563 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis 

Elective Courses 

In addition to the required courses, six units shall be selected from courses offered in the School 
of Business Administration and Economics at the 400 or 500 level. These courses must be approved 
by the associate dean, graduate programs. Under no circumstances is a 300-level course acceptable 
on the M.B.A. study plan. Further, no more than nine units (combined elective and required) may 
be selected from any one department. 


PLAN II 

Prerequisites Units 

QM 265 Computer Methods* 3 

Acc 201 A,B Elementary Accounting 6 

Eco 200A,B or Eco 210 Principles of Economics 5-6 

Fin 330 Business Finance 3 

Man 341 Organization and Management Theory 3 

Man 346 Business Law 3 

Mar 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics 3 

Total 29-30 


In addition to the prerequisites listed above, each student will be held responsible to the department 
of his choice for the specialized undergraduate background (prerequisites) prescribed for that area 
of concentration. The area of concentration shall be selected from finance, management, marketing 
and quantitative methods. 

Curriculum 

Candidates under the M.B.A. Plan II Program are required to complete 30 units of which 18 are core 
requirements and 12 are in the student's area of concentration: 

Core 

Acc 500 Seminar in Industrial Accounting or 

Acc 501 Seminar in Administrative Accounting 

Eco 510 Competition, Monopoly and Public Policy or 

Eco 512 Comparative Economics Seminar 

Fin 532 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management 

Man 544 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration 

Mar 551 Seminar in Marketing Problems 

QM 560 Operations Research or 

QM 563 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis 


t Accounting majors must substitute an acceptable course for Acc 500. 

• Math 120, Elementary Probability, and QM 264, Computer Programming, will satisfy the mathematics and programming require- 
ments of QM 265, resp)ectiveiy. 


144 


Business Administration 


Concentration 

In addition to the graduate core, each student shall elect an area of concentration of at least 12 units 
but not more than 15 units to be approved by an adviser, the department chairman concerned, and 
the associate dean, graduate programs of the school. At least 24 units must be at the 500 level. The 
remaining 6 units may be at either the 400 level or the 500 level. Under no circumstances is a 
300- level course acceptable on an M.B.A. study plan. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Completion of 12 credit hours of graduate work of which 6 units must be 500-level with a 
minimum grade point average of 3.0. 

2. Completion of an application form in the office of the dean of graduate studies. Approval must 
be given by the adviser, the associate dean, graduate programs, of the School of Business 
Administration and Economics and the dean of graduate studies. 

Completion 

Candidates for the M.B.A. must complete the prescribed coursework of 30 units (at least 24 of which 
must be at the 500 level). They must satisfactorily pass a terminal evaluation and must receive the 
endorsement of the faculty of the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Plan / — Terminal Evaluation 

Plan I students are required to participate in a management decision simulation for their terminal 
evaluation. 

Plan II — Terminal Evaluation 

Plan II students must complete the terminal evaluation required by their department. 

For further information, consult the School of Business Administration and Economics Graduate 
Handbook, and/or the associate dean, graduate programs, in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics. See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The economics major is designed to prepare students for positions in business, education, and 
government, and for graduate work in economics and related disciplines. 

Advanced Placement Program in Economics 

An Advanced Placement Program in Economics has been established by the Department of Eco- 
nomics, the Center for Economic Education, and the Center's affiliated Leadership Croup of High 
School Teachers of Economics. Three semester-units of university academic credit in principles of 
economics ar7c/ advanced placement are offered to students taking economics in high school who 
enroll in the program and pass the Advanced Placement Examination in Economics given at the 
university at the end of each fall and spring semester. To enroll in the program contact Dr. Norman 
Townshend-Zellner, director. Center for Economic Education. 

Requirements 

Required of all students for the degree: 

1 . Completion of 41 semester credit hours of courses in economics and business administration 
of which 27 semester credit hours must be in upper division courses. At least 1 5 semester 
hours must be completed in residence in the School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics. 

2. Completion of the major course requirements for economics majors as listed below. Students 
in economics are required to take Quantitative Methods 265 or equivalent as prerequisite to 
Quantitative Methods 361. 

3. Completion of at least 62 semester credit hours in areas other than economics and business 
administration. 

4. Students must attain at least 2.0 grade-point average in all college or university work attempt- 
ed, and in ail courses in the School of Business Administration and Economics. 

Business administration and economics courses required of all students majoring in economics are 
listed below: 


S7-C I m 


Business Administration 


145 


Lower Division Units 

Eco 210 or 200A,B Principles of Economics 5-6 

Acc 201 A,B Elementary Accounting or Mathematics 150A,B Analytic Geometry and 

Calculus 6-8 

QM 265 Computer Methods 3 


Total 14_17 

Upper Division 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Eco 420 Money and Banking 3 

QM 361 Statistical Methods In Business and Economics 3 

QM 360 Mathematical Methods in Business and Economics or Mathematics 150A 

Analytic Geometry and Calculus 3 

Fifteen hours of upper division electives in economics approved by the student's 

adviser 15 

Total 30-31 


MINOR IN ECONOMICS 

A minor In economics may be achieved by taking the following courses: 


Units 

Eco 210 or 200A,B Principles of Economics 5-6 

Eco 310 Intermediate Microeconomic Theory 3 

Eco 320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory 3 

Electives 9 


Total 20-21 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ECONOMICS 

The Master of Arts in Economics is a part-time, evening (and late-afternoon ) degree program, 
designed especially for candidates who will be employed full or part-time while working for the M.A. 
degree. 

The procedural steps for admission to, and completion of, the Master of Arts in Economics follow. 
Admission Requirements 

1 . Apply for admission to the university In unclassified graduate status and declare the objective 
to be a Master of Arts In Economics degree. This must be accomplished at the Office of 
Admissions before the dates established in the university calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the Master of Arts in Economics program. Please read carefully page 
71, and secure informal advisement from the graduate office of the School of Business Adminis- 
tration and Economics. The informal advisement should occur at least three weeks prior to your 
first registration, but in any event during the first semester of work. Specific admission require- 
ments include: 

a. An overall grade-point average in all undergraduate work of not less than 2.7. 

b. Completion of QM 265, Computer Methods, and QM 360, Mathematical Methods in Business 
and Economics, or QM 264, Computer Programming, and one semester of calculus. 

c. Satisfactory level of performance on the Graduate Record Examination (verbal and quantita- 
tive), aptitude only. 

Prerequisites 

Acceptance into the program requires the completion of the following prerequisite courses, or 
equivalent: 

1 . For students without an undergraduate major in economics (a grade-point average of not less 
than 3.0 in the following prerequisites is required): 


U-t 1 30 


146 A ccounting 

Units 


Principles of Economics ^ 

Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis 3 

Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis 3 

Statistics (analytical) 3 

Money and Banking 3 

Total 1 8 


2. For students with an undergraduate major in economics: 24 semester units of work in econom- 
ics or related courses (e.g., statistics), with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0. The 24 units 
must include the following courses or their equivalent, with a minimum grade of 3.0 in each 
course: Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis, Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis, Statis- 
tics (analytical). Money and Banking. 

Program of Study 

1. A core of 12 graduate units in economics is required: 

Units 


Eco 502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis 3 

Eco 503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis 3 

Eco 505 Methodology in Economic Research Seminar 3 

Eco 506 Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic 

Applications (proyecr required) 3 

Total 12 


2. In addition to the core, 18 units of electives are required as follows: 

a. Eighteen units of electives at the 400 or 500 level, with a minimum of six and a maximum 
of 12 in a field outside of but related to economics. 

b. At least nine units of electives must be at the 500 level, six of which must be in economics. 

c. If nine or more units are taken in fields outside of economics, at least three units must be 
at the 500 level. 

For further information^ consult the School of Business Administration and Economics Graduate 
Handbook and I or the associate dean, graduate programs, in the School of Business Administration 
and Economics. See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ACCOUNTING COURSES 

201A,B Elementary Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 A must be taken before taking 201 B. Accounting concepts and tech- 
niques essential to the administration of a business enterprise; accounting as a process of measur- 
ing and communicating economic information; analyzing and recording financial transactions; 
preparation of financial statements; analysis and interpretation of financial statements; introduc- 
tion to manufacturing accounts and reports; the interaction of accounting with the areas of 
finance, quantitative methods, interpersonal relations, motivation, and data-information systems. 

300 Accounting Fundamentals (3) 

Basic fundamentals of accounting as they apply to the accumulation, organization, and interpretation 
of financial and quantitative data relevant to the activities of the corporate business enterprise. 
The interaction of accounting with the areas of finance, interpersonal relations, motivation, and 
data-information systems. The fund flow statement. Not open to undergraduate students. 

301A,B Intermediate Accounting (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. The quantification, recording, and presentation of balance sheet and 
income statement items with particular emphasis on the corporate type of organization; state- 
ment of application of funds; cash flow statement; basic concepts of accounting theory; interpre- 
tation of financial statements. 

302 Cost Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. The development of accounting information for management of 
manufacturing enterprises; cost records; cost behavior and allocation; standard costs; and an 
introduction to cost control. 


Accounting 147 


303 Governmental Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: one course in accounting. A consideration of the accounts and reports of nonprofit 
institutions, municipalities, state and federal governments; organization, procedures, budgets. 

304 Managerial Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Intended for students whose area of concentration is not accounting. 
Analysis, interpretation, and application of accounting information for managerial decision mak- 
ing; budgets and budgetary control; special-purpose reports; differential cost analyses. 

305 Elements of Accounting (3) 

Intended for students whose area of concentration is not accounting but computer science. Account- 
ing concepts essential to the administration of a business enterprise; accounting as a process of 
measuring and communicating economic information; interaction of accounting with the areas 
of finance, quantitative methods, interpersonal relations, and motivation. Special emphasis on 
interaction of accounting with computers. Relationship of accounting to decision making. Not 
open to students majoring In business administration or economics. 

307 Distribution Costs (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B and Marketing 351. The development of quantitative measures for 
marketing activity; costs of distributing through different channels of distribution, advertising vs. 
personal selling, and movement activities; development of sales budgets, standard costs, and the 
analysis of actual perfomance In the light of budgets and standards. 

308 Federal Income Tax (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B. Basic consideration of the history, theory, and accounting aspects 
of federal income taxation. 

401 Advanced Accounting (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 301 B. A study of partnerships, statements for special purposes, receiver- 
ships, consolidated financial statements, branch accounting and foreign exchange. 

402 Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B and 302. Nature of an audit, auditing standards and procedures, audit 
reports; professional ethics and responsibilities of the independent public accountant; introduc- 
tion to internal auditing. 

4% Cost Control (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 302. A study of current and persistent problems in cost accounting; theories 
of cost allocation and absorption; flexible budgeting; responsibility accounting; and distribution 
cost control. 

407 Integrated Data Processing Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B or 300 and QM 264 or 265. Integrated systems for the collection, 
processing, and transmission of information; aspects of the information service function; feasibil- 
ity studies; case studies of operating systems. 

^ Problems in Taxation (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 308. Research in problems of taxation with emphasis on income taxes as 
they relate to corporations, partnerships and fiduciaries. 

W C.P.A. Problems and Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 401 , or consent of the instructor. Selected problems and questions as found 
in the uniform C.P.A. examination; preparation, analysis and revision of financial statements, 
assets, liabilities and ownership equities; Income determination; cost accounting, governmental 
and institutional accounting; accounting theory. 

W Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

^99 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by department chairman. Open to qualified undergradu- 
ate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Seminar in Industrial Accounting (3) - . 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B, or 300, classified M.B.A. status and consent ot the instructor. 
Accounting information for industrial management; elements of manufacturing cost; cost sys- 
tems; standard costs; cost reports; distribution cost analysis. 


148 


Economics 


501 Seminar in Administrative Accounting (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 302, 304, or 500; classified M.B.A. status; and consent of instructor. The 
integrative aspects of accounting, financial, and other quantitative data for managerial decision- 
making; long-term and short-term profit planning; budgetary control; cost analysis; financial 
analysis and planning; taxation; and transfer pricing; and how they relate to management policy 
formulation and implementation. 

502 Seminar in Accounting Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 301 B, classified M.B.A. status and consent of the instructor. The concepts 
and theory of accounting; the effects of professional, governmental, business, and social forces 
on the evolution of accounting theory. 

503 Seminar in Contemporary Financial Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisites; Accounting 502 and classified M.B.A. status. A critical examination of the current 
problems and areas of controversy in financial accounting. 

504 Seminar in Contemporary Managerial Accounting Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 500 or 302, classified M.B.A. status and consent of the instructor. A critical 
examination of the current problems and areas of controversy in managerial accounting. 

505 Seminar in Auditing (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 402 and classified M.B.A. status. Auditing theory and practices; profes- 
sional ethics; auditing standards; SEC and stock exchange regulations; auditor's legal liability; 
statement trends and techniques. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor, and approval by department chairman. 
May be repeated for credit. 


BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION COURSES 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core, senior standing and consent of instructor. Application of 
research methods: selection and identification of a problem, determining a method of approach, 
collection and analysis of relevant data, eliciting conclusions and solutions. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. The changing role of capitalism and 
its control in the United States, European countries and japan. The trends as to Government 
policy and action, relative to private ownership and coordinated economic planning. 


ECONOMICS COURSES 

101 The American Economy (3) (Formerly 201) 

A course specifically designed for non-majors with the purpose of introducing basic economic 
analysis and its application to problems such as unemployment, inflation, growth, inequality, 
discrimination, pollution, war and other public issues. Not open to students majoring in business 
administration or economics. 

200A Principles of Economics (3) (Formerly 100A) 

An introduction to the principles that underlie all economic analysis. Emphasis is on those forces 
that determine national income and the rates of employment, inflation, and growth. Includes a 
study of the role of money and financial capital in the economy. 




Economics 151 


200B Principles of Economics (3) (Formerly 100B) 

An introduction to the principles that underlie all economic analysis. Emphasizes the allocation of 
resources by examining the behavior of markets, firms and industries. 

210 Principles of Economics (5) (Formerly 200) 

Prerequisite: open only to junior transfers. (Duplicates 200A,B). An introduction to the principles 
of economic analysis and policy including the central problem of scarcity, basic economic 
institutions of the United States, resource allocation and income distribution, economic stability 
and growth, and the role of public policy. 

222 Economics of Utopia (3) 

An economic analysis of utopian thought and attempts to create ideal economic systems. Emphasis 
is placed on the importance of economic structure and environment to the performance of 
utopian experiments. 

300 Basic Economics (3) 

A concentrated study of the principles of economic analysis and policy and the basic economic 
institutions of the United States. Not open to undergraduate students. 

301 Economic Principles (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150A,B or equivalent. An introduction to economic principles for students who 
have a strong quantitative background, and who have a special interest in the technical areas 
of engineering and computer science. Not open to students majoring in business administration 
or economics. 

310 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economic 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. An analysis and evaluation of (1) rational 
decision-making behavior of consumers and firms and (2) price and output determination in 
markets; with special emphasis placed on the use of cases and problems to illustrate the applica- 
tion of the analysis to the contemporary scene. 

320 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 2(X)A,B or 210 or equivalent. The explanation and evaluation of the determi- 
nants of the level and fluctuations of such economic aggregates as national income and employ- 
ment, with stress placed on the use of problems Involving the application of analytical tools to 
modern macroeconomic issues. 

324 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. A study of the structure and operation of 
commercial banks and financial institutions including a consideration of the impact of money and 
capital market developments on economic activity. Not open to economics majors. 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. A study of alternative economic systems with 
regard to their theoretical foundations, actual economic institutions, and achievements and 
failures. The contrast between socialist and capitalist systems will be emphasized. 

331 The Soviet Economy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. An analytical evaluation of Soviet economic 
development including the structure and performance of the Soviet economy and problems of 
planning and control. 

332 Economic Problems of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. Analysis of the natural resources, population, 
agricultural. Industrial, transportation, communications, monetary, banking, etc. problems of Asia 
I.e. China, japan, etc. and the Asian subcontinent. The relations of non-economic problems to 
the economic are considered in detail. 

333 Economic Development: Analysis and Case Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. An examination of the processes of economic 
growth with special references to developing areas. Considers capital formation, resource alloca- 
tion, relation to the world economy, economic planning and institutional factors, with appropri- 
ate case studies. 

334 Economics of Poverty, Race and Discrimination (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 2(X)A,B or 210 or equivalent; Economics 101 will be accepted as the 
prerequisite with permission of the instructor. An economic analysis of the problems and policies 
dealing with poverty, race and discrimination. A field investigation or project Is required of each 
student. 


152 Economics 


350 American Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. The development of American economic 
institutions with special emphasis on economic problems, economic growth, and economic 
welfare. 

351 European Economic History (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. The evolution of European economic institu- 
tions and their relation to the development of industry, commerce, transfjortation, and finance 
in the principal European countries. 

360 Economics of Location (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. The theory and principles underlying the 
location of economic activity. 

361 Urban Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. Theory and analysis of the urban economy, 
urban economic problems and policy. 

365 Public Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B, or 210 or equivalent. A study of government finance at the federal, 
state, and local levels with particular reference to the impact of taxation and spending on 
resource allocation, income distribution, stabilization and growth. 

370 Economics of Research, Development and Technological Change (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 200A,B or 210 or equivalent. Examination of the importance of R & D and 
technological change in the economy; concepts, issues, and major figures in the study of eco- 
nomics of technology; analytical techniques for the assessment of technological change; and 
evaluation of the impacts of technological change. 

410 Government and Business (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An economic study of business organization, conduct and performance 
followed by an analysis of the rationale and impact of public policy on various segments of 
business and business activities, including the regulated industries, sick industries and antitrust 
policy. 

411 International Trade (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An examination of the theory of international trade and the means and 
significance of balance of payments adjustments, with an analysis of past and present develop- 
ments in international commercial and monetary policy. 

412 Labor Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 310. An analysis of the basic economic and institutional influences operating 
In labor markets. Considers relevant aspects of resource allocation. Income distribution, econom- 
ic stability and growth. 

420 Money and Banking (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the money supply process and the impact of monetary 
policy on economic activity. 

421 Monetary and Fiscal Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 320. A study of the techniques of monetary and fiscal policy and an appraisal 
of their relative roles in promoting economic stability and growth. 

440 Introduction to Econometrics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310, 320 and QM 360 or Math 150A. Development of advanced statistical 
methods and their application in economic research. Advanced concepts in model building; 
development of different types of economic models. The use and effect of economic models in 
public policy. 

441 Introduction to Mathematical Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310, 320 and QM 360 or Math 150A. Selected topics in economic theory, 
drawn from microeconomics and macroeconomics. Content varying from year to year but with 
emphasis on constrained optimization problems and rational decision-making. 

450 History of Economic Thought (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 310 and 320. A study of the development of economic thought as reflected 
in the evolution of major schools of thought and of leading individual economists as they 
influenced economic thought and policy. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 


Economics 153 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: economics major or concentration, senior standing and approval by the department 
chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent 
inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

502 Advanced Microeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 210 or 200A,B and 310. An advanced theoretical formulation of the princi- 
ples of the determination of prices and outputs of goods and productive services in a market 
system. Topics include: consumer choice, demand, production, cost, the equilibrium of the firm 
and the market and distribution. 

503 Advanced Macroeconomic Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 210 or 200A,B and 320. Advanced theory of the determination of employ- 
ment, fluctuations of real and money income and the forces underlying economic growth. 

505 Methodology in Economic Research Seminar (3) 

Applications of statistical and econometric techniques in economic analysis. Emphasis Is on practical 
problems in empirical research. Topics include statistical analyses of demand functions, con- 
sumption functions, cost and production functions, and models of national income determina- 
tion. Practical problems involved In using multiple regression analysis are examined. 

506 Seminar in Micro- and Macroeconomic Applications (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 502, 503, and 505. Complements the study of methodology in economic 
research. Students select approved topics and via independent investigation, seminar presenta- 
tion and critique develop their analytical and research abilities, culminating with an acceptable 
paper. 

510 Competition, Monopoly and Public Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 300 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Seminar devoted to an 
examination of the economic implications of various forms of market structure and business 
conduct and considers the application of public policy to various segments of business and 
business activities, including antitrust policy and regulation of business. (Not open to Economics 
M.A. candidates.) 

511 Economic Problems and Public Policy (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 300 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Seminar devoted to an 
examination of the nature and implication of the major economic problems facing the economy 
and an evaluation of current and alternative policies for their solution. Problems considered will 
include price level stabilization, balance of payments equilibrium, economic growth, and cyclical 
and technological unemployment. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

512 Comparative Economics Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 300 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. A comparative study of 
various analytical and prescriptive approaches to economic problems of scarcity, development, 
fiscal and monetary policy, planning and poverty. (Not open to Economics M.A. candidates.) 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

5% Selected Topics in Economic Analysis and Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 2(X)A,B or 210, 310 and 320. Seminar: Selected topics in economic analysis 
and policy will be covered in depth, with special emphasis on contemporary research and 
materials. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Projects (3) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed Independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Open to qualified graduate students. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing, consent of instructor, and approval by department chairman. Open 
to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 


154 Finance 


FINANCE COURSES 

324 Money and Banking (3) 

(Same as Economics 324) 

330 Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Accounting 201 B or 300. Financing business enterprises; financial planning and control; 
analysis of alternative sources and uses of combinations of short-, intermediate- and long-term 
debt and equity. Cost of capital. Study of capital investment decisions; capital budget analysis 
and valuation; working capital and capital structure management. 

331 Financial Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Development of techniques for internal financial control and their applica- 
tion to business situations. Capital costs and optimal capital investment decisions. Budgets and 
forecasts for projection of long-term profitable operations. Analysis of current financial models. 
Group problems and case studies. 

333 Personal Financial Management (3) 

Financial problems of the household in allocating resources and planning expenditures. Considera- 
tion of housing, insurance, installment buying, medical care, savings and investments. 

334 Principles of Insurance (3) 

Principles of life, casualty and liability Insurance, individual and group insurance programs; methods 
of establishing risks and rates. 

335 Security Investments (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Principles underlying the selection and management of portfolios, analysis 
of different types of securities; the role of mutual funds, investment trusts and other investment 
Institutions. Group problems and case studies. 

336 Principles and Practices of Real Estate (3) 

Survey of urban real estate principles and practices; structure and growth of cities; economic 
implication to real estate markets. Trends and factors affecting real property values, real estate 
financing and real estate law. Integrative cases and projects. Study of current urban models used 
in urban development. Group problems and case studies. 

401 Real Estate Research (2) 

Prerequisites: Finance 336 and 437 or 438 and concurrent enrollment for 1 unit of Finance 499. Group 
problems, laboratory work as determined by computer terminal availability. (2 hours lecture, 2 
hours laboratory) 

425 Commercial Bank and Financial Institution Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 330 and 331. Application of analytical techniques to the solution of financial 
institution problems. Major financial intermediaries and the broad range of decision-making 
problems they face: function, management operations, loan analysis. Investment policies, and 
liquidity problems. Regulation and its effect on management operations. Group problems and 
case studies. 

431 Capital and Money Markets (3) 

Role of capital and money markets in the American economy; markets for new corporate and 
government issues; secondary markets; interrelation of financial Institutions; factors influencing 
yields and security prices. 

433 Problems in Business Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 331 . Comprehensive case studies including group problems of estimating funds 
requirements, long-term financial planning, controlling and evaluating cash flows, and financing 
acquisitions and mergers. Croup problems and case studies. 

435 Security Analysis (3) 

Pirprequisite: Finance 335, or consent of Instructor. An advanced securities analysis course (with 
computer applications) developing various models of security valuation. A simulated portfolio 
management game is played during the latter part of the course. 


loi-t 1 nc 


Finance 155 


436 Legal Aspects of Real Estate (3) (Formerly Management 349) 

Prerequisites: Management 346 or equivalent area; Finance 336. Law of real property; types of 
ownership; titles and estates; transfers of interests; encumbrances; casements; fixtures; land sale 
contracts; recording; zoning; leases; responsibilities of real estate brokers. 

437 Real Estate Finance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 336 or consent of instructor. Sources and uses of capital in financing real estate 
transactions. Financial institutions and their effect on credit. Money and capital market conditions 
and their effect on credit availability and cost. Instruments of real estate finance. Real estate as 
an investment medium. Group problems and case studies. 

438 Real Estate Valuation (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 336 or consent of instructor. Theory of real property value, historical develop- 
ment; methods used in urban and rural property appraisals; special purp)ose appraisals. Croup 
problems, laboratory work as determined by computer terminal availability. 

439 Social Insurance (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Financial problems and policies in old age pensions, health insurance, 
unemployment Insurance, workman's compensation, and private pension plans. 

441 Business Conditions Analysis and Financial Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisite: Finance 330. Role of forecasting in financial management: effect of business fluctuations 
on financial planning; procedures for measuring changes in business activity; methods of fore- 
casting for the economy, the particular Industry, and the individual firm. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing and approval by the department chairman. Open to qualified under- 
graduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

532 Seminar in Corporate Financial Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 433 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Emphasis in this 
course is on the analysis of the financial decision-making process. Areas of emphasis include: 
management and control of current assets; evaluation of cash flows; financial forecasting and 
fund requirements; capital budgeting; cost of capital; dividend policies; and merger, acquisition, 
and valuation problems. Current financial theory and models. Case studies and seminar presenta- 
tions. 

533 Seminar in Financial Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 532 and classified M.B.A. status. Optimal financing and asset administration; 
advanced techniques of capital budgeting; application of analytical methods to the administration 
of the finance function of the business firm. 

534 Seminar in Financial Markets (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 431 or consent of the instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Structure and 
operation of major financial institutions; portfolio composition, price-cost problems, and market 
behavior; analysis of financial intermediation and interrelation of financial institutions and mar- 
kets. 

535 Seminar in Investment Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 435 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. Problems of invest- 
ment and portfolio management; concepts of risk evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of 
interest rate movements; investment timing; valuation of securities; regulation of securities mar- 
kets. 

^36 Seminar in Risk Management (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 334 and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques of risk management, structure of 
risk management, insurance planning and control, risk management programs. 

537 Seminar in Real Estate Investment (3) 

Prerequisites: Finance 330, 336 or equivalent and classified M.B.A. status. Problems of real estate 
investment; concepts of evaluation and investment criteria; analysis of real property values; real 
estate development and financing. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 


156 Management 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor, and approval by department chairman. 
May be repeated for credit. 


MANAGEMENT COURSES 

340 Fundamentals of Behavioral Science for Management (3) 

Prerequisites: general education requirements for social sciences. An analysis of interpersonal behav- 
ior of individuals and groups in organizations. Attention Is given to the social environment of 
business and to the systematic development of knowledge about human behavior, and Its 
implications for organizational design and management practice. 

341 Organization and Management Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200A,B or 210, or consent of instructor. Administrative processes and 
theories of organization; their applications in utility-creating business functions and operations. 
Concepts of planning and control, communication and Information systems, measures of effec- 
tiveness, and Interpersonal relationships. Relationship of business to the social and political 
environments. Management role of leadership in the creation of utility. 

342 Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites. Management 341 and QM 265. Fundamentals of production systems which combine 
materials, labor, and capital resources to produce a good or service. Analysis of systems, models 
and methods for management of production operations. Product and process development. Case 
studies stress utilization of computer decision models. 

343 Personnel Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of instructor. A study of the personnel function, its 
activities, and its problems. Emphasis upon management's responsibilities for selection, develop- 
ment and effective utilization of personnel. 

346 Business Law (3) 

The philosophy, institutions and role of the law in business and society, with emphasis upon the 
functions of courts and attorneys, and upon case studies in the areas of contracts and the law 
relating to the sale of goods. 

347 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 346 or equivalent. The philosophy, institutions and role of the law in 
business relationships, with emphasis upon case studies in the areas of agency, partnerships, 
corporations, bankruptcy, unfair competition and trade regulation. 

348 Business Law (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 346 or equivalent. The philosophy, institutions and role of the law in 
commercial and personal transactions, with emphasis upon case studies in the areas of personal 
property, bailments, commercial paper, secured transactions, real property, mortgages, trusts, 
community property, wills, estate administration and insurance. 

441 Labor-Management Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: Management 341 or consent of Instructor. The course provides an understanding of the 
impact of labor-management relations upon labor, management, and the public. Proper griev- 
ance procedure, collective bargaining, and the settlement of disputes are among the subjects that 
are examined. 

442 Labor Law (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 341, 346 or consent of instructor. The study of labor law and its effects 
upon American society. Federal and state legislation, and actions of regulatory bodies are 
explored by means of case studies. 


lU-C 1 6«0 


Management 157 

443 Dynamics of Individual, Interpersonal and Group Behavior for Management (3) 

Prerequisites; Management 340, 341 or consent of instructor. Case studies and current literature in 
the human problems of work situations. Special emphasis is focused on each participant gaining 
knowledge about himself: his motivation as a manager, his strengths as a communicator, areas 
where he can improve his interaction skills, and ways he can improve the interaction processes 
in groups where he serves as a leader. Laboratory work offers a practical approach to these areas, 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

444 Management of Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: QM core. The technology for managing programs, enterprises, and organizations as 
cybernetic systems. The course investigates the design and control of systems appropriate for 
product, project and program levels of analysis. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

445 Advanced Production Operations (3) 

Prerequisites: Management 342 and QM core. Planning and control methodologies for production 
operations. Quantitative approaches which integrate cost, schedule and technical performance 
criteria. Collection, evaluation and use of real-time information. Individual and group projects 
synthesize control systems for actual cases. 

446 Managerial Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM core. Economics 310 and Management 341, or consent of instructor. A study of 
the relationship of management tools to applied economics and statistics in the decision-making 
process; the use of cases and group problems to study the true economic meaning of cost, 
demand, supply, price, product and competition. 

447 Management Decision Games (3) 

Prerequisites: business administration core less Management 449, or consent of instructor. A simula- 
tion of an oligopolistic industry to provide the student with an opportunity, through group 
problems, to use statistics and other analytical tools to make managerial decisions in the function- 
al areas of management. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

449 Seminar in Business Policies (3) 

Prerequisites: three elective units from among Anthropology 202, Psychology 101, and Sociology 201 
or 471; Accounting 201 A,B; Finance 330; Management 341, Marketing 351; QM core, senior or 
graduate standing, and consent of instructor. Through an analysis of Integrative cases and 
problems from the viewpoint of top management, the student is encouraged to use his business 
and liberal arts training, especially his knowledge of business functions and operations, adminis- 
trative processes, organization theory, and policy formulation and administration. Individual and 
team efforts resolve decision-making policies and actions. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: management concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department chair- 
man. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. 
May be repeated for credit. 

341 Seminar in Project Operations Problem Solving (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. A seminar designed to focus atten- 
tion on application of system analysis and other dynamic techniques to current operations 
problems. Special projects are used to demonstrate application of concepts. 

542 Seminar in Labor Relations (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. Theories and philosophies of union- 
management relations in modern industrial society with attention to trends in nonindustrial 
organizations. Issues In collective bargaining contract administration, labor law, and government 
regulation. Discussion and analysis of literature. 

543 Seminar in Personnel Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and the consent of instructor. The seminar provides the 
graduate student with an opportunity to study cases, problems, and significant literature in the 
field in order to develop a comprehensive understanding of personnel administration and human 
relations. 

544 Seminar in Organizational Behavior and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. The analysis of human behavior in 
organization, studies In organizational theories, and administrative action. 


158 Marketing 

545 Seminar in Research and Development Project Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. Management of R&D projects. 
Techniques of preparing project proposals and assessing their economic worth. Project selection 
and review procedures based on performance, cost and marketing projections. Project program- 
ming and control. Establishing a creative environment. 

548 Seminar in International Management (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. Problems in managerial qualifications 
and training, political structure within and without the operations, foreign receptivity to United 
States business, organizing and controlling the international firm. Management in selected coun- 
tries is examined. 

549 Seminar in Policy Planning and Administration (3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and consent of instructor. Planning, implementing, and control- 
ling policy strategies to achieve objectives are considered. The executive's role in the overall 
operations of the enterprise and its resources are examined, and supported by cases, literature 
and training techniques in practice. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-^) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor and approval by department chairman. 
May be repeated for credit. 


MARKETING COURSES 

351 Principles of Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Economics 2(X)A,B or 210. Marketing organization and methods for the individual 
business with serious consideration of the social and economic aspects of the distribution task. 
Topics include the consumer, his place and his problems in the marketing area; marketing 
functions, institutions, and policies; legal and political environment for marketing activity; and 
an evaluation of the present marketing system. 

352 Principles of Retailing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Retail problems of location; organization; buying; selling media and 
methods; pricing; and merchandising. Emphasis will be placed upon operating procedures and 
control, planning, budgeting, and costs. 

353 Marketing Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Major problems facing the marketing executive, including product 
planning, pricing, market analysis, sales potentials, marketing organization, and administration of 
the sales force. 

354 Principles of Advertising (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The management of the advertising function, including the role of 
advertising in marketing strategy, budgetary considerations, allocation among media, measure- 
ment of effectiveness, administration and control, and its economic and social implications. 

355 Credit and Credit Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The general nature and functions of credit, credit instruments; the 
operation of the credit department; sources of credit information; acceptance of credit risk; 
establishment of credit limits; and the problem of collections. 

356 Creative Motivation in Marketing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351 . Personal salesmanship and the application of the findings of the behav- 
ioral sciences to selling and group dynamics as they relate to the creative and promotional 
aspects of the business. 


Marketing 159 


357 Industrial Purchasing (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The principles and practices of purchasing for industrial organizations. 
Major buying policies, sources of materials, quantity and quality considerations, and the relation 
to production cost. 

358 Physical Distribution (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. Consideration of the logistics problems of physically distributing pro- 
ducts and the principles and practices of solving them. An evaluation of the transportation and 
storage of products based on considerations of cost, time, and service. 

452 Marketing Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and QM 361. The application of scientific methodology as an aid in 
solving problems of product planning, pricing, promotion, and distribution. Practical application 
is emphasized through class projects and case problems. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

453 Marketing to the Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351. The marketing of defense and nondefense products to the government. 
The nature and administration of contractual agreements with government agencies. 

454 Advertising Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 354 or consent of instructor. Plus senior standing. Management of the 
advertising function in the marketing program. A study of the formulation of advertising policies, 
involving primarily an analysis of cases dealing with the role of advertising in marketing, the 
definition and choice of advertising objectives, strategy, appropriation policy, media selection, 
evaluation of advertising results, and the organization and implementation of the advertising 
program. Cases, simulations, and readings. 

457 Quantitative Marketing Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Accounting 201 B and Marketing 351. The development of quantitative measures for 
marketing activity; costs of distributing through different channels of distribution, advertising 
versus personal selling, and movement activities; development of sales budgets, standard costs, 
and the analysis of actual performance in the light of budgets and standards. 

458 International Marketing (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and 353; or consent of Instructor. Presents an analytical framework for 
studying the development of domestic marketing systems In the context of overall economic 
growth. Emphasis Is given to U. S. firms Involved In international marketing operations. 

459 Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisite: Marketing 351, 353 and 452; or consent of instructor. Case studies of problems facing 
the marketing executive; identification and analysis of the problems; selection and evaluation of 
alternative solutions; and implementation of recommended solutions. Micro/macro considera- 
tion of marketing problems facing the marketing executive, the consumer and the society. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: marketing concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department chairman. 
Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent inquiry. May 
be repeated for credit. 

551 Seminar in Marketing Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 351 and classified M.B.A. status. A managerial approach to the major 
marketing problems faced by industry: e.g., definition of and organization for the marketing task; 
demand analysis; decisions concerning product, price, promotion, and trade channels. A firm's 
adjustment to its marketing environment with emphasis on competitive strategy. The case ap- 
proach supplemented with simulations and topical readings. 

552 Seminar in Pricing and Price Policy (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 551 and classified M.B.A. status. A critical analysis of the pricing problems 
of a firm with alternative choices and diverse objectives. The pricing function will be examined 
from the standpoints of economic theory, management science, business practices, legal con- 
straints, and ethical considerations. Relationship of pricing objectives, policies, strategies, and 
methods to market behavior and the goals of the firm. Pricing policies among businesses and 
their economic and social implications. 


160 Quantitative Methods 

553 Seminar in Product Planning (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 551 and classified M.B.A. status. A course designed to assist marketing 
management in the formulation and execution of marketing plans for new and existing products. 
An examination of the management decision areas and procedures required for search, prelimi- 
nary evaluation, development and testing, and commercialization of products. Particular empha- 
sis on solving problems arising from product programs developed to assure corporate growth. 

554 Seminar in Promotion (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 551, 452, and classified M.B.A. status. A critical analysis of the promotion 
mix as employed by small, medium and large business organizations in their efforts to optimize 
profitable operations. Particular emphasis will be given to: determination of promotional goals, 
planning, budgeting, and controlling promotional programs; and measuring the effectiveness of 
the promotional effort. 

555 Seminar in Marketing Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 452, 551, consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. The application 
of scientific method to marketing decisions; research methodology and models; decision-making 
applications. 

556 Seminar in Consumer Behavior (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 551 and classified M.B.A. status. A critical analysis of theories underlying 
consumer behavior. The orientation is on understanding and predicting consumer behavior. 

559 Seminar in Marketing Thought and Concepts (3) 

Prerequisites: Marketing 551 and classified M.B.A. status. Application of theoretical concepts In the 
behavioral sciences, managerial sciences and quantitative methods to the development of theo- 
ries and models in marketing. The emphasis is on the Interdisciplinary exchange of ideas relating 
to marketing. Evolving concepts and theories in marketing are appraised. May be repeated for 
credit. 

595 Modern Capitalism (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 595) 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. Student will select and have 
approved a thesis topic, show evidence of original research, and must present himself for a 
defense of the thesis before a faculty committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status, consent of instructor and approval by department chairman. 
May be repeated for credit. 


QUANTITATIVE METHODS COURSES 

100 Introduction to Analysis (4) 

(Preparation for calculus — same as Engineering 100 or Math 100) 

210 Logic (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 210) 

264 Computer Programming (1) 

Introduction to problem-oriented languages of computers. The solving of problems using computer 
programming. May be repeated for credit. (2 hours activity) 

265 Computer Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: college algebra or three years of high school mathematics including a second course 
in algebra. Introduction to sets, logic, counting, frequency distributions, and probability. Solving 
problems on a digital computer with a compiler language. (2 hours lecture; 2 hours activity) 

280 Computer Language Survey (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 264, 265, or equivalent. A study of selected computer languages and the types of 
problems for which they are suited. Introduction to formal language theory. Student written 
programs in languages typical of the major categories: numerical, data processing, string and list 
processing, formal structure manipulating, multipurpose and specific task oriented. (2 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 


Quantitative Methods 161 


289 Computer Methods in Social Science (3) 

An introduction to the history and application of digital computers to problems in the social sciences. 
Basic methods of data manipulation. Student written programs in a problem-oriented computer 
language used for data screening, simple statistics, frequency distributions, ranking, and cluster 
analysis. Discussion of measurement, precision, and accuracy; computers, law and society; 
artificial Intelligence; and other topics of current interest. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

360 Mathematical Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 265 or equivalent. Concepts of mathematical methods and their application to 
business and economic problems. Elementary mathematical optimization models. Students with 
a quantitative methods concentration must take Math 150A,B and QM 363 in lieu of this course. 

361 Statistical Methods in Business and Economics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 265 or equivalent. Collection, analysis, and presentation of statistical data. Random 
sampling, estimation, and hypothesis testing. Introduction to regression and correlation. 

362 Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (3) 

Prerequisites: Economics 200A,B, QM 361 and Economics 310 (may be taken concurrently). An 
introduction to basic mathematical tools and their application to economic theory. The nature 
of econometric models and the concept of identification. Estimation and evaluation of simple 
single equation linear models and an Introduction to such problems as autocorrelation and 
multicollinearity. Not open to students who have taken QM 360. 

363 Management Science (3) (Formerly 463) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A,B. Introduction to the basic concepts of Management Science and its 
relationship to economics and decision theory. Topics surveyed include optimization In continu- 
ous models, linear programming, queueing and inventory models, dynamic programming and 
decision-making in the business environment. 

364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 264, 265, or equivalent. An introductory survey of assembler language, hardware 
organization, design, logic, and system software of modern digital computers. (2 hours lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

36B First Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 368) 

369 Second Course in Symbolic Logic (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 369) 

382 Information Structures and Machine Language Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 364. A formal discussion of information structures, the types of processes for which 
they are appropriate, and their relative computational efficiencies. Assignments implemented in 
a variety of machine languages. 

420 Applied Statistical Forecasting (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and Economics 310 or 320. Statistical methods applied to problems in business 
and industry; fundamentals of Index-number constructions; practical multiple regression models 
with computer solutions; basic techniques in time-series analysis of trend, cyclical and seasonal 
components; correlation of time-series and forecasting with the computer. 

422 Surveys and Sampling Design and Applications (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 361. Principles and methods for designing and performing business and economic 
surveys, with applications in accounting, marketing research, work sampling, economic statistics 
and the social sciences. Basic ideas and methods of sampling: simple random, stratified and 
multistage design. Techniques for construction of sampling frames. Techniques for detecting and 
controlling non-sampling errors. 

446 Computer Programming Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. A study of techniques for establishing the correctness of algorithms, estimating 
time and storage requirements of algorithms, and selecting the operational environment and 
linguistic media appropriate for algorithms. 

^ Digital Simulation (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 280, and Math 435 or QM 461. A study of techniques of generating stochastic 
variates and their use in solving numerical problems and studying op)erational problems in 
pueueing, communication, economic, inventory, scheduling and other models. 


‘^--83097 

I 130 


162 Quantitative Methods 

461 Advanced Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and Math 150A,B, or equivalent. An advanced treatment of the theory and 
application of the topics covered in QM 361, using the methods of the calculus. Moments, 
generating functions, point and interval estimation, Neyman-Pearson and Likelihood Ratio Hy- 
pothesis Tests. 

464 Information Retrieval and Natural Language Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 364 or consent of instructor. An examination of modern computer hardware, the 
techniques of programming it, and the languages in which such programs are written. Includes 
discussion of memory protection, Interrupt systems, recursive programming, list-structured-lan- 
guages and user-oriented languages. 

465 Linear Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150A,B or consent of instructor. The theory and applications of linear program- 
ming. Topics include: linear programming and the simplex algorithm; starting procedures; the 
dual and economic interpretation; parametric programming and sensitivity analysis; and trans- 
portation and assignment problems. 

466 Nonlinear Programming (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 465, Math 281, or consent of instructor. A unified study of nonlinear programming 
theory with emphasis on computational algorithms and industrial applications. Topics will in- 
clude: Kuhn-Tucker theorem, duality, quadratic programming, integer programming, dynamic 
programming, search techniques, and post-optimality analysis. 

467 Statistical Quality Control (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361. Shewhart Control Charts for variables, percent defective, and defects. Toler- 
ances, process capacity, special control charts, acceptance sampling, and batch processing 
problems. Bayesian aspects of process control. 

468 Seminar in Symbolic Logic (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 468) 

469 Reliability Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461 or equivalent. Statistical principles of reliability; hazard functions; point and 
interval estimation of reliability; reliability demonstration; growth models. 

475 Multivariate Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 461, or equivalent. The least squares principle; estimation and hypothesis testing 
in linear regression; multiple and curvilinear regression models; discriminant analysis; principal 
components analysis; application of multivariate analysis in business and industry. 

484 Computer Assisted Instruction (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 264 and consent of instructor, knowledge of computer organization, terminology, 
and experience in programming. A survey of computer-assisted and computer-based instruction 
consisting of a review of present research activities and including: methodology of educational 
approaches, implementations, and present achievements. 

485 Programming Systems and Programming Language Processing (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. A study of monitor, assembler, and compiler systems and the hardware, 
firmware, and software characteristics required in a real-time, interactive environment. 

486 Automata Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 382 and Math 250, or consent of Instructor. A formal introduction to the theory 
of computation and Its relation to modern computing techniques. Includes development of 
Turing machines, recursive functions, equivalence theorems, and the algebraic theory of recog- 
nizers. 

487 Artificial Intelligence (3) 

Prerequisite: QM 382. Selected topics of current Interest from heuristic programming, pattern recog- 
nition, learning systems, problem solving systems, and formal symbol manipulating systems. 

490 Stochastic Process Models in Business and Industry (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 461, Math 281, or consent of instructor. Models of industrial waiting line and 
storage systems. Markov chains, single and multiple server models, discrete and continuous 
processes, and homogeneous birth and death processes. 

497 Business and Economic Research (3) 

(Same as Business Administration 497) 


i«-t f lao 


Quantitative Methods 163 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: quantitative methods concentration, senior standing, and approval by the department 
chairman. Open to qualified undergraduate students desiring to pursue directed independent 
inquiry. May be repeated for credit. 

560 Operations Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A, QM 361 and classified M.B.A. status. An examination of the nature and 
scope of Operations Research, with emphasis on the techniques of model construction. Topics 
surveyed include optimization in continuous models, linear programming, queueing and schedul- 
ing models, inventory models, dynamic programming, and decision-making under uncertainty. 
(Not open to students with QM 363) 

561 Seminar in Operations Research (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 560 or consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. A particular topic in 
Operations Research, such as simulation, inventory theory, waiting line theory, or synthesis of 
large scale systems will be covered in depth with special emphasis on research methods. 

563 Quantitative Business Decision Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and classified M.B.A. status. Techniques from probability, statistical decision 
theory, and computer simulation applied to problems of management. 

565 Seminar on Computers in Industry (3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor and classified M.B.A. status. An examination of developments 
and innovations concerning computers in industry. Artificial intelligence, information retrieval, 
and time sharing. 

566 Design of Experiments (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 361 and classified M.B.A. status. A survey of the fundamentals of experimental 
design, including analysis of variance, factorial experiments, nested designs, confounding, and 
fractional replication. 

571 Seminar in Quantitative Methods of Policy Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: QM 363 or 560 and classified M.B.A. status. The synthesis, analysis and evaluation of 
policy alternatives through the use of quantitative methods. The analyst's role in evaluating 
operations of an enterprise is demonstrated by individual and team efforts in the design, develop- 
ment, performance and communication of results of operations research projects. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Directed independent inquiry. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: classified M.B.A. status. Student will select and have approved a thesis topic, show 
evidence of original research and must present himself for a defense of the thesis before a faculty 
committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: classified M.B.A. status and approval by the department chairman. May be repeated 
for credit. 



Computer Science 


l«--3 U 30 





167 

COMPUTER SCIENCE PROGRAM 

Chairman: Herbert C. Rutemiller 


Computer science degree programs are administered by the Computer Science Council, an interdis- 
ciplinary group representing the Department of Mathematics, the Department of Quantitative Meth- 
ods and the School of Engineering. 

FACULTY 

Wen Chow, Ronald Colman, Walter Hudetz, Eugene Hunt, Ronald Miller, Sam Pierce, jesus Tuazon, 
Yun-Cheng Zee 

The Association for Computing Machinery has given the following discipline description of computer 
science: 

"Computer science is not simply concerned with the design of computing devices — nor is it the 
design of computing devices — nor is it just the art of numerical calculation, as important as these 
topics are. Computer science is concerned with information in much the same sense that physics 
is concerned with energy; computer science is devoted to the representation, storage, manipula- 
tion and presentation of information in an environment permitting automatic information systems. 

... All forms of information — numeric, alphabetic, pictorial, verbal, tactile, olfactory, etc. — are 
of interest to computer science." 

The computer scientist is interested in effective ways to present information, algorithms to transform 
information, languages in which to express algorithms, effective means to monitor the process and 
display transformed information, and effective ways to accomplish these goals at reasonable cost. 

B.S. IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

The degree requires completion of 54 units of basic courses which include courses in mathematics 
and statistics as well as in computer languages, information structures and computer logic design. 
Fifteen additional units are required beyond the basic courses. Considerable flexibility is provided 
to the student in that he may elect a 15-unit concentration in mathematics, engineering or quantita- 
tive methods. The student's grade-point average must be at least 2.0 for the 69 units required for 
the major, and none of these may be taken on a credit-no credit basis. 

Required courses are as follows: 

Lower Division 

Mathematics 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (8) 

Mathematics 250 Intermediate Calculus (4) 

Mathematics 281 Linear Alegebra with Differential Equations (3) 

Quantitative Methods 265 Computer Methods (3) or Engineering 205 Digital Com- 
putation (3) 

Quantitative Methods 280 Computer Language Survey (3) 

tipper Division 

Quantitative Methods 364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Quantitative Methods 382 Information Structures (3) 

Quantitative Methods 485 Programming Systems (3) 

Engineering 402 Digital Logic (3) 

Mathematics 340 Numerical Analysis (3) 

Mathematics 335 Mathematical Probability (3) or Engineering 423 Engineering 
Probability and Statistics (3) 

Mathematics 435 Mathematical Statistics (3) or Quantitative Methods 461 Ad- 
vanced Statistics (3) 

Quantitative Methods 448 Digital Simulation (3) 

Quantitative Methods 363 Introduction to Management Science (3) 

Economics 301 Economic Principles (3) 

Accounting 305 Elements of Accounting (3) 

Electives: 

l4»-3 U 305 


Units 

21 


33 


Units 

15 


1 68 Computer Science 

A minimum of 15 units of upper division electives, selected to comprise a concentration 
in one of the three areas: Engineering, quantitative methods or mathematics. The 1 5 units 
may include courses In other areas besides the concentration, but all electives must be 
approved by the student's adviser. 

Total 69 

All courses within the computer science program originate in other departments within the 
university. Students should refer to the department originating the course for description. 

MINOR IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

Students majoring in other fields, Including those without an extensive mathematics background, 
may earn a minor in computer science. A minimum of 21 units of computer science are required 
for a minor. These shall include Quantitative Methods 265, Quantitative Methods 289 or Engineering 
205 in addition to Quantitative Methods 280 and either Quantitative Methods 364 or Engineering 
402, and a minimum of four courses (at most two from the same area) selected from the following 
upper division courses in the Indicated areas: 

Engineering: 317, 402, 403*, 405, 424, 458 
Mathematics: 335, 340*, 435*, 440 

Quantitative Methods: 364, 382, 446, 448, 461*, 464, 485, 487 

Students must have a 2.0 grade-point average or better In the minor. These courses may not be taken 
on a credit/ no credit basis. 


•Not both Mathematics 435 and Quantitative Methods 461 nor both Mathematics 340 and Engineering 403 may be used to fulfill 
minor requirements. 


.;:v''^ V- '0:>: 












EDUCATION 


UB-S t 1«5 




o' 



173 

SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 

Acting Dean: Ida S. Coppolino 


DEPARTMENT OF BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES IN EDUCATION 

FACULTY 
Calvin Nelson 

Department Chairman 

Marilyn Bates, James Bennett, Louis Brockmann, Ida Coppolino,* James Gilmore, David Kiersey, 
Frederick Kingdon, Doyle Knirk, Anne Langstaff, Robert Lemmon, Lester March, Fraser Powlison, 
Richard Rogal, Leo Schmidt, Shirley Schaefer, Shirl Stark 

The courses and programs of the department are designed to fulfill the following objectives of 
students: 

1. Master of Science in Education with a concentration in counseling. 

2. Master of Science in Education with a concentration in special education. 

3. Preservice teacher training for teachers of the educationally handicapped and the mentally 
retarded. 

4. Professional training for pupil personnel services in the public schools. 

5. Psychological foundations requirements for the preservice training of elementary, secondary 
and special education teachers. 

Instruction is centered about the scientific treatment of behavior change in educational settings. The 
objective of the program is to develop student competencies in the selection, development, applica- 
tion and evaluation of materials and procedures necessary for the modification and optimum 
development of human behavior. Though there is a primary commitment to the public school as 
a behavior change agency in our culture, the department's program is viewed as having application 
to educational decision-making situations outside the schools. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM THE DEPARTMENT 

1. Master of Science in Education, School Counseling. 

2. Master of Science in Education, Special Education. 

3. Preparation of Teachers of the Mentally Retarded Children Programs. 

4. Special Education Newsletter. 

PRESERVICE EDUCATION 

Cal State Fullerton is accredited by the California State Board of Education for programs leading to 
the following credentials offered by the Department of Behavioral Sciences in Education: 

1. Restricted teaching credential for services as a speech and hearing specialist. 

2. Restricted teaching credential to teach the trainable mentally retarded. 

3. Restricted teaching credential to teach the educable mentally retarded. 

4. Standard designated services credential with a specialization in pupil personnel services. 
Details of the programs are provided in special brochures available from the Department of Behav- 
ioral Sciences in Education. Information about the professional services authorized by the above 
credentials will be provided by professional advisers. 

personnel services for teacher education students 

Advisement is available to any student seeking a credential offered by the department and a bachelor 
of arts degree at this university. During registration, the student should consult an adviser in the 
department in which he expects to major and an adviser in the Department of Behavioral Sciences 

University administrative officer. 

t wo 


174 


Education 


in Education who will help him select courses and build his program. A student from another 
institution should bring transcripts of previous work and a tentative selection of courses. Transferred 
education courses must be of upper division level and taken within the past 1 5 years to be applicable 
to upper division credential requirements. 

ADMISSION TO SPECIAL EDUCATION CREDENTIAL 

To become a candidate for a teaching credential the student must be enrolled, in good standing, 
and must be admitted to "teacher education" in the Office of Admission to Teacher Education of 
the School of Education. Application for admission to teacher education should be filed during the 
first semester of the junior year or the first semester of attendance at the university, if the student 
enters with advanced standing. 

Admission to teacher education is required of each student before he files the application for student 
teaching.! 

A faculty committee will review information concerning the applicant's intellectual resources and 
mastery of important concepts in the common curricular areas of higher education, command of 
fundamental skills of communication (English language, usage, written composition, speech, hearing, 
reading comprehension, handwriting, mathematical skills), scholarship, personality and character, 
interest in teaching, and health. Data related to these criteria are gathered from transcripts and 
records from other schools and universities, group and individual tests, personality inventories, 
estimates of the potential of the applicant, and from the Student Health Center. Students should 
normally qualify for admission and be advised of their status during the second semester of the junior 
year or their first semester of attendance if they enter with advanced standing with degrees from 
accredited colleges or universities. 

Students who show weaknesses in any of the fundamental skills of communication are advised of 
their standing. If there are weaknesses In only one or two of the areas noted above, the student will 
be advised of refresher courses and given a specified time to meet the standard. 

If the applicant has serious deficiencies in communication skills or does not meet the standards of 
mastery in the common curricular areas, personality and character, scholarship, interest in teaching, 
or health, the faculty committee will deny admission to teacher education. 

The student must arrange to take the required battery of group and individual tests and inventories 
necessary to provide information needed by the faculty committee. The tests of breadth of under- 
standing, reading, English usage, number skills, composition, handwriting, and personality are given 
by the School of Education for admission to teacher education; consult the Office of Admission to 
Teacher Education of the School of Education for dates. 

STUDENT TEACHING 

Each candidate for a credential to teach the mentally retarded, the restricted credential to teach the 
educable mentally retarded, or the restricted credential to teach the trainable mentally retarded ( REX 
Program) will do his student teaching during the last semester of his senior year or during his 
postgraduate year in the university. Persons seeking the credential to teach the mentally retarded 
will divide their student teaching experience with elementary or secondary student teaching. Details 
about student teaching may be obtained from the departmental office. Student teaching assignments 
are made in elementary and secondary schools geographically accessible to the university. Students 
will be assigned to work under the supervision of carefully selected supervising teachers. A university 
supervisor will regularly visit the student teacher and the supervising teacher. Student teachers will 
be expected to meet In a weekly seminar with the university supervisor. 

Permission to Substitute Teaching Experience for Student Teaching 

A candidate for a teaching credential who has had two years of successful, regular teaching experi- 
ence must petition the School of Education, through his professional adviser, for permission to 
substitute such experience for the student teaching requirement. Substitution of teaching experience 
for student teaching will be considered only if the applicant: 

1 . Has been admitted to teacher education at the university. 

2. Has submitted an official verification from his former supervisor, principal, or superintendent 
to the School of Education certifying at least two years of successful, regular teaching experi- 
ence at the appropriate level. A form for this verification is available in the Office of the School 
of Education. 

t Exceptions will be made in the case of new transfer students. 


Education 1 75 


STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDENTIALS FOR TEACHING 

The curricular requirements for credentials for teaching in special education are included in the 
curricula descriptions. Upon the completion of the requirements, the student will submit an applica- 
tion for a credential to the State Department of Education in Sacramento. On these applications the 
student is asked about his citizenship status, his professional conduct, and he is asked to sign an oath 
of allegiance. He must also submit a health examination form signed by a qualified physician, two 
fingerprint-identification cards and the legal fee, which is currently $20. The forms are available in 
the Credentials Office of the university. 

Curricula in Preparation of Special Education Teachers 

There are three credential programs and one non-credential program offered by the department. The 
credential programs include the regular mental retardation credential, the restricted credential to 
teach the educable mentally retarded, and the restricted credential to teach the trainable mentally 
retarded. The non-credential program is one leading to teaching the educationally handicapped. 

Requirements for the Credential to Teach the Mentally Retarded 

Students who complete the requirements for this credential are qualified to teach both the trainable 
and educable mentally retarded. In addition to completing the requirements in special education, 
the student must also complete the curriculum in either elementary or secondary education as 
described in pages 197 and 198. When the major is in an academic area commonly taught in the 
elementary or secondary schools (as appropriate), the 22 units of specialized preparation described 
below (not including student teaching) may be substituted for the minor. Upon successful comple- 
tion of the program, the student will be recommended for the standard teaching credential with a 
specialization in elementary or secondary teaching with specialized preparation to serve as a teacher 
of exceptional children, area of the mentally retarded. Upon receipt of the credential, the student 
will be authorized to teach in special classes as well as in regular classes at the appropriate level. 
Students desiring to prepare as teachers of the mentally retarded should proceed as follows: 

1. Apply for admission to special education (forms are available in the department office). 

2. Arrange for a personal interview with a member of the special education faculty. 

3. Apply for admission to teacher education as described on page 192. 

4. Upon completion of the necessary prerequisite courses, apply for admission to student teach- 
ing. Since students completing this program divide their student teaching experience between 
special education and regular education, they should apply for admission to student teaching 
as described on page 193. In addition, they must apply for student teaching in special education 
by completing the application form necessary the semester before taking the course. 

Students seeking recommendations for this special credential to teach the mentally retarded should 
complete the courses listed below in lieu of the minor required for the Standard Teaching Credential. 

Units 


Educ 471 Exceptional children 3 

Educ 473 Mental Retardation and Brain Injury 3 

Educ 474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the Mentally Retarded 3 

Educ 475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the Mentally Retarded 3 

Educ 779 Student Teaching with Mentally Retarded Pupils 4 

Educ 452 Principles of Guidance 3 

Speech Comm 403 Speech Development 3 

Electives from courses related to teaching the mentally retarded (4 units); electives must 
be approved by the adviser. 

Total number of units in special education not including student teaching 22 


176 Education 

Recommended Sequence of Courses in Professional Education for Students Preparing as 
Teachers of the Mentally Retarded 



Elementary 

Secondary 

junior year, first semester 

Educ 411 (3) 

Educ 411 (3) 


Educ 496 (1) 

Educ 496 (1) 

junior year, second semester 

Educ 471 (3) 

Educ 471 (3) 

Educ 340 ( 3) 

Senior year, first semester 

Educ 331 (8) 

Educ 442 (3) 


Educ 473 (3) 

Educ 473 (3) 

Senior year, second semester 

Educ 474 (3) 

Educ 474 (3) 

Educ 401 (4) 

Fifth year, first semester 

Educ 475 (3) 

Educ 475 (3) 


Speech Comm 403 (3) 

Speech Comm 403 (3) 


Electives In special 

Electives in special 


education (4) 

Educ 401 (4) 

education (4) 

Fifth year, second semester 

Educ 779 (4) 

Educ 779 (4) 


Educ 739 (4) 

Educ 749 (2) 


Educ 452 (3) 

Educ 452 (3) 


Requirements for a Restricted Credential to Teach the Educable Mentally Retarded 

Upon completion of the requirements for this credential, an individual is qualified for service at all 
grade levels with service restricted to teaching the mentally retarded. Students seeking this credential 
must: 

1. Obtain the baccalaureate degree. 

2. Complete a fifth year of university work. 

3. Complete 22 hours of coursework in special education and related fields. 

4. Complete student teaching with educable mentally retarded children. 

Educ 312 is prerequisite to this credential program. 

These programs are subject to change pending the initiation of programs consistent with the Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970. 

Program Leading to the California Credential — Speech and Hearing Specialist 

Students wishing to pursue the major in speech and hearing and to complete a fifth year for the 
"Restricted Teaching Credential for Services as a Speech and Hearing Specialist" (1967) should 
follow the major for speech for the B.A. degree with emphasis in speech pathology and audiology 
to be followed by a fifth year of adviser-approved specialized preparation. 

Required in the undergraduate and graduate years will be the completion of 65 semester units 
constituting a well-integrated program that Includes 18 semester units in courses that provide 
fundamental information applicable to the normal development and use of speech, hearing, and 
language, and their relationship to the educative process, and 42 semester units in courses that 
provide information about and training in the management of speech, hearing, and language disor- 
ders and that provide Information supplementary to these fields. 

Details of this teacher education program are found on page 394. The program is administered by 
the Department of Speech Communication In consultation with the School of Education. 

Standard Teaching Credential with Specialization in Speech and Hearing in Lieu of Minor 

A major other than speech and hearing is required for the clinical speech and hearing program taken 
in lieu of a minor. See an adviser in the Department of Speech Communication for details of this 
program. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

The Department of Behavioral Sciences in Education offers work in pupil personnel toward the 
credentials for school counseling, school psychometrists and school psychologists. Students must 
check with an appropriate adviser to plan a program of study. 


l7S-t t M 


Education 177 


The Department offers work under the Standard Designated Service Credential of 1964 and the 1970 
State Board of Education revision of the Standard Designated Services Credential. The Standard 
Designated Services Credential of 1964 requires a master's degree and 60 units of postgraduate work. 
The 1970 State Board revision requires a postgraduate program of work as follows: 

School Counseling 

Required professional background for Standard Designated Services Credential: Pupil Counseling 
(1970 Revision of Fisher Act) 

1. Educ 452, Principles of Guidance (3) 

2. Educ 550, Counseling Theories and Processes (3). To be taken concurrently with 3. 

3. Educ 596, Graduate Educational Practicum: Individual Counseling Relations (1-3) 

4. Educ 555, Dynamics of Individual Behavior and Case Study (3) 

5. Educ 551, Education and Career Orientation (3) 

6. Educ 552, Group Processes in Counseling and Guidance (3) 

7. Educ 596, Graduate Educational Practicum: Group Leadership and Membership 

8. Educ 553, Administration and Organization of Pupil Personnel Programs (3) 

9. Educ 559A,B, Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services: Counseling * (6) 

10. Certification of competency as pupil counselor (Signature obtained from at least two pupil 
personnel faculty) 

School Psychometry 

To become a candidate for the school psychometry credential, the following are prerequisites: 

1. Completion of the counseling credential training program (outlined previously) or issuance of 
a pupil personnel services credential in counseling, on a clear basis, by the California State 
Department of Education. 

2. Approved for candidacy by the School Psychology Training Program Committee. Application 
for admission to the program must be submitted as soon as the student becomes seriously 
interested in this area of professional work. Application, references, informal study sheet, and 
CRE scores must be submitted prior to screening. Committee approval for candidacy must 
occur prior to the student's enrollment in Educ 596, Graduate Educational Practicum: Individ- 
ual Assessment and Case Study (see E. below). Additional program requirements including 
coursework follow: 

A. Educ 471, Exceptional Children (3) 

B. Either Educ 522, Behavior Problems in the Classroom (3), or Educ 523, Learning Problems 
in the Classroom (3) 

C. Educ 570, Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Developmental Psy- 
chology (3) 

D. Educ 596, Graduate Educational Practicum: Individual Testing (3) (Prerequisite to E. 
below) 

E. Educ 596, Graduate Educational Practicum: Individual Assessment and Case Study (3) 
(Should be taken concurrently with F. below) 

F. Educ 559C, Fieldwork in School Psychometry (3) 

G. Certification of competency as a school psychometrist by the School Psychology Training 
Program Committee. 

H. (Screening for school psychology training program occurs at this point) 

With the approval of the student's adviser, some of the above required courses for the psychometry 
program may be taken concurrently while completing the pupil counseling credential program 
(courses A. through D.). 

Also, units from these courses may be applied toward the six units selected outside the area of 
specialization in the master's degree program. Substitution of courses including courses taken at 
other institutions necessitate the approval of the School Psychology Training Program Committee. 

School Psychology 

To become a candidate for the school psychology credential, the following are prerequisites: 

1. The candidate must have clear credentials In counseling and psychometry. 

2. The candidate must have completed the M.S. in counseling or be in the final stages of comple- 
tion. The School Psychology Training Committee may approve acceptable masters already 

• Admission to fieldwork should be requested on appropriate form at least a semester before a student expects to enroll. Students 
must have completed a minimum of six pupil personnel related units at Cal State Fullerton and obtain adviser's approval. 


iT7-t t ao 


178 Education 


completed in lieu of the M.S. in counseling. 

3. The application of the candidate must be approved by the School Psychology Training Program 
Committee prior to entering the training program. Applications for admission to the program 
must be submitted as soon as the student becomes seriously interested in this area of profes- 
sional work. Application, references, informal study sheet, and CRE scores must be submitted 
prior to screening. (For students who complete the psychometry training program, some of 
this material and information may already be available to the committee.) 

Additional program requirements including coursework follow: 

A. Educ 556, Advanced Individual and Croup Process (3) (To be taken concurrently with C. 
in fall) 

B. Educ 557, Seminar in School Psychology: A Contemporary Overview (3) (To be taken 
concurrently with D. in spring) 

C. Educ 558A, Advanced Psychometrics (3) 

D. Educ 558B, Advanced Case Analysis including Remediation and Rehabilitation Techniques 
(3) 

E. Educ 571, Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Psychology of Learning 
(3) 

F. Either Educ 516, Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3), or Educ 581, Analysis of Reading 
Difficulties (3) 

G. Educ 559D, Fieldwork in School Psychology (6) (3 units to be taken concurrently with A. 
and C. in the fall and three units to be taken concurrently with B. and D. in the spring). 

H. Certification of competency as a school psychologist by the School Psychology Training 
Program Committee. 

Substitution of courses including courses taken at other institutions necessitates the approval of the 
School Psychology Training Program Committee. 

These programs are subject to change pending the initiation of programs consistent with the Teacher 
Preparation and Licensing Law of 1970. 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
School Counseling 

Requirements for the M.S. in Education: School Counseling 

Prerequisites 

1. Baccalaureate degree from an accredited Institution 

2. Teaching experience or other approved experience 

3. An approved major 

4. A grade-point average of 2.5 overall 

5. Specified course prerequisites completed or in progress: Educ 452 (3 units); Educ 550 (3 units) 

6. Satisfactory Graduate Record Examination Aptitude Test scores 

7. Satisfactory interview, references and autobiography 

Study Plan 

Thirty semester units of graduate work, specified on a formal study plan approved by the graduate 
adviser, must be completed within five years. The university may, at Its option, extend the time 
limitation for students who pass a comprehensive examination in relevant courses which were 
completed prior to the five-year period. No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken at Cal 
State Fullerton prior to classified status may be applied to a student's formal master's degree study 
plan. (This does not refer to prerequisites.) A minimum of 24 units must be completed at Cal State 
Fullerton. If a specific course requirement has been met by previous study, electives may be 
substituted as approved by the adviser. The student is required to maintain at least a B average, with 
no grade below B in his concentration. The 30 units are to be distributed as follows: 

1. Nine units outside the area of specialization 

A. Educ 510, Research Design and Analysis (3) 

B. Six units selected with the approval of an adviser (6) 


Education 179 


2. Twenty-one units in the concentration in counseling 

A. Educ 551, Education and Career Orientation (3) 

B. Educ 552, Croup Processes in Guidance (3) 

C. Educ 553, Administration and Organization of Pupil Personnel Programs (3) 

D. Educ 555, Dynamics of Individual Behavior and Case Study (3) 

E. Educ 559A,B, Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services: Counseling (3,3) 

F. Educ 597 — Graduate Project or Education 595, Advanced Studies (Comprehensive) (3) 
For further information, consult the department graduate program adviser. See also "The 
Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


Special Education 

The following Information is provided to assist students in planning programs and in seeking admis- 
sion to classified graduate status. Students should consult the Graduate Bulletin for information 
concerning standards for graduate study, steps in the master's degree program, and graduate policies 
and procedures. This publication is available from the Office of Graduate Studies. 

The degree program Is designed: 

1. To help individuals interpret and implement research related to exceptional children, conduct 
appropriate research in the classroom and/or clinical setting, become skilled in their abilities 
to diagnose with educational instruments and observation techniques, interpret the results of 
diagnostic procedures, prescribe and implement educational strategies. 

2. To provide teachers with competencies to enable them to fulfill the role of supervising teachers 
and demonstration teachers In special classes. 

3. To prepare individuals for positions of leadership In the field of special education. 

4. To prepare individuals to pursue graduate work toward the doctoral degree. 


Prerequisites for Admission to the Program: 

1. A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution 

2. At least 2.5 grade-point average In previous academic and related work 

3. An acceptable score on the Graduate Record Examination — Aptitude Test 

4. An approved major 

5. Satisfactory completion of Educ 471, Exceptional Children (3) 

6. Satisfactory Interview, references and autobiography 

Steps in the Master's Degree Program (see Graduate Bulletin): 

Courses required for the Degree: 


1 . Nine semester hours of adviser-approved courses outside the area of special educa- 
tion 


2 . 


A. 


3 hours in basic research 
and 


(Met by Educ 510 (3) or 
Educ 509 (3)) 


B. Administration (Met by 6 units of adviser- 

or approved courses) 

Clinic orientation 
or 

Teaching strategies 
or 

Communication and 
Interpersonal relations 
or 

Educational technology 
or 

Inter- and intracultural 
studies 


Twenty-one semester hours of adviser-approved courses selected from the area of 
special education 


Units 

9 


21 


180 


Education 


A. 4-6 units of research activity * (Met by Educ 514 (3) 

and 

Educ 597 or 598 (1-3) 

B. 2-5 units of practicum (Met by Educ 572 (2-4) 

and/or 

Educ 496 (1-3) 

C. 10-15 units of special (Met by adviser-approved 

education specialization special education courses 

at the 400- and 500-level) 


For further information, consult the department graduate program adviser. See also "The Program 
of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES IN EDUCATION 
PRESERVICE COURSES 

2% Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct an individual educationally oriented experience with a child, youth, or young adult in an 
educational practicum location under the direction of a faculty member. Available to students 
who want or need public service experience with children, youth, or adults. Does not give credit 
toward any teaching credential. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. Open 
to freshman and sophomore students. (3 hours laboratory per hour of credit) 

312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Prerequisite: Psych 101. A comprehensive study of human growth and development with emphasis 
on childhood, adolescence, and middle and old age. Includes mental, social, emotional and 
physical development. 

1 411 Psychological Foundations of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: Psych 1 01 and concurrent enrollment in upper division practicum or fieldwork. Prereq- 
uisite to other courses in the professional education sequence. Learning theory, thinking proc- 
esses, and human growth and development. Students who have completed Psych 31 1 must have 
consent of instructor to enroll. 

471 Exceptional Children (3) 

Corequisite: Educ 411 (or Educ 312 for students working toward the Restricted EMR Credential). 
Seminar on the study of children who deviate from the average in the elementary and the 
secondary schools; physically handicapped, mentally retarded, gifted, socially maladjusted, emo- 
tionally disturbed, and delinquent. Special educational services, curriculum, procedures, and 
materials necessary to promote their maximum development. 

472 Gifted Children (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411. Identification, principles of instruction, grouping, individualized Instruction, 
classroom enrichment. Problem solving and research experiences in science, social studies, and 
mathematics, reading programs and literature, creative writing, oral language. 

473 Mental Retardation and Brain Injury (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471. Organic and cultural basis of mental retardation and brain injury, including 
social, psychological, and vocational problems. Child growth, sensory development, learning 
characteristics of mentally retarded and brain injured children, and techniques of working with 
parents will be considered. 

474 Curriculum and Methods for Teaching the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 473. Curriculum development, methods, and materials for teaching the educable 
and trainable mentally retarded at the elementary and secondary levels. 

475 Observation and Individual Instruction with the Mentally Retarded (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 474. Supervised observation and participation with the educable and the trainable 

mentally retarded at both the elementary and secondary levels of education. (4 hours activity, 
1 hour lecture and discussion) 

• Student nr»ay elect to substitute the Department Comprehensive Examination for Educ 597/598. Students electing this option must 
complete Educ 514. 

t Open only to persons previously admitted to the teacher education program. 


Education 181 


477 The Educationally Handicapped Child (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471. Behavioral characteristics of the educationally handicapped child, the child 
with a neurologically handicap or a behavioral disorder as defined by the California Education 
Code. Educational procedures, perceptual and motor training, evaluation, parent guidance. 

479 Seminar and Practicum in Education of the Trainable Mentally Retarded (6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Curriculum, methods, and materials for children having severe 

intellectual, motor, sensory and language impairment. Emphasis will be placed on the educational 
management of children exhibiting handicapping conditions. (3 hours seminar and 9 hours 
practicum in special school facilities.) 

480 Issues in Higher Education (3) 

Seminar in structure, governance, administration and challenges of American higher education. 

489 Fieldwork in Exceptional Children (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Direct supervised experience with educationally 
handicapped children. 

4% Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with an individual under the 
direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing, consent of instructor and department prior to registration. 
Conduct of an individual investigation under supervision of a faculty member; investigation might 
be an experiment, a library study, or a creative project; only students of demonstrated capacity 
and maturity will be approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeated for 
credit. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500 Survey of Collegiate Student Personnel Services (3) 

History, philosophy, objectives, organization and administration of collegiate student personnel 
services. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

514 Graduate Seminar: Behavioral Research on Children with Learning Disorders (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 510 or 511, consent of instructor, and teaching experience with exceptional 
children. Critical analysis of behavioral research on children with learning disorders. Resources, 
criteria for evaluation of studies with exceptional children, historical view of research in special 
education. Research relating to learning and handicapping conditions, and efficacy of special 
methods and materials will be reviewed. 

521 Group Processes in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of Instructor. Exploration of group interaction, teacher sensitivity, 
and their relevance to educational planning and management. Emphasis: emotionally disturbed, 
educationally handicapped. 

522 Behavior Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Identification and management of social and affective 
disturbances related to school performance. Emphasis: early detection, behavioral modification 
techniques, parent counseling. Interagency cooperation. 

523 Learning Problems in the Classroom (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 471 or consent of instructor. Identification and educational management of 
learning problems. Emphasis: developmental sequences, related prescriptive teaching and 
remediation techniques. 

550 Counseling Theories and Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 452. Seminar in the dynamics of counselor and client relationships, exploration 
of various theories of counseling, application of theory to techniques and processes, and a study 
of the counseling theory in relation to personality theory. Major project and supervised practice 
required. To be taken concurrently with Educ 596. 


182 Education 


551 Educational and Career Orientation (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to the pupil personnel program, Educ 550 or consent of instructor. Seminar 
in the principles of evaluating, classifying, and disseminating occupational and educational 
Information in the guidance program; sources of occupational literature, occupational research, 
vocational surveys, and methods of studying the individual as a unique whole to help him 
develop his greatest career potential. Emphasis on the psychological, sociological, economic, and 
clinical implications of career and educational choice. A major project in career information is 
developed under supervision. 

552 Group Processes in Counseling and Guidance (3) 

Prerequisite: admission to the pupil p>ersonnel program, Educ 550 or consent of instructor. Seminar 
in the intensive study of the dynamics of group processes including the function of leadership, 
effective membership and techniques of group problem solving. Special emphasis on clinical 
group counseling including a semester project In a school setting. 

553 Administration and Organization of Pupil Personnel Programs (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to the pupil personnel program, Educ 551 or consent of instructor. Seminar 
in the development, organization, supervision, and administration of the pupil personnel services. 
Seminar on analysis and evaluation of pupil personnel services by the case study method, 
curriculum, counselor competencies, staffing; includes laws relating to children and child wel- 
fare. 

555 Dynamics of Individual Behavior and Case Study (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to the pupil personnel program, Educ 451, 550, or consent of Instructor. 
Seminar in case conference techniques; clinical study of the techniques of individual diagnosis 
including the synthesis and interpretation of information. Use of the life or developmental record, 
self-ratings, behavior ratings and tests as they relate to counseling with the normal and abnormal 
pupil. Identification and remediation of learning difficulties emphasized. 

556 Advanced Individual and Group Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: admission to school psychology program, Educ 452, 550, 552, and concurrent enroll- 
ment in Educ 558A. An advanced course in individual counseling and advanced group process 
to be offered as part of the training requirements for school psychologists. Includes experience 
in working with faculty interaction groups in a leadership capacity. Attention will be given to the 
translation of theory into practice in public school and clinical settings. Lecture and practicum 
including school and clinical experiences. 

557 Seminar in School Psychology: A Contemporary Overview of Professional Aspects and 
Problems in School Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: concurrent enrollment in Educ 588B. An advanced course in school psychology cover- 
ing professional aspects in a contemporary setting including ethics. Issues and problems, mem- 
bership in professional organizations, psychological services relationship to other school and 
community service, supervision of psychometrists and other specialized personnel, legislation 
and current and future trends In public education. Initiating and developing district level research 
and consultation functions of a school psychologist will be stressed. 

558A School Psychology: Seminar in Problems in Personality Diagnosis (4) 

Prerequisites: a clear California credential in school psychometry or psychology intern credential and 
admission by Pupil Personnel Services screening committee. Seminar and internship and/or 
fieldwork In problems of personality assessment in the school setting, effecting changes in 
behavior among school pupils and personnel. Emphasizes role and function of the school 
psychologist in pupil personnel services. Advanced experience in the clinical case study, applica- 
tion of understandings of the dynamics of individual counseling and group counseling to human 
behavior in the school setting. 

558B School Psychology: Seminar in Problems of Learning (4) 

Prerequisite: Educ 558A. Seminar and internship and/or fieldwork in problems of learning and their 
remediation. Advanced work in diagnostic testing, clinical interpretation of data, remediation of 
identified problems. Advanced work in communication including reporting, individual counsel- 
ing, group counseling and case conference. 

559A,B Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services: Counseling (2-6) 

Prerequisites: Educ 551, 552, 555 and consent of instructor. Student will participate in guidance and 
counseling activities in his local school setting under the supervision of a local coordinator and 
the college staff. Work assignments are made on an individual basis. In addition to work in the 
field, students will meet in weekly seminar. May be repeated for credit up to a maximum of 12 
units. 






Education 185 


559C Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services: Psychometry (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 559A,B, admission to psychometry program and consent of instructor. Students 
will participate in psychometry activities in their local school setting under the supervision of a 
local coordinator and university staff. Work assignments are made on an individual basis. May 
be repeated for credit up to a maximum of 12 units. 

559D Fieldwork in Pupil Personnel Services: School Psychology (6) 

Three units to be taken concurrently with Educ 556 and 558A and three units to be taken concurrently 
with Educ 557 and 558A. 

570 Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Developmental 
Psychology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the physical-motor develop- 
ment, cognitive-intellectual growth and affective-personality organization of children and adoles- 
cents. Focus is given to educational interventions as a means of problem solving. 

571 Graduate Seminar in Educational Psychology: Advanced Psychology of Learning (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Research, theory and practice in the psychology of learning and 

motivation: motoric, cognitive and affective. Focus on problem solving situations in which 
educational intervention is designed to facilitiate learning in each domain. 

572 Psycho-Educational Clinic (2) 

Prerequisites: prerequisite sequence or equivalent and consent of instructor. (Prerequisite sequence 
is Educ 475 or 477, 523, 570, and 571 concurrently with 572.) A clinical practicum for the purpose 
of developing clinical teaching skills in dealing with the learning problems of exceptional chil- 
dren, practice in working with formal and informal information-gathering devices, special teach- 
ing instruments, teaching systems, and teaching strategies. Students may, upon the 
recommendation of the instructor, repeat the course for credit one time. (6 hours laboratory) 

577 Seminar in Program Trends in Special Education (3) 

Prerequisites: recommendation of adviser and consent of instructor. A seminar designed for the 
study of historical development of educational programs for exceptional children. A critical 
analysis of issues and trends in special education. 

578 Administration and Supervision of Special Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 577 or consent of instructor. Problems of organization, administration, and super- 
vision of special education programs: finance and attendance, physical facilities, budgeting, 
needed equipment, community agencies and curriculum development. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

5% Graduate Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conduct at a graduate level an educational practicum experience 
with an indivdual under the direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum of 
six units. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisites: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, wkh conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue 
independent inquiry. 

PROFESSIONAL COURSES IN POSTGRADUATE PROGRAM 

702 Guidance of the College Bound Student (3) 

778 Fieldwork in Administration of Special Education (12) 

Prerequisites: Educ 577, and registration in Educ 578. Directed fieldwork in the administration of 
special education programs. An assignment will be made in public or private schools. 


186 Education 


779 Student Teaching with Exceptional Children (4-8) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Participation in a class for exceptional children for greater part 
of every school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures for 
teaching exceptional children. The student will enroll for either four or eight units credit depend- 
ent upon the problems and procedures for teaching exceptional children. 

DEPARTMENT OF SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION/ 

SOCIAL FOUNDATIONS/READING 

FACULTY 
Ernest Lake 
Department Chairman 

Hollis Allen (Emeritus), Walter Beckman, Edwin Carr, Hazel Croy,* Stuart McComb (Emeritus), 
Robert McLaren, Deborah Osen, Kenneth Preble, Stanley Rothstein, George Schick, Robert 
Simpson 

PART-TIME 

Clayton Credell, Emmanuel Deligiannis, Ragnar Engebretsen, Robert Jenkins, Donald Jordan, Charles 
Kenney, Dorothy Klausner, David Lloyd, Clinton McClarty, Ernest Norton, Raymond Oliver, 
David Paynter, Walter Pray, Max Rauch 

UNDERGRADUATE COURSES IN SOCIAL FOUNDATIONS 

Courses in the social foundations of education are designed to help prospective teachers understand 
how the school has been shaped, and is being shaped, by a myriad of forces. These forces are 
intellectual, historic, economic, political, social, legal; together they influence the outcomes of formal 
education at least as much as does any education methodology. For this reason work in the social 
foundations of education is one of the requirements for teaching credentials. 

UNDERGRADUATE COURSES IN READING 

Lower division courses in reading are designed to assist students in developing the critical and 
creative reading skills required for efficient university learning. The upper division course in reading 
(Educ 480) presents an overview of reading education (K-adult) and prepares teachers to assess 
reading skills and build a curriculum based on the results of continuing assessment. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
School Administration 

A program of graduate studies leading to the degree of Master of Science in Education with a 
concentration in school administration has been authorized by the California State University and 
Colleges Board of Trustees. The principal objective of the curriculum is to prepare carefully selected 
individuals for certain leadership positions in school administration. 

The program is designed to help these individuals gain the technical knowledge and scholarship 
requisite to high achievement in these positions. This professional program is based on and com- 
bined with sound preparation in the liberal arts and sciences. The curriculum proposes an interdisci- 
plinary approach to the preparation of the professional specialist in public education. Thus, those 
who qualify for the degree should have completed coursework in such fields as philosophy, public 
administration, psychology, political science, biology, English, sociology, economics, anthropology 
or history. 

Prerequisites 

A student desiring to enter the program should complete the following requirements: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

2. A successful teaching experience in an elementary or secondary school, or community college, 
is desirable. If such experience is not available, other experience in related fields Is a recom- 
mended alternative, which must be approved by a graduate adviser before starting the pro- 
gram. 


• Chairman, Institute for Reading 


Education 187 


3. Generally, students will have completed as a requirement of their teaching certificate 30 units 
of postbaccalaureate study. These must be of upper division or graduate level (300-level or 
above) and be approved by the graduate adviser. Students should make an appointment with 
a graduate adviser as soon as the objective in school administration is selected. 

4. An approved undergraduate major. 

5. A minimum of 12 postgraduate units in academic subjects, completed either prior to or during 
the program. 

6. At last 2.5 grade-point average in previous academic and related work. 

7. Acceptable scores on the Graduate Record Examination Test. 

Programs of Study 

The degree study plan must include 30 units of committee-approved coursework, of which 21 must 
be at the 500 level. A minimum of 21 units must be in school administration; six units may be assigned 
on an interdisciplinary basis from courses related to the needs of individual students. Course require- 
ments include field experience and a project. 

No more than nine units of postgraduate work taken prior to classified status may be applied to a 
student's master's degree program. 

Students concentrating in school administration will take Education 503, Foundations for Administra- 
tive Leadership, as soon as they identify their interest in this M.S. degree. To continue in the program 
beyond this course, the student must be granted a "letter of admission to the program" and possess 
an official Cal State Fullerton program evaluation. Students who desire only isolated courses from 
the program are normally denied admission to such courses. The adviser-approved 30 units (mini- 
mum) on the study plan will include: 

Units 


Master's degree studies, supporting courses 9 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses (outside the student's area of specialization and outside the 
Department of School Administration and Social Foundations (6) 

Courses for the concentration in school administration 21 


(No grade below C) 

All of the following: 

Educ 505 Supervision of Curriculum (4) 

Educ 561 Organization of School Systems (3) 

Educ 563 Principles of School Personnel Administration (2) 

Educ 564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Educ 565 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration, and Buildings (3) 

Educ 567A Fieldwork and Seminar in School Administration (Includes Project or 
Thesis) (2) 

Educ 567B Fieldwork and Seminar in School Administration (Includes Project or 
Thesis) (2) 

One of the following: 

Educ 566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor (3) 

Educ 586 The Secondary School Principal, Community College Administrator, and 
Supervisor (3) 

For advisement and further information, consult the Department of School Administration/Social 
Foundations/ Reading. See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," p. 71 and the Graduate Bulletin. 

INTERNSHIP IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

A selected number of teachers will be offered the opportunity to study and to practice school 
administration as school interns in administration. A candidate must obtain admission to the pro- 
gram, and agreement must be reached with a sponsoring school or college district to employ the 
candidate as a full-time administrator during the school year. The concept of the internship in 
educational administration is similar to that found in other professional fields. Its basic function is 
to enable the intern to gain the necessary experience in the performance of the critical tasks of his 
profession while under the close supervision of a fully-trained and experienced practitioner. It is an 
opportunity for the college and local school and college systems to work together in training 
well-qualified school administrators. The internship in educational administration is but one phase 
of the program for preparing supervisory and administrative personnel for community college, high 


188 Education 


school, intermedate school, and elementary school positions of leadership. It is an investment in 
training supervisory leadership from which the cooperating school district, the university and the 
intern will derive benefit and in which all three have responsibilities. Cooperation among all three 
is essential to the success of the program. 

Internships are for a full academic year and require of all students the completion of a minimum 
of 19 graduate credits. During the period of the internship the student is required to be a registered 
graduate student at Cal State Fullerton. 

All candidates will be given a temporary credential for supervision and administration according to 
the regulations of the California Administrative Code, Title V, Section 6555. Such candidates should 
register in two courses: Education 561, Organization of School Systems, Education 563, Principles 
of School Personnel Administration. 

Both courses must be completed in the summer session if the student is to do his internship beginning 
in the fall semester. Applications for admission to the program should be sent to the chairman. 
Internship Program In School Administration, by June 1. Careful planning of electives will enable 
candidates to receive the Master of Science in Education with a concentration in school administra- 
tion upon further study, after completing the requirements for the internship. 

ADVANCED CREDENTIAL PROGRAM 
School Administration 

Candidates in administration, upon completion of the degree requirements for a Master of Science 
in Education, should qualify for certification as a school administrator at any level providing they 
have taught three years. As certification requirements change yearly, candidates are urged to have 
their adviser check their study program against current requirements. 

Candidates in administration accepted in the Administrator Internship Program will be issued the 
Standard Supervision Credential conditionally upon partial fulfillment of requirements according to 
the California Administrative Code, Title V, Section 6555. 

OTHER STUDENTS IN SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION 

Experienced school administrators, holding a California administrative credential or a supervision 
credential and exempt from degree requirements, may register for any course in the school adminis- 
tration concentration. Teachers wishing to take courses In school administration directed at helping 
them to understand administration problems are welcome to take selected courses. 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 
Reading 

A program of graduate studies leading to the degree of Master of Science in Education, Reading, 
is authorized by the California State University and Colleges Board of Trustess. The program is 
designed to help qualified individuals gain the technical knowledge and scholarship requisite to 
becoming reading specialists. This professional program is based on and combined with sound 
preparation in the liberal arts and sciences. The curriculum proposes an interdisciplinary approach 
to the preparation of the professional specialist in the area of reading. Thus, those who qualify for 
the degree must complete a specified amount of their coursework in such fields as linguistics, English, 
sociology, speech communication, theatre or psychology. 

Prerequisites 

Once the student has been notified of his acceptance for this master's degree program, he should 
complete an application for classified status. Then he must confer with the graduate studies adviser 
in the reading program to discuss the following prerequisites which should be fulfilled for admission 
to the proposed degree program: 

1 . A baccalaureate degree from an accredited college or university. 

2. Successful teaching experience in an elementary or secondary school or community college. 

3. An approved major. 

4. A grade-point average of 2.5 or better In previous academic and related work. 

5. Sufficient background in reading. 

6. Acceptable scores on the Graduate Record Examination Aptitude Test. 

7. Four references from school administrators, school supervisors or professors. 

8. A satisfactory interview. 


Education 


189 


Study Plan 

The adviser-approved minimum of 31 units on the study plan will include the following: 

Units 


Master's Degree Studies, Supporting Courses 9 

All of the following: 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Adviser-approved courses outside the area of concentration (6) 

Courses for the concentration in reading 22 


(No grade below a B) 

All of the following: 

Educ 506 Curriculum and Research: Reading (3) 

Educ 516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Educ 581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (3) 

Educ 583 A Remedial Reading: Casework (3) 

Educ 583B Remedial Reading: Casework (3) 

Educ 595 Advanced Studies (1) 

(Includes comprehensive examination) 

Two of the following: 

Educ 507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3) 
Educ 508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Educ 517 Educational Testing (3) 

Educ 518 Behavioral Problems in Teaching (3) 

Educ 519 The Principal's Role in the Effective School Reading Program (3) 
Educ 582 Analysis of Corrective Reading Practices (3) 

Educ 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

Educ 585 Word Perception Skills in Reading (3) 

For further information, consult the chairman of the Institute for Reading. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION/SOCIAL 
FOUNDATIONS/READING UNDERGRADUATE COURSES 

101 Reading Development (1) 

An elective course for students enrolled at Cal State Fullerton who wish to improve their reading 
efficiency. May be repeated for a maximum of three units of credit. 

301 The Educated Man (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing or consent of instructor. Various conceptions of the nature, concerns 
and activities of a truly educated person are studied, as proposed by scholars from Plato to B. 
F. Skinner. Special attention will be given to such problems as the humanitarian ideal; aspects 
of human freedom; the relation of science to culture; mankind's concern about his own nature 
and destiny. 

302 The Campus in Transition (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing or consent of instructor. History and development of American higher 
education is studied in the context of both its historic roots in European education, and the many 
phases of American culture from the founding of Harvard in 1636 to the present. The roots of 
change and campus unrest are examined, and special attention is given to such contemporary 
issues as Black Power, the war and the draft; student attitudes toward sex; rebellion against 
"estabishment" ideals; attitudes toward grades, drugs and political involvement. 

303 Education and Its Critics (3) 

Examination of the criticisms of contemporary education and of proposals for reform. Includes visits 
to a variety of schools. Designed for all students. Not a part of the credential program. 


»i-a t MO 


190 


Education 


304 Contemporary Educational Change (3) 

Emphasis on the changing educational scene: primary focus on elementary and secondary levels. 
The quest for greater flexibility, better methods of teaching, improved staffing patterns and 
accountability will serve as the course foundation. 

305 School and Society (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 401 or consent of instructor. Stability and change in contemporary society 
viewed in terms of the decline of traditional values and culture and the rise of legal-rational 
institutions. Urban life, social class, race relations and family organization will be examined in 
relation to the stressful nature of modern society. 

401 Social Foundations of Education (4) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411, admission to teacher education or consent of instructor. Seminar in philo- 
sophical, historical and sociological foundations of education, considered in the light of their 
influence on contemporary educational theory and practice in the United States. 

402 Comparative Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 401, 403, or consent of instructor. A seminar centered in study of the various 
countries' and areas' education patterns, problems and trends as part of the cultural setting in 
which found; designed to deepen insight into our own culture's educational program and offer 
bases for comparative evaluation with other systems. 

403 History of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: history of world civilization and Educ 331 or 442 or consent of instructor: The main 
streams of educational history In Europe and America, with particular emphasis on the ways 
these main streams have affected the current scene in the United States. 

406 Educational Sociology (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 331 or 442, or consent of instructor. The school In the social order; the school 
as a social system; analysis of cultural factors affecting the school; the special culture of the 
school; roles and role conflicts In the school; policy questions flowing from social issues and 
school-cultural relationships. 

480 The Teaching of Reading (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 380) 

Curriculum and methods in the teaching of reading In the elementary and secondary schools. 
Examination and analysis of the approaches to reading in teachers' manuals and guides. Practical 
experience in preparing lessons in classroom teaching of reading. 

485 Introduction to Educational Administration (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Administrative tasks, roles and processes in education, with 
particular attention to personal and professional qualifications for administrative positions. 

4% Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with an individual under the 
direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing, consent of instructor and department prior to registration. 
Conduct of an individual investigation under supervision of a faculty member; Investigation might 
be an experiment, a library study, or a creative project; only students of demonstrated capacity 
and maturity will be approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeated for 
credit. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Prerequisites: postgraduate standing and Educ 339 or 739 or Educ 749, or consent of instructor. Uses 
of theories of knowledge, value and reality in dealing with educational problems; application of 
contemporary systems of thought to education. 

503 Foundations for Administrative Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Seminar on cultures and values to which schools must contribute: 
introduction to community sociology, tax systems and public administration; the literature of 
leadership. Screening for admission to program. Occasional special meetings. Required of all 
students during first registration in school administration and supervision at this university. 


Education 191 


505 The Supervision of Curriculum (4) 

Prerequisite: Educ 566 or 586. Seminar on development of a quality program of instruction in both 
elementary and secondary schools; appraisal of programs of instruction; advanced principles of 
curricular review and modification. Evaluation of subject matter competence in area of supervi- 
sory specialization. Meets credential requirements in principles of curriculum construction and 
evaluation; supervision of instruction and curriculum in both elementary and secondary schools. 

506 Curriculum and Research in Reading (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 506) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Study of curriculum and research in reading, including materials, 

organization and methods of instruction. 

507 Current Trends in Secondary and College Reading Programs (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. Recent research findings on the learner, the teacher, approaches, 
materials and facilities in the teaching of reading at secondary and college levels. 

508 Teaching Reading in Today's Elementary School (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division or graduate status. Current trends in the teaching of elementary reading, 
focusing on the teacher as diagnostician and the reading process as continuous and developmen- 
tal for all learners. 

516 Etiology of Reading Difficulties (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 516) 

Prerequisite: teaching experience, Educ 506 or consent of instructor. Studies of the factors underlying 
learning disabilities in reading in children, adolescents and young adults. 

517 Educational Testing (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing or consent of instructor. Survey of Individual and group intelligence, 
achievement, interest, aptitude, vocational and personality tests. Theory and practical application 
of individual and group tests used with students having learning problems. A course for reading 
specialists, school counselors, teachers and administrators to enhance their effective use of 
services of school psychologists' reports. Demonstrations of tests by Instructor. 

518 Behavioral Problems in Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing or consent of instructor. Practical application of psychological 
principles to the diagnosis and management of behavioral problems in elementary and secondary 
classrooms. 

519 The Principal's Role in the Effective School Reading Program (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing — preservice or inservice principal. Includes techniques for develop- 
ing the philosophy, goals and objectives of the school reading program consistent with the PPBS 
format procedures for assessing students' reading ability and using this Information to place 
students in classes and methods for providing Inservice experiences in reading for the school 
faculty. 

560 Contemporary Problems in School Administration (3) 

A seminar on contemporary problems in school organization and administration with particular 
emphasis on collective bargaining, the computer as a business and educational tool, and the 
needs of urban schooling including the problems of racial isolation. 

561 Organization of School Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 503 or concurrent enrollment. Seminar on structure, functions, trends, fiscal 
responsibilities and issues In respect to the government of education at federal, state, county, and 
local school district levels. Basic principles in school organization and administration. Special 
emphasis on intergovernmental relations and impact at local level. 

563 Principles of School Personnel Administration (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 503 or concurrent enrollment. Seminar on principles of organizational behavior, 
social processes inherent In effective leadership, and techniques of school personnel manage- 
ment. 

564 Seminar in School Law (2) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. School law as a reflection of public policy; the California Educa- 
tion Code and the California Administrative Code, Title 5, and county counsel opinions as they 
affect administration, instruction, and financial management of public schools. Court attorney 
general decisions In interpreting school law. Legal basis for public education in California. An 
elective course in school administration. 

^65 Seminar in School Finance, Business Administration, and Buildings (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Emphasis on school finance, business administration, and build- 
ings as they implement an effective educational program. A study of financial principles. School 
revenues and expenditures, budgetary procedures and processes, cost analysis; business man- 
agement, and salary policies. An elective course in school administration. 


192 Education 


566 The Elementary School Principal and Supervisor (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 561 and 563. Seminar on leadership roles of elementary school principal and 
supervisor, pupil personnel and Instructional program in elementary school; working relations 
and morale among staff, community and pupils; parent education; relations with central district 
staff; management and recordkeeping functions; teacher evaluation. 

567A3 Fieldwork and Seminar in School Administration (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 566 or 586 or concurrent registration, and consent of instructor. Two-semester 
terminal sequence required for the M.S. in Education with a concentration in school administra- 
tion. Includes directed fieldwork in selected public schools and district offices. Supervised project 
or thesis required for degree. (4 hours fieldwork, 2 hours conference) 

568 Seminar for Administrative Trainees (3) 

Provides a behavioral analysis approach In the establishment of a sound foundation for educational 
administrators who have just completed a year of practice in administration. The seminar is the 
culminating offering of the Administrator Internship Program. The objectives of the seminar 
Include (1) developing further insights into the complex behavior of human beings in social 
groups, (2) increasing understanding of how certain theory and research contribute to effective 
administrative practice, (3) evaluating further self-behavior in administration. Experienced 
school administrators who wish to relate their administrative experiences to the theory of 
behavioral analysis are welcome to register in the seminar. Behavioral environment will be 
examined as it shapes process, organization and function In school administration. 

581 Analysis of Reading Difficulties (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 581) 

Prerequisites: bachelor's degree, teaching experience, Standard Teaching Credential, Educ 506 or 

consent of instructor. Analysis and diagnosis of reading difficulties. Techniques and methods or 
prevention and treatment. Individual remediation of student. Primary through secondary. 

582 Analysis of Corrective Reading Practices (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 582) 

Prerequisites: Educ 516, 581 and consent of instructor. Critical evaluation of reading and remedial 

reading practices. Short-term project in a school situation. 

583A,B Remedial Reading Casework (3,3) (Formerly Teacher Education 583A,B) 

Prerequisites: Educ 582 and consent of instructor. Fieldwork in diagnosis and remediation in reading 
through casework technique. Conferences with teachers, parents, consultants, and administra- 
tors. 

584 Linquistics and Reading (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 584) 

A study of linguistics and Its influence on reading materials and instruction. An analysis of trends 
in reading and changes affected by the science of linguistics. 

585 Word Perception Skills In Reading (3) (Formerly Teacher Education 585) 

Study of word perception skills in the process of learning to read. A developmental hygiene of child 
vision. Visual anomalies and their applications to reading disorders. 

586 The Secondary School Principal, Community College Administrator and Supervisor 
(3) 

Prerequisites; Educ 561 and 563. Seminar on leadership roles of the secondary school principal and 
supervisor, pupil personnel and Instructional program in the secondary school; the development 
and administration of vocational and adult education; working relations and morale among staff, 
community and pupils, relations with central district staff; the management and record-keeping 
functions; teacher evaluation. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
Interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent Inquiry. 


Education 193 


DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

FACULTY 
Bernard Kravitz 

Department Chairman 

James Cusick (Coordinator of Secondary Education), Raymond Denno,* Kenneth Doane,* Mildred 
Donoghue, Gerhard Ehmann,* Barbara Hartsig, Shirley Hill, Emma Holmes, Paul Kane, Edith 
McCullough, Bryan Moffet (Coordinator of Teacher Education and Elementary Education), 
Donald Pease, Morris Sica 

SECONDARY EDUCATION TEACHING METHODS FACULTY 

James Alexander (Journalism Education), Jean Barrett (Physical Education), Carol Chadwick (Music 
Education), Francis Collea (Science Eduation), Miriam Cox (English Education), Naomi Dietz 
(Art Education), Hugh Ellison, (Music Education), Kaye Good (Speech Education), Donald 
Henry (Theatre Education), George Hoetzl, Jr. (Mathematics Education), Elmer Johnson (Physi- 
cal Education), Joseph Landon (Music Education), L. Clark Lay (Mathematics Education), 
Benton Minor (Music Education), Irene Nims (English Education), David Pagni (Mathematics 
Education), Albert Porter (Art Education), Virginia Scheel (Physical Education), Clarence 
Schneider (English Education), Eula Stovall (Physical Education), H. Eric Streitberger (Science 
Education), Jacqueline Thornton (Foreign Language Education), Howard Warner (Art Educa- 
tion), John White (English Education), Charles Williams (Science Education), Jon ZImmermann 
(Foreign Language Education) 

PART-TIME 

Leona Baumgardner, Margot Coons, Margaret Eadie, Clarence Lee, Helen Levy, Margery Ogden, 
Russell Parks, Ann Pease, Lloyd Pieper, E. Ann Pierce, Harriet Schultz, Mildred Shell 

The courses, programs, and services of the department are directed toward the following objectives 
of students: 

1 . Master of Science in Education with concentration in an elementary curriculum and instruction. 

2. Preservice teacher education (elementary school, secondary school, community college). 

3. In-service teacher education. 

Instruction concentrates on the central principles of the school as a basic institution of our culture, 
the methods and materials associated with effective teaching, and the current and persistent prob- 
lems that confront teachers, and other professional workers in educational institutions. In addition 
to using published source materials and attending class sessions for presentations and discussions, 
many courses require fieldwork in schools, laboratories, clinics, and other educational agencies. 

PUBLICATIONS AVAILABLE FROM THE DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

1. Master of Science in Education, Elementary Curriculum and Instruction 

2. Admission to Teacher Education: Standards, Instructions, Application 

3. Admission to Student Teaching: Standards, Instructions, Application 

4. Standard Teaching Credential with a Specialization In Elementary Teaching 

5. Standard Teaching Credential with a Specialization in Secondary Teaching 

6. Standard Teaching Credential with a Specialization in Community College Teaching 

Important note: 

Due to changes in the legal requirements for teaching credentials mandated by the California State 
Legislature, the programs and requirements listed below apply only to those students who were 
admitted to Teacher Education prior to November 2, 1971 . It is possible that other students interested 
in obtaining a teaching credential at this institution will be subject to different requirements and 
programs which will be published in a supplementary bulletin. 

* University administrative officer. 


" S3097 


194 Education 

PRESERVICE TEACHER EDUCATION 


TEACHER EDUCATION CURRICULA 

Cal State Fullerton is accredited by the California State Board of Education for programs leading to 
the following credentials offered by the Department of Teacher Education: 

1. Standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teaching 

2. Standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching 

3. Standard teaching credential with specialization in community college teaching 

The School of Education has administrative responsibility for teacher education. All curricula provide 
for completing the requirements for graduation with the bachelor of arts degree at the end of the 
usual four collegiate years and an additional year of work to satisfy requirements for a teaching 
credential. Preparation for teaching in a community college requires the master's degree. Details of 
the programs are provided in special brochures available from the Department of Teacher Education. 
Information about the professional services authorized by the above credentials will be provided 
by professional advisers. 

PERSONNEL SERVICES FOR TEACHER EDUCATION STUDENTS 

Advisement is available to any student seeking a public school credential and a bachelor of arts 
degree at this university. During registration, the student should consult an adviser in the department 
in which he expects to major and an adviser in the School of Education who will help him select 
courses and build his program. A student from another institution should bring transcripts of previous 
work and a tentative selection of courses. Transferred education courses must be of upper division 
level and taken within the past 15 years to be applicable to upper division credential requirements. 

ADMISSION TO TEACHER EDUCATION 

To become a candidate for a teaching credential the student must be enrolled, in good standing, 
and must be admitted to "teacher education" in the Office of Admission to Teacher Education of 
the School of Education. Application for admission to teacher education should be filed during the 
first semester of the junior year or the first semester of attendance at the university, if the student 
enters with advanced standing. 

Admission to teacher education is required of each student before he files the application for student 
teaching.! 

A faculty committee will review information concerning the applicant's intellectual resources and 
mastery of important concepts in the common curricular areas of higher education, command of 
fundamental skills of communication (English language usage, written composition, speech, hearing, 
reading comprehension, handwriting, mathematical skills), scholarship, personality and character, 
interest in teaching, and health. Data related to these criteria are gathered from transcripts and 
records from other schools and colleges, group and individual tests, personality inventories, esti- 
mates of the potential of the applicant, and from the Student Health Center. Students should normally 
qualify for admission and be advised of their status during the second semester of the junior year 
or their first semester of attendance if they enter with advanced standing with degrees from accredit- 
ed colleges or universities. 

Students who show weaknesses in any of the fundamental skills of communication are advised of 
their standing. If there are weaknesses in only one or two of the areas noted above, the student will 
be advised of refresher courses and given a specified time to meet the standard. 

If the applicant has serious deficiencies in communication skills or does not meet the standards of 
mastery in the common curricular areas, personality and character, scholarship, interest in teaching, 
or health, the faculty committee will deny admission to teacher education. 

The student must arrange to take the required battery of group and individual tests and inventories 
necessary to provide information needed by the faculty committee. The tests of breadth of under- 
standing, reading, English usage, number skills, composition, handwriting, and personality are given 
by the School of Education for admission to teacher education; consult the Office of Admission to 
Teacher Education of the School of Education for dates. 

The student who comes to Cal State Fullerton to work toward a credential for teaching in a secondary 
school and who already has a bachelor's degree must, before he is admitted to teacher education. 


t Exceptions will be made in the case of new transfer students. 


Education 195 

consult with an adviser in the major and must submit a statement, signed by the adviser, which 
indicates the following: 

1 . That the student's undergraduate preparation in his major is considered to be adequate for the 
credential sought, or 

2. Specific courses which the student must complete to have a major adequate for the credential 
sought, and which he must complete before he will be admitted to student teaching. These may 
be in addition to the minimum of the six upper division or graduate units required in the major 
in the postgraduate year, or may, in part or in whole, satisfy this six unit minimum requirement. 

Full details on standards and procedures for admission to teacher education are described in 
"Instructions and Standards for Admission to Teacher Education," which is available from the Office 
of Admission to Teacher Education and the Department of Teacher Education. 

STUDENT TEACHING 

Each candidate for the standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teach- 
ing will do his student teaching in the last semester of his senior year or in his postgraduate year 
at the university. Each candidate for the standard teaching credential with specialization in second- 
ary school teaching, or for the specialization in community college teaching will do his student 
teaching during a postgraduate year. Details about student teaching in special education classes are 
available in the Department of Behavioral Sciences. Student teaching assignments are made In the 
elementary and secondary schools of districts geographically accessible to the university. Commu- 
nity college student teaching assignments are made in nearby community colleges. Students will be 
assigned to work under the supervision of carefully selected supervising teachers; a university 
supervisor makes frequent visits to the student teacher and the supervising teacher. Student teachers 
meet in a weekly seminar under the leadership of the university supervisor to discuss performance 
and problems. 

Application for Student Teaching 

Admission to teacher education as described above is the first step in a cumulative and continuing 
evaluation of a candidate's fitness to teach. The applicant for admission to student teaching must 
have a grade-point average of at least 2.5 in the major, 2.5 in the minor, and 2.5 in professional 
education. Marks of C, or better, are required in all professional education courses. Applicants for 
admission to elementary school student teaching must be classified as postgraduate students or be 
within 1 5 units of the baccalaureate degree. Applicants for admission to secondary school student 
teaching or to community college student teaching must be classifed as postgraduate students. All 
applicants must have completed at least 12 units at Cal State Fullerton. The applicant must present 
a favorable report on health status and history. FHe must present evidence of readiness for student 
teaching responsibility as testified by the major adviser, the professional adviser, and other university 
faculty. This evidence relates to scholarship, breadth of understanding, command of the subjects to 
be taught, fundamental skills of communication, personality and character, interest and potential for 
teaching, and health. 

Competence is required in all subjects and skills for which the candidate is seeking a credential. For 
the elementary school teacher education student, this includes all subjects and skills commonly 
taught in the first eight grades of the public schools. Secondary school and community college 
teacher education students must meet the requirements for major and minor (s) as specified by the 
academic divisions. 

All instructors of the university are asked to participate in the continuing evaluation of students in 
relation to those aptitude, personality and character traits which are considered essential to admis- 
sion to the teaching profession. Dependability in fulfilling assignments, class attendance, ability to 
get along with people, industry, and emotional stability are representative criteria. In addition to the 
evaluations by instructors, the applicants may be interviewed by a faculty committee, and attention 
will be directed to general appearance, dress, vitality, poise, temperament, integrity and social 
attitudes. 

The application for admission to student teaching is submitted to the coordinator of admissions to 
teacher education and student teaching. The application must be submitted by October 1 5 or March 
1 of the semester preceding the semester in which the student teaching assignment is expected. A 
faculty committee will gather the information described above and report to the student in time to 
do planning for the following semester. 

Except for graduate students who are in their first semester of study at Ca! State Fullerton, appHca- 


196 Education 


tions will be accepted only from those who have completed all requirements for admission to 
teacher education. 

Full details on standards and procedures are described in "Instructions and Standards for Admission 
to Student Teaching/' available in the Department of Teacher Education. 

Study Limits of Student Teachers 

Students who enroll in Educ 339 or 739, Student Teaching in the Elementary School, will be limited 
to one additional course for that semester. Students who enroll in Educ 749, Student Teaching in 
the Secondary School, will be limited to two additional courses for that semester. It is expected that 
students will not carry out-of-university work responsibilities during the semester of the student 
teaching assignment. 

If a student is under hardship because of these limitations, he may submit a petition to the coordina- 
tor of elementary education or to the coordinator of secondary education, as appropriate, requesting 
permission to carry not more than 13 units, including student teaching. The petition must set forth, 
in full, the circumstances necessitating the petition. 

Permission to Substitute Teaching Experience for Student Teaching 

A candidate for a teaching credential who has had two years of successful, regular teaching experi- 
ence must petition the School of Education, through his professional adviser, for permission to 
substitute such experience for the student teaching requirement. Substitution of teaching experience 
for student teaching will be considered only if the applicant: 

1 . Has been admitted to teacher education at the university. 

2. Has submitted an official verification from his former supervisor, principal, or superintendent 
to the School of Education certifying at least two years of successful, regular teaching experi- 
ence at the appropriate level. A letter of verification must be submitted to the Department of 
Teacher Education. 

STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS FOR CREDENTIALS FOR TEACHING 

The curricular requirements for credentials for teaching in California elementary schools, secondary 
schools and community colleges are included in the the curricula descriptions. Upon the completion 
of the requirements, the student will submit an application for a credential to the State Department 
of Education in Sacramento. On these applications the student is asked about his citizenship status, 
his professional conduct, and he is asked to sign an oath of allegiance. He must also submit a health 
examination form signed by a qualified physician, two fingerprint-identification cards and the legal 
fee, which is currently $20. The forms are available in the Credentials Office of the university. 

Curriculum in Elementary School Teacher Education * 

The program leading to the recommendation for the standard teaching credential with specialization 
in elementary school teaching includes the following: 

1 . A bachelor's degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of college or university postgraduate education taken at the upper division or 
graduate level. (If the student does not complete all requirements, the credential may be 
awarded on the basis of partial fulfillment at the end of four or more years of work if he has 
a bachelor's degree from an approved institution and has completed the student teaching 
requirement.) 

3. A minimum of 45 semester hours in five of the following six areas: (1) social sciences, (2) 
natural sciences, (3) humanities (excluding foreign languages), (4) fine arts, (5) mathematics, 
and (6) foreign languages. The humanities requirement must include a year of English and a 
course in advanced composition. (To prepare himself to meet professional responsibilities, an 
elementary school teacher education candidate should include in his program Art 100, Music 
101, PE 123, PE 149, and Speech Communication 100 or Speech Communication 102). These 
45 semester hours of coursework for the credential can be met through the university general 
education requirements for the bachelor's degree with the proper selection of courses. (Not 
more than six hours of coursework taken to satisfy these requirements shall apply toward the 
fulfillment of the requirements for either a major or a minor. 


• Regulations for the credential are subject to change by the State Board of Education; any curricular changes will be available in 
later university publications. 


rs-j II IS 


Education 197 


4. Three semester hours of coursework in the theory of the structure, arithmetic and algebra of 
the real number system or three semester hours of coursework in calculus. (Math Ed 103A 
meets this requirement.) 

5. One of the following: 

A. A major consisting of at least 24 semester hours of upper division or graduate level courses 
in an academic subject matter area commonly taught in the public elementary schools. 
These majors are currently available for this specialization at the university: American 
studies, anthropology, art, biological science, chemistry, communications with a journalism 
emphasis, comparative literature, drama, economics, English, French, geography, German, 
history, linguistics, mathematics, music, philosophy, physics, political science, psychology, 
sociology, Spanish, speech. (Note: the specifications above are state minima, and do not 
necessarily satisfy requirements for a major for graduation from the university.) 

B. A major and a minor, each of which is in a subject matter area commonly taught in the 
public elementary schools, and one of which is in an academic subject matter area. The 
academic major shall consist of at least 24 semester hours of upper division or graduate 
coursework. If the major is not an academic one, it shall consist of 28 semester hours of 
upper division or graduate coursework. (With a nonacademic major, i.e., business adminis- 
tration or physical education, only the major and minor subjects may be taught in kindergar- 
ten and grades 1 through 9.) This minor shall consist of a minimum of 20 semester hours 
of coursework. When the major is in an academic subject matter area specialized prepara- 
tion in such areas as mentally retarded or speech and hearing handicapped may be substitut- 
ed. 

C. Two minors in subject matter areas commonly taught in the public elementary schools and 
a major, other than education and educational methodology, not commonly taught therein. 
If the major is not in an academic subject matter area, each minor shall be in an academic 
matter area. (With a nonacademic major only the major and minor subjects may be taught 
in kindergarten and grades 1 through 9.) If the major is in an academic subject matter area, 
one of the minors shall be in an academic subject matter area. These minors shall consist 
of a minimum of 12 semester hours coursework. Specialized preparation in such areas as 
mentally retarded or speech and hearing handicapped may be substituted for one of the 
minors. 

6. Courses selected from the following ones offered by academic departments as part of the basic 
preparation for elementary teachers. A minimum of three courses, selected with the approval 
of a professional adviser, must be completed before student teaching. 

Art 380 Art and Child Development (3) 

English 433 Children's Literature (3) 

Math Ed 103B Fundamental Concepts of Mathematics (3) 

Music 333 Music and Child Development (3) 

PE 333 Physical Education and Human Development (3) 

Sci Ed 310 Elementary Experimental Science (3) 

7. Professional education requirements which are currently met by the following program: 

Educ 331 A Elementary School Principles, Curricula, and Methods: Mathematics, Science, and 
Social Studies (4) 

Educ 331 B Elemenary School Principles, Curricula and Methods: Language Arts and Reading 
(4) 

Educ 339 or 739 Student Teaching in the Elementary School (8) 

Educ 401 Social Foundations of Education (4) 

Educ 411 Psychological Foundations of Education (3) 

Educ 496 Senior Educational Practicum, Elementary (1) 

Note: Admission to the university does not include admission to the elementary teacher education 
program. Procedures for admission to teacher education outlined on page 194. It is the responsi- 
bility of each student to file an application for admission to teacher education In his junior year and 
to complete the requirements for admission to teacher education before enrolling in Educ 331. 
Admission to teacher education does not include admission to student teaching. Each student is 
responsible for meeting the requirements and following the procedures for admission to student 
teaching %\yer\ on page 195. 


tn— 3 II 190 


198 


Education 


Composite Lower Division, Upper Division, and Fifth Year Work 

A student seeking recommendation for the standard teaching credential with specialization in 
elementary school teaching after five years of preservice teacher education should complete — 

In the lower and upper division: 

a. Coursework listed in 3, 4 and 5 above. 

b. A minimum of three courses from item 6 above. These courses are to be selected in consulta- 
tion with and with the approval of his professional adviser. 

c. Courses in professional education 
Junior year, Educ 411 (3) and 4% (1) 

Senior year, second semester, 331 A (4) and 331 B (4) 

d. Additional courses selected in consultation with his professional adviser. 

In the fifth year: 

a. Courses in professional education 
First semester, Educ 739 (8) 

Second semester, Educ 401 (4) 

b. Additional courses from item 6 above as needed and other courses selected in consultation 
with his professional adviser. 

(The applicant for the standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school 
teaching must complete 30 units of upper division and/or graduate work after he has completed 
all requirements for the bachelor's degree.) 

A student seeking the standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school teaching 
on partial fulfillment of requirements should complete — 

In the lower and upper division: 

a. Coursework listed in 3, 4, and 5 above. 

b. A minimum of three courses from item 6 above. These courses are to be selected in consulta- 
tion with and with the approval of his professional adviser. 

c. Courses in professional education 
junior year, Educ 411 (3) and 496 (1) 

Senior year, first semester, 331 A (4) and 331 B (4) 

Senior year, second semester, Educ 339 (8) 

d. Additional courses selected In consultation with his professional adviser 
In the fifth year (to be completed during the first seven years of teaching): 

a. Courses In professional education 
Educ 401 (4) 

b. Additional courses from item 6 above as needed and other courses selected in consultation 
with his professional adviser. 

(The applicant for the standard teaching credential with specialization in elementary school 
teaching must complete 30 units of upper division and/or graduate work after he has completed 
all requirements for the bachelor's degree.) 

Alternate Program, Internship 

An alternate program (Internship teaching) leading to the recommendation for the standard teaching 
credential with specialization in elementary school teaching Is available for those who meet the 
requirements. 

This program fulfills the fifth year (30 units beyond the bachelor's degree) requirement and qualifies 
the candidate for the standared teaching credential with an elementary specialization. 

This program extends over two summers and two semesters. A student must begin the internship 
program In the summer preceding his internship teaching. 

Standards for admissions to the internship program: 

a. A bachelor's degree from an approved institution with a major consisting of at least 24 semester 
hours of upper division or graduate level courses in an academic subject matter area commonly 
taught in the public elementary schools. 

b. A minimum of 45 semester hours in five of the six areas outlined in No. 3 on page 1%.* 

• For those who do rrot meet this requirement, but otherwise qualify for the internship, a program will be planned so that the individual 
can enter the internship program ar>d meet the requirements of the Curriculum in Elenwntary School Teacher Education. 


a0*-3 II 175 


Education 199 


c. Three semester hours of course work in mathematics outlined in No. 4 on page 197. 

d. No teaching experience. 

e. A grade-point average of 2.5 in the major. 

f. Minimum achievement requirements on the Graduate Record Examination for admission to 
graduate study. 

g. Screening by faculty in elementary teacher education and by cooperating school districts. 

h. Sponsorship by a school district as an intern in elementary school teaching. 

Courses in the program include selection from No. 6 on page 195, the courses in No. 7 on page 197, 
Educ 496, 537, 595, and one or more electives from the following: 

Educ 503 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Foreign Languages (3) 

Educ 531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Educ 532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Educ 533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Educ 534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Curriculum in Secondary School Teacher Education t 

Credential requirements and the program leading to the recommendation for the standard teaching 
credential with specialization in secondary school teaching includes the following: 

1 . A bachelor's degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of university or university postgraduate education taken at the upper division or 
graduate level. (The postgraduate year is defined by California State University, Fullerton as 
30 semester units of upper division or graduate level coursework competed after the bachelor's 
degree. Coursework taken through extension at this university and summer workshops offered 
at this university may be used as coursework applying towards the fifth-year requirement.) 

3. Forty-five semester hours of coursework, including the English and the competency described 
below, and including four oi the following six areas: (1) humanities (excluding foreign lan- 
guages), (2) social sciences, (3) natural sciences, (4) mathematics requiring as a prerequisite 
an understanding and knowledge of high school algebra and geometry, (5) fine arts, and (6) 
foreign languages. The humanities requirement must include a year of English, and in addition, 
the applicant for the credential shall demonstrate competence in composition either by passing 
a course in advanced composition or by passing an examination in lieu thereof. 

(Note: This 45 semester hours of coursework for the credential can be met through the 
university general education requirement for the bachelor's degree with proper selection of 
courses. Not more than six hours of coursework taken to satisfy these requirements shall apply 
toward the major or minor for the credential.) 

4. Preparation in subject matter areas commonly taught in the public secondary schools for the 
purpose of credential requirements for majors and minors. 

a. One of the following: 

Option 1. A major in an academic subject matter area commonly taught in the public 
secondary schools. 

Option 2. A major and a minor, each of which is in a subject matter area commonly taught 
in the public high schools, and one of which is in an academic subject matter 
area. 

b. Major requirements for the credential must include at least 24 upper division and graduate 
level units. At least six units in the major must be taken at the graduate level. Six postgraduate 
units in the minor may be taken in lieu of this requirement for the major. See the general 
course numbering code on page 93 for the description of graduate level courses for the 
credential. Also see the appropriate sections of this catalog for descriptions of requirements 
in specific majors. The university will recognize single subject areas as satisfying Option 1 
provided the student supplies additional upper division or graduate units in supporting areas 
structured by the department in which the baccalaureate degree is taken and in consultation 
with the other departments involved. This option should be considered carefully, since it 
may not be practical in terms of job placement. Some departments of the university will 

t This is the curriculum for the standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary school teaching. Credential requirenf>ents 
are subject to regulatory changes. Any such changes will be described in later university publications. 


200 Education 


require that the student must present a minor. Students must consult with academic and 
professional advisers concerning Option 1. 

c. Minor requirements vary, but must include 20 units in a single subject in this credential 
program at Cal State Fullerton. (Note; A minor is not required for graduation from the 
university but is required for the recommendation of the university for Option 2.) 

Each student will complete a major planned with and approved by his major adviser. Majors 
presently available are: American studies, art, biology, business administration, chemistry, 
communications with journalism emphasis, economics, English, French, geography, Ger- 
man, history, mathematics, music, physical education, physics, political science, Spanish, 
speech communication and theatre arts. 

Each student will complete a minor planned with and approved by his professional adviser. 
Minors presently available are: American studies, art, biology, business education, chemis- 
try, communications with journalism emphasis, economics, English, French, geography, 
German, history, mathematics, music, physical education, physics, political science, Span- 
ish, speech communication and theatre arts. Students may also present specialized prepara- 
tion to serve as a teacher of exceptional children in the area of the mentally retarded or 
speech and hearing handicapped in lieu of the minor. 

Students majoring in business administration and physical education must have an academic 
minor with a minimum of 20 units in subjects commonly taught in the public secondary 
schools. Students with these majors must complete 12 units of upper division or graduate 
level work in the minor area. 

5. Credential requirements in courses for preservice professional education are met in the follow- 
ing program in professional education: 

Courses in Professional Education 

Units 


Educ 340 Principles and Curricula of Secondary Education 3 

Educ 401 Social Foundations of Education 4 

Educ 41 1 Psychological Foundations of Education 3 

Educ 496 Senior Educational Practicum, Secondary 1 

Educ 442 Teaching (art, English, etc.) in the secondary Schools (also listed in respec- 
tive departments) 2 

Educ 449 Fieldwork in Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools 1 

Educ 749 Student Teaching (art, English, etc.) in the Secondary School and Seminar 

(also listed in respective departments) 6 


Students normally will begin their work in professional education in the junior year, and it is expected 
that, except for Educ 401, the courses above will be taken in the indicated sequence. Students who 
begin their work in professional education as seniors or as graduate students will follow a somewhat 
different sequence, and should consult professional advisers when planning their programs. Gradu- 
ate students without professional education backgrounds may be required to extend their program 
beyond a single academic year to complete the university secondary school teacher education 
program. Coursework taken in extension at other institutions is not acceptable in substitution for any 
of the above courses. In all cases, students are required to take Educ 340 the first semester they are 
enrolled in professional education. 

Note: Admission to the university does not include admission to the secondary school teacher 
education program. See the description on page 194 for the procedures for admission to teacher 
education which does include admission to this credential program. It is the responsibility of each 
student to file his application for admission to teacher education by the end of the semester in which 
he completes Educ 340. It is also the responsibility of each student to arrange to complete his 
requirements for admission to teacher education in his work in professional education. Students 

must be admitted to teacher education prior to taking Educ 442 and 449. 

Admission to teacher education does not include admission to student teaching. See the description 
of the procedures for admission to student teaching on page 195. The student must observe the 
deadline and must meet other requirements for admission to student teaching. 

Curriculum in Community College Teacher Education 

The program requirements leading to the university-recommended Standard Teaching Credential 
with a specialization in community college teaching are: 


Education 201 


1. A master's or higher degree from Cal State Fullerton or other accredited institution. 

2. Preparation in subject matter areas commonly taught in community colleges in either of the 
following: 

a. An academic major in a single subject commonly taught in community colleges. (The 
subject in which a master's degree has been granted constitutes a major in that subject for 
these purposes.) 

b. If the major is nonacademic (the candidate holds a master's degree in a subject such as 
business administraton or physical education), the candidate must have an academic minor 
of a minimum of 20 semester hours in a single subject commonly taught in the community 
college. Twelve of the units in the minor must be of upper division or graduate level. 

3. Professional education requirements in Cal State Fullerton recommended program: 

Units 


Educ 744 Principles of Community College Teaching 3 

Educ 799 Community College Student Teaching and Seminar 4 


Admission to Community College Teacher Education Program 

Admission to the university does not constitute admission to community college teacher education. 
The candidate must: 

Have a masters or higher degree from a fully accredited institution in a field in which the 
university offers a major 
or 

have classified graduate status (master's degree candidacy) at Cal State Fullerton and possess 
a baccalaureate degree. 

Admission to community college teacher education follows in general the procedure described on 
page 200. For exact procedures see Office of Admissions to Teacher Education. 

The student is responsible for filing his application for admission as early as possible and is also 
responsible for admission to teacher education. 

Application for community college student teaching and seminar is not included in admission to 
the program. The student is responsible for following the procedures listed on page 195 under 
"Application for Student Teaching." 

The courses in professional education listed above will be taken in sequence. The student must have 
postgraduate standing before he enrolls in these courses. Student teaching may be taken in either 
the last semester in which the master's degree will be completed or after the degree has been 
granted. 

Mote: The above is a description of the program leading to the recommendation of the university 
for the credential. This program includes student teaching and work in professional education not 
required by the state. The university program is designed to meet the job placement needs of 
candidates for positions in community colleges . 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION 

This degree is reserved for professionally qualified graduate students who desire to prepare for or 
advance their careers in elementary curriculum and instruction. 

Prerequisites 

To be admitted to the program, students must have a basic teaching credential or equivalent 
experiences, an approved major (minimum of 24 units upper division or graduate), acceptable 
scores on the Graduate Record Examination (aptitude test), a 2.5 grade-point average on previous 
academic and related work, satisfactory interview, references and autobiography. Credit will be 
given for previous postbaccalaureate studies when possible. Otherwise well-qualified students may 
be admitted with limited subject or grade deficiences, but these deficiences must be removed. 
Grade-point average deficiences may be removed by a demonstration of competency in the gradu- 
ate program. 


202 


Education 


Programs of Study 

The adviser-approved 30 units (minimum) on the study plan will include the following; 

Coursework outside elementary education 

Two of the following: 

Educ 402 Comparative Education (3) 

Educ 403 History of Education (3) 

Educ 406 Educational Sociology (3) 

Educ 452 Principles of Guidance (3) 

Educ 501 Philosophy of Education (3) 

Educ 509 Theory and Practice in Measurement (3) 

Educ 510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Educ 511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Other adviser-approved courses (3) 


Coursework in elementary education 

Educ 536 Curriculum Theory and Development (3) 
Three of the following: 

Educ 530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 
Foreign Languages (3) 

Educ 531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 
Language Arts (3) 

Educ 532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 
Mathematics (3) 

Educ 533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 
Science (3) 

Educ 534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: 
Social Studies (3) 

Educ 537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) 

One of the following: 

Educ 597 Graduate Project (1-3; total of 3) 

Educ 598 Thesis (1-3; total of 3) 


Units 

9 


Units 

15 


Electives selected with approval of the adviser 6 

For further information, consult the chairman. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


TEACHER EDUCATION PRESERVICE COURSES 

308 Education of Various Cultural Groups: Early Childhood (3) 

A course designed for Head Start personnel and others engaged in the early education of culturally 
different children. Focus will be on the development of learning, curriculum content, and 
methodology related to various cultural groups. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

309 Fieldwork in the Education of Various Cultural Groups (3) 

Observation and participation in classes for various cultural groups. Integrated with coursework in 
Education of Various Cultural Groups. Must be taken concurrently with Educ 308. (9 hours 
laboratory) 

331A Elementary School Principles, Curricula and Methods (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 411, 496, Math Ed 103A and admission to teacher education. Must be taken 
concurrently with 331 B. Principles, curricula, methods and materials of elementary school in- 
struction with major emphasis on arithmetic, social studies and science. Includes audiovisual 
instruction, methods and techniques. Required of all candidates for the standard teaching creden- 
tial with specialization in elementary school teaching. Includes screening for admission to student 
teaching. (2\ hours lecture, l!^ hour activity) 


30»-3 11 m 


Education 203 


331 B Elementary School Principles, Curricula and Methods (4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 411, 496 and admission to teacher education. Must be taken concurrently with 
Educ 331 A. Principles, curricula, methods and materials of elementary school instruction with 
major emphasis on language arts and reading. Two semester hours devoted to methods of 
reading instruction, including phonics. Required of all candidates for the standard teaching 
credential with specialization in elementary school teaching. Includes screening for admission 
to student teaching. (2j^ hours lecture, l)^ hour activity) 

339 Student Teaching in the Elementary School and Student Teaching Seminar (8 or 4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 331, three academic related courses, and admission to student teaching. Partici- 
pation in a regular elementary school teaching program for the greater part of every school day. 
Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures of elementary school 
teaching. Concurrent enrollment in other courses is discouraged. (Minimum of 30 hours a week 
in an elementary school, 2 hours per week seminar.) 

340 Principles and Curricula of Secondary Education (3) 

Required first course in the professional sequence for the standard teaching credental with speciali- 
zation in secondary teaching. Principles of secondary education in the United States: organiza- 
tion, curriculum, and teaching practices. Correlated with methods and materials courses in the 
major. Two hours of observation per week in selected junior and senior high school classes. 
Application for admission to teacher education is included. Each student is expected to complete 
all requirements for admission during Educ 340. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours fieldwork) 

431 Principles and Curricula of the Elementary School (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 41 1 or consent of instructor. An introductory course in elementary education. 
Stress on major principles and basic curricular considerations. Importance of the elementary 
school system to society. 

432 Teaching — in the Elementary School 

Prerequisite: Educ 41 1 or consent of instructor. Courses, listed dually in the School of Education and 
in the other appropriate departments dealing with objectives, methods, and materials of teaching 
the various subjects and areas in the elementary schools. The courses are professional education 
courses and applicable toward credential requirements. Detailed descriptions of the courses are 
to be found in the materials of other departments within this catalog. 

For Lang Ed 432 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Elementary School (2) 

436 Child Study Techniques for Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 331 or consent of instructor. Techniques the classroom teacher may use in 
understanding individual children within his classroom who do not respond to the teacher and 
his peers in typical ways. 

437 Early Childhood Education (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of current literature and recent research in the area of 
education of young children through individual and group study. Emphasis will be placed on 
problems centered in cognitive processes, content, structure and instruction at the early child- 
hood education level. 

442 Teaching — in the Secondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: 20 units in the major, Educ 411, 496, 340, admission to teacher education, and senior 
standing; or consent of instructor. A series of courses, with the exception of business and social 
science methods, listed dually in the School of Education and in the other appropriate depart- 
ments, dealing with objectives, methods, and materials of teaching, including audiovisual instruc- 
tion, the various subjects and areas in secondary schools. Required, before student teaching, of 
students presenting major in these areas or subjects for the standard teaching credential with 
specialization in secondary school teaching. Students without teaching experience must register 
concurrently in Educ 449 to complete a teacher aide assignment in high schools. 

Art Ed 442 Teaching Art in the Secondary School (4) 

Educ 442 Teaching Business in the Secondary School (2) 

Educ 442 Teaching Social Science in the Secondary School (2) 

Engl Ed 442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (2) 

For Lang Ed 442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (2) 

Journ Ed 442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (2) 

Math Ed 442 Teaching Mathematics in the Secondary School (2) 

Mu Ed 442 Principles and Methods of Teaching Music in the Public Schools (4) 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (2) 


204 


Education 


Sci Ed 442 Teaching Science in the Secondary School (2) 

Speech Ed 442 Teaching Speech in the Secondary School (2) 

Theatre Ed 442 Teaching Theatre in the Secondary School (4) 

443 Principles of Core Curriculum (2) 

Prerequisite: teaching experience or consent of instructor. Unity and interrelationships of human 
learning and behavior and the curricular processes and arrangements by which this may be 
achieved. Seminar on development, principles, and application of core curricula; guidance 
furictions; evaluation; and roles of the teacher. 

445 Junior High School Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 442 or 331 or consent of instructor. Seminar on principles and procedures for 
developing the junior high school program. Purposes, curriculum, and organization of the junior 
high school are stressed including examination of recent innovations and proposals. Designed 
for students with elementary or secondary backgrounds who plan to teach in the junior high 
school. 

446 Secondary School Curriculum (3) 

Prerequisite: student teaching or teaching experience or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of 
curriculum development. Seminar on current issues within secondary education. Curricular 
organization and current practices. Survey and evaluation of newer curricular programs. 

449 Fieldwork in Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools (1) 

Prerequisite: Educ 340, 411, admission to teacher education or consent of instructor. Participation 
in the instruction of a secondary school class as a teacher aide. Integrated with coursework in 
the teaching of the major. Must be taken concurrently with Educ 442 and students must allow 
sufficient time in their schedules, at the same hour each day, to serve as a teacher aide. 

451 Principles of Educational Measurement (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411 or Psych 311. Development, validation, and application of the principles of 
educational measurement. Construction and use of informal and standardized achievement tests. 
Summary and interpretation of results of measurement. 

491 Audiovisual Education (2) 

Prerequisites: Educ 411, 442, or consent of instructor. Media in communication, psychological bases, 
development, curricular function, evaluation. Survey of equipment and materials available, 
preparation of instructional materials for classroom use. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

492 Television in the Classroom (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411 or consent of instructor. Television as a vehicle for instruction, information, 
and enrichment. General theory of media in classroom, psychological bases, curricular capabili- 
ties and limitations of equipment. Responsibility of the classroom teacher. Practice in utilization 
process. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

493 Production of Audiovisual Materials (2) 

Prerequisite: Educ 491 or consent of instructor. Exploration and development of audiovisual materi- 
als. Students will participate in script writing, story board, photography and tape production. 
Experience will be provided in producing graphics, charts and bulletin boards. (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

496 Senior Educational Practicum (1-3) 

Conduct at an advanced level an educational practicum experience with an individual under the 
direction of a faculty member. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior or graduate standing, consent of instructor and department prior to registration. 
Conduct of an individual investigation under supervision of a faculty member; investigation might 
be an experiment, a library study, or a creative project; only students of demonstrated capacity 
and maturity will be approved; adequate prerequisite study necessary. May be repeated for 
credit. 


GRADUATE COURSES 

509 Theory and Practice in Educational Measurement (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 411 or Psych 311. Introduction to basic concepts, theory, and procedures for 
construction of informal and standardized tests. Application of measurement theory and statisti- 
cal techniques toward problems of analysis, scaling, norming, and interpretation of test results. 
Practice in item writing for short classroom tests and intensive analysis of selected commercial 
standardized tests. 


314-3 II 335 






Education 207 


510 Research Design and Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: bachelor's degree, Educ 509 or the equivalent. Elements of design, instrumentation, 
treatment of data, hypothesis testing and inference, and analysis of educational data. Develop 
a research proposal. Practice in analyzing and evaluating research reports. 

511 Survey of Educational Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Educ 509, teaching experience. Review of descriptive statistics and statistical inference 
as applied to educational problems. Analysis of representative research papers. Principles of 
research design. Prepare a research proposal. 

530 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Foreign Language (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of pertinent investiga- 
tions and their appliction in the classroom together with significant curriculum developments and 
organization in the area of second language learning in the elementary school, including English 
as a foreign language. Criteria for appraising programs, personnel, and materials also will be 
discussed. 

531 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Language Arts (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739 or consent of instructor. Seminar for advanced study of trends and 
problems in teaching the fundamental skills of communication in the elementary school. Analysis 
of research in the language arts and related disciplines as background for curriculum develop- 
ment. 

532 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math Ed 103A, Educ 339 or 739, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of 
significant research, curricular developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving 
mathematics programs and instruction. 

533 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Science (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739 or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of significant research 
in elementary school science. Criteria for planning and improving science programs and the 
development of materials. 

534 Graduate Studies in Elementary Education: Social Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739, or consent of instructor. Seminar for the study of significant research 
developments and materials, criteria for planning and improving social studies programs and 
current techniques of teaching. 

537 Seminar for Elementary Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 339 or 739 or consent of instructor. A study of problems and issues in elementary 
education, their causes and possible solutions. 

547 Seminar for Secondary Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Educ 749 or consent of instructor. Persistent problems in secondary education and 
survey of related literature; causes of and solutions for these problems. Application of scientific 
method to educational poblems, sources of educational research, and to techniques of coopera- 
tive thinking. 

595 Advanced Studies (1-3) 

Graduate seminars designed to develop professional competencies in such areas as behavior, 
teaching strategies, educational technology, program development, communication theory and 
interpersonal relations. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical project, with conferences 
with the instructor, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Individual research with conferences with the instructor, cul- 
minating in a thesis. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Open to qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independ- 
ent inquiry. 

PROFESSIONAL COURSES IN THE POSTGRADUATE PROGRAM 

709 Supervision of Student Teaching (3) 

Prerequisites: possession of a teaching credential and one year of teaching experience. Designed for 
teachers who supervise student teachers. Emphasis on principles and procedures of effective 
supervision and research. 


208 Education 


721 Philosophy and Objectives of Community College Education (2) 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing or consent of instructor. Origins of the junior college movement 
in higher education in the United States; economic, technologial, and social forces creating needs 
for new and different post-high school education; objectives of community college education; 
relationships to secondary and higher education; functions of the community college; curriculum 
development and organization. 

739 Student Teaching in the Elementary School and Student Teaching Seminar (8 or 4) 

Prerequisites: Educ 331, three academic related courses, admission to student teaching, and post- 
graduate status. Participation in a regular elementary school teaching program for the greater part 
of every school day. Includes a two-hour seminar each week in problems and procedures of 
elementary school teaching. Concurrent enrollment in other courses is discouraged. (Minimum 
of 30 hours a week in an elementary school, 2 hours per week seminar.) 

744 Principles of Community College Teaching (3) 

Prerequisite: postgraduate standing or consent of instructor. Psychological foundations of commu- 
nity college teaching, measurement and evaluation of learning. Educational and philosophical 
bases for instructional procedures in the community college. Instructional procedures including 
audiovisual materials, community college class observations. (2 hours seminar, 3 hours field- 
work) 

749 Student Teaching In — in the Secondary School and Seminar (6 or 2) 

A series of courses in student teaching and seminars listed dually in the School of Education and 
in the other appropriate departments. 

Prerequisites: Educ 442, 449, and admission to student teaching. Student teaching for the 
general secondary credential or the standard teaching credential with specialization in secondary 
school teaching. Participation in a regular secondary school teaching program for half-days for 
a full semester. Includes a seminar each week in problems and procedures of secondary school 
teaching, under the direction of the respective university supervisor. (Minimum of 15 hours a 
week in a secondary school; 2 hours per week in seminar) 

Art Ed 749 Student Teaching in Art in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Educ 749 Student Teaching in Business in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

Educ 749 Student Teaching in Social Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Engl Ed 749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

For Lang Ed 749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary School and 
Seminar (6) 

Journ Ed 749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Math Ed 749 Student Teaching in Mathematics in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Mu Ed 749 Student Teaching in Music in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

PE 749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Sci Ed 749 Student Teaching in Science in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Speech Ed 749 Student Teaching in Speech in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 
Theatre Ed 749 Student Teaching in Theatre in Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

799 Community College Student Teaching and Seminar (4) 

Prerequisite: Educ 744. Student teaching in the student's major field in a cooperating community 
college for one semester. Weekly seminar on curriculum development and organization in the 
community college, instructional procedures and materials, and instructional problems of the 
community college student teacher. (Minimum of 9 hours a week in a community college; 2 
hours per week in seminar) 


313-3 11 3n 





ENGINEERING 












>5 . ' ■ 












}i 









fP 




\\ ; , .r 








PW^: 










' i, ^ 


'i^: ■¥ 


y' • 



s 


213 

SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING 

Acting Dean: Eugene B. Hunt 


FACULTY 
George Chiang 

Chairman, Civil Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 
Jack Kemmerly 

Chairman, Electrical Engineering 
Floyd Thomas, Jr. 

Chairman, Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering 
George Cohn, Munir El-Saden, Walter Hudetz, Jesa Kreiner, Sundaram Krishnamurthy, Young Duck 
Kwon, Wai Kok Lim, Charles Medler, Peter Othmer, Irene Petroff, James Rizza, Jesus Tuazon, 
Mahadeva Venkatesan 

The School of Engineering offers programs at the undergraduate and graduate levels. The individual 
courses are described in the section of this catalog on announcement of courses. At the undergradu- 
ate level the school prescribes certain patterns of courses combined with those of other academic 
departments and schools of the university, as a program of 132 semester units leading to the degree 
of Bachelor of Science in Engineering. At the graduate level the school offers a sequence of courses 
as a program of 30 semester units leading to the degree of Master of Science in Engineering. In the 
graduate program specific options in major fields are offered. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 

The objective of the undergraduate engineering program is to form a broad base of science, 
mathematics, social science, humanities and engineering science — coupled with enough specializa- 
tion in an area of concentration to initiate a successful engineering career. Students are prepared 
to enter directly into engineering practice or to continue further education at the graduate level. 
The heart of the engineering program is a core curriculum somewhat broader than that of the 
traditional engineering program. This core includes courses in mathematics, physics, chemistry, basic 
engineering sciences, social sciences and the humanities and provides a firm basis for more special- 
ized knowledge at an advanced level. Beyond the basic core curriculum a student chooses a 
minimum of 30 units of technical electives to complete his program with enough specialization in 
an area of emphasis to initiate a successful engineering career. During the first 2!^ years of study all 
students in engineering take the same program emphasizing the inter-relationship of the primary 
engineering subjects which form the broad background required of modern-day engineers. 

The program of 132 semester units presumes that the entering student brings a high school prepara- 
tion which includes geometry, trigonometry and two years of algebra. Physics and chemistry are 
highly desirable. Students deficient in mathematics must take a special preparatory course, Engineer- 
ing 100, Introduction to Analysis, or equivalent, which will not carry credit for graduation. 

Transfer Students 

A transfer student shall complete a minimum of 24 units in residence of which at least 15 shall be 
taken in upper-division engineering courses. Work taken at another college or university on which 
a grade of D was earned may not be substituted for upper-division courses. 

A smooth transition from a community college into upper-division engineering is assured when the 
following program, as a minimum, has been completed. Students deficient in any of these areas may 
look to the summer session bulletin for offerings that may make up any deficiencies: 

S/linimum Number of 


Semester Units 

Analytic geometry and calculus 14 

Chemistry (for engineering and science majors) 8 

Physics (for engineering and science majors) 12 

Engineering graphics 2 

Properties of engineering materials 2 

Computer programming (FORTRAN) 3 

Analytical mechanics (statics) 3 

aM-3 II 405 


214 Engineering 

Engineering Liaison Committee Statement 

The School of Engineering subscribes to the following statement approved by the Engineering Liaison 
Committee of the State of California: 

"Based on the 1970-71 requirements, any student of a California community college, with a stated 
major in engineering, who presents a transcript showing satisfactory completion of the following 
proposed core program in lower division, will be able to enroll in this institution with regular junior 
standing; and further, assuming normal progress, said student can complete an engineering pro- 
gram in four additional semesters with a regular bachelor's degree, presuming, upon transfer, that 
he has completed at least 50 percent of the graduation unit requirements in that program. 
Completion of a specific program of his choice will be dependent upon his proper selection of 
elective courses. 


Semester Quarter 

Subject Area Units Units 

Mathematics (beginning with analytical geometry and calculus and completing 

a course in ordinary differential equations) 16 24 

Chemistry (for engineers and scientists) 8 12 

Physics (for engineers and scientists) 12 18 

Statics 3 4 

Graphics and descriptive geometry 3 4 

Computers (digital) 2 3 

Orientation and motivation 1 1 

Properties of materials 3 4 

Electric circuits 3 4 

Electives 11-15 17-23" 


Technical Electives 

During the junior year the student shall submit for approval a proposed study plan to his faculty 
adviser covering the sequence of upper-division level courses totaling not less than 30 units in 
engineering. While his study plan need not be contained within one area of emphasis, it shall include 
a sufficient number of courses to provide continuity and depth of understanding within a given area 
of specialization. It shall also include two senior laboratory courses and one design course and the 
prerequisite courses thereto. This study plan must be approved by the student's adviser before taking 
any technical electives. 

Areas which students may wish to emphasize are civil engineering and engineering mechanics, 
electrical engineering, and mechanical and aerospace engineering. Within the overall concept of a 
broad general background with enough specialization to become a productive engineer upon 
graduation, a student may further specialize in such areas as electronics, communications, control 
systems, digital systems, aeronautics, heat and mass transfer, thermal sciences, mechanical design, 
structural systems and design, applied mechanics and environmental studies. 

Upon special application, students may be considered for an engineering science program. The 
program in engineering science Is to be selected by the student and his adviser and submitted for 
approval to a committee of the School of Engineering (supplemented, if appropriate, by members 
of the science and mathematics faculty). Such a program must include the two senior engineering 
laboratories and senior engineering design course and their prerequisites. Courses are to be selected 
from upper division engineering, science and mathematics offerings to meet a special and specific 
engineering science objective of the student such as engineering physics. 

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGRADUATE DEGREE 
Lower Division Science and Mathematics (All required for B.S.) 

Units 


*Math 150A, B Analytic Geometry and Calculus 8 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 4 

Math 281 Linear Algebra with Differential Equations 3 

Chem 101 A General Chemistry 5 


Students with inadequate preparation for Math 150A will take Egr 100, Introduction to Analysis. 


334-3 II 436 


Engineering 215 

Chem 105 General Chemistry for Engineers 3 

Physics 225A,B,C Fundamental Physics 9 

Physics 226A,B,C Fundamental Physics Laboratory 3 

35 

Non-engineering General Education 28 


The engineering student will take at least 24 units from Areas II and III of the general education 
requirements for the bachelor's degree (see page 67), six units of which may meet the U.S. 
history and government requirements. He will follow, as a minimum, the universitywide require- 
ments, adding courses at his discretion to make 24 units. An additional four units, for a total 
of 28 must be specifically approved by his adviser and will be recommended to assure the best 
balance for the student's education. A student shall be limited to a maximum of six units of 
activity courses. 


Lower Division Engineering (All required for B.S.) 

Egr 101 Introduction to Engineering 1 

Egr 102 Graphical Analysis 2 

Egr 201 Mechanics 3 

Egr 202 Properties of Engineering Materials 3 

Egr 205 Digital Computation 3 

12 

Upper Division Engineering (All required for B.S.) 

Egr 300 Electric Circuits 3 

Egr 300L Electric Circuits Laboratory 1 

Egr 302 Dynamics 3 

Egr 303 Electronics 3 

Egr 303L Electronics Laboratory 2 

Egr 304 Thermodynamics 3 

Egr 305 Transport Processes 3 

Egr 306A Unified Laboratory 1 

Egr 306B Unified Laboratory 2 

Egr 308 Engineering Analysis 3 

Egr 370 Seminar in Engineering 1 

Egr 417 Engineering Economy 2 

27 

Technical Electives 30 

Total 132 


DETAILED OUTLINE OF TYPICAL * EIGHT-SEMESTER PROGRAM 
FOR B.S. IN ENGINEERING 
(132 Units) 


Semester 1 Freshman Units 

General education elective 4 

Math 150A Calculus 4 

Chem 101 A General Chemistry 5 

Egr 101 Introduction to Engineering 1 

Egr 102 Graphical Analysis 2 


16 


* NOTE: This program is merely a guide. The student may lighten his academic load each semester to meet his needs. 


216 Engineering 

Semester 2 Freshman Units 

Math 1 SOB Calculus ^ 

Physics 225A Fundamental Physics (Mechanics) 3 

Physics 226A Fundamental Physics Laboratory 1 

Chem 105 Chemistry (for engineers) 3 

Egr 205 Digital Computation 3 

General education elective 3 

17 

Semester 3 Sophomore 

General education electives 6 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 4 

Physics 225B Fundamental Physics (Electricity and Magnetism) 3 

Physics 226B Fundamental Physics Laboratory 1 

Egr 201 Mechanics 3 

17 

Semester 4 Sophomore 

General education electives h 

Math 281 Linear Algebra with Differential Equations 3 

Egr 202 Properties of Engineering Materials 3 

Physics 225C Fundamental Physics (Modern Physics) 3 

Physics 226C Fundamental Physics Laboratory 1 

16 

Semester 5 Junior 

Egr 300 Electric Circuits 3 

Egr 300L Electric Circuits Laboratory 1 

Egr 304 Thermodynamics 3 

Egr 305 Transport Processes 3 

Egr 306A Unified Laboratory 1 

Egr 302 Dynamics 3 

Egr 308 Engineering Analysis 3 

17 

Semester 6 Junior 

Egr 303 Electronics 3 

Egr 303L Electronics Laboratory 2 

Egr 306B Unified Laboratory 2 

Engineering technical electives 9 

16 

Semester 7 Senior 

General education electives 3 

Egr 417 Engineering Economy 2 

Engineering technical electives 12 

17 

Semester 8 Senior 

General education electives 6 

Engineering technical electives 9 

Egr 370 Seminar in Engineering 1 

16 

Total 132 

338-3 11 488 


Engineering 217 


MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENGINEERING 

Applicants, as well as continuing students, should read carefully the university requirements for 
master's degree programs, page 71. 

Admission Procedure 

The procedural steps for admission to and the completion of the Master of Science in Engineering 
are as follows: 

1 . Apply for admission to the university in unclassified graduate status and declare the objective to 
be a Master of Science in Engineering. Proof of a degree from an accredited college or university 
must be supplied. This must be taken care of at the Office of Admissions before the dates 
established In the university calendar. 

2. Apply for admission to the School of Engineering Master of Science Program. This must be taken 
care of at the office of the School of Engineering after admission to the university but before 
registration. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the engineering program requires a 2.5 undergraduate gradepoint average; however, 
students may be considered with grade deficiencies. Any deficiencies must be made up, and will 
require six or more units of adviser-approved courses with at least a 3.0 average in addition to those 
required for the degree. A committee of the engineering faculty will evaluate each student's record 
for specific course deficiencies in the engineering field. Making suitable allowance for actual engi- 
neering experience, the committee will require each student, prior to admission to the program, to 
make up such deficiencies as the committee determines. 

NOTE: A student may be required to take the engineering mathematics review course, 701. This course is open to all who may feel 
the need for such a refresher course. It is to be taken in addition to those required for the degree. 

Admission to Classified Graduate Status 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1 . Meeting the prerequisites of the previous paragraph. 

2. Before completing nine units at Cal State Fullerton toward a M.S. degree, a student shall fill out 
an application card for classified status in the Office of the Dean of Graduate Studies and make 
an appointment with the adviser at the office of the School of Engineering. 

3. Preparing, in consultation with his adviser, an approved graduate study plan. 

Advancement to Candidacy 

Achievement of this status requires the following: 

1. Having been granted classified status in the Master of Science in Engineering program. 

2. Having completed 12 units of coursework on his master's degree study plan with a GPA of 
not less than 3.0, including six units of 500-level courses. 

3. Filing an advancement to candidacy card in the Office of the Dean of Graduate Studies. 

Graduation 

Final achievement of the Master of Science in Engineering requires: 

1 . Having been admitted to candidacy status. 

2. Filing a request for check on completion of requirements during registration and prior to the 
appropriate deadline. 

3. Having completed 30 units of approved work with an overall GPA of not less than 3.0. 

4. Completing satisfactorily a final comprehensive examination. 

5. Receiving approval of the faculty of the School of Engineering and the dean of graduate studies. 

The Program for the Master of Science in Engineering 

Qualification for the Master of Science in Engineering requires the following: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 30 units of approved upper division or graduate-level work 
including: 

(a) a minimum of six units of approved upper division or graduate mathematics (certain 
engineering courses may fulfill this requirement). 

(b) a minimum of 15 units of approved 500-level courses. 


218 Engineering 

2. An overall CPA of 3.0. 

3. Satisfactory completion of a final comprehensive examination. 

A candidate for the Master of Science in Engineering may pursue one of five options currently offered 
by the School of Engineering: 

Electrical engineering 

Mechanical and aerospace engineering 

Structural engineering and engineering mechanics 

Systems engineering 

Engineering science 

A student is normally required to select a minimum of 15 units within these options. These 15 units 
may be 400-level and 500-level courses. The 500-level courses are listed below: 

Electrical Engineering Units 

Egr 501 A,B Microwaves 3,3 

Egr 503 Information Theory and Coding 3 

Egr 504 Linear Network Synthesis 3 

Egr 505 Nonlinear Control Systems 3 

Egr 506 Advanced Digital Computer Systems 3 

Egr 507 Statistical Communication Theory 3 

Egr 513 Optimal Control Systems 3 

Egr 514A, B Software Systems Design 3,3 

Egr 515 Quantum Electronics 3 

Egr 521 Antenna Theory 3 

Egr 523 Solid State Devices and Integrated Circuits 3 

Egr 554 Hybrid Computation 3 

Egr 555 Electromagnetic Field Theory 3 

Egr 557 Sampled-Data Systems 3 

Egr 559 Analysis and Synthesis of Active Networks 3 

Egr 570 Seminar in Electrical Engineering 1-3 

Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering 

Egr 508 Advanced Fluid Mechanics 3 

Egr 511 Advanced Dynamics 3 

Egr 516 Advanced Radiation Heat Transfer 3 

Egr 520 Advanced Viscous Fluid Flow 3 

Egr 522 Theory of Hydrodynamic Lubrication 3 

Egr 524 Advanced Thermodynamics 3 

Egr 526 Advanced Convective Heat Transfer 3 

Egr 530 Advanced Strength of Materials 3 

Egr 573 Aerospace Guidance Systems 3 

Egr 575 Kinetic Theory and Statistical Thermodynamics 3 

Structural Engineering and Engineering Mechanics 

Egr 508 Advanced Fluid Mechanics 3 

Egr 509 Theory of Plates and Shells 3 

Egr 510 Numerical and Approx Meth. in Structural Mechanics 3 

Egr 51 1 Advanced Dynamics 3 

Egr 519 Advanced Structural Mechanics 3 

Egr 530 Advanced Strength of Materials 3 

Egr 547 Advanced Dynamics of Structures 3 

Egr 549 Theory of Elastic Stability 3 

Systems Engineering 

Egr 581 Theory of Linear Systems 3 

Egr 582 Linear Estimation Theory 3 

Egr 585 Optimization Techniques in Systems Engineering 3 

Egr 587 Operational Analysis Techniques in Systems Engineering 3 

Egr 592 Advanced Engineering Analysis 3 

(Students possessing a B.S. degree in engineering may elect to take up to nine units in systems 
engineering from approved subjects offered in the School of Business Administration and Econom- 
ics.) 


Engineering 219 


Engineering Science 

The program in engineering science is to be selected by the student and his adviser and submitted 
for approval to a committee of the School of Engineering (supplemented, if appropriate, by members 
of the science and mathematics faculty). The courses selected are to meet a special and specific 
engineering science objective of the student, such as engineering physics. 

In addition to those courses offered in the specific options, the following three courses apply to any 
option, though they are not necessarily required. 

Units 


Egr 597 Project 1-6 

Egr 598 Thesis 1-6 

Egr 599 Independent Graduate Research 1-3 


For further information, consult the School of Engineering. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ENGINEERING COURSES 

100 Introduction to Analysis (4) 

Prerequisites: two years of high school algebra, one year of high school geometry. Algebraic, 
exponential and trigonometric functions and relations. Coordinate geometry and vectors. Real 
and complex numbers. Designed to prepare students better for a first course In calculus. Does 
not carry major or related area credit for engineering, mathematics, quantitative methods or 
science majors. (Same as Physics 1(X)) 

101 Introduction to Engineering (1) 

An introduction designed to familiarize the student with the nature, responsibilities and opportunities 
of the profession. 

102 Graphical Analysis (2) 

Prerequisite or corequisite: Egr 101 or consent of instructor. Graphics as fundamental means of 
communication in engineering analysis and design; development of spatial visualization; free- 
hand sketching; descriptive geometry and modern engineering drawing practice. Methods of 
engineering design and design project. Graphical computation; nomography, representation and 
analysis of empirical data. (6 hours lecture-laboratory) 

110A,B The Man-Made World (3^) 

Prerequisite: must be non-science, non-mathematics, non-engineering major; corequisite: Egr 1 1 1 A,B 
(laboratory). The methodology of the technological age. The use of models of the real world 
to arrive at rational decision making. Control, amplification, and feedback. 

111A,B The Man-Made World (1,1) 

Corequisite: Egr 110A,B. Laboratory to accompany Egr 110A,B. Simulation of real situations with 
models. 

201 Mechanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 1 50B and Physics 225A. An introductory development of the fundamentals of 
statics with emphasis on application to strength of materials. 

202 Properties of Engineering Materials (3) 

Prerequisites: Chem 101 and Egr 201. Scientific and engineering principles important in the selection 
and design of engineering materials, variables influencing material properties, concepts of stress 
and strain, Hooke's law. Equilibrium of rigid bodies, introduction to metallurgy; material models; 
dislocations and other defects in solids, strengthening mechanisms, modes of failure. 

205 Digital Computation (3) 

Corequisite: Math 150A. Introduction to computers and their applications. Elementary FORTRAN 
programming language, numerical methods for the solution of algebraic and transcendental 
equations and systems of linear algebraic equations; numerical integration. 

207 Pollution and Politics (3) 

The scientific/technological, political /legal and philosophical aspects of pollution problems and their 
possible solutions. A systematic and unified examination of environmental control, with a review 
of extant technological solutions and the political, economic and human factors that prevent or 
retard their application. 


220 Engineering 

300 Electric Circuits (3) 

Prerequisites; Physics 225B and Math 250; corequisite: Egr 300L. Ohm's and Kirchhoff's laws; 
mesh-current and nodal analysis methods; basic network theorems; transients in RL and RC 
circuits; phasors and steady-state sinusoidal circuit analysis; current, voltage and power relation- 
ships in electrical systems; polyphase circuits; magnetically coupled circuits; introduction to 
transformers and electrical machines. 

300L Electric Circuits Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 300. Experimental investigation of simple resistive RL and RC circuits; electrical 
measurement techniques; study of transformers; performance tests on electrical machines. (3 
hours laboratory) 

301 Strength of Materials (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and Egr 202. States of stress and strain. Analysis and design of structural 
elements (pressure vessels, beams, torsion bars, springs), fracture criteria, statically indetermi- 
nate problems, energy methods, buckling of columns. 

302 Dymanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and Egr 201 . Kinematics and kinetics of particles and rigid bodies, Newton's 
laws, work and energy, impulse and momentum. Solution of problems by using vector approach 
is emphasized. 

303 Electronics (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 225C, Egr 300 and 300L; corequisite: Egr 303L. Characteristics and applications 
of semiconductor diodes; the p-n junction, field-effect transistors, bipolar-junction transistors, 
vacuum tubes; applications to electronic devices: rectifiers, clippers, clampers, amplifiers. 

303L Electronic Laboratory (2) 

Corequisite: Egr 303. Experimental study of semiconductor diodes, transistors, and elementary 
electronic circuits. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

304 Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Chem 105 and Egr 201 . The study of energy and its transformation which encompasses 
heat and work and the conservation of energy, the concept of entropy and its relation to other 
system properties. The ideas are conveyed through the detailed study of ideal gases, heat engines 
and refrigeration (both ideal and actual). 

305 Transport Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250, Egr 201 and Physics 225C. Fluid statics, one-dimensional steady flow 
analysis, analysis of steady one-dimensional heat conduction. Principles of similitude and dimen- 
sional analysis. Steady state heat transfer by radiation, free and forced convection. 

306A Unified Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202 or equivalent; corequisite: Egr 305. Observations and measurements in the 
laboratory as an introduction to the experimental method. Static and dynamic measurements are 
made on simple engineering systems (beams, columns, pendulum, gyroscopes) using mechani- 
cal and electrical transducers. Report writing is emphasized. (3 hours laboratory) 

306B Unified Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisites: Egr 305 and 306A. A continuation of Egr 306A. More complex engineering systems are 
considered with fluid flow and thermal measurements emphasized in the laboratory. Lecture 
deals with instrumentation theories and the design of engineering experiments. The students' 
ability to express theoretical concepts and experimental efforts via the technical report is further 
enhanced. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

308 Engineering Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 281 or consent of Instructor. Fourier series, Fourier transforms, Laplace trans- 
forms, complex analysis, vector analysis; engineering applications. 

309 Networks and Transmission Lines (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 300, 300L and 308. Continuation of Egr 3(X). Performance of RLC circuits; 
complex frequency and the s-plane; frequency response and resonance; network topology; 
two-port network characterization; transmission line theory; classical filter theory. 

310 Electronic Circuits (3) 

Prerequisites; Egr 205, 303, 303L and 308. Continuation of 303, multistage amplifiers and feedback, 
frequency characteristics of amplifiers, tuned amplifiers, frequency characteristics and stability 
of feedback amplifiers, oscillators and power amplifiers. 


361'^J II 570 


Engineering 221 


311 Field Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Physics 225B and Math 281. Review of fundamental concepts underlying the formula- 
tion of static and quasi-static electric and magnetic fields. Effect of magnetic, dielectric, and 
conducting materials. Capacitance, inductance and resistance. Boundary value problems. Max- 
well's equations and development of the wave equation. 

312 Linear System Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 300, 302 and 308. Engineering analogies (models); system concepts (block dia- 
grams; signal graphs; transient and frequency response; Bode plots; stability; transfer functions; 
feedback; and Nyquist polar diagrams); non-dimensionalization of functions and analysis of 
distributed parameter systems — with engineering applications; introduction to probability. 

313 Introduction to Electromechanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 300 and 308. Electromagnetic fields and circuits; transformers, saturation effects. 
Simple electro-mechanical systems. Circuit models, terminal characteristics, and applications of 
DC and AC machines. 

316 Applied Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 304. Continuation of Egr 304, additional coverage of power and refrigera- 
tion cycles. Maxwell's relations, mixtures of real and ideal fluids, chemical reactions (emphasis 
on combustion), phase and chemical equilibrium. 

317 Introduction to Computer Science (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 or QM 264 or QM 265 or equivalent. Overview of computer systems, com- 
puter applications, ALGOL programming language, internal information structures, binary arith- 
metic, code conversion, computer organization, algorithms. 

320 Metallurgy (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202. Structure and properties of metals and alloys, influences of mechanical and 
thermal treatments, plastic deformation, work hardening and recrystallization, grain growth, alloy 
diagrams, solution hardening, diffusion hardening, precipitation hardening, the iron-carbon sys- 
tem, composite materials, brittle, creep and fatigue failures. 

320L Engineering Metallurgy Laboratory (1) (Formerly 462L) 

Corequisite: Egr 320. Study of microstructure of materials, cold work and heat treatment, use of 
microscope and sample preparation, fatigue testing and failure analysis. (3 hours laboratory) 

324 Soil Mechanics and Foundations (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 201 and 301 . Soil properties and soil action as related to problems encountered 
in engineering structures; compression shear strength, stability and lateral earth pressures. 

324L Soil Mechanics and Foundations Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 324. Laboratory exercises supporting Egr 324. (3 hour laboratory) 

326 Structural Design (3) 

Corequisite: Egr 301. Elements of the design of steel, timber members. Connection details. Design 
of complete structures for both vertical and lateral loads. 

331 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202. Plastic deformation mechanisms, treatment of plastic deformation, fatigue, 
creep and fracture. Case studies. 

332 Manufacturing Processes (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202. Study of industrial manufacturing processes. Principles of conventional and 
nonconventional material removal, forming and joining processes and equipment. Nondestruc- 
tive and other testing methods. 

333 Introduction to Aerodynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 305. Kinematics of fluid flow, classification of flow fields, Euler and 
Navier-Stokes equations, the Bernoulli equation, flow measurement, wind tunnel testing laminar 
and turbulent flow through ducts of varying cross-section-aerodynamic forces, effect of Reynolds 
number and Mach number. 

335 Mechanical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 202, 205, and 302; corequisite: Egr 335L. Kinematics and dynamics of mechanisms, 
analysis of linkages, gears, cams, etc., using analytical and graphical techniques, balancing. 

335L Mechanical Analysis Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 335. Analytical and graphical techniques will be used in solving engineering type 
problems in mechanical design. (3 hours laboratory) 


222 Engineering 

365 Computers in the Life Sciences (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in the life sciences; cannot be taken for credit toward the B.S. in 
Engineering. Introduction to electronic computers and FORTRAN programming. Characteristics 
and functions of analog, digital and hybrid computers and their application to problems in the 
life sciences. Representative problems will be solved on analog and digital computers. 

370 Seminar in Engineering (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. The engineering profession, professional ethics, and 
related topics. 

371 Technical Seminar in Engineering (1) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. Recent developments In engineering. Oral and written 
reports. 

375 Electrical Engineering Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisites: Egr 309 and 311; corequisites: Egr 310 and 313. Experimental studies of discrete and 
integrated electronic circuits and electrical machines; bridge measurements of circuit parameters; 
slotted-line measurements; simulation studies using analog computers. (6 hours laboratory) 

376A Mechanical Engineering Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisites: Egr 302, 306B and 308. Experimental studies of dynamic systems, error analysis, 
simulation and solution of dynamic problems on the analog computer. (6 hours laboratory) 

376B Mechanical Engineering Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisites: Egr 306B and 316. A laboratory investigation of mass transfer, heat transfer, and 
thermodynamic phenomena and their interaction with mechanical systems. (6 hours laboratory) 

377 Structural Engineering Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: Egr 301. Experimental studies in structural mechanics; stress and deformation studies 
of concrete and steel structures. Dynamic response of structures. (6 hours laboratory) 

385 Electrical Engineering Design Projects Laboratory (3) (Formerly 360) 

Prerequisite: Egr 375, within 20 units of graduation. The application of fundamental engineering 
principles to typical design problems in the field of electrical engineering. ( 1 hour lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

402 Digital Logic (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 317 or QM 364. Introduction to digital computers. Boolean algebra, number repre- 
sentations. Analysis, simplification and synthesis of combinational and sequential networks. 

402L Digital Logic Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 402. Experimental study of digital logic circuits; decoders and encoders, counters, 
serial and parallel adders, control circuits. (3 hours laboratory) 

403 Computer Methods in Numerical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 308 or equivalent. The use of numerical methods and digital computers 
in the solution of algebraic, transcendental, simultaneous, ordinary and partial differential equa- 
tions. 

405 Digital Computer Design and Organization (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 402. Digital computer organization; arithmetic operations: addition, subtraction, 
multiplication, division; control unit: instruction format, types, acquisition, execution; memory 
unit: organization, types, hierarchies; Input-output unit: methods, data organization. 

406 Dynamic Response (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 302 and 308. Natural and forced motions of linear lumped and distributed 
parameter systems, vibration analysis of mechanical systems and vibration control. 

406L Dynamic Response Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Egr 376A; corequisites: Egr 376B and 406. Steady and transient response of mechanical 
and thermal systems, linear and nonlinear systems, analog simulation and computation. (3 hours 
laboratory) 

407 Transfer and Rate Processes (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 305 and 308. Analysis of two- and three-dimensional steady and unsteady heat 
conduction, heat exchangers, forced and free convection for interior and exterior surfaces, heat 
transfer with a change in phase. 

408 Reinforced Concrete Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 326. Theory of reinforced concrete. Design of reinforced concrete slabs, 
beams, columns, buildings and bridges. Introduction to prestressed concrete, ultimate strength 
theory. 


374-} II 635 


Engineering 223 


410 Space Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 302. Gravitational field, impulsive transfer and rendezvous between two-body 
orbits; dynamics of two or more interconnected rigid bodies; spin stability, orientation by gravity- 
gradient and solar-radiation pressure, damping of spacecraft's rotational motion. 

411 Dynamics of Structures (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 308, or equivalent. Free and forced vibrations of discrete systems, response 
of structures to impulse loads and earthquakes. Matrix formulation and normal coordinates 
analysis. Vibration of beams. 

412 Theory of Elasticity (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 308. The differential equations which govern the behavior of an elastic 
solid, and their applications to a variety of problems in two and three dimensions using various 
coordinate systems. 

414 Matrix Analysis of Structures (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 301 and 308 or equivalent. Introduction to matrix algebra; use of matrix 
formulation in the analysis of structures; flexibility and stiffness methods; applications using the 
matrix method on a digital computer. 

415 Gas Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 304 and 305. Thermodynamics of compressible fluid flow, normal and oblique 
shocks, flow through converging-diverging passages, flow in ducts with heating or cooling, 
interaction of shocks and expansion waves. 

416 Feedback Control Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 312. Feedback system characteristics; state-space and frequency domain analysis, 
design using root-locus and Nyquist plots; introduction to stability theory; application of basic 
compensation methods. 

416L Control Systems Laboratory (2) 

Corequisite: Egr 416. Experimental study of simulated and actual control system components; deter- 
mination of transfer characteristics; compensation methods. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

417 Engineering Economy (2) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering. Development, evaluation and presentation of alterna- 
tives for engineering systems and projects using principles of engineering economy and cost 
benefit analysis. Examination of the relationships between the engineer and other members of 
the enterprise environment. Examination of the engineer's ethics, value systems and nonquantifi- 
able inputs from the enterprise environment. 

418 Foundation Design (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301, 326 and 408. Design loads for foundation structures. Design of footings, 
retaining walls, piled foundations, bulkheads, other waterfront structures. 

419 Electromagnetic Field Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 311. Continuation of Egr 31 1 to provide a greater depth and extension of 
coverage, energy in fields, Maxwell's equations, boundary value problems, propagation, guided 
waves. 

421 Mechanical Design (2) 

Prerequisites: Egr 331 (or 301) and 335; corequisite: Egr 421 L. The application of the principles 
learned in mechanics of rigid and deformable bodies to the proportioning of machine elements 
to engineering problems. 

421 L Mechanical Design Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 421. Analysis, formulation and solution of engineering type problems encountered 
in mechanical design. (3 hours laboratory) 

423 Engineering Probability and Statistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 308, or consent of instructor. Engineering problems involving discrete and continu- 
ous random variables, probability distribution and density functions, introduction to stochastic 
processes, correlation functions and power spectral densities. 

424 Computer Simulation of Continuous Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205 and 312. Analog computer methods, digital differential analyzers, digital 
simulation languages, simulation of engineering systems. 

425A,B Environmental Engineering (3,3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering or equivalent. Fundamentals of environmental engineer- 
ing. Planning, analysis and design of systems for water and air pollution control; domestic and 
industrial waste treatment and disposal. 


224 Engineering 

426 Ocean and Coastal Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering or equivalent. Characteristics of ocean basis, marine soils. 
Fundamentals of ocean waves, currents, tides, tsunamis and storm surges. Effect of waves on 
structures, floating platforms, offshore towers. Engineering problems of beach erosion, harbor 
design and coastal problems. 

427 Structural Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 301 . The analysis of determinate and indeterminate structures, such as continuous 
beams, frames, grids, arches, trusses, curved beams, using slope and deflection method, moment 
distribution method, elastic energy approach. Temperature effect, foundation settlement, sec- 
ondary stresses. Nonprismatic members. 

428 Engineering Hydraulics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 305. Hydraulic forces, theory and analysis of open channel flow and pipe flow. 
Critical flow, uniform and non-uniform flow. Design of channels, spillways, gravity pipelines. 
Hydraulic analogies. 

428L Engineering Hydraulics Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 428. Laboratory experiments which illustrate the principles of engineering hydraul- 
ics. (3 hours laboratory) 

429 Transportation and Traffic Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in engineering or equivalent. Introduction to transportation systems. 
Engineering aspects of air, highways, rails, waterways and other modes of transportation. Plan- 
ning, design and regulation of highway traffic. Elements of highway and freeway layout. Planning 
and design of rapid transit systems. Transportation facilities. Application of computers. 

430 Design of Steel Structures (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 301. Design of steel structures: design of built-up girders, moment connections, light 
gage metal members. Torsion and unsymmetrical bending of beams, buckling of beams and 
columns. Design for wind and earthquake forces. The use of the latest AISC design code. 

431 Experimental Stress and Model Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 306A or equivalent. Lectures and laboratory in the principal experimental 
methods of stress and model analysis. Principles of similitude, mechanical and electrical strain 
gaging, analogy methods, photoelasticity, photostress and Moire methods. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours laboratory) 

434 Direct Energy Conversion (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 300, 304 and 305. The direct conversion of heat to electrical energy, thermoelectric, 
thermionic and magnetohydrodynamic devices, solar and fuel cells. 

437 Propulsion (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 305 and 316. Theoretical analysis of flight vehicle propulsion systems. Includes 
review of pertinent thermodynamic, fluid mechanic, and dynamic fundamentals; air breathing 
engines (ramjet, turbojet, turboprop); chemical rockets. 

443 Electronic Communication Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 310. Principles of amplitude, angular and pulse modulation, study of representative 
communication systems, consideration of the effects of noise on system performance. 

445 Pulse and Digital Circuits (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 303 and 308. Analysis and design of active and passive circuits for the generation 
and processing of pulse, digital and switching waveforms. 

445L Pulse and Digital Circuits Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: Egr 445 (may be taken concurrently). Laboratory study of logic circuits, switching 
circuits, gates, timing circuits and special waveform generating circuits. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

451 Thermal Environmental Conditioning and Control (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 304 and 305. A rigorous and thorough approach to the fundamentals of controlling 
the thermal environment within enclosed spaces. Theory and analysis of fundamental thermody- 
namics are emphasized providing a broad coverage of topics relating to thermal environmental 
engineering. 

455A Solid State Electronics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 303 and 311. Quantum mechanical principles, atomic structure, crystal structure, 
crystal defect and diffusion, lattice vibration and phonons, energy band theory, charge transport 
phenomena, free electron theory of metal, intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, p-n junction 
theory, transistor theory. 


Engineering 225 


455B Solid State Electronics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 455A. Superconductivity, dielectric theory and materials, ferroelectrics, diamagnet- 
ism and paramagnetism, ferromagnetism and antiferromagnetism, ferrimagnetism and ferrites. 

458 Computer Structure and Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 317. Influence of computer structure on language design; machine language, non- 
numeric programming, stacks, searching, sorting, computer structure simulation. 

460 Failure of Engineering Materials (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 202. Imperfections in solids; fracture initiation and crack propagation; dislocations; 
yield point phenomenon; fatigue; creep; ultrasonic effects; radiation damage; stress corrosion; 
hydrogen embrittlement; composite materials. 

468 Engineering Construction (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing in civil engineering. Engineering construction planning, equipment and 
methods. Construction estimates, costs and contracts. Construction management. Introduction 
to critical path method. 

473 Introduction to Nuclear Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing in engineering. A review of atomic physics and nuclear 
fission followed by elementary reactor theory and reactor design considerations. 

475 Engineering Acoustics (3) 

Prerequisite: Physics 225C. Basic phenomena on the propagation, absorption and generation of 
acoustic waves, specification and measurement of noise, effects of noise on speech and behav- 
ior, legal aspects of Industrial and building noise, principles and applications of noise control. 

483 Computer Methods in Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 423. The use of digital computers to solve engineering problems in the 
area of data analysis, state space and random processes. Problem oriented computer languages 
and graphic terminals and their applications. 

489 Microwave Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 375; corequisite: Egr 489L or permission of Instructor. Propagation of electromagnet- 
ic waves. Guided waves. Waveguides. Resonant cavities. Waveguide and cavity coupling tech- 
niques. Principles of microwave amplifiers and oscillators. Klystrons, traveling wave tubes, 
solid-state microwave devices, masers and lasers. Radiation patterns and impedance characteris- 
tics of simple antenna elements. 

489L Microwave Engineering Laboratory (1) 

Corequisite: Egr 489. Experimental study of microwave networks and components. Microwave 
detectors, determination of load impedance, tuners, phase shifters, couplers, filters, Q measure- 
ments, radiation patterns. Investigation of representative active devices. (3 hours laboratory) 

491 Analytical Methods in Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 308 or consent of instructor. Differential equations with constant and variable 
coefficients; orthogonal functions; conformal mapping; potential theory; engineering applica- 
tions. 

497 Senior Projects (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser and instructor. Directed Independent design project. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: approval of study plan by adviser. Study of specialized topics in engineering selected 
In consultation with the instructor and carried out under his supervision. May be repeated for 
credit. 

501 A, B Microwaves (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403, 419, 489 and 491. Review of concepts underlying Maxwell's equations, 
propagation through passive, active, linear, nonlinear, isotropic, anisotropic, homogeneous and 
inhomogeneous media with and without wave guiding structures. Orthogonal modes In wave- 
guide and cavity resonators, microwave circuit theory, microwave devices. Generation and 
transmission of microwave energy. 

503 Informaton Theory and Coding (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 423. Information measures, probabilistic studies of the transmission and encoding 
of information. Shannon's fundamental theorems, coding for noisy channels. 

504 Linear Network Synthesis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 309 and 403. Foundations of network theory; synthesis procedures for realizing 
driving-point and transfer-functions; approximation methods in filter design; computer assisted 
analysis and design. 


226 Engineering 

505 Nonlinear Control Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 416. Analysis of nonlinear control systems using linearization and perturbation 
techniques; describing function and phase plane techniques; stability theory. 

506 Advanced Digital Computer Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 405. Computer system structure, mini-computers, medium and large-scale com- 
puter systems, list processors, time-sharing and multi-processor computer systems. 

507 Statistical Communication Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 423 and 443. Transmission of random signals through linear systems, noise consid- 
erations, detection theory, optimum receivers. 

508 Advanced Fluid Mechanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 308 and 333. Two and three dimensional inviscid steady flow analysis through 
the use of transformation and numerical techniques. 

509 Theory of Plates and Shells (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 and 491 or equivalent. Theory of plates bent by transverse loads; applications 
to circular, rectangular, other shapes. General theory of thin shells; shells of revolution; shells of 
translation. 

510 Numerical and Approximate Methods in Structural Mechanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 205, 308 and 414 or equivalent. Use of finite-difference and finite-element methods 
for solution of problems in structural engineering. Coding on a digital computer and numerical 
solutions using direct and iterative techniques. 

511 Advanced Dynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 312. The dynamics of particles and rigid bodies by the use of the formulations of 
the laws of mechanics due to Newton, Euler, Lagrange and Hamilton; applications. 

513 Optimal Control Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 581. Formulation of optimal control problems; the calculus of variations; the 
maximum principle; studies of minimum-time and minimum-energy problems; dynamic pro- 
gramming. 

514A,B Software Systems Design (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 402 and 458 or equivalent. A brief review of programming languages (syntax and 
semantics); organization of system components for assembly, compilation and interpretation; 
organization and design of operating systems for batch processing, multiprocessing, and time 
sharing; memory allocation in a dynamic environment. 

515 Quantum Electronics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403, 419, 489 and 491. Electroluminescence, interaction of radiation and matter, 
gas lasers, solid state laser, injection lasers, holography, electro-optic effects, non-linear optics, 
laser systems, noise and applications. 

516 Advanced Radiation Heat Transfer (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 407. A study of advanced principles in radiation heat transfer including the study 
of the geometric factor, black and real systems, and energy transfer in absorbing and emitting 
media. 

519 Advanced Structural Mechanics (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301, 427 and 491 or equivalent. Use of potential energy principle in structural 
analysis; direct and indirect method of calculus of variations; nonlinear problems of large defor- 
mation; beam on elastic foundations; special topics in structural mechanics. 

520 Advanced Viscous Fluid Flow (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 333 and 407. A study of the fundamental equation of motion and continuity applied 
to viscous fluids (Navier-Stokes equations). The development of the boundary layer equations 
and the study of viscous drag, investigation of boundary layer control theory to reduce viscous 
drag. 

521 Antenna Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403, 419, 489 and 491. Polarization; radiation patterns; impedance characteristics; 
plane, cylindrical and spherical waves, electric and magnetic dipoles; wire antennas, traveling 
wave antennas; broad band antennas; analysis and synthesis of arrays; parabolas; lenses; 
radomes; feed systems; scattering; multiple beam antennas; synthetic antennas; phased arrays; 
diffraction; solution by superposition, orthogonal expansion, integral equation and variational 
techniques; antenna measurements. 


Engineering 227 


522 Theory of Hydrodynamic Lubrication (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 333 and 407. The analysis and design of compressible and incompressible journal 
and thrust bearings. 

523 Solid State Devices and Integrated Circuits (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 455A. Solid state fabrication technologies: diffusion, epitaxy, metallization, photoli- 
thography. Solid state device design principles: diodes, transistors, FETS, linear integrated circuits, 
digital integrated circuits. 

524 Advanced Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 316. Equilibrium and stability criteria, chemical thermodynamics, multiple reaction 
systems, ionization, equilibrium composition. 

526 Advanced Convective Heat Transfer (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 407. A study of advanced principles in convective heat transfer including the study 
of heat transfer in external and internal flow fields for both laminar and turbulent fluid flow. 

530 Advanced Strength of Materials (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301 (or 421 ) and 308. Energy methods, principle of virtual work, applications to 
structures, cylinders, shrink fits, curved beams, elastic and inelastic buckling of columns. 

547 Advanced Dynamics of Structures (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 41 1 and 491 or equivalent. Vibration of beams, plates and shells. Dynamic response 
of continuous systems in general. Introduction to random vibrations. Topics in nonlinear vibra- 
tions. 

549 Theory of Elastic Stability (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 301, 530 and 491 or equivalent. Critical loads of columns, beam columns, plates, 
shells; lateral stability of beams, torsional buckling of open sections, stability of the frames; 
dynamic stability of elastic systems. 

554 Hybrid Computation (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 424. Hybrid analog-digital computer systems, A/D and D/A converters 
and other linkage equipment, application of hybrid computers to solving partial differential 
equations and modeling, error analysis. 

555 Electromagnetic Field Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 419 and 491. Relativistic electrodynamics, retarded potentials, radiation from 
arbitrarily moving charges, Cerenkov radiation, cyclotron radiation, propagation in dispersive 
media, space charge dynamics, advanced boundary value problems. 

557 Sampled-Data Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 416. Analysis and design of sampled-data and digital control systems, using Z- 
transforms and state-variable methods; consideration of stability. 

559 Analysis and Synthesis of Active Networks (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 310 and 504. Analysis of active networks: controlled sources, negative-immittance 
converters, gyrators, and infinite-gain devices; parameter sensitivity; realizability conditions; 
synthesis of active RC networks. 

570 Seminar in Electrical Engineering (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and 12 units of graduate coursework. Special topics and current 
developments of primary interest in the field of electrical engineering. This course, with different 
content, may be retaken for additional credit. 

573 Aerospace Guidance Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 410 and 423. Guidance equations for powered and impulsive orbit injection and 
mid-course correction; analysis of navigation fix; estimation from measurements and error analy- 
sis; recursive navigation theory. 

575 Kinetic Theory and Statistical Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 316. Statistical study of ideal gases, kinetic theory, statistical mechanics, electron 
gas, thermionic emission, photon and phonon gases. 

581 Theory of Linear Systems (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 416. Principles of state space domain analysis, linear spaces, stability of 
systems; numerical methods for linear systems analysis and design. 

582 Linear Estimation Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 423 and 581 . Mathematical models of continuous-time and discrete-time stochastic 
processes; the Causs-Markov theorem; the Kalman filter, smoothing and suboptimal filtering, 
computational studies. 


228 Engineering 

585 Optimization Techniques in Systems Engineering (3) 

Prerequisite: Egr 403. Calculus of variations, optimization of functions of several variables, Lagrange 
multipliers, gradient techniques, linear programming, and the simplex method, non-linear and 
dynamic programming. 

587 Operational Analysis Techniques in Systems Engineering (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 423 and 585. Operational research models; applications of probability theory to 
reliability, quality control, waiting line theory, Markov chains; Monte Carlo methods. 

592 Advanced Engineering Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Egr 403 and 491 or equivalent. Partial differential equations In engineering; numerical 
techniques; integral equations; engineering applications. 

597 Graduate Projects (1-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. 

598 Thesis (1-6) 

Prerequisite: consent of adviser. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: classified graduate status. Open to graduate students only by consent of Engineering 
School Graduate Committee. May be repeated for credit only upon approval of this committee. 

701 Review of Applied Mathematics for Engineers (3) 

Review of elementary calculus, ordinary differential equations, Laplace transforms, vector analysis, 
Fourier series, matrices, and partial differential equations. 




HEALTH EDUCATION, PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION, RECREATION AND ATHLETICS 










233 


DIVISION OF HEALTH EDUCATION, PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION, RECREATION AND ATHLETICS 

Chairman: Paul Pastor 


ATHLETICS 

Neale Stoner, Director 

FACULTY 

David Gibbs, John Codden, jerry Lloyd, Donald Matson, George Radovich, V. Richard Wolfe, Peter 
Yoder 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 
Eula Sovall, Chairman 

FACULTY 

Paul Fardy, M. William Fulton, Eric Hanauer, Elmer Johnson, Araminta Little, Bille Moore, Alexander 
Omalev, Virginia Scheel, Carol Weinmann, Ronald Witchey, Michael Yessis 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The Department of Physical Education offers the Bachelor of Science in Physical Education for 
students preparing to teach, for those preparing to pursue graduate work in physical education and 
for those preparing for careers in business, industry and government service. 

The major consists of 40 units in physical education. Electives are to be approved by the student's 
departmental adviser. Requirements for the major, including proficiency requirements, prerequisite 
and lower division courses, are indicated below. 

MAJOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION ♦ 

It is strongly recommended that students take one or more of the following courses to fulfill their 
general education requirements: 

Chemistry 100 Introductory Chemistry (4) 

Physics 211 A Elementary Physics (4) 

Physical Science 201 Modern Physical Science (4) 

Biological Science 201 Elements of Biology (5) 

Biological Science 361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology (4) 

Lower Division (maximum of 12 units) 

Units 


PE 201 Introduction to Physical Education 3 

A minimum of six classes elected from the following 6 t 


PE 110, 120, 130, 140, 170 and 180. (Although course number may be repeated to 
meet this requirement, a specific class may count only once.) 

Upper Division (minimum of 28 units) 

Units 

Theoretical and practical bases: 

Minimum of two courses from the following 6-7 

PE 324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) 

PE 360 Movement Anatomy (3) 

PE 361 Biomechanics of Sport (3) 

PE 370 Physiology of Exercise (4) 

PE 418 Adapted and Corrective Activities (3) 

* Students planning to seek a teaching credential should obtain a copy of the "Major in Physical Education with Teaching Emphasis" 
from the department office. Final decisions on these requirements were not made in time for inclusion in this catalog, 
t Three units for students who transfer from institutions granting one-half unit credit for physical education activity classes. 


234 HEPERA 


Contemporary Understandings: 

Minimum of two courses from the following 6 

PE 350 History of Physical Education (3) 

PE 356 Cultural Perspectives of Physical Activity (3) 

PE 436 Sport Psychology (3) 

PE 437 Sport Sociology (3) 

Analysis: 

Three courses as follows 6-7 

One course from the PE 340 series, Analysis of Individual Sports (2) 

One course from the PE 341 series. Analysis of Dual Sports (2)2 
One course from the following 

PE 340 Analysis of Individual Sports (2) 

PE 341 Analysis of Dual Sports (2) 

PE 342 Analysis of Team Sports (2) 

PE 482 Ethnic Dance (3) 

PE 484 Contemporary Dance Technique (3) 

PE 486 Choreography (3) 

Upper division physical education courses to complete the required 40 units for the major 

Total 40 

Proficiency Requirements for Major and Minor Students 

Activity courses should be taken to meet the prerequisite requirements for any analysis series courses 
the student plans to take. Proficiency screening tests are administered in the analysis classes at the 
beginning of the semester. 

MINOR IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

A physical education minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework in physical education with a 
minimum of 12 upper division units which must include work from each of the following areas: 
Theoretical and Practical Bases, Contemporary Understandings and Analysis series. 

CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PHYSICAL EDUCATION MAJORS 

IMPORTANT NOTE: Due to changes in the legal requirements for teaching credentials mandated 
by the California State Legislature, the programs and requirements listed below apply only to those 
students who were admitted to teacher education prior to November 2, 1971 . It is possible that other 
students interested in obtaining a teaching credential at this institution will be subject to different 
requirements and programs which will be published in a supplementary bulletin. 

The university program for meeting the requirements for the standard teaching credential with a 
specialization in secondary school teaching is as follows: 

1 . A bachelor's degree from an approved institution. 

2. A fifth year of university or university education taken at the upper division or graduate level, at 
least six semester hours of which must be taken at the graduate level. 

3. Forty-five semester hours of coursework selected from fouroi the following six areas: humanities 
(except foreign languages); social sciences; natural sciences; mathematics; * fine arts; and foreign 
languages. The applicant must have at least a year of English and shall demonstrate competence 
in composition by passing a course in advanced composition or by passing an examination.! (The 
general education requirement for the bachelor's degree will satisfy this requirement if courses 
are selected properly. Not more than six hours of general education coursework shall apply 
toward the major or the minor for the credential.) 

4. A major and a minor in subject matter areas commonly taught in the public secondary school. 
The following minors are available for physical education majors: art, biology, chemistry, com- 
munications with a journalism emphasis, economics, English, French, geography, German, his- 
tory, mathematics, music, physics, political science, Spanish, speech communication and theatre 
arts. 

• Mathematics requiring as a prerequisite an understanding and knowledge of high school algebra and geometry, 
t The English requirement including composition is met at this university by English 100 or 103, English 1 10, 11 1 or 112 (or equivalents) 
and English 301. 


411—3 It in 


HEPERA 235 

5. Credential requirements for preservice professional education are met through the following 
program in professional education; 

Units 


Educ 340 Principles and Curricula of Secondary Education 3 

Educ 411 Psychological Foundations of Education 3 

Educ 4% Practicum (concurrent enrollment with Educ 411) 1 

Educ 401 Social Foundations of Education 3 

PE 442 Teaching Physical Education In Secondary Schools J 2 

Educ 449 Fieldwork in Methods of Teaching In Secondary Schools (concurrent enroll- 
ment with PE 442) 1 

749 Student Teaching in Physical Education In the Secondary School and Seminar t 6 

Admission to Teacher Education 


The application for admission to teacher education should be completed by the end of the semester 
in which Educ 340 is completed. Information about admission to teacher education is available at 
the Credentials Office. The instructions for admission indicate all the procedures to be followed. 
Each applicant should take the test batteries at the earliest date listed in the admission to teacher 
education materials. 

Admission to Student Teaching 

Admission to teacher education does Include admission to student teaching. Information about 
admission to student teaching is available at the Department of Teacher Education. Applications for 
student teaching for fall semester must be submitted by March 1 and for spring semester by October 
15. 

Study Limits of Student Teachers 

Students enrolled in PE 749 will be limited to two additional courses for that semester. It Is expected 
that students will not carry out-of-university work responsibilities during the semester of the student 
teaching assignment. 

GRADUATE PROGRAMS 

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

The program of studies leading to this degree is designed to prepare carefully selected individuals 
as master teachers of physical education by providing the technical knowledge and scholarship 
necessary to interpret to others through modern methods of education: (1 ) the basic subject matter 
of physical education; (2) the conduct and application of experimental research pertinent to 
physical education; (3) the ability to evaluate critically the basic issues affecting physical education; 
and (4) the application of concepts from related fields having significance for physical education. 
The program is also designed to prepare teachers of physical education at the university level as well 
as to provide the background for continued study In a doctoral program in physical education. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to the program include: 

(1) completion of 24 approved upper division units in physical education; 

(2) a grade-point average of 3.0 or better, for all upper division work taken in physical education 
and a 2.5 CPA for all previous college and/or university work. (Contingency provisions: 
grade-point deficiencies in individual courses In physical education may be met by taking 6-12 
hours of approved courses at Cal State Fullerton, and earning a 3.0 CPA in these courses. Such 
courses, while counted toward the prerequisites for the master of science program, may not 
be used to fulfill the program requirements.) 

(3) completion of the Aptitude Test of the Craduate Record Examination. 

Program of Study 

The degree study plan normally consists of 30 units of graduate coursework with a CPA of 3.0 or 
better. Coursework shall include 18 units of 500-level courses of which 8 to 10 units shall be in the 
core studies. Further work includes 12-17 units in physical education electives with eight of these 
units concentrated In one special area. Six units of work must be in disciplines other than physical 


t See course description for prerequisites. 


236 HEPERA 


education. A thesis and an oral examination at the conclusion of the program are required; a written 
examination may also be required. 

1. Core Studies (8-10 units) 

PE 510 Research Design in HEPER (3) 

PE 598 Thesis (4) 
or 

PE 597 Project (2) 

At least one of the following: 

PE 515 Seminar in Physical Education (3) 

PE 516 Philosophical Bases of Physical Education (3) 

PE 520 International Physical Education (3) 

2. Electives (12-17 units) in physical education, including a minimum of eight units in one of the 
following concentrations: 

(PE 596, Advanced Studies in Physical Education, 1-3 units, may be applied to core, concentra- 
tion or elective area as approved. PE 599, Independent Research, 1-3 units, may be applied to 
any of the concentrations which follow.) 

A. Administrative: 

PE 532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

PE 530 Administration and Supervision of HEPER (3) 

PE 533 Facilities Development and Planning (2) 

PE 545 Seminar in Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

B. Scientific: 

PE 552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) 

PE 555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

PE 551 Seminar: Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

PE 545 Seminar in Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

PE 540 Seminar in Problems in Adapted Physical Education (3) 

C. Scientific Sports: 

Must include two courses from the scientific area above. 

PE 560 Advanced Study in Performance: 

(a) Tennis-Badminton (2) 

(b) Gymnastics (2) 

(c) Track and Field (2) 

3. Supporting courses from other disciplines (6 units) 

For further details, consult the graduate studies adviser. Division of Health Education, Physical 
Education and Recreation. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


HEALTH EDUCATION COURSES 

101 Personal and Community Health (2) 

Meaning and significance of physical, mental and social health as related to the individual and to 
society; alcohol and narcotics education; fire prevention; public safety and accident prevention. 

102 Prevention and First Aid (2) 

Study of the hazards in man's environment and the common accidents related thereto. Emphasis 
is placed upon both the care and prevention of accidents. Students will be certified in standard 
and advanced American Red Cross first aid procedures. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

321 Stimulants and Depressants (2) 

Critical study of habit-forming substances such as alcohol, tobacco, narcotics and related drugs. 
Social and legal aspects of the drug problem are also considered. 

322 Man, Exercise and Leisure (2) 

A study of the effect of man's nutrition in relation to exercise. The interrelationships of activity and 
leisure in modern society and the problems that are associated with them will also be investigat- 
ed. 


HEPERA 237 


419 The School Health Program (3) 

Prerequisite: HE 101 or equivalent. Consideration of the three classical divisions of the school health 
program: instruction, services and environment. Study will include standards, problems, and 
relationships pertaining to these areas as well as a field project. 

421 Public Health (2) 

A study of the structure, policies and practices of public health agencies in the United States. 
Emphasis on factors affecting environmental health. 


PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES 

General Education Requirements: 

Health and Physical Education Electives 

There are no specific health and physical education requirements. Each student, however, must take 
a minimum of three courses (9 units) with one from each of three fields included in Category IV, 
Basic Subjects: computer science, elementary foreign languages, health education, mathematics, oral 
communications, physical education, reading, statistics or writing. See page 67. 

110 Aquatics (1) 

A physical activity experience in aquatics activities with a student in an educational setting and under 
the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

120 Group Activities (1) 

A physical activity experience in group activities with a student in an educational setting and under 
the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

130 Individual Activities (1) 

A physical activity experience In individual activities with a student in an educational setting and 
under the direction of a faculty member who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests 
of the student. Open to all students. May be repeated for credit. 

140 Dance Activities (1) 

(Same as Dance 140) 

170 Intercollegiate Sports (W) (1) 

An intercollegiate activity experience in individual or team sports for women In an educational 
setting under the direction of a coach who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests 
of the student. Consent of coach required for enrollment. 

180 Intercollegiate Sports (M) (1) 

An intercollegiate activity experience in individual and team sports for men In an educational setting 
under the direction of a coach who directs the activity to meet the needs and interests of the 
student. Consent of the coach required for enrollment. 

Professional Theory Courses 

201 Introduction to Physical Education and Recreation (3) 

Introduction to physical education programs in public and private agencies, personal, social and 
professional requirements of the physical education teacher and recreation leader, includes the 
origin and development of the professions of health education, physical education and recreation 
with emphasis upon their significance and function in contemporary American culture. 

206 Techniques of Officiating Team Sports (2) 

Analysis of officiating techniques and rules necessary for officiating team sports. May be repeated 
for various sports or combinations of sports. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

210 Water Safety Instructor (2) 

Prerequisite: PE 110 (Life Saving) or equivalent and consent of instructor.This course prepares the 
student to teach swimming and life saving and to supervise aquatic programs. Successful comple- 
tion of this course will qualify the student for certification as an ARC Water Safety Instructor. 
(1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 


u m 


238 


HEPERA 


214 Skin and Scuba Diving (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 110 (Life Saving) or equivalent and the consent of instructor. The techniques of 
skin and scuba diving. Theory of diving, safety procedures and applications of diving will be 
covered. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

301 Prevention and Care of Athletic Injuries (3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing, successful completion of HE 102 (or equivalent) and consent 
of instructor. Designed to assist trainers, coaches, physical education instructors, health educa- 
tors, YMCA and playground personnel, and athletes in the prevention and care of athletic injuries. 
Emphasis will be on practical applications as well as theory. (2 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

320 Theory of Coaching: Sports (2) 

A physical education experience designed to help prepare the student to coach specific individual 
and team sports. Emphasis will include coaching techniques, conditioning of athletes, budget 
preparation, purchase and care of equipment, scheduling and design and care of facilities. May 
be repeated for credit with emphasis on a different sport. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

324 Theory and Principles of Human Motor Learning (3) 

An analysis of current theories of motor learning as related to human performance. Philosophical 
bases are developed from which basic principles are evolved. 

325 Case Studies in Human Motor Learning (3) 

Case studies involving human physical performance. Sequence of activities, individual needs, institu- 
tional patterns of organization and programming. 

333 Physical Education and Human Development (3) 

Emphasis is placed upon characteristics of the child, particularly as these relate to physical growth 
and development; basic mechanical principles underlying efficient movement; and programs for 
physical needs of children in the elementary school. 

335 Afro-American Dance (2) 

(Same as Dance 335) 

340 Analysis of Individual Sports (2) 

Prerequisites: prior experience In the specific sport (s) offered. Must demonstrate adequate profi- 
ciency in each sport (s) offered. Analysis of a specific sport (s) including game play and skill 
performance. Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. May be repeated for 
credit with emphasis on a different sport. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

341 Analysis of Dual Sports (2) 

Prerequisites: prior experience in the specific sport (s) offered. Must demonstrate adequate profi- 
ciency in each sport (s) offered. Analysis of a specific sport (s) including game play and skill 
performance. Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. May be repeated for 
credit with emphasis on a different sport. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

342 Analysis of Team Sports (2) 

Prerequisites: prior experience in the specific sport (s) offered. Must demonstrate adequate profi- 
ciency in each sport (s) offered. Analysis of a specific sport (s) including game play and skill 
performance. Emphasis on understanding the specific nature of the activity. May be repeated for 
credit with emphasis on a different sport. (1 hour lecture, 2 hours activity) 

350 History of Physical Education (3) 

Historical development of thought and practice In athletics and physical education In American 
education. 

356 Cultural Perspectives of Physical Activity (3) (Formerly 435) 

An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of physical activity in the cultural milieau. Study 
will cover historical and contemporary interpretations of the role of play, games and sports, 
dance and recreation In human life. 

360 Movement Anatomy (3) 

Description of human movement especially as witnessed in sports. Comprehension of muscle action 
and function in various sports. 

361 Biochemics of Sport (3) 

Sports technique analysis. General techniques of motion study and application of mechanical princi- 
ples to sport. 

370 Physiology of Exercise (4) 

The study of physiological processes in physical activities and the effects of training upon perform- 
ance. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 




HEPERA 241 


418 Adapted and Corrective Activities (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 360. The study and selection of activities and programs for students physically unable 
to participate in the regular physical education program. 

420 Tests and Measurements in Physical Education (3) 

A study of the development and use of tests and measurements in physical education in the 
evaluation of objectives, programs, and student achievement. 

425 Special Programs: Physical Education (1-3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. Group investigation of selected topics determined by profes- 
sionals in the field. Will be offered as a one-, two- or three-unit course. May be repeated for 
credit. 

431 Health, Physical Education, Recreation and Athletics in the Community Colleges (3) 

A course designed to prepare students for community college teaching and for administrative 
positions. An investigation of the role of health, physical education, recreation and athletics in 
the community college curriculum. Fieldwork and campus visitations required. 

436 Sport Psychology (3) 

Discussion and analysis of literature, research and Issues dealing with psychological aspects of play, 
games and sport. (Same as Psychology 436) 

437 Sport Sociology (3) 

A critical examination of the interrelationships of sport and athletics with other aspects of the culture; 
special emphasis on 2()th-century America. 

442 Teaching Physical Education in the Secondary School (2) 

Prerequisite: Education 340, Education 411, admission to teacher education, senior standing or 
consent of Instructor. The student who has not had teaching experience must register concurrent- 
ly in Education 449. See page 199 under Secondary Education for description of Standard 
Teaching Credential program. Objectives, methods, and materials including audiovisual instruc- 
tion for teaching physical education in secondary schools. 

482 Ethnic Dance (3) 

(Same as Dance 482) 

484 Contemporary Dance Technique (3) 

(Same as Dance 484) 

486 Choreography (3) 

(Same as Dance 486) 

496 Physical Education Practicum (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the department chairman and instructor. Participation as an assistant In 
planning, preparing, coaching, teaching in public school, college, or community physical educa- 
tion or recreation programs. May be repeated for a maximum of six units of credit. Credit/no 
credit only. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and consent of Instructor supervising the study and department 
chairman. Independent Inquiry Into problems of topics of special interest beyond the scope of 
regular coursework. May be repeated for credit up to six units. 

510 Research in Health Education, Physical Education and Recreation (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. The role and functions of research in health, physical education, and 
recreation; included are the different types of research with tools of and equipment for the 
respective research. Selection and development of research problems and critique of completed 
studies are stressed. 

515 Seminar in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major or minor In physical education. A study of current 
problems and issues in physical education through a critical analysis of the literature in the field 
and research findings. 

516 Philosophical Bases of Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Identification of philosophical 
schools of thought as related to physical education including the role of the philosophical 
process. Examination and application of the philosophical process In physical education. 

520 International Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. An in-depth study of the theory and 
practice of physical education and sports in selected foreign countries. Evaluation of foreign 
physical education programs in relation to programs witnessed in the United States. 


«n— 3 U 3M 


242 HEPERA 

530 Administration and Supervision of Health Education, Physical Education and 
Recreation (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with major in physical education. An in-depth study and critical analysis 
of existing programs in health education, physical education, and recreation in terms of estab- 
lished evaluative criteria and norms of practice. 

532 Curriculum Design in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. Study In desirable practices, proce- 
dures, and factors influencing curricular development in the field of physical education. Especial- 
ly designed for the practicing teacher, supervisor of physical education, and the school 
administrator concerned with physical education in the total school program. 

533 Facilities Development and Planning (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and a major in physical education. Analysis of new trends and research 
In the development of indoor and outdoor facilities in planning programs in health education, 
physical education and recreation with special emphasis upon design, safety, features, site 
selection, building construction and equipment needs. 

540 Seminar in Problems in Adapted Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 418. Identification and solutions of problems in planning, organization, administra- 
tion, and evaluation of adapted physical education programs at local, state and national levels. 

545 Seminar in Evaluation in Physical Education (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status with a major in physical education. The study and application of 
advanced evaluation procedures and scientific Instrumentation used in the solution of current 
problems and projects in physical education. 

551 Seminar: Advanced Study in Physiology of Exercise (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 370 or equivalent. A study of advanced theories of exercise and physiological 
function. 

552 Human Bio-Kinetics (3) 

Prerequisite: PE 361 or equivalent background In kinesiology. A study of advanced theories and a 
detailed analyls of human movement. 

555 Scientific Bases of Training (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, coursework in kinesiology, physiology of exercise, bio-kinetics, and 
consent of instructor. Detailed study of contemporary training with specific attention to the 
development of those qualities involved in various sports. Experience in evaluation of the effects 
of training. 

560A Advanced Study in Performance: Badminton and Tennis (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, advanced preparation and/or experience in badminton and tennis or 
consent of instructor. Theory and analysis of top level performance. Includes in depth study of 
skills, techniques and strategy involved in badminton and tennis and the factors pertinent to 
outstanding athletic performance. 

560B Advanced Study in Performance: Gymnastics (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, advanced preparation and/or work in gymnastics or consent of 
instructor. Theory and analysis of top level performance. Includes in-depth study of the skills and 
techniques involved in gymnastics and the factors pertinent to outstanding athletic performance. 

560C Advanced Study in Performance: Track and Field (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate status, advanced preparation and/or work In track and field or consent of 
instructor. Theory and analysis of top level performance. Includes in-depth study of the skills, 
techniques, and strategy involved in track and field and the factors pertinent to outstanding 
athletic performance. 

596 Advanced Studies: Physical Education (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate status. Graduate seminars designed to develop competencies In such areas 
as: historical, philosophical, sociological, psychological, scientific bases of sport and dance. 
Opportunities are provided for the individualization of instruction with appropriate experiences. 
May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (2) 

Prerequisites: PE 510 and consent of instructor. Individual work on an empirical problem. Confer- 
ences with project chairman and committee, culminating in a project. 

598 Thesis (4) 

Prerequisites: PE 510 and consent of instructor. Individual research on an empirical problem. Confer- 
ences with thesis chairman and committee, culminating in a thesis. 


HEPERA 243 


599 Independent Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate status and consent of the faculty adviser and department chairman. Research 
for qualified graduate students desiring to pursue independent inquiry. May be repeated for 
credit. 

749 Student Teaching in Physical Education in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 208 for description and prerequisites. 


RECREATION COURSES 

203 Recreation Programs and Activities (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Theory and activity course, leadership in recreation programs, 
activities in recreation agencies. Laboratory experiences and practice included. (1 hour lecture, 
2- hours activity) 



LETTERS, ARTS AND 
SCIENCES 


IS 830 






247 


SCHOOL OF 

LETTERS, ARTS AND SCIENCES 

Dean: Hazel J. Jones 


The curricula of the School of Letters, Arts and Sciences are designed to provide opportunities for 
the student to expand his general knowledge, to develop a beginning specialization, to investigate 
areas of intellectual interest, and, if he chooses, to prepare himself for specialized professional 
studies. 

The School of Letters, Arts and Sciences is presently comprised of 21 departments offering 23 
undergraduate majors leading to the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science degree and 19 master's 
programs leading to the Master of Arts or Master of Public Administration degree. 

DEPARTMENT OF AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Wacira Cethaiga 
Chairman 

Michael Finnie, Cheryl Armstrong, Jim Hancock, Sonia Tilden, Boaz Namasaka 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ETHNIC STUDIES 

This degree program is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a variety of needs in 
contemporary higher education. These are: extending opportunities for university education to 
students who have long been under-represented due to cultural differences between their experi- 
ences and the cultural emphasis of higher education; providing for personal consultation between 
faculty and students of diverse cultural backgrounds; revising curriculum and promoting research 
to give all students and faculty an understanding of the interaction of ethnic groups in past and 
contemporary civilizations; and conducting continuous research in innovative teaching methods and 
courses to create more effective means of teaching students in a culturally pluralistic environment. 

AFRO-AMERICAN STUDIES OPTION 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Afro-Ethnic Studies 103 *, 107 and 240 plus six 
additional units from lower division offerings and a minimum of 24 units in upper division courses. 
The purpose of the Afro-American studies option is: to provide a specialization in Afro-American 
studies within the framework of a more generalized and comprehensive ethnic studies perspective; 
to provide greater flexibility and more electives within the ethnic studies program to meet the variety 
of needs and interests of the diverse group of students selecting this program; to acquaint students 
with the problems, successes and failures of America's largest minority group; to help students 
understand the nature of contemporary ethnic and social turmoil and guide them into constructive 
modes of thought about current issues; to enable students to see the black experience in America 
in a world setting; and to enable students to lead more effective lives in a culturally pluralistic and 
rapidly changing society. 

To accomplish this, it is important that prospective majors and others interested in a minor consult 
with the Afro-American faculty for advice. 

Required 

103 Effective Communication (3) * 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

240 Afro-American History (3) 

Lower division electives: (6 units required) 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

104 Swahili (4) 


* Students can be exempted from Afro-Ethnic Studies 103 by an examination and/or consent of department. 


248 Afro-Ethnic Studies 

105 Swahili (4) 

170 The Amer- Asian (3) 

230 The Native American (3) 

245 Black Political History 

250 Cultural Scars of Oppression (3) 

260 Cultural Identity and the Contemporary Black Man (3) 

285 Schools and Minority Croups (3) 

Upper division electives: (24 units required) 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

303 Ancient and Modern African Culture (3) 

305 Community Organizations (3) 

309 The Black Family (3) 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

315 Pan-African Art (3) 

345 Europe, Africa and America in Modern Western Civilization (3) 

346 The African Experience (3) 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

402 Africa and Self-Determination (3) 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

460 Afro-American Music (3) 

495 Selected Topics (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 


AFRO-ETHNIC STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

A survey of the basic concepts and problems involved in an examination of the perspective through 
which black and brown people have come to see themselves in terms of their own heroes, 
culture, and contributions to societies in which they live and world society in general. 

103 Effective Communication (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic skills, emphasizing writing and communication skills, stressing 
the use of idioms, proper pronunciation, intonation, and correct English patterns. 

104 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

(Same as Swahili 101 ) 

105 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

(Same as Swahili 102) 

107 Introduction to Afro-American Studies (3) 

Introduction to the aims and objectives of the Afro-American studies program. The course will define 
and explore the basic terms and references that give substance to Afro-American studies. It will 
provide uniform purpose and direction for students who seek an education in Afro-American 
studies. 

230 The Native American (3) 

A study of the American Indian experience in the United States as seen from the Indian's point of 
view in comparison with that of the white man. Special attention will be focused on the problems 
of American Indians today. 

240 Afro-American History (3) 

A survey of the social, political, and economic history of black people in the United States from 
slavery to the present. 

245 Black Political History 

Background in the political development of the United States and the influence of slavery there on 
to the present date. Included is a survey and analysis of the U. S. Constitution showing separate 
political development of white and black. 

250 Cultural Scars of Oppression (3) 

An examination of the process of socialization of the black man in America and its imprints upon 
his psyche. 


Afro-Ethnic Studies 249 


260 Cultural Identity of the Contemporary Black Man (3) 

An examination and study of the “identity crisis" or lack of it in young black individuals in the United 
States. An in-depth analysis of the changing points of view of the black toward acculturation. 

270 The Amer-Asian (3) 

A survey of the Asian-American experience from the early 19th century. Includes: analysis of the 
discriminatory legislation as reflected in immigration quotas; investigation of the fallacies sur- 
rounding the Asian-American experience; and study of present day attitudes in the Asian commu- 
nity. 

285 Schools and Minority Groups (3) 

A study of the prevailing educational practices in regard to minority groups in elementary school 
through college, including minority students' failure patterns, what is being done to change 
failures, and the outcomes of these practices. 

301 Afro-American Culture (3) 

A survey of African cultural characteristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, 
including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

303 Ancient and Modern African Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: advanced sophomore or upper division standing. A survey of the African cultures 
(specifically West African contrasted with East African) before the period of exploration and 
after colonization. A look at the present-day American black culture and an estimation of the 
carry-over cultures. 

305 Community Organizations (3) 

A study of organization agencies, such as Partners for Progress, Fair FHousing, SER, Urban League 
and the local welfare systems and their relevancy to the minority community. Students will be 
involved in field research and assess the goals and accomplishments of an organization selected 
for study. 

309 The Black Family (3) 

A study of the American social conditions that shaped the black family from the African cultural 
patterns that were destroyed during slavery to the family that exists today. Special attention will 
be given to the roles of poverty, racism and discrimination. 

314 Pan-African Dance and Movement (3) 

Theory and practice of movement of African and Haitian peoples. An investigation of how move- 
ment (dance) acts as quasi-language in perpetuating the life style of African cultures and cultures 
of African descent. 

315 Pan-African Art (3) 

A study of African and Afro-American art from prehistoric to contemporary times, including African 
influences in other art forms and a stylistic analysis of drawings, sculpture and paintings. 

345 Europe, Africa and America in Modern Western Civilization (3) 

A historical* examination of the interrelationships and interactions of European, African and American 
cultures. Particular emphasis will be placed upon the effects of slavery, colonization and self- 
determination upon various cultures. 

346 The African Experience (3) 

A survey of major themes of African history from the origin of the black man and traditional African 
civilization through the African diaspora to the institutional realities of Africa today. 

401 Black American and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Analysis and discussion of the socioeconomic and political problems confronting black Americans, 
with an emphasis on problem solving. Particular focus will be placed on the effects American 
social attitudes and institutions have had on the black community. Research will focus on these 
areas. 

402 Africa and Self-Determination (3) 

Prerequisite: Afro-Ethnic Studies 303. A study of the national characters of African nations, how they 
shed labels like “tribes" and united to demand the independence they had lost. 

410 Afro-American Literature (3) 

A study of the literary endeavors of Afro-Americans and their cultural impact, especially in relation- 
ship to the social and psychological evolution of the Afro-American. 

411 Black Writers' Workshop (3) 

Practice in writing prose, fiction, drama, short stories, book reviews, poetry and essays from the 
perspective of the black experience. 


250 American Studies 


460 Afro-American Music Appreciation (3) 

A survey of black music in America; the sociological conditions that help produce various forms of 
black music; and influential black music in America. 

495 Selected Topics (3) 

Prerequisite: junior status or consent of instructor. Special seminar in selected topics in Afro- 
American studies. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and acceptance of the subject by department chairman and the faculty 
member directing the study. 

DEPARTMENT OF AMERICAN STUDIES 

FACULTY 
David Pivar 
Department Chairman 
E. James Weaver 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The degree in American studies is an interdisciplinary program within the School of Letters, Arts and 
Sciences. The program is designed for students with a special interest in the American experience, 
including the overseas experience. It permits, through intensive study of the United States, greater 
perception of American society, both contemporary and historical. By providing students with an 
opportunity to discover the larger relationships among disciplines, the student may receive a better 
sense of the whole. 

The American studies degree prepares students for teaching either on the elementary or secondary 
level. Credentialing, usually handled during the fifth year of study, may be obtained for students 
enrolled in this interdisciplinary program. American studies is useful for any career in which an 
understanding of American culture is important. Specialized careers in American studies, leading to 
the Ph.D., are also available. 

Since two alternative programs are available, the student interested in becoming a major must 
consult with an American studies counselor to develop a course of study mutually satisfactory. 
The major consists of 36 units distributed as follows between the core program and either plan a 
or b: 

I. Core program (12 units) required of all majors. 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

301 The American Character (3) 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

II. Alternative plans (24 upper division units in either plan — electives in American Studies may 
be used in conjunction with courses in other departments) 

a. The student may choose to work in two but not more than three disciplines related to the 
American experience; i.e.: history and literature or sociology, anthropology and political 
science. 

b. The student may choose to pursue a specialized theme or subject; i.e., mass culture, 
urbanization or ethnic groups in American society, or the student may choose to concen- 
trate on 20th-century American problems. 

Students interested in the American studies major must consult with the chairman of the department 
before establishing an individual course of study. 

The number of courses offered by the department is expected to increase in 1972-73, and students 
are urged to consult the class schedule for such offerings as Irish-Americans and the Cult of Success 
and The Hero in American Popular Culture. 




- -M 


-m^'i^r-^ n-'i 

i' 'fe ’■i' \ ■’.' ^ 

■ ^ ■ •' ' .K ■ I*- ^ 

■ ..,• 'A'-'' ’'‘'•Tt’V , ■ ' 

;■' ■-• ■!:-^ •' .' <■ *‘ t ». .< «*>.' 




• ^-*1 '»■,-•/ ;>»■ 





'V 


r ■ < ^ 




5(--' \ J _ 'J^ 



WJMMM 


Anthropology 253 


AMERICAN STUDIES COURSES 

201 Introduction to American Studies (3) 

With the concept of culture as a unifying principle, this course will focus on four separate time 
periods in order to provide the framework for an understanding of American civilfzation. Several 
different kinds of documents will be used to Illustrate the nature and advantages of an Interdisci- 
plinary approach. 

301 The American Character (3) 

Prerequisite: American Studies 201 or History 170A or B or consent of instructor. An intensive 
examination of the changing national character. Reading assignments will reflect an interdiscipli- 
nary approach, ranging from poetry to sociology. Some attention will be paid to the American 
Negro and Indian in addition to the transplanted European, and foreign perspectives on the 
American will be considered. 

333 Visual Arts in Contemporary America (3) 

Visual phenomena in America as they reveal changes in recent American culture. Areas covered 
include the ''high" arts (painting, sculpture) as contrasted with the "low" arts (advertising, 
television); the artist as innovator, alienation, the business world, and American values in art. 

350 Seminar in Theory and Method of American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 1 70A or B; or consent of Instructor. Designed 
to provide the American studies major with an understanding and appreciation of methodology, 
theories of society and images of man as they effect American studies contributions to scholar- 
ship. 

401 Proseminar in American Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. Designed 
to permit students to examine the relationship between theory and application. Emphasis on 
analytic readings and research. Topics will be announced each semester. Some examples might 
be: The novelist as historian or the concept of postindustrial society. 

402 Religion in the Development of American Society (3) 

Prerequisites: American Studies 201 and 301; or History 170A or B; or consent of instructor. An 
intensive study of the changing role of religion in shaping, reflecting, and challenging dominant 
American values and institutions. Focus Is on the 19th and 20th centuries, although some 
attention will be paid to the colonial period. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

(Same as English 425) 

450 Women in American Society (3) 

An effort to explain the rise and decline of feminism in America. The first half of the course will be 
lecture. The second half will be devoted to discussion aimed at comparing and contrasting the 
contemporary woman's movement with its predecessors. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in American studies to be taken with the consent of instructor and 
program coordinator. May be repeated for credit. 

Related courses in other departments: 

English 325 American Ballad and Folksong (3) 

DEPARTMENT OF ANTHROPOLOGY 

FACULTY 

Hans Leder 
Department Chairman 

Lawrence Christensen, Marlene de Rios, David Evans, Nga Pare Kaihina Hopa, Christopher Hulse, 
Leroy Joesink-Mandeville, Roger Joseph, Fred Katz, Peter Koepping, Otto Sadovszky,* Richard 
See, Judy Suchey, Wayne Untereiner * 


* University administrative officer 


«n»-4 I m 


254 Anthropology 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The major in anthropology is designed for students desiring a broad generalist background, students 
preparing to become teachers of social sciences, and students preparing for graduate work in 
anthropology and in advanced specializations on particular areas (Africa, Asia, etc.) or with cross- 
cultural and international emphasis. 

The required minimum for the major is 45 units, in addition to those taken for the general education 
requirement, distributed as follows: 

Thirty-three units must be taken in anthropology, 24 in upper division courses. Anthropology 201, 
202, 203, 380, 401 , 406, and 480 are required. One course is required from areal offerings in the field: 
Anthropology 204, ^303, 321, 322, 324, 325, 328, 340, 341, 345, 347, 350, 351, 352, 360, and 361. 
Two courses are required from theoretical /institutional courses in the field: Anthropology t313, 
t315, 403, t407, ^408, ^410, 411, 412, 413, 415, ^41 6, 420, 421, ^422, 423, 424, 425, 428, 429, 430, 
440, 441, 450, ^453, 460, 465, 470 and 490. 

(The courses marked with t are cross-listed with other departments and programs. They may be 
used to satisfy the major requirement for: either the courses in anthropology; or related courses.) 

Minimum units 33 

Twelve upper division units are to be taken in the related social science fields of economics, 
geography, history, political science, sociology and psychology, to be approved by the major 
adviser. Advanced work in biological science, the fine and applied arts, and the humanities may be 
substituted for these units by students with specialized interests with the approval of their advisers. 
Students interested in specializing in anthropological linguistics are urged to take courses from the 
university's program in linguistics. Students interested in specializing in physical anthropology are 
urged to take some of the following biological science courses: 161, Principles of Zoology; 312, 
Genetics; 361, Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology; 404, Evolution; 463, Comparative Vertebrate 
Anatomy; 465, Animal Ecology; and 471, Natural History of the Vertebrates. Students interested in 
specializing in primitive art are urged to take many of these art courses: 451, Oceanic Art; 452, Art 
of Sub-Saharan Africa; 461, Art of North American Indians; 462, Art of Mesoamerica; 471, Art of 


Central and South America. 

Minimum units 12 

Minimum total units for the major 45 


Students considering advanced professional careers in research, teaching, or applications of an- 
thropology are urged to explore and sample widely from course offerings in the other social sciences, 
the biological and natural sciences and the humanities and arts. Through a judicious selection of 
these courses it is hoped that anthropology majors will broaden their interests and diversify and 
develop their skills in working towards a variety of individualized career objectives. 

The Department of Anthropology's main emphasis is on cultural anthropology. The comparatively 
great number of linguistic offerings is due only to the purpose of cross-listing courses. 

TEACHING MINOR IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The minor in anthropology is intended as a second field for persons completing a major in another 
discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. Twenty-one units must be taken in anthropology; 
15 of these in upper division courses. Anthropology 201 or 203, 202 and 380 are required. Two 
additional courses must be selected from areal offerings in the field: Anthropology 303, 321, 322, 
324, 325, 328, 340, 341, 345, 347, 350, 351, 352, 360 and 361. Another course must be selected from 
theoretical /institutional courses in the field: 313, 315, 403, 406, 407, 408, 410, 411, 412, 413, 415, 416, 
420, 421, 422, 423, 424, 425, 428, 429, 430, 440, 441, 450, 453, 460, 465, 470 and 490. A final course 
must be either Anthropology 401 or 480. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY 

The program for this degree provides advanced study of general anthropology as well as research 
and other learning experiences for students with specialized areas of interest or competence. This 
program has its main emphasis on cultural anthropology. (The comparatively great number of 
linguistic offerings is due only to the purpose of cross-listing courses.) After consultation with his 
adviser, a student may, however, decide to concentrate in archaeological, linguistic or physical 
anthropology. 


Anthropology 


255 


Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires: 

1. A bachelor's degree with a minimum of 27 units in anthropology, including the following 
courses or their equivalents: 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

203 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 

380 Ethnological Theory (3) 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

480 History of Anthropology (3) 

One areal course (e.g. Anthropology 328, Peoples of Africa) 

One theoretical or topical course (e.g. Anthropology 415, Culture and Personality: Psycho- 
logical Anthropology) 

Reading courses and special examinations may be substituted for some of these prerequisites 
by the department. 

2. A CPA of 3.0 (B) for all work taken in anthropology. 

3. Evaluation and acceptance by the graduate study committee. The applicant must submit at least 
two letters of recommendation and may be required to attend a personal interview at the 
discretion of the graduate study committee. 

Students with limited subject or grade deficiencies may be considered for admission to the 
program upon completion of additional courses, selected by the graduate study committee, 
with at least a 3.0 (B) average. 

Study Plan 

The study plan for the degree must include the following: 

Units 


1 . Anthropology 501 Methodology of Anthropological Research 3 

2. Anthropology 502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology 3 

3. Anthropology 598 Thesis 6 

4. Two additional graduate seminars in anthropology 6 

5. Upper division or graduate work in anthropology 6 

6. Upper division or graduate work in related fields 6 


30 

Any adviser-approved 300- or 400-level course taken as a graduate student may be used for 
requirements 5 and 6. Anthropology 599, Independent Graduate Research, may be used for require- 
ment 5. 

For continuation in the program an average of 3.0 (B) for all work in the study plan must be 
maintained. A thesis must be completed for the degree. Normally a student will register for thesis 
two times, for three units each semester. Students must demonstrate reading knowledge of an 
appropriate foreign language prior to completion of the degree. 

For further information, consult the Department of Anthropology. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES 

201 Introduction to Physical Anthropology (3) 

Man in biological and evolutionary perspective. Methods, findings, concepts, and issues in the study 
of primates, fossil men and races. 

202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

The nature of culture and its significance for man. Uniformities and variations in human cultures. 
Cultural analyses of major institutional forms such as the family, economy, government, religion 
and art with an emphasis on preliterate peoples. A consideration of central problems of cultural 
comparison and interpretation. 




170 


256 Anthropology 

203 Introduction to Archaeology (3) 

Relationship of archaeology, prehistory, and culture history; field methods and analysis of archaeo- 
logical data. A survey of world culture history, from Pleistocene beginnings to the threshold of 
civilization; and introduction to the world's early centers of civilization. 

204 Man's Many Faces (3) 

The study and analysis of a broad selection of human societies, which will provide a perspective 
on how human problems have been solved and the possibilities for new solutions to our own 
problems. 

303 Woman in Cross-Cultural Perspective (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202. A description, analysis and survey of the social position of woman 
in cultures of the world. Attention is given to the influence of biological determinants as they 
are shaped by cultural factors such as beliefs, values, expectations and socially defined roles for 
women. The changing role of women in industrial society will form an important analytical 
segment. 

313 Human Genetics (3) 

(Same as Biological Science 313) 

315 Jazz: Past, Present and Future (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 315) 

321 The American Indian (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of North American Indians 
north of Mexico; origins, languages, culture areas, cultural history; the impact of European 
contacts. 

322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. General survey of the culture history and 
ethnology of the Mesoamerican culture-area, with treatment of each of the principal subareas 
in depth. Analysis of both the native civilizations of Mesoamerica and the present-day ethnologi- 
cal societies, emphasizing sociopolitical organization, economic systems and religious systems. 

324 Ancient Mesoamerica (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthrop)ology 202 or consent of instructor. A culture history survey of the principal 
cultures of pre-Columbian Mesoamerica from the dawn of incipient agriculture to the Spanish 
conquest. 

325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Central and South 
America. Description of selected cultures representative of different cultural areas before and 
after contacts with Western countries. 

328 Peoples of Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of Africa. Description of 
selected cultures representative of different cultural areas before and after contacts with Western 
and Asian countries. 

340 Aboriginal Peoples of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Survey of cultural areas outside the centers 
of high civilizations of China and Japan. Emphasis on steppe-nomadism, Siberia, and ethnic 
splinter groups between India and the Philippines, with focus upon their influence on the cultural 
centers and vice versa. Ecology, migration routes, social organization, religious systems. 

341 Peoples of China and Japan (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Description and analysis of the religious, 
social and technological systems of the civilizations of japan and China, as well as the impact 
of nomadic herders of North and Central Asia upon those centers, from an anthropological point 
of view. Also, a comparison of community studies on these regions. 

345 Peoples of the Middle East (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A cultural survey of the Middle East with 
descriptions of selected cultures (Arab urban, nomadic, Jewish, Turk, Berber, Kurd). 

347 Peoples of the Pacific (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey of the native peoples and cultures 
of the Pacific Islands, including Australia; the social and cultural patterns of representative 
cultures of various areas; special ethnological and theoretical problems. 


Anthropology 257 


350 Peoples of Western Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Representative groups considered in mod- 
ern and historical perspective, stressing especially rural-urban relationships and the dynamics of 
change. 

351 Peoples of Eastern Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Peasant cultures of Russia, Southeast Europe, 
Poland, Czechoslovakia and the Baltic area, their traditional way of life and the impact of 
industrialization and Communist ideology. 

352 Peoples of Ancient Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey of the cultural and social institu- 
tions of the peoples of Pre-Christian Europe. Particular attention will be paid to the Creek, Italic, 
Germanic and Celtic peoples, and readings will be drawn largely from original ancient writers. 

360 Contemporary American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Application of anthropological methods, 
categories of analysis, and types of interpretation to American culture. Survey and critique of 
selected community studies and other kinds of relevant research. 

361 Afro-American Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to African culture. A survey 
of African cultural characteristics in the New World, as they relate to contemporary events, 
including art, ideas, dance and literature. 

380 Ethnological Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. A survey on the theories about the position 
of man as a social and cultural being in the network of biological and environmental as well as 
intrapersonal factors, as described and thought about by philosophers in Greece, during the 
Renaissance, and particularly in the 19th century up to modern times in the Western World. 

401 Ethnographic Field Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 6 additional units of anthropology or consent of instructor. 
Anthropological field research by students on various problems using participant observation 
techniques. 

403 Archaeological Fieldwork (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 or 203 and consent of instructor. Participation in the excavation of 
a local archaeological site. Archaeological mapping, photography and recording. Laboratory 
methods of cataloging, preservation, description and interpretation of archaeological materials. 
Saturday field sessions. (6 hours fieldwork per week) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 406) 

410 Language and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of Instructor. The study of language as a factor in culture. 
Introduction to anthropological linguistics. Trends in the study of language and culture. (Same 
as Linguistics 410) 

411 Folklore (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the study of folktales, 
myths, legends, proverbs, riddles and other forms of the verbal traditions of peoples. Major 
concepts and theories and research methods in the study of folklore. 

412 Comparative Oral Literature (3) 

A comparative survey of oral literature and its role in society. The types of oral narratives, their 
themes, meanings, and functions will be analyzed. 

413 Ethnological Music (3) 

Music, musicmaking and musicians in various nonliterate societies. 

415 Culture and Personality: Psychological Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and Psychology 331 or 351 or Sociology 341 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Comparative study of the relationship between the individual and his culture. Child training 
in nonwestern cultures. Survey of important concepts, studies, and research techniques. Chang- 
ing viewpoints and new directions in culture-personality studies. 

416 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) 


— s:jof>7 


258 Anthropology 

420 Primitive Value Systems (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Study of what properly is considered 
"common sense" in the everyday life of people living within differing sociocultural environ- 
ments. 

421 Anthropology of Religion (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Examination of beliefs and practices in the 
full human variation of religious phenomena, but with an emphasis on primitive religions. The 
forms, functions, structures, symbolism, and history and evolution of man's religious systems. 
Analysis of major categories, concepts, and theoretical models used by anthropologists in the 
study of religion. 

422 Jewish and Comparative Mysticism (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 422) 

423 Comparative Aesthetics and Symbolism (3) 

An analysis of the metaphysical and mystical systems underlying the "grammars" of the art, poetry, 
languages, myths, music, and rituals of various nonliterate and literate peoples and their develop- 
ment into creative experiences. 

424 Psychedelic Anthropology (3) 

A study of states expanded consciousness. It Is a synthesis of anthropology, sociology, philosophy, 
psychology, psychoanalysis, mythology, mysticism, esoteric systems and the religious traditions 
of East and West, including Yoga and the Vendanta, Zen Buddhism, Taosim, Islam, ancient and 
primitive religions, Judaism and Christianity. 

425 Anthropology of Law and Government (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Sources of law-government in primitive 
societies; the cultural background of law; the functions and development of law and government 
in primitive politics; transitions to and comparisons with classical and modern legal and political 
systems. 

428 Social Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of Instructor. A study of the social organization of 
preindustrial societies; religious, political and economic institutions; status and value systems; 
conditions and theories of change. 

429 Kinship and Social Organization (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 428 or consent of instructor. Kinship systems in primitive society 
and their significance in the organization of social life. Theories of kinship, marriage regulations, 
and kinship role patterns. Analysis of the formal properties of diversely structured kinship systems 
and techniques of kinship and structural analysis. 

430 Economic Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or consent of instructor. Analysis of anthropological concepts of 
economy, ecology, and technology; relationship between habitat, economy, and culture. A 
survey of the different types of economic systems found throughout the world; outline of the 
economic development of mankind. 

440 Human Evolution (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 201. Advanced human evolution; human physiological and related cur- 
tural evolution as displayed in the fossil record, adaptations, problems in human evolution. 

441 Human Races (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 201. In seminar a historical study of racial classifications; analysis of 
processes of race formation; analysis of the concept of race and racism; and the study of variation 
in modern populations. 

450 Culture and Education (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 or Education 301 or consent of instructor. The transmission of values, 
implicit cultural assumptions, and the patterning of education in cross-cultural perspective, with 
special attention to American culture and development problems. 

460 Culture Change (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202 and 301 or consent of instructor. Interrelations between cultural, 
social and psychological processes In the dynamics of culture growth and change. Impact of 
western technology on tribal and peasant societies. Anthropological contributions to the planning 
of directed sociocultural change in selected areas. 

465 Alternative Futures (3) 

A study of the growing literature on the future and a consideration of its implications for anthropolo- 
gy and the other social sciences and humanities. 


Anthropology 259 

470 Philosophical and Behavioral Foundations of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 202 and open to lower division students with the consent of instructor. 
Consideration of basic assumptions and contexts of anthropological work. The synthesis of ideas 
and methods into professional skills and careers. 

480 History of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: at least 12 units of anthropology or consent of instructor. Historical antecedents of 
modern anthropology. A systematic survey of the development of anthropology as a scientific 
field; and examination of the principal contributions of leading anthropologists, past and present. 
Reinterpretations and emerging trends. 

490 Senior Seminar in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Topics in anthropology selected by the faculty and students 
participating in the course. May be repeated for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: at least 15 units of anthropology and consent of adviser. Student selection of an 
individual research project involving either library or fieldwork. There are conferences with the 
adviser as necessary, and the work results in one or more papers. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Seminar: Methodology of Anthropological Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 202, 401 and consent of instructor. Examination, analysis and evaluation 
of the contemporary methodological spectrum in anthropology and of new trends in research 
planning and implementation. Consideration and critique of specific cases involving differing 
research designs. 

502 Contemporary Theory in Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 480 or consent of instructor. Critique of the basic assumptions and 
theoretical positions of leading contemporary anthropologists. 

504 Seminar: Selected Topics in Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisites: completion of undergraduate major in anthropology and/or graduate standing or 
consent of instructor. The topic chosen and a general outline of the seminar will be announced 
by the Department of Anthropology to graduate students in Anthropology and circulated to other 
potentially interested departments. May be repeated. 

505 Seminar: Phonological Analysis (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 505) 

507 Seminar: Morpho-syntax (3) 

(Same as Linguistics 507 

508 Modern Theories of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Anthropology 507 or Foreign Languages 507 or Linguistics 507 or consent of instructor. 
Speech 404 and Anthropology 410 recommended but not required. Intensive and practical study 
of contemporary theories of grammar, with special emphasis on transformational, generative, 
logical and electromechanical bases and techniques of utterance analysis. (Same as Linguistics 
508) 

550 Seminar in Problems in the Teaching of Anthropology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Discussion of a variety of methods and materials for the teaching 
of anthropology at primary, secondary, and undergraduate college levels. 

592 Field Methods in Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Anthropology 505 and 507 or consent of instructor. Methods of analysis and descrip- 
tion of language structures. Data elicited from informants will be analyzed and described. 
Controlled study of a live informant's language. (Same as Linguistics 592) 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. The writing of a thesis based on original 
field research, library study or an educational project and its analysis and evaluation. May be 
repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department. Individual research on either a field or a library study, with 
conferences with a project adviser as necessary, and resulting in one or more papers. May be 
repeated for credit. 


260 Biological Science 

ASTRONOMY 

(Offered by the Department of Physics and the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 
See departmental descriptions for the following courses: 

Physics 

300 Introduction to Astronomy (4) 

415 Astrophysics (3) 

Earth Science 

350 General Astronomy (4) 

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

FACULTY 
Donald Bright 
Department Chairman 

Phillip Adams, Natalie Barish, L. Jack Bradshaw, Bayard Brattstrom, jack Burk, Calvin Davenport, 
Linda Fagan, Ted Hanes, Michael Horn, Claris Jones, Charles Lambert, Miles McCarthy,* Lonnie 
McClanahan, Kenneth McWilliams, Steven Murray, Marvin Rosenberg, Alvin Rothman, James 
Smith, Donald Sutton, George Turner, David Walkington, Joel Weintraub, Jerome Wilson 

PART-TfME (Special Lecturers in Medical Technology) 

Norman Cadman; Ernest Courier; Margaret Gilbertson; Shinichi Hamashige; Thomas Jones; Thomas 
Johnson; Don Miyada; Jay Palmer; Charlene Rubey; Lorin Spencer. 

The Department of Biological Science offers a program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Biological 
Science for students preparing to enter graduate and professional schools, for those preparing to 
teach, and for those preparing for careers in industry and government service. 

It is the conviction of the faculty In biological science that the purposes of all these students can 
best be served by building their curricula on a core of courses fundamental to the science of biology. 
This core curriculum includes biological principles, ecology, genetics, microbiology and molecular 
biology. 

In considering the curricula beyond this core of subjects, the faculty has agreed that the interest and 
goals of individual students can best be satisfied through individual counseling rather than through 
prescribed programs. After discussion with their advisers, students will elect those upper division 
courses which will satisfy their individual Interests and professional goals. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree in biological sciences, students must have a C average in all 
required related courses. No credit toward the major will be allowed for biological science courses 
in which a grade D Is obtained. 

Advanced students will be permitted to enroll in Biological Science 480, Advanced Topics in Biology, 
and Biological Science 499, Independent Study. All full-time upper division students are expected 
to attend the departmental seminars. 

The Department of Biological Science also offers a curriculum for students majoring in other fields 
who wish to minor In biology. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE 

One hundred twenty-four units including general education (see page 67), foreign language, 36 units 
in biology courses, and supporting courses in physical sciences and mathematics. The supporting 
courses must include one year of inorganic college chemistry including qualitative analysis with 
laboratory, two semesters of organic chemistry with laboratory, one semester of college calculus, 
and one year of college physics with laboratory. % An emphasis in medical technology is available 
to students majoring in biological science. Those who are interested in this emphasis should com- 
plete the core requirements plus Chemistry 420 and select their 14 units of electives from the 
following: Biological Science 423, 242, 445 and 462 

• University administrative officer 

t Those students seeking careers in biology at the Ph.D. level and careers in medicine should take a full year of organic chemistry, 
a year of analytical geometry and calculus, quantitative chemistry and laboratory, and obtain a proficiency in one nwdern foreign 
language or advanced courses in computational sciences. 


Biological Science 261 

Minimum Course Requirements for the Major X 


Lower division: Units Units 

141 Principles of Botany 4 

161 Principles of Zoology 4 


8 8 

Upper division: 

Biological Science 


305 Molecular Biology 4 

312 Genetics Lecture 3 

316 Principles of Ecology 3 

320 General Microbiology 4 

Electives — 14 units, of which four must be 
outside area of emphasis 14 


28 28 
36 


Minimum Requirements for Biological Science Minor X 


Biological Science 

141, 161 Principles 8 

404 Evolution or 

312 Genetics or 31 3 Human Genetics....; 3 

320 General Microbiology 4 

361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology 4 

Electives 4 


23 


MASTER OF ARTS IN BIOLOGY 

The program for this degree is based on the assumption that modern science necessitates broad 
preparation through the master's level of training. It permits breadth of preparation and at the same 
time concentration in an area such as botany, microbiology or zoology. In design it offers sufficient 
breadth and depth to strengthen the student's academic understanding and improve his competence 
for (a) advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree in biological science, (b) teaching at 
all levels — elementary, secondary, and community college, (c) participating in research programs, 
(d) participating in various field service and conservation positions with both the state and national 
governments, (e) entering the field of public health service, and (f) technological work in the health 
sciences. An M.A. in Biology is available to students who are planning technological work in a clinical 
laboratory through the medical biology concentration. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to classification in the M.A. In Biology program are as follows: 

1. A B.A. in Biological Science at Cal State Fullerton or other accredited institution with a grade- 
point average of 3.0 in biological science and a CPA of 2.5 in the related sciences of mathemat- 
ics, chemistry and physics. 

2. A study plan prepared In conference with the thesis adviser and submitted to the departmental 
graduate committee. 

3. Acceptance by a thesis adviser. 

Students with limited subject or grade deficiencies may be considered for admission to the program 
upon completion of nine units of postgraduate studies in biology, mathematics, chemistry or physics, 
with a CPA of 3.0. These courses will be selected in conference with the thesis adviser. Students 

t Those students seeking careers in biology at the Ph.D. level and careers in medicine should take a full year of organic chemistry, 
a year of analytical geometry and calculus, and quantitative chemistry with laboratory, and obtain a proficiency in one nwclern 
foreign language or advanced courses in computational sciences. 


907—4 I 310 


262 Biological Science 

should complete the classification step as soon as they are eligible, since no more than nine units 
of graduate work taken before classification can be included on the study plan for the Master of Arts 
degree. 

Advancement to candidacy for the M.A. in Biology will be granted after: 

1. Completing 12 units of coursework on the study plan with a CPA of 3.0. 

2. Thesis program selected and approved by student's thesis committee. 

3. Approval by departmental graduate committee upon recommendation from the thesis adviser 
and committee. 

Study Plan 

A student who meets the prerequisites may apply for classified graduate status. He must file a study 
plan including 30 units of adviser-approved graduate work, at least 15 of which must be at the 
500-level. All study plans must include Biological Science 580, Advanced Graduate Topics in Biology, 
and Biological Science 598, Thesis, and at least one departmental seminar. Six units must be outside 
the principal area. Further electives may be possible. Required is a thesis or a published paper, or 
a paper accepted for publication, acceptable to the adviser and committee, covering a research 
problem. A final oral examination on the student's research is also required. 

The program of study for the medical technology concentration will include the general require- 
ments as shown above with the following modifications: the study plan must include adequate 
coursework in the paramedical sciences; and Biological Science 514A,B,C,D,E (taken at an affiliated 
hospital laboratory school). 

Supervising the work of graduate students requires the personal attention of advisers. To insure that 
advisers are available for new graduate students, it is highly recommended that a graduate student 
complete the requirements for graduation within three years after classification. 

Students who are graduate assistants should complete the classification step either prior to appoint- 
ment or during their first semester of appointment. They must become classified before being 
reappointed. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should consult the chairman of the Biological 
Science Department, or the graduate program adviser of the Biological Science Department. See also 
'The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


BIOLOGICAL SCIENCE COURSES 

101 Elements of Biology (5) 

An introduction to basic concepts in the study of living organisms and to the characteristics of the 
natural environment. (3 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

102 Crisis Biology (3) 

Presents to the student basic biological knowledge necessary for understanding our current environ- 
mental problems. With this information the ecology of man and his ecosystem is analyzed and 
crisis areas discussed. 

141 Principles of Botany (4) 

Emphasis will be placed on the dynamic aspects of botany although the traditional areas of mor- 
phology and classification will not be neglected. Required of all biology majors. (2 hours lecture, 
6 hours laboratory) 

161 Principles of Zoology (4) 

An introduction to the principles of animal biology with special reference to the structure, classifica- 
tion, phylogeny, physiology, behavior and ecology of animals. Required of all biology majors. 
(2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

267 Insects and Man (3) 

Insect biology and ecology; the effects of insects upon civilization past and present; control of insects 
and effects upon the environment; and the superiority of insects. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 


51S-4 I 33B 


Biological Science 263 


305 Molecular Biology (4) 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology; prior completion or concurrent enrollment in the second 
semester of organic chemistry. An introduction to the physical and chemical aspects of biological 
science including macromolecular synthesis and function as well as the biochemistry of subcellu- 
lar activities. Topics include studies of modern data-gathering methods, organelle structure and 
function, bioenergetics, protein biosynthesis, and gene function at the molecular level. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

312 Genetics Lecture (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or consent of instructor. The general principles and modern 
developments in the study of heredity. Course designed for biology majors: nonmajors see Bio 
Sci 313. 

312L Genetics Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312. The use of a variety of organisms and methods for exploring basic principles 
of genetics. (3 hours laboratory) 

313 Human Genetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 101 or equivalent. Principles of heredity with emphasis on methods of analysis, 
on interaction of genes and environment, and on gene populations in humans. (Same as An- 
thropology 313) 

316 Principles of Ecology (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or consent of instructor. A community approach to plant 
and animal systems. Environmental factors, biological cycles, community types and contempo- 
rary environmental problems are discussed. Students are provided with background for the 
advanced ecology courses. (3 hours lecture) 

316L Principles of Ecology Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 316 (can be enrolled concurrently). Laboratory and field techniques used in 
ecological studies are taught. Student projects and one or more field trips required. (3 hours 
laboratory) 

318 Marine Biology (4) 

Prerequisite: one semester of college biology or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Physical and 
chemical aspects of the ocean as a background for the study of marine organisms and habitats, 
including food cycles, communities, identification, ecology, methods of collecting and preserving 
local marine algae, invertebrates, and fish. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory or fieldwork) 

320 General Microbiology (4) 

Prerequisites: one semester of college biology and one year of college chemistry, or consent of 
instructor. An introduction to the study of the morphology, growth, physiology and genetics of 
bacteria and other microorganisms. A consideration of the role of microorganisms as agents of 
change in natural processes. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

344 Plant Morphology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or consent of instructor. A study of the modern concepts of plant morpholo- 
gy, including biochemical and morphogenetic considerations. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours labora- 
tory) 

352 Plants, Man and Life (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or consent of instructor. An examination of man's dependence upon and 
economic interest in plants throughout the world. Includes a discussion of the domestication of 
plants and the origin of agriculture. (3 hours lecture) 

352L Plants, Man and Life Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141, 452 or consent of instructor (may be taken concurrently). Includes a 
discussion of the manufacture and use of economically important plant derivatives. Many of 
these products will be manufactured and utilized as a portion of this course. (3 hours laboratory) 

361 Mammalian Anatomy and Physiology (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or consent of instructor. Study of the structure and function 
of the human organism. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

401 Biogeography (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or consent of instructor. A study of the present day 
distribution of plants and animals based upon classification, fossil records, morphology, geogra- 
phy and consideration of current theories. (3 hours lecture) 


Sl»-^ 1 370 


264 Biological Science 

403 Biosystematics (4) 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology, and Bio Sci 316 or 404 and consent of instructor. An 
introduction to the principles and techniques of biosystematics, including evolutionary mech- 
anisms, the species concept, taxonomic procedures and nomenclature. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

404 Evolution (3) 

Prerequisite: one semester of college biology or zoology or consent of instructor. A study of 
evolution, including the history of evolutionary thought; origin of universe, earth and life; geologi- 
cal and paleontological history of the earth; evidences for evolution derived from comparative 
anatomy, embryology, genetics, zoogeography; mechanisms of evolution. 

404L Evolution Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 404 (may be taken concurrently). (3 hours laboratory) 

405 Developmental Biology (4) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305 or consent of instructor. Recommended either Bio Sci 312 or 464. Molecu- 
lar and cellular processes involved in the development of organisms. The following areas will be 
considered in some depth: oogenesis, fertilization, cytokinesis-morphogenetic movements, nu- 
cleocytoplasmic interactions, genetic control of growth, differentiation and metamorphosis. (2 
hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory — discussion) 

406 Biometry (4) 

Prerequisite: Math 120, 130, or 150A, upper division standing in biological sciences. Introduction to 
experimental design, interpretation, and practical application of statistics to biological problems. 
(3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

410 General Cell Physiology (4) 

Prerequisites: one year of college biology and one semester of organic chemistry or consent of 
instructor. Characteristics of life at the cellular level; processes by which the cell obtains energy 
and material and forms new cell substances; control of these processes by the cell; organization 
of structures and enzyme systems within the cell. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

412 Population Genetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 312 or 313. Theory and literature of genetic change in populations, primarily 
one-locus: maintenance of genetic variability, inbreeding, drift, migration and selection treated 
singly and in combination. Estimation of genetic parameters. (3 hours lecture) 

413 Molecular Genetics (3) (Formerly 513) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 312, 305 and Chem 301 A,B. The organization, replication and function of the 
genetic material and informational macromolecules in organisms from the viruses to the higher 
plants and animals. Topics include: chromosomal structure and function, recombination, muta- 
genesis, genetic coding, protein synthesis and genetic aspects of development. (3 hours lecture) 

413L Molecular Genetics Laboratory (1) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 312, 320 and concurrent enrollment in Bio Sci 413. Designed to give 
experience in the basic techniques of molecular genetics, Including Isolation, characterization 
and function of the information macromolecules. (3 hours laboratory) 

416 Limnology-Fresh Water Ecology (4) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141, 161, and Chem 101 B. Comparative physical, chemical and biological 
characteristics of inland waters and estuaries. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

417 General Oceanography (3) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141 and 161, and Chem 101 A,B (may be concurrent). Physics 21 1. Introduction 
to oceanography including the study of the extent of the oceans; the chemical nature of the sea; 
marine geology; causes and effects of currents and tides; and interrelationships of plants and 
animal life. 

418 Biological Oceanography (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 417. Biological factors of the marine environment; physiological and ecological 
relationships; methods of sampling, identification and analysis. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours labora- 
tory) 

419 Marine Ecology (4) 

Prerequisites: upper division or graduate standing in biological sciences, and successful completion 
of Bio Sci 418 or 446 or 461. A course In the fundamentals of ecology embracing the aspects 
of the interrelations of organisms and their environment with emphasis on productivity, popula- 
tion dynamics, behavior and biological associations. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 


Biological Science 265 


423 Pathogenic Microbiology (4) 

Prerequisite: one semester of microbiology or bacteriology. Study of the biology of infectious 
disease: mechanisms of microbial pathogenicity; host defenses; mode of action of antibiotics and 
other antimicrobial agents; characteristics of specific pathogenic bacteria, fungi and viruses. (2 
hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

424 Immunology (4) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 320 and Chem 301 A, or consent of instructor. A study of the cellular and 
molecular nature of the immune process. Emphasis is placed on the nature of antibodies and 
antigens, their role in immunity and the specificity of their reactions. Other topics, such as 
transplantation, immuno-chemistry and the immunology of neoplastic disease are discussed. The 
laboratory is designed to give the student a basic knowledge of the techniques of modern 
immunology. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

426 General Virology (2) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 305, 312 and 320. A comparison of bacterial, animal and plant viruses. A 
detailed study of viral structure and host-virus interaction in the viral replication process. 

426L General Virology Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: prior completion or concurrent enrollment in Bio Sci 426. Experimental methods for 
studying bacterial and animal viruses, including techniques for growth and titration of infectious 
viral units and physical characterization of virus structures. (6 hours laboratory) 

439 Microbial Ecology (4) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 316 and one semester of microbiology or bacteriology. The interaction of 
microbes and their environment; the influence of physical and chemical factors on the distribu- 
tion and activities of microbial populations; the effects of microbes on the living and nonliving 
environment. Basic principles of microbial enrichment, selection and succession. On completion 
of the basic experiments each student will select and perform a field and laboratory study in 
microbial ecology. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

441 Plant Taxonomy (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the study of classification and 
evolution of vascular plants with an emphasis on the flowering plants. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

443 Plant Ecology (4) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 31 6 and 441 or consent of instructor. A study of environmental factors and their 
effect upon plants and their distribution. Includes field experience and a survey of plant ecologi- 
cal literature. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory; field trips required) 

444 Plant Physiology (4) 

Prerequisites: Bio Sci 141 or equivalent and one semester of organic chemistry or consent of 
instructor. A study of plant growth, nutrition, food synthesis, and metabolism. (2 hours lecture, 
6 hours laboratory) 

446 Phycology (4) (Formerly Algology) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 141 or consent of instructor. Biological aspects of marine and freshwater algae 
with an emphasis on comparative development, morphology, taxonomy and ecology. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

460 Protozoology (4) 

Prerequisites: the student should have had general biology and zoology. For portions of the course 
an understanding of cellular physiology would be helpful. The biology of microbial acellular 
animals will be considered in lecture/discussion, primarily physiology, ecology, evolution and 
behavior. In the laboratory the emphasis will be on taxonomy, systematics and morphology. The 
student will be expected to participate in field trips. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or 
fieldwork) 

461 Invertebrate Zoology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 161, or a year of college biology or consent of instructor. Evolution, classifica- 
tion, physiological adaptations, and biology of invertebrate animals. Includes dissection, identifi- 
cation and observation of living animals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory, or fieldwork) 

462 Parasitology (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of general biology or consent of instructor. A consideration of the symbiotic 
relationships existing at all levels of animal organization. Emphasis on the natural history, biology, 
physiology, ecology and laboratory recognition of symbiotic organisms. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory) 


266 Biological Science 

463 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (4) 

Prerequisite: one semester of general zoology or biology or consent of instructor. A comparative 
study of the chordates, with emphasis on morphology and evolution of various organ systems 
from fish through mammals. Includes comparative dissection of numerous vertebrates. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

464 Embryology (4) 

Prerequisite; a year course in general zoology or biology or consent of instructor. Study of develop- 
ment from gametogenesis through organogenesis. Laboratory work includes a study of selected 
vertebrate and invertebrate embryos. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

465 Animal Ecology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 316. A study of the factors that affect the distribution and abundance of animals. 
Emphasis on field techniques, statistical applications, and theoretical approaches. (2 hours 
lecture, 6 hours laboratory; one or more weekend trips per semester required) 

466 Animal Behavior (3) 

Prerequisite: one year of college biology or consent of instructor. An introduction to the current 
problems In animal behavior including sensory capacities, orientation, innate and learned pat- 
terns, and social behavior of invertebrates and vertebrates. (3 hours lecture) 

467 Entomology (4) 

Prerequisite: Bio Sci 161, or a year of college biology or consent of instructor. Anatomy, physiology, 
evolution, and biology of insects and other terrestrial arthropods. Laboratory includes detailed 
dissection, collection, identification, and observation of living arthropods. (2 hours lecture, and 
6 hours laboratory or fieldwork) 

468 Comparative Animal Physiology (4) 

Prerequisites: principles of zoology, Chem 1 01 A, 1 01 B, and organic chemistry. A comparative survey 
of organ systems and physiological processes among invertebrate and vertebrate animals. (2 
hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

469 Hematology (3) 

Prerequisites; upper division standing and Chem 301 A or equivalent. Theoretical and practical study 
of blood and hemopoiesis. Study of the functions and morphology of blood components in 
healthy and diseased states; hematological tests and factors affecting test reliability are included 
in the laboratory. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

474 Natural History of the Vertebrates (4) 

Prerequisite: one semester of college biology or zoology, or consent of instructor. Natural history 
and ecology of the vertebrates including behavior, temperature and water regulation, migration 
and homing, echolocatlon, diving adaptations, venoms, color and coloration. Laboratory and 
field emphasis on observation, identification, behavior, ecology and distribution of the verte- 
brates of California. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or fieldwork; one or more weekend trips 
per semester required) 

475 Ichthyology (4) 

Prerequisite: a year of college biology, or consent of instructor. The biology, structure, physiology, 
ecology, evolution and economic importance of fishes. Laboratory and field work in identifica- 
tion, collection, and natural history of fishes. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory or fieldwork 
per week; one or more weekend trips per semester required) 

476 Herpetology (4) 

Prerequisite: one semester of college biology, or zoology, or consent of instructor. The biology, 
structure, physiology, ecology, distribution, evolution, and behavior of amphibians and reptiles. 
Laboratory and fieldwork in identification, collection, study of amphibians and reptiles including 
studies on reptile and amphibian behavior and physiology. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours laboratory 
or fieldwork per week; one or more weekend trips per semester required) 

478 Mammalogy (4) 

Prerequisites: one semester of college biology, or zoology, or consent of instructor. The biology, 
structure, physiology, ecology, distribution, evolution and behavior of mammals. Laboratory and 
fieldwork in identification collection, and natural history of mammals. (2 hours lecture, 6 hours 
laboratory or fieldwork per week; one or more weekend trips per semester required) 

480 Advanced Topics in Undergraduate Biology (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division students majoring in biology with consent of instructor. Designed to 
consider current topics, updating of concepts, recent advances and unification of the principles 
of biology. May be repeated for credit. 


Biological Science 267 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to qualified undergraduate students by consent of instructor with whom the student wishes 
to pursue independent study in biology. May be repeated for credit. 

502 Seminar in Biology (3) 

Open to graduate students only by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

503 Seminar in Modern Concepts in Biology (3) 

Investigation of major integrative themes in biological sciences and explore the ways in which these 
permeate all levels of biological thought. May be repeated. 

505 Seminar in Molecular Biology (3) 

Selected advanced topics in molecular biology, such as macromolecular structure, thermodynamics 
in biological systems and molecular regulation of cellular activities. Open to graduate students 
and other qualified students by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

510 Seminar in Physiology (3) 

Selected topics within the area of physiology. Open to graduate students and other qualified students 
by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

512 Seminar in Genetics (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of genetics. Open to graduate students and to other 
qualified students only by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

514A Medical Hematology (1) 

The study of normal and diseased cells. Includes theory and practice in hematological methods. 

( Lecture / laboratory ) 

514B Medical Biochemistry (2) 

The chemistry of the body and body fluids in health and in disease. Includes basic and advanced 
techniques of biochemical and microscopic analyses. (Lecture/ laboratory) 

514C Blood Bank and Immunology (1) 

Blood bank and pretransfusion procedures and problems; serological diagnosis. (Lecture/ labora- 
tory) 

514D Medical Bacteriology (1) 

The pathogenesis, diagnosis, and control of bacterial diseases. Includes the isolation and identifica- 
tion of pathogenic bacteria. (Lecture/ laboratory) 

514E Medical Mycology and Parasitology (1) 

The photogenesis and control of fungus and parasitic diseases. Includes procedures for the identifica- 
tion of fungi and parasites. (Lecture/ laboratory) 

514F Topics in Medical Biology (1) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of department. Selected areas of current research 
interest in medical biology will be discussed. May be repeated. (Seminar) 

517 Seminar in Ecology (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of ecology. Open to graduate students and to other 
qualified students only by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

518 Seminar in Marine Science (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of marine science. Open to graduate students and 
to other qualified students, only by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

520 Seminar in Microbiology (3) 

Selected topics in the areas of microbiology. Open to graduate students and other qualified students 
by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

524 Seminar in Immunology (3) 

Selected topics in immunochemistry, immunobiology and medical immunology. Open to graduate 
students and other qualified students by consent of instructor. May be repeated. 

540 Seminar in Botany (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of botany. Open to graduate students and to other 
qualified students by consent of the instructor. May be repeated. 

560 Seminar in Zoology (3) 

Selected advanced topics within the general area of zoology. Open to graduate students and to other 
qualified students by consent of the instructor. May be repeated. 

580 Advanced Topics in Graduate Biology (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing in biology with the consent of instructor. Designed to consider 
current research topics, experimental design and problem solving in biological systems. May be 
repeated for credit. 


268 Chemistry 

598 Thesis (1-3) 

May be repeated for a maximum of 6 units of credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3)) 

Open to graduate students only by consent of instructor with whom the student wishes to pursue 
independent study in biology. May be repeated for credit. 


MEDICAL BIOLOGY COURSES 

(See departmental course descriptions for the courses listed below) 

Biological Science 

423 Pathogenic Microbiology (4) 

424 Immunology (4) 

426 General Virology (2) 

426L General Virology Laboratory (2) 

445 Mycology (4) 

462 Parasitology (4) 

468 Comparative Animal Physiology (4) 

469 Hematology (4) 

514A3,C,D,E,F Medical Biology (6) 

560 Seminar in Zoology (Hematology) (3) 

598 Thesis (3) 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Chemistry 

312 Quantitative Chemistry (4) 

420 Clinical Chemistry (4) 

421A,B General Biochemistry (3^) 

42^A,B General Biochemistry Laboratory (2,2) 


OCEANOGRAPHY COURSES 

(See departmental course descriptions for the courses listed below) 

Biological Science 
325 Marine Biology (4) 

420 General Oceanography (3) 

421 Biological Oceanography (4) 

426 Marine Ecology (4) 

520 Seminar in Marine Science (3) 

Earth Science 

110 Introduction to Physical Oceanography (3) 

401 Studies in Geoscience, Geofluids (2-6) 

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY 

FACULTY 
Carl Prenziow 
Department Chairman 

David Bailey, Robert Belloli, John Bryden, Fred Dorer, j. Milton Harris, Gene Hiegel, Harvey Janota, 
William Langworthy,* Frances Mathews, Andrew Montana, L. Donald Shields,* Robert Spenger, 
Carl Wamser, Bruce Weber, Patrick Wegner, W. Van Willis, Dorothy Pan Wong 


University administrative officer 





Chemistry 271 


The Department of Chemistry is on the approved list of the American Chemical Society. 

The curriculum is planned to provide thorough instruction in the basic principles and concepts of 
chemistry for students who will (1) advance to graduate work in chemistry or biochemistry; (2) 
teach in the science programs of secondary schools; (3) seek employment in industry or govern- 
ment; (4) advance to medical or dental training or (5) pursue a chemistry minor in support of other 
science majors such as physics or biology. 

To qualify for a baccalaureate degree in chemistry, students must have a C average in all courses 
required for the majors including those in the related sciences. A reading proficiency in one modern 
foreign language (Russian, German, French) is required. This requirement may be met by taking 
either four semesters of university or university foreign language or a course in scientific French, 
German or Russian. Under unusual circumstances the requirement may be met by examination upon 
approval by the department chairman. Examinations will be given in October and March of each 
academic year. For details of examination procedure, apply at the department office. A reading 
comprehension of a second modern foreign language is recommended for students planning gradu- 
ate study leading to the Ph.D. degree. 

No credit toward the major will be allowed for specific major courses in which a grade of D is 
obtained. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN CHEMISTRY 

The basic chemistry curriculum contains the minimum requirements for a B.A. in Chemistry and is 
suitable for those students who are candidates for professional schools as medicine, dentistry, etc. 
and secondary education. Chemistry majors intending to work in chemical industry or continue with 
graduate work in chemistry would generally take 6-10 additional units of upper division chemistry 
electives. Students may elect a curriculum based upon the recommendations of the Committee for 
Professional Training of Chemists of the American Chemical Society and upon completion of this 
program receive a Certificate of the American Chemical Society. This curriculum is the basic 
curriculum plus Instrumental Analysis (Chem 41 1 ) and at least one upper division chemistry elective. 
Chemistry students interested in biochemistry may elect the biochemistry emphasis. This program 
differs from the basic chemistry curriculum and may be the chemistry program selected by those 
students who are candidates for professional schools in medicine, dentistry, etc. and graduate school 
in biochemistry or molecular biology. 

The chemistry curricula have been designed to give the student a full understanding of the fundamen- 
tal areas of chemistry and still allow him to tailor his program to his interests and goals. The student 
is urged to consult regularly with the chemistry faculty about his program. 


Basic Chemistry Curriculum * 

Required Courses in Chemistry Cnits Units 

General Chemistry (101 A, B) 10 

Organic Chemistry (305A,B) 10 

Quantitative Chemistry (312) 4 

Physical Chemistry (371 A, B) b 

Inorganic Chemistry (425)’ ^ 

Physical Chemistry Lab (441)’ ^ 

Senior Research (495 or 499)’ ^ 

Total Units 

Related areas 

Physics (225A,B,C, 226 A,B,C)’ 12 

Mathematics (150A,B, 250) 12 

Biology ^ 

Total Units 28 

Total units in science and mathematics 08 


• Under unusual circumstances and with the approval of the department chairman, particularly when a student decides to become 
^ a chemistry major in his sophomore or junior year, the minimum requirements for a chemistry degree can differ from the above. 
Requirements differ for the biochemistry emphasis. 


272 Chemistry 

General education units, not including 13 units of physical science, mathematics (see 


general education requirements, page 67 32 

Elective units * 24 

Total units for the B.A. in Chemistry 124 

Chemistry Curriculum with a Biochemistry Emphasis * 

Required Courses in Chemistry Units Units 

General Chemistry (101 A,B) 10 

Organic Chemistry (305A,B) ^ 10 

Quantitative Chemistry (312) 4 

Physical Chemistry (371 A,B) 6 

Biochemistry (423A,B, 422A,B) 10 

Senior Research (495 or 499) 2 

Total units 42 

Related areas (satisfies the general education requirement in natural science 
and mathematics) 

Physics (225A,B,C, 226A,B,C) ^ 12 

Mathematics (150A,B, 250) 12 

Biology^ 12 

Total units 36 

Total units in science and mathematics 78 

General education units, not including 13 units of science and mathematics 32 

Elective units 14 


Total units for the B.A. in Chemistry with biochemistry emphasis 


124 


MINOR IN CHEMISTRY 

A minimum of 24 acceptable units of chemistry, including 14 units of upper division chemistry 
courses, excluding independent study, are required for a chemistry minor. 


Suggested Eight Semester Program for a Majoi 
First Semester (Freshman) 

Units 


Chem 101 A Gen Chem 5 

Math 150A Anal Geo and Calc 4 

Eng 101 Composition and Lit 3 

Gen education courses 4 


in Chemistry 

Second Semester (Freshman) 

Units 


Chem lOlB Gen Chem 5 

Math 150B Anal Geo and Calc 4 

Physics 225A, 226A Fund Physics 4 

Eng 102 Lit and Composition 3 


16 


16 


Third Semester (Sophomore) 


Chem 305A Org Chem 5 

Math 250 Inter Calc 4 

Physics 225B, 226B Fund Physics 4 

Gen education courses 3 


16 


Fourth Semester (Sophomore) 


Chem 305B Org Chem 5 

Math 281 Lin Alg Dif Eq 3 

Physics 225C, 226C Fund Physics 4 

Bio Sci 4 


16 


^ Generally includes 6-10 units of upper division chemistry units. In some cases, a student may substitute biology, mathematics, or 
physics courses from an approved list for these upper division electives. 

• Under unusual circumstances and with the approval of the department chairman, particularly when a student decides to become 
a chemistry major in his sophomore or junior year, the minimum requirements for a chemistry degree can differ from the above. 

Students who are candidates for professional schools as medicine, dentistry, etc., or graduate school in biology may substitute 
Chemistry 301 A,B, 302A,B (8 units). This substitution is not preferable for students who are candidates for graduate school in 
chemistry or biochemistry. 

Students who are candidates for professional schools such as medicine, dentistry, etc., or graduate school in biology may substitute 
Physics 211A,B (8 units). This substitution is not preferable for students who are candidates for graduate school in chemistry 
or biochemistry. 

Includes 4 units of lower division biology and 8 units of upper division biology or related areas as approved by adviser. 


Fifth Semester (Junior) Units 

Chem 371 A Physical Chem 3 

Chem 312 Quant Chem 4 

General education courses 9 


16 

Seventh Semester (Senior) 


Chem (495 or 499) 2 

Chem 425 Inorg Chem 3 

Electives 11 


16 


Chemistry 273 


Sixth Semester (Junior) Units 

Chem 371 B Physical Chem 3 

Chem 441 Phys Chem Lab 3 

General education courses 6 

Electives 3 


15 

Eighth Semester (Senior) 


Chem 41 1 Instr Anal 4 

Chem 495 (or 499) 2 

Electives 8-10 


14-16 


Listed below are possible electives which would be available to the upper division student: 
Chem 403 Anal of Org Cmpds 
Chem 421 A,B Gen Biochem 
Chem 422A,B Gen Biochem Lab 
Chem 427 Prep Techniques 
Chem 431 Adv Org 
Chem 451 Quantum Chem 

Graduate chemistry courses 
Approved biology courses 
Approved mathematics courses 
Approved physics courses 


Suggested Eight Semester Program for a Major in Chemistry with a Biochemistry Emphasis 


First Semester (Freshman) 


Units 

Chem 101 A Gen Chem 5 

Math 150A Anal Geo and Calc 4 

Eng 101 Composition and Lit 3 

Biology 4-5 


16-17 


Second Semester (Freshman) 

Unit! 


Chem lOlB Gen Chem 5 

Math 150B Anal Geo and Calc 4 

Physics 225A, 226A Fund Physics 4 

Eng 102 Lit and Composition 3 


15 


Third Semester (Sophomore) 


Chem 305A Org Chem 5 

Math 250 Inter Calc 4 

Physics 225B, 226B Fund Physics 4 

General education courses 3 


Fourth Semester (Sophomore) 


Chem 305B Org Chem 5 

Physics 225C 226C Fund Physics 4 

Bio Sci 3-4 

General education courses 3 


16 


15-16 


274 Chemistry 


Fifth Semester (Junior) Units 

Chem 371 A Physical Chem 3 

Chem 312 Quant Chem 4 

General education courses 9 


16 

Seventh Semester (Senior) 


Chem 423 A, 422 A Molec Biochem 5 

General education courses 4 

Electives 6 


15 


Sixth Semester (Junior) Units 

Chem 371 B Physical Chem 3 

Biology 3 

General education courses 9 


15 

Eighth Semester (Senior) 


Chem 423B, 422B Molec Biochem 5 

Chem 495 (or Chem 499) 2 

General education courses 9 


16 


MASTER OF ARTS IN CHEMISTRY 

The master of Arts in Chemistry is designed to qualify students for more advanced work in chemistry, 
to provide preparation which will lead to responsible positions In industrial or government research 
and development laboratories, and to provide preparation for the effective teaching of chemistry 
in the high schools and community colleges. 

The program provides fundamental courses at a level and depth commensurate with those taken 
during the first year of a doctoral program and provides an introduction to research and research 
methods. 

Prerequisites 

Students to be admitted to the program must: 

1. Meet the general prerequisites for graduate work formulated and recommended by the 
university. 

2. Have a baccalaureate degree from an accredited Institution. 

3. Have an undergraduate major in chemistry with a grade-point average of 3.0 or better in 
chemistry courses taken, and a 2.5 CPA in all other previous university work. 

4. Have had enough specialized elective courses In chemistry to give a minimum of 24 units of 
upper division chemistry. Including at least one course which has three years of chemistry as 
a prerequisite. 

The major in chemistry should have included In the undergraduate program a year-course in each 
of the following fields: general chemistry, analytical chemistry, organic chemistry, and physical 
chemistry. The course in physical chemistry should have included laboratory work. 

Qualifying examinations, administered by the department three times a year, are required of all 
students entering the program. Qualifying examinations are required in the areas of physical and 
organic chemistry, plus two from the areas of analytical, inorganic or biochemistry. The results of 
these examinations will be used to advise the student In developing his study plan. A student may 
be classified with certain subject deficiencies, but such deficiencies must be removed before ad- 
vancement to candidacy either ( 1 ) by committee-approved coursework with a grade of B or better, 
or (2) by passing the next qualifying examination. Proficiency in reading chemical literature in one 
approved foreign language (e.g., German, French or Russian) must be demonstrated before ad- 
vancement to candidacy. 

Study Plan 

The degree program consists of 30 units of committee-approved course work completed with a 
minimum grade-point average of 3.0, including at least 15 units of 500-level chemistry courses. 
The following courses are required of all students: 


Units 

Chem 505 Seminar in Chemistry 2 

Chem 599 Independent Graduate Research 3 (minimum) 

Chem 598 Thesis 1-2 


Chemistry 275 

Each student is also required to take two SOO-level courses other than those listed above (minimum 
total of 15 units 5(X)-level required). 

In order to insure sufficient breadth and background, each student is required to take one course 
from each of the following groups //he has not passed (with a B or better) equivalent courses as 
an undergraduate. However, courses taken as an undergraduate cannot be applied to the 30 units 
required for graduation. 

Units 


Group I — Chem 41 1 Instrumental Analysis 4 

Chem 425 Inorganic Chemistry 3 

Croup II — Chem 423A Molecular Biochemistry 3 

Chem 431 Advanced Organic Chemistry 3 

Croup III — Chem 451 Quantum Chemistry 3 

Chem 450 Advanced Physical Chemistry 4 


Elective courses, to be taken with the approval of the adviser, must include a minimum of six units 
outside the student's area of specialization and a minimum of nine units (in addition to the minimum 
of three units of Chem 599, as above) in one of the following areas of specialization, including related 
areas as approved by the committee. 

1. Analytical chemistry 

2. Biochemistry 

3. Inorganic chemistry 

4. Organic chemistry 

5. Physical chemistry 

For further details or advisement, please refer to the graduate adviser of the Chemistry Department. 
See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


CHEMISTRY COURSES 

100 Introductory Chemistry (4) 

Prerequisite: one year of high school algebra. Fundamental principles of chemistry with emphasis 
placed on the chemistry of inorganic compounds. Does not apply as credit for majors in the 
physical or biological sciences or for minors in the physical sciences. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

101 A,B General Chemistry (5^) 

Prerequisites: high school algebra and either high school chemistry or high school physics or 
Chemistry 100. High school physics and trigonometry strongly recommended. Intended for 
majors and minors in the physical and biological sciences. 

A — The fundamental principles of chemistry including stoichiometry, gas laws, solid and liquid 
states, changes of state, modern atom concepts, chemical bonding and chemical equilibrium with 
emphasis on quantitative acid-base chemistry. Laboratory: experiments applying elementary 
physical chemistry and volumetric quantitative analysis. (3 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

B — Oxidation-reduction chemistry, introduction to chemical thermodynamics and chemical 
kinetics, discussions of the chemistry of representative and transition elements, and introductions 
to biochemistry, organic and nuclear chemistry. Laboratory: experiments concerning gravimetric 
and volumetric quantitative analysis, selected topics in qualitative analysis and inorganic prepara- 
tions. (3 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

105 General Chemistry for Engineers (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 101 A. Description the same as Chemistry 101 B. Open only to engineering 
majors. Not open to students with credit in Chemistry 101 B. 

201 Modern Physical Science (4) 

(See course description under Physical Science) 

205 Glassblowing (1) 

Elementary training in the manipulation of glass leading to the construction of scientific glass appara- 
tus. Enrollment limited with preference given to junior and senior physical science majors. (4 
hours laboratory) 


96T— 4 1 610 


276 Chemistry 

301A,B Organic Chemistry (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry lOlB or equivalent. Chemistry 301 B must involve concurrent enrollment in 
Chemistry 302 B or 302X. A course in organic chemistry designed for the non-chemistry major. 
Emphasis is placed on modern theories of structure and reaction mechanism. Recommended for 
biology majors and students planning to enter a paramedical profession. 

302A,B Organic Chemistry Laboratory (1,1) 

Chemistry 302A (3 hours laboratory) must be taken concurrently with Chemistry 301 A. Chemistry 
302B (3 hours laboratory) must be taken concurrently with Chemistry 301 B. A course designed 
to give training in the basic techniques of the organic chemistry laboratory, including synthesis 
of typical aliphatic and aromatic compounds. Students wishing to fulfill all of their organic 
chemistry laboratory requirement in a single semester should enroll in Chemistry 302X. 

302X Organic Chemistry Laboratory (2) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 301 A or equivalent. Chemistry 302X (6 hours laboratory) must be taken 
concurrently with 301 B. A course designed to give training in the basic techniques of the organic 
chemistry laboratory, including synthesis of typical aliphatic and organic compounds. 

305A,B Organic Chemistry (5,5) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry lOlB or equivalent. A comprehensive course in organic chemistry designed 
for the chemistry major. Emphasis in lecture and laboratory is placed upon modern theories of 
structure and reaction mechanism with applications of modern instrumental and spectroscopic 
methods. (3 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

309A,B Fundamentals of Physical Chemistry (2,2) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101 B, Mathematics 150B and one year of college physics. A short course 
in physical chemistry presenting topics in thermodynamics, kinetics, non-electrolyte and electro- 
lyte solution theory, changes of phase and related subjects with special applications to the life 
sciences. Does not fulfill major requirements for chemistry majors. (2 hours lecture) 

312 Quantitative Chemistry (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101A,B (grade C or better) and at least one semester of organic chemistry 
lecture and laboratory Physics 21 1 A,B or Physics 221 A,B strongly recommended. Modern analyt- 
ical chemistry including contemporary separation methods, nonaqueous quantitative chemistry, 
and introductions to instrumental methods of analysis in electrochemistry, absorption spectros- 
copy, and radiochemistry. (2 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

351 Introduction to Biochemistry (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 301 B and five units of biology. A survey of the chemistry and metabolism 
of proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, hormones, in plants, animals and microorganisms. (3 hours 
lecture discussion, 3 hours laboratory) 

371A,B Physical Chemistry (33) 

Prerequisites: Mathematics 250, one year of physics and Chemistry 101 B. Chemistry 312 recom- 
mended. Equivalent courses may be substituted. A study of the fundamental laws and theories 
of chemistry. Thermodynamics, solutions, chemical and phase equilibria, electrochemistry, trans- 
port phenomena, introduction to atomic and molecular structure, rotation and vibration spectros- 
copy, statistical mechanics, kinetics are the major topics discussed. Discussions with emphasis 
on the use of fundamental principles to solve problems. 

403 Analysis of Organic Compounds (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 305A,B and 312 or equivalents. Isolation and identification of organic 
compounds using chemical and instrumental techniques. (2 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours 
laboratory) 

411 Instrumental Analysis (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 312, 301 A,B, 371 A,B and one year of college physics. Advanced topics in 
absorption and emission spectroscopy, nuclear magnetic resonance, electron spin resonance, 
mass spectrometry, gas chromatography. X-ray methods, electrochemistry and radiochemistry. 
(2 hours lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

420 Clinical Chemistry (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 351 or equivalent. Principles of biochemistry and analytical methods applied 
to physiological fluids. This course cannot apply to the major in chemistry. 

421A3 General Biochemistry (3,3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 301 B or equivalent. Survey of major areas of biochemistry, including chemis- 
try and functions of compounds of biochemical interest. Course emphasizes bio-organic mech- 
anisms. Not applicable for a chemistry major. 


57S-4 1 635 


Chemistry TJl 


422A,B General Biochemistry Laboratory (2,2) 

Prerequisites: concurrent or prior enrollment in Chemistry 421 A, B or 423A,B. Laboratory designed 
to illustrate the chemistry and metabolism of carbohydrates, nucleic acids, lipids, and proteins, 
to introduce techniques of enzyme chemistry and isolation, and to introduce the student to 
research methods. (6 hours laboratory) 

423A,B Molecular Biochemistry (3,3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 305B, 312 and concurrent or prior registration in 371 A. Recommended for 
chemistry majors. Survey of major areas of biochemistry, with emphasis on the structural chemis- 
try and function of biomolecules, mechanisms of enzyme action and physical chemical appro- 
aches to the study of biopolymers and biochemical systems. Readings from current literature 
required. 

425 Inorganic Chemistry (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 101 A,B or equivalent and Chemistry 301 A,B and 371 A,B. A comprehensive 
Inorganic chemistry course with an introduction to modern theories of chemical bonding and 
structure. Theoretical treatments Include molecular orbital and ligand field theory with their 
extensions, coordination and transition metal chemistry, various aspects of nonmetal chemistry 
and a discussion of hydride properties. 

427 Preparative Techniques (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 312, 301 A,B and 425 (concurrent enrollment acceptable) or equivalents. 
Laboratory exercises using advanced techniques and modern methods for the preparation and 
identification of chemical compounds. Readings In the current literature required. 

431 Advanced Organic Chemistry (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 301 A,B, 371 A and 371 B. Theoretical aspects of organic chemistry with 
emphasis on the modern concepts of structure and chemical reactivity. 

441 Physical Chemistry Laboratory (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A, B. Laboratory exercises illustrating the physical principles of chemistry. 
(1 hour lecture discussion, 6 hours laboratory) 

450 Advanced Physical Chemistry (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A, B or equivalent. An advanced study of classical thermodynamics 
followed by an introductory study of statistical mechanics and chemical kinetics. 

451 Quantum Chemistry (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A,B. An Introduction to the application of quantum mechanics. Postulates 
and theories approximation methods, the electronic structure of atoms and periodic system, 
molecules and the chemical bond, and introduction to group theory. 

472 X>Ray Crystallography (4) 

Prerequisites: Physics 221 A,B, Mathematics 250, and Chemistry 301 A,B, or equivalent courses. 
Morphological crystallography, crystal symmetry and crystallographic groups. X-rays and X-ray 
diffraction, the recording and Interpretation of diffraction phenomena, and the analysis of crystal 
structures, including computer applications. (3 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

495 Senior Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: three one-year courses In chemistry and senior standing. Must have consent of 
suiaervising instructor before enrollment. Open only to students with a 3.0 grade point average 
in chemistry. An introduction to the methods of chemical research through a research project 
carried out under the supervision of one of the Chemistry Department faculty. May be repeated 
for credit. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: upper division standing and completion of two one-year courses in chemistry. Study 
of some special topic in chemistry, selected In consultation with the Instructor and carried out 
under his supervision. May be repeated for credit. 

505 Seminar (1-2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of department. Student presentations of recent contri- 
butions to the chemical literature. May be repeated for credit. 

511 Theory of Separations (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 312, 301 A, B, 371 A, B. The theory, application, and limitations of physical 
and chemical separation techniques. 

512 Electroanalytical Chemistry (4) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 312, 301 A, B, 371 A,B. Advanced topics in potentiometry, amperometry, 
electroanalysis, coulometry, conductometry, polarography, single and multiple sweep vol- 
tammetry, chronopotentlometry and chronoamperometry. 


278 Chemistry 

525 Radiochemistry (4) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 371 A, B. Introduction to the theory of nuclear properties and phenomena; 
their detection and measurement; application of their technology to chemical experimentation. 

528 Coordination Chemistry (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 425 or equivalent. A concise treatment of the structure and bonding in 
coordination compounds according to crystal field, molecular orbital, and ligand field theories 
is Included, as well as preparative methods and a survey of ligand substitution kinetics. The 
theoretical models will be related to spectral, thermodynamic, kinetic and redox properties. 
Biochemical and Industrial uses of coordination compounds will be discussed. 

531 Theoretical Organic Chemistry (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 431 and 550. The application of theoretical concepts to current topics of 
physical organic chemistry research. 

535 Organic Synthesis (3) 

Prerequisites: Chemistry 301 A,B or 305A,B and 371 A,B (concurrent enrollment acceptable). Meth- 
ods of synthetic organic chemistry and their application to construction of organic molecules. 
Recent developments covered. 

539 Chemistry of Natural Products (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 301 B. Selected topics from the chemistry of the alkaloids, terpenes, steroids 
and a variety of other natural products of plant and animal origin. Discussions included on the 
classification, structure elucidation, synthesis, biosynthesis and physiological activity of these 
compounds. 

540 Chemistry of Proteins and Nucleic Acids (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 421 B or 423B or consent of instructor. Chemical synthesis of mac- 
romolecules, physical and chemical methods of determining the primary, secondary and tertiary 
structure, theories of structural organization and macromolceular Interactions, macromolecular 
evolution. 

541 Enzyme Chemistry (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 421 B or 423B or consent of Instructor. Discussion of the structure and 
chemical modification of enzymes and mechanisms and kinetics of enzyme catalyzed reactions. 

542 Intermediary Metabolism (3) 

Prerequiste: Chemistry 421 B or 423B or consent of Instructor. A discussion of metabolic and biosyn- 
thetic pathways and physiological control mechanisms. 

551 Quantum Mechanics (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 451. Elementary applications. Perturbation theory, collision problems, rela- 
tivistic theory of the electron, theories of valence, complex compounds and complex crystals. 

555 Chemical Kinetics (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 450 or consent of Instructor. Analysis of reacting systems; theories of chemi- 
cal kinetics; discussion of gas phase, liquid phase and surface reactions including recent develop- 
ments. 

561 Statistical Thermodynamics (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 450 or equivalent. A study of statistical mechanics and its application to 
chemical problems. 

575 Theory of Spectroscopy (3) 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 451 or equivalent. Croup theory, symmetry mode, intensities and selection 
rules, selected topics from electronic spectra of atoms and molecules, UV, IR, NMR, ESR and 
Raman spectroscopy. 

580 Topics in Advanced Chemistry (1-6) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in chemistry. Selected areas of current research Interest in chemistry 
will be discussed. May be repeated for credit. 

598 Thesis (1-2) 

Prerequisites: an officially appointed thesis committee and advancement to candidacy. Guidance in 
the preparation of a project or thesis for the master's degree. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-6) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing in chemistry. May be repeated for credit. 


Chicano Studies 


279 


DEPARTMENT OF CHICANO STUDIES 

FACULTY 
Robert Serros 
Department Chairman 
Carlos Duron, Dagoberto Fuentes 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THE CHICANO STUDIES OPTION OF ETHNIC STUDIES 

This degree program is designed to provide an effective vehicle for meeting a variety of needs in 
contemporary higher education. These are extending opportunities for university education to 
students who have long been under-represented due to cultural differences between their experi- 
ences and the cultural emphasis of higher education; providing for personal consultation between 
faculty and students of diverse cultural backgrounds; revising curriculum and promoting research 
to give all students and faculty an understanding of the interaction of ethnic groups in past and 
contemporary civilizations; and conducting continuous research in innovative teaching methods and 
courses to create more effective means of teaching students in a culturally pluralistic environment. 

CHICANO STUDIES OPTION 

The required minimum for the major is 36 units: Chicano Studies 106, 102 * or 103 * and 200 and 
6 additional units from the lower division offerings and a minimum of 24 units in upper division 
courses. 

The purposes of the Chicano studies option are to provide a specialization in Chicano studies within 
the framework of a more generalized and comprehensive ethnic studies perspective; to provide 
greater flexibility and more electives within the ethnic studies program to meet the variety of needs 
and interests of the diverse group of students selecting this major; to acquaint students with the 
problems, successes, and failures of California's largest minority group; to help students understand 
the nature of contemporary ethnic and social turmoil and guide them into constructive modes of 
thought about current issues; to enable students to see the brown experience in America in a world 
setting; to enable students to lead more effective lives in a culturally pluralistic and rapidly changing 
society; and to prepare students to work more effectively in Spanish-speaking areas. 

Required 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

*102 Communication Skills (3) 

*103 Communication Skills (3) 

Core courses (9 units required) 

213 Spanish for the Spanish Speaking (3) 

214 Spanish for the Spanish Speaking (3) 

215 Chicano Creative Writing (3) 

21 8A Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

21 8B Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Lower division electives (3 units required): 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

120 Bilingual Oral Exprssion (3) 

237 Mexican and Chicano Literature in Translation (3) 

Upper division electives (a minimum of 24 upper division units from the following courses): 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

320 Chicano Art (3) 

• Students can be exempted from Chicano Studies 102 and/or 103 by an examination and/or the consent of department. 


280 Chicano Studies 

336 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

340 Sociology of the Chicano (3) 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and Aztian (3) 

411 Mexican Arts and Mexican Society (3) 

415 Chicano Music Appreciation (3) 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

421 Economics of the Chicano (3) 

430 Cancidn de la Raza (3) 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

433 Mexican Literature since 1940 (3) 

434 Counseling Chicano Students (3) 

435 Directed Research and Studies in Chicano Schools (3) 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

441 Religion in the Chicano Society (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

452 The Chicano and Nativism (3) 

453 Mexico since 1906 (3) 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

MINOR IN CHICANO STUDIES 

The minor in Chicano studies consists of 24 units in the following areas: 

Lower division 

106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

2(X) Chicano Movement (3) 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Upper division 

430 Cancio'n de la Raza (3) 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Approved electives 

Six units of approved coursework in upper-division Chicano studies to be selected with approval 
of an adviser. 


CHICANO STUDIES COURSES 

101 Introduction to Ethnic Studies (3) 

A survey of the basic concepts and problems involved in an examination of the perspective through 
which black and brown people have come to see themselves in terms of their own heroes, 
culture and contributions to societies in which they live and world society in general. 

102 Communication Skills (3) 

A methodical presentation of the basic communication skills emphasizing writing and communica- 
tion skills stressing the use of idioms, proper pronunciation, intonation and correct English 
patterns of thought. 

103 Communication Skills (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 102 or consent of department. A methodical presentation of the basic 
communication skills emphasizing writing and communication skills stressing the use of idioms, 
proper pronunication, intonation and correct English patterns of thought. 


Chicano Studies 281 


106 Introduction to Chicano Studies (3) 

A study of the role of the Chicano in the United States. Special emphasis on the Chicano's cultural 
values, social organization, urbanization patterns, and the problems In the area of education, 
politics and legislation. 

120 Bilingual Oral Expression (3) 

Recommended: Chicano Studies 102 and/or 103. Designed to train the bilingual Chicano in the 
process of oral expression in English and barrio Spanish. Pertinent topics will be selected in the 
areas of education, law enforecement and contemporary issues for bilingual oral expression. 

213 Spanish for the Spanish-Speaking (3) 

A methodical presentation of the Spanish language as it Is spoken in the United States today. The 
first part of the course is designed to improve the basic communication skills in Spanish for 
students from Spanish speaking backgrounds; emphasis on vocabulary building, syntactical anal- 
ysis and conversation. Designed for Chicano students but not restricted to them. 

214 Spanish for the Spanish-Speaking (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 213. Designed to enhance further the communication skills in Spanish 
of the Spanish-speaking student. The second part of the course will emphasize written expression. 
Designed for Chicano students but not restricted to them. 

215 Chicano Creative Writing (3,3) 

Chicano creative writing utilizing the barrio's trilingual expressions. Student work as well as the work 
of contemporary Chicano writers will be analyzed. 

218A,B Survey of Chicano Culture (3) 

A survey of the Chicano's cultural heritage from the pre-Cortesian period to the present. A historical 
analysis of the music, literature, art and dance of the Chicano. A — Literature and art. B — History, 
music and dance. 

220 Mexican Heritage (3) 

Introduction to the basic characteristics of the Mexican and especially the Chicano society and 
culture and its ramifications in the United States today. The survey course covers the period of 
1519 to the present day. Special emphasis is placed on the arts, literature, and history of Mexico 
and the Chicano in the United States. 

237 Mexican and Mexican-American Literature in Translation (3) 

A survey course in Mexican and Chicano literature in English. Special emphasis will be given to 
presenting the point of view of the Chicano. Panel discussions will emphasize the exposure of 
students to the Ideas of Mexcian and Chicano literature as seen through the eyes of the Chicano. 

300 Barrio Conversational Spanish (3) 

Analysis of the Calo language of the southwestern states of the United States. Students will study 
the bicultural language of the Chicanos, origin, development, and contemporary use in the 
barrios. 

302 Ancient Mexican Culture (3) 

A historical and cultural survey of the principal pre-Columbian cultures of Mexico and their signifi- 
cance for Mexican society. 

305 The Chicano Family (3) 

The Chicano family development as an American social institution. Historical and cross-cultural 
perspectives. The socio- and psychodynamics of the Chicano family. 

306 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisites: Chicano Studies 101 and/or 220 or consent of instructor. Students are given classroom 
instruction covering the major characteristics of the barrio. Supervised fieldwork in the barrio 
is required. An analysis of the barrio or agency will be made after fieldwork Is completed. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours fieldwork) 

307 Barrio Studies (3) 

Prerequisite: Chicano Studies 306. Students are given classroom instruction covering the major 
characteristics of the barrio and are then supervised in their fieldwork in the local barrios. An 
analysis of the barrio or agency will be made after fieldwork is completed. (2 hours lecture, 3 
hours fieldwork) 

320 Chicano Art (3) 

An overview of Mexican art forms from pre-Cortesian epochs to the contemporary artists, with 
emphasis on the use of oil painting techniques as employed by modern Mexican and Chicano 
artists. 


282 


Chicano Studies 


336 Main Trends in Spanish American Literature (3) 

An introduction to the main currents of Spanish American literature emphasizing contemporary 
works. Close attention will be given to the relation between the artistic expression and the 
ideological values of the period. 

337 Contemporary Chicano Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: any of the following: Chicano Studies 101, 106, 220, or 237, or consent of instructor. 
A study of the modern Chicano wri:ers in the United States. Special emphasis will be given to 
Allurista, Corky Gonzales, Octavio Romano, El teatro campesino and the major Chicano maga- 
zines and newspapers. 

340 Sociology of the Chicano (3) 

Prerequisites: Chicano Studies 101 or 106, 220, or consent of instructor. A general survey of the field. 
Sociological perspectives of Chicano culture and social structure, including background, present 
nature, and changing patterns. 

403 Cultural Differences in Mexico and Aztian (3) 

A study of the cultural conflicts in Mexico as seen by the contemporary thinkers of Mexico and the 
United States. Special emphasis will be given to the urban and rural problems. 

411 Mexican Arts and Mexican Society (3) 

Study of the ways in which Mexican artists, architects and designers have reacted to the political, 
social and artistic developments in Mexico and the world. 

415 Chicano Music Appreciation (3) (Formerly 232) 

A survey of Mexican music ranging from the pre-Corteslan period to the present in Mexico and in 
the southwestern states of the United States. The history and music are presented by lectures 
and recordings. 

420 Spanish for the Elementary School Teacher in the Barrio (3) 

Designed to improve the oral expression of teachers in the barrio elementary schools. Special 
emphasis will be given to the language patterns of the Chicano students and their parents. 

421 Economics of the Chicano (3) 

A study of the Chicano and his socioeconomic situations. Special emphasis will be placed on 
contemporary economic problems in immigration, agriculture, business, industry, and crafts. 

430 Cancion de la Raza (3) 

Prerequisite: reading knowledge of Spanish. Survey and analysis of the Nahuatl, Mexican and 
Chicano literature from the pre-Columbian period to the present. The latter part of the course 
will focus on contemporary Chicano writers. 

431 The Chicano Child (3) 

Study of the Chicano child from preschool through grade six. The course will emphasize motor, 
physical, social. Intellectual and emotional growth and development and their effect on school 
adjustment and achievement. Observation of preschool and grade school children will be 
arranged. 

432 The Chicano Adolescent (3) 

A survey of the Chicano adolescents' social, intellectual, and emotional growth and development. 
Special emphasis will be placed on the bicultural pressures from the barrio, family structure, 
school and achievement values. 

433 Mexican Literature since 1940 (3) 

An in-depth study and analysis of the literature of Mexico since 1940. Emphasis will be placed on 
the works of Carlos Puentes, Luis Spota, Rodolfo Usigli, Xavier Villaurrutia, Juan jose Arreola, 
Octavio Paz, Roberto Blanco Moheno and Luis C. Basurto. 

434 Counseling the Chicano Student (3) 

Definition of problems of the Chicano student. Review of proposed methods of motivational coun- 
seling and analysis relevant curriculum. 

435 Directed Research and Studies in Chicano Schools (3) 

Supervised research and study of Chicano schools. Special emphasis will be placed on curriculum, 
library materials, and teaching techniques of the schools of the barrio and of classes with a high 
percentage of Chicano students. 

440 Mexican Intellectual Thought (3) 

Recommended: a reading knowledge of Spanish and Chicano Studies 237 and 302. A study and 
discussion of the emergence of the Chicano movement dealing with political, economic, and 
sociological facets. This course analyzes the writings of the Nahuatl, Spanish, Spanish-American 
and Chicano writers. Special attention will be focused on the contemporary writers. 


Communications 283 


441 Religion in the Chicano Society (3) 

Prerequisites: Chicano Studies 220, and/or consent of instructor. A comparative study of American 
Protestant and Mexican Catholic thought and their influence on the values held by Anglos and 
Chicanos. Special emphasis will be placed on the contemporary issues. 

445 History of the Chicano (3) 

History of the Chicano from the pre-Columbian period to the present. Special emphasis on the 
Chicano's changing role in the United States, his cultural identity crisis, and his achievements. 

450 The Chicano and Contemporary Issues (3) 

Analysis and discussion of the socioeconomic and political problems confronting the Chicano, with 
emphasis on proposed solutions. Particular focus will be placed on the effect that social institu- 
tions have had on the Chicano community. Study and research will be made In these areas. 

452 The Chicano and Nativism (3) 

A study of nativism and the Chicano. Special emphasis Is placed on Anglo-Chicano relationships as 
well as Immigration law and practices. 

453 Mexico Since 1906 (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division class standing. A study of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 stressing the 
political, economic, and social features of this period. Special emphasis will be given to the 
Revolution and its contributions In the fields of art, music, literature and social reforms. 

460 The Chicano and Politics (3) 

Theory of urban p>olitics and evaluation of issues that affect the Chicanos and American society. 
Evaluations and surveys will be made on political organizations in the Hispanic-surnamed com- 
munities. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisites: senior level and approval by the department chairman and the professor (s) in charge 
of directing the study. An opportunity to do independent study under the guidance of the 
department, of a subject of special Interest to the student. 

DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS 

FACULTY 
J. William Maxwell 
Department Chairman 

lames Alexander, Fenton Calhoun, Raynolds Johnson, Martin Klein, Mary Koehler, George Mas- 
trolannl, Wayne Overbeck, Marvin Rosen, Ted Smythe 
The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts in Communications emphasizes study of broad princi- 
ples of communications, functions of the mass media in a democratic society, and theories relevant 
to informing, instructing, and persuading through communications media. It may serve as prepara- 
tion for careers In mass media, business, industry, government and education; and as a preparation 
for graduate and professional schools. 

The department offers a major in communications with emphases in advertising, journalism, photo- 
communications, public relations, technical communication, and telecommunication. A sp>ecial 
emphasis designed to meet the needs and interests of individual students may also be arranged. 
A master of arts program in Communications provides advanced study in communications and 
related disciplines for those seeking professional careers in teaching, research and development, and 
mass media. 

Programs in the department are designed to provide both theory and practice in the use of print, 
broadcast and film media of communication to inform. Instruct and p)ersuade. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

Every student must take 21 units of core courses and a minimum of 1 5 units In one of the emphases 
offered by the department. Additionally, the student must complete 1 2 units of collateral courses 
specified for the emphasis selected, although some flexibility may be permitted upon advisement. 
The major totals 48 units. 


COMMUNICATIONS CORE Units 

Com 101 Communications Writing 3 

Com 102 Communications Writing 3 

Com 333 Mass Communication in Modern Society 3 


284 Communications 


Com 407 Communication and the Law 3 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication 3 

andV^o of the following: 

Com 410 Principles of Communication Research 3 

Com 426 World Communication Systems 3 

Com 427 Current Issues in Mass Communication 3 

EMPHASES FOR COMMUNICATIONS MAJORS 

Every communications major must select an area of emphasis and complete the courses in it. 

ADVERTISING 

Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 21 8A Introduction to Photography 2 

Com 353 Advertising Copy and Layout 3 

Com 354 Retail Advertising 3 

Com 356 Advertising Production (1,1) 2 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Com 451 National Advertising Campaigns 3 

Collateral Requirements 

Art 103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

Engl 303 The Structure of Modern English 3 

Phil 310 Ethics 3 

Mktg 351 Principles of Marketing 3 

JOURNALISM 

Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 21 8A Introduction to Photography 2 

Com 21 8B Communications Photography 2 

Com 332 Copy Editing and Makeup 3 

Com 335 Reporting of Public Affairs 3 

Com 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Collateral Requirements 

Soc 341 Social Interaction 3 

Engl 462 Modern British and American Novels 3 

Hist 476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 3 

and one of the following: 

Pol Scl 3(X) Contemporary Issues in California Government and Politics 3 

Pol Sci 413 Pressure Groups and Public Opinion 3 

* PHOTOCOMMUNICATIONS 

Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 21 8A Introduction to Photography 2 

Com 21 8B Communications Photography 2 

Com 220A Color Photography 2 

Com 306 Photographic Production 2 

Com 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Com 358A Publications Production 2 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Collateral Requirements 

Pol Sci 3(X) Contemporary Issues in California Government and Politics 3 

Amer Stu 301 The American Character 3 

• Pholocommunications students who wish to emphasize film should take Com 218A, 311, 375, 411, 439 and 485. 


611^4 t 190 


Communications 285 

Art 338A Creative Photography 3 

Geo 365 Conservation of the American Environment 3 

PUBLIC RELATIONS 

Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 21 8A Introduction to Photography 2 

Com 361 Theory and Principles of Public Relations 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Com 463 Public Relations Methods 3 

Com 465 International Public Relations 3 

and one of the following: 

Com 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Com 358A Publications Production 2 

Collateral Requirements 

Art 103 Two-Dimensional Design 3 

Engl 334 Shakespeare 3 

Spch 334 Persuasive Speaking 3 

Pol Sci 413 Pressure Groups and Public Opinion 3 

♦TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION 

Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 332 Copy Editing and Makeup 3 

Com 334 Feature Article Writing 3 

Com 401 Report Writing 3 

Com 403 Technical Writing 3 

Com 404 Advanced Specialized Writing and Editing Techniques 3 

Collateral Requirements 

Phys 211 A Elementary Physics 4 

Phys 21 IB Elementary Physics 4 

QM 361 Business and Economic Statistics 3 

QM 364 Computer Logic and Programming 3 

t Telecommunication 

Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs 3 

Com 380 Introduction to Radio and Television 3 

Com 390 Introduction to Telecommunications Production 3 

Com 439 Mass Media Internship 2 

Com 475 Telecommunications Programming 3 

Collateral Requirements 

Engl 322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 3 

Soc 341 Social Interaction 3 

Pol Sci 410 Political Parties 3 

Hist 476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 3 

Special Emphasis 

Students whose interests involve more than one emphasis may seek approval of a special emphasis. 
Minimum requirements for the special emphasis are the same as for other emphases: 15 units of 
coursework in communications, at least 12 of which will be in upper division courses; 12 additional 
units of collateral course work in other departments; and approval of the special emphasis plan in 
advance by the Department of Communications. 

• Required collateral units may exceed 12 for this emphasis to include additional mathematics and science. In such cases, variations 
in the core requirements will be arranged through advisement so that the major will not exceed 48 units, 
t Telecommunication students who wish to emphasize film in broadcasting should take Com 290A or 290B, 311, 375, 411 and 439. 


286 Communications 


MINOR IN COMMUNICATIONS 

Twenty-one units approved by the department are required for a minor in communications. The 
following is a recommended minor sequence emphasizing writing and publication courses. 


Lower Division (maximum of 7 units) Units 

Com 101 or 102 Communications Writing 3 

Com 21 8A Introduction to Photography 2 

Com 218B Communications Photography 2 

Upper Division (minimum of 14 units) 

Com 331 Analyzing News Communication 3 

Com 333 Mass Communication in Modern Society 3 

Com 338 Newspaper Production 3 

Com 358A Publications Production 2 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication 3 


TEACHER CREDENTIAL REQUIREMENTS 

The Department of Communications offers major and minor programs approved as academic by 
the State Board of Education for those seeking an elementary or secondary teaching credential. For 
advisement, consult the Department of Communications. Because of anticipated changes in creden- 
tial requirements due to the Ryan Act, students should consult an adviser In the department regarding 
the specific steps Involved in completing credential requirements. 

SECONDARY 

Communications majors who are secondary teacher candidates should complete the communica- 
tions core and journalism emphasis, including Communications 358A,B; have a minor approved by 
the Communications Department chairman; and fulfill professional education course requirements 
beyond those of the major and minor. (See "Journalism Education," page 290) 

Elementary and Intermediate 

The program of courses for elementary and intermediate teachers follows. 


Emphasis Requirements Units 

Com 331 Analyzing News Communication 3 

Com 333 Mass Communication in Modern Society 3 

Com 361 Theory and Practice of Public Relations 3 

Com 375 The Documentary Film 3 

Com 380 Introduction to Radio and Television 3 

Com 425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication 3 

Com 426 World Communication Systems 3 


Elect 15 units from appropriate communications courses in consultation with adviser (may include 
a project, Com 499, for three units). 

Collateral Requirements 

Engl 303 Structure of Modern English 3 

Elect nine additional units from appropriate courses in consultation with adviser. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN COMMUNICATIONS 

The Master of Arts in Communications Is designed to provide advanced study in communications 
and related disciplines and to develop a research emphasis or option related to the processes and 
effects of communications. These options are: advertising, journalism education, news, photocom- 
munication, public relations, technical communication, or telecommunication. 

Students completing the Master of Arts in Communications with an emphasis in journalism education 
research are eligible for journalism teaching positions in high school or community college. 

Prerequisites 

Students must possess a baccalaureate degree and have completed a basic core of courses in 
communications as prerequisites to the M.A. program. Before admission to classified graduate status, 
students must achieve satisfactory scores on the Graduate Record Examination Aptitude Test. 


«7— « t 


Communications 287 


Study Plan 

Students are required to complete 30 units of approved study, including 18 units in graduate level 
communications courses and six units in related studies. Six of the 18 units of graduate-level courses 
are applicable to the thesis or project requirement. In addition, students must satisfy a “collateral 
field requirement" in a related discipline. 

For further information, consult the Department of Communications. See also "The Program of 
Master's Degrees," page 71 and the Graduate Bulletin. 


COMMUNICATIONS COURSES 

100 Introduction to Communications (3) 

A survey of the mass media and their relationship to society today. 

101 Communications Writing (3) 

An introductory course covering principles of reporting and writing, with emphasis on content 
organization, conciseness, and clarity. Typing ability required. 

102 Communications Writing (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 101 or consent of instructor. Concentration on reporting and writing 
of more advanced material. Typing ability required. 

103 Applied Writing (3) 

Principles and practice in organizing and preparing letters, reports, documents, and proposals 
required in most occupations. Designed especially for non-communications majors. 

218A Introduction to Photography (2) 

Introduction to photographic theory and the application of photographic principles. Students are 
encouraged to provide their own adjustable cameras. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

218B Communications Photography (2) 

Prerequisite: Communications 21 8A or consent of instructor. Application of photographic principles 
to the requirements of mass communications. Students are encouraged to provide their own 
adjustable cameras. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

220A Color Photography (2) 

Prerequisite: Communications 21 8A. Basic color photography covering the elementary chemistry 
and physics of the color processes, the processing of negative and positive color films, and 
making color prints. 

290A,B History and Aesthetics of Motion Pictures (3,3) 

History and development of the motion picture as an art form and social force. A — the motion 
picture from its origins until 1945. B— the contemporary cinema from 1945 to present. (Same 
as Theatre 290A,B) 

301 Writing for Telecommunication (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 380 (or concurrent enrollment) and Communications 101. An intro- 
duction to theory and principles of writing employed in the broadcast and film media. 

303 Business Communications (3) 

Design and implementation of communications systems for various business enterprises. Utilizes 
graphic analysis and analytical techniques. Includes practice in producing messages and channel- 
ing them to avoid ambiguities. 

306 Photographic Production (2) 

Prerequisites: Communications 218A,B or consent of instructor. Production of photographs for 
university publications and television programs. Application of photocommunication principles 
to media problems under deadline conditions. (1 hour lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

311 Introduction to Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 218A or equivalent or consent of instructor. Introduction to theory 
and practice of motion picture photography and film production. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours 
laboratory) 

331 Analyzing News Communications (3) 

Analyzing news and other informational materials to assess their influence on the public, especially 
children. Oriented to teachers and teacher candidates, particularly those at the intermediate or 
elementary level. 


288 Communications 


332 Copy Editing and Makeup (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 101 and 102, or consent of instructor. Practice and theory of editing 
informational materials for publication in newspapers and magazines. (6 hours activity) 

333 Mass Communication in Modern Society (3) 

Basic structure and interrelationships of newspapers, magazines, films, radio, and television, in terms 
of their significance as social instruments and economic entities in modern society. 

334 Feature Article Writing ((3) 

Nonfiction writing for newspapers and magazines, including study of sources, methods and markets. 
Open to non-majors. 

335 Reporting of Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 101 and 102, or consent of instructor. Coverage in depth of significant 
events pertinent to operations of governmental units and related organizations. 

338 Newspaper Production (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A lecture and activity course in which members of the class 
constitute the editorial staff of the university newspaper. The group meets four hours per week 
for critiques in news reporting, writing, editing and makeup, followed by production. With 
consent of instructor, the course may be repeated for a maximum of nine units of credit. (More 
than 9 hours laboratory) 

353 Advertising Copy and Layout (3) 

Writing of copy and layout of advertisements, based on study of sales appeals, attention factors and 
illustrations. (6 hours activity) 

354 Retail Advertising (3) 

Principles and procedures of retail advertising; utilization of mass media; supervised field assign- 
ments in the analysis of specific advertising needs. 

356 Advertising Production (1) 

Preparation of advertisements for the university newspaper and magazine. Advertising accounts 
assigned to each student. Weekly critique sessions. Individual consultation with instructor. (5 
hours laboratory) 

358 Graphic Communications (3) 

A lecture/activity class covering basic principles of graphic communication. Areas studied include 
printing processes, publication formats, copy preparation, copy-fitting techniques, layout princi- 
ples, paper selection and distribution methods. (1 hour lecture, 4 hours activity) 

359 Magazine Production (2) 

Prerequisite: Communications 358 or consent of instructor. A production class for development of 
student publications, including the university magazine, authorized by appropriate university 
authorities. Activities include writing articles, editing copy, taking photographs and preparing 
layouts. (More than 6 hours laboratory) 

361 Theory and Principles of Public Relations (3) 

Examination of the social, psychological, philosophical, economic and political foundations of public 
relations, as well as the theories and principles of public relations as a communications discipline. 

371 Radio-Television News and Public Affairs (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 101 and 380 (or concurrent enrollment). Theory and practice of 
covering news events and public affairs for radio and television. (6 hours activity) 

375 The Documentary Film (3) 

Purpose, development, current trends, critical analysis and production requirements of the docu- 
mentary film. Future of the medium in business, government, education and television. 

380 Introduction to Radio and Television (3) 

(Same as Theatre 380) 

381 Broadcast Advertising (3) 

Study of television and radio as advertising media. Planning advertising campaigns, costs and 
coverage. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

390 Introduction to Telecommunications Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380. Basic theory and practice of radio and television program pro- 
duction. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

401 Report Writing (3) 

Planning, organizing, and writing of reports for business, education and government. Practice will 
be given in use of graphic aids and preparation of copy for reports that are to be printed. 
Recommended for non-majors. 


Communications 289 


403 Technical Writing (3) 

Study of uses of technical writing in industry, science and engineering and completion of written 
assignments designed to test understanding of, and provide experience with, various forms. 

404 Advanced Specialized Writing and Editing Techniques (3) 

Writing and editing of material for reports, proposals, special publications and journals. 

407 Communication and the Law (3) 

The Anglo-American concept of freedom of speech and press; statutes and administrative regulations 
affecting freedom of information and of publishing, advertising and telecommunication. Libel and 
slander, rights in news and advertising, contempt, copyright and invasion of privacy. 

410 Principles of Communication Research (3) 

Survey of research methods used to assess the effects of print, broadcast and film communications 
on audience attitudes, opinions, knowledge and behavior. Basic concepts of research design and 
data analysis in communications research. 

411 Advanced Motion Picture Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 21 8A, 31 1 or consent of instructor. Advanced theory, procedures and 
practice in film production. Motion picture (silent and sound), script writing, transfer and mixes; 
production, distribution and financing. 

425 History and Philosophy of American Mass Communication (3) 

American mass communication, beginning with newspapers and periodicals and continuing through 
radio and television. Includes ideological, political, social and economic aspects. 

426 World Communication Systems (3) 

Major mass communication systems, both democratic and totalitarian, and the means by which 
news and propaganda are conveyed internationally. 

427 Current Issues in Mass Communication (3) 

Mass media regulation by the government, “objective" versus “interpretive" news reporting and 
ethical and legal questions of particular cases. 

428 Communications and Social Change (3) 

The impact upon contemporary society of American mass media and mass communications. 

439 Mass Media Internship (2) 

According to his emphasis, the student serves a supervised internship with organizations such as a 
newspaper or magazine publisher, radio or television station, press association, public relations 
firm or an advertising agency. Application for internships must be made through the department 
coordinator one semester prior to entering the internship program. 

451 National Advertising Campaigns (3) 

Advanced study of advertising campaigns and utilization of mass media — such as television, newspa- 
pers, and magazines — in national advertising programs. Design of complete campaign. 

463 Public Relations Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 361 or consent of instructor. Techniques used for effective public 
relations in both personal and mass communications. 

465 International Public Relations (3) 

Public relations principles applied to international operations, both private and public. 

467 Public Relations for Educational Institutions (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 361 or consent of instructor. Theory and practice of public relations 
applied to public and private schools. Methods, policies, programs and problems inherent in 
educational public relations. 

473 Telecommunications Regulation (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380. Self-regulation, governmental regulation and international regula- 
tion of broadcast programming. 

475 Telecommunications Programming (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380. Theory and practice of programming for television and radio. 

477 Telecommunications Station Management (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 380. Management functions and policies of broadcasting stations and 
networks. Effects of government, public opinion, employee groups and ownership. Technical, 
legal, financial and other obligations. 

479 Advanced Telecommunications Production (3) 

Prerequisite: Communications 390 or consent of instructor. Advanced techniques in producing 
television-radio programs. (2 hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 


— 83097 


m-A S 315 


290 Communications 


485 Film Production (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 311, 375 and 411 or consent of instructor. Fundamentals of docu- 
mentary film production planning and execution. Students prepare complete films in teams. (2 
hours lecture, 3 hours laboratory) 

490 Film Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 290A and/or 290B or equivalent or consent of instructor. Analytical 
and comparative study of theories relating to film-making; nature of the film medium. 

499 Independent Study (1~3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chairman. Individually supervised mass media projects and 
research on campus and in the community. May involve newspaper and magazine publishers, 
radio and television stations and public relations agencies. May be repeated. 

500 Theories of Communication (3) 

Theoretical study of communication processes In terms of source, media, message, audience and 
context variables. Review of research on the effects of communications on audience attitudes, 
opinions, knowledge and behavior. 

502 Theories of Instructional Communication (3) 

Theories of learning, persuasion, and instruction applied to the design of Instructional communica- 
tions. Study of human factors in the design, development and evaluation of such media as 
textbooks, programmed workbooks, training films and videotapes, recordings, and audio-tutorial 
and interactive training systems. 

503 Practicum of Instructional Communication (3) 

Principles of programmed instruction applied to achieve training objectives through the use of the 
media of communication. Includes development and empirical tryout of short programs in print, 
film, and/or broadcast media utilizing behavioral analysis of typical audiences to assess program 
effects. 

510A Seminar in Communication Research (3) 

Prerequisites: Communications 410 or equivalent, 500 and 501, 503 or 512 (or concurrent enroll- 
ment). Principles of research design and analysis applied to the study of communication proc- 
esses and effects. 

510B Advanced Seminar in Communication Research (3) 

Prerequsite: Communications 51 OA. Problems in theoretical, applied and evaluative research In 
communication. 

512 Graduate Seminar in Journalism Education (3) 

Study of selected problems in journalism education with emphasis on individual research. 

597 Project (3 or 6) 

Completion of a creative project in the area of concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Completion of a thesis In the area of concentration beyond regularly offered coursework. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chairman. Individually supervised mass media projects or 
research for graduate students. May be repeated. 


JOURNALISM EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching Journalism in the Secondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 411, 340, admission to teacher education, or consent of instructor. The 
student without teaching experience must register concurrently in Education 449. Theory and 
technique of advising school newspaper and yearbook staffs and teaching journalism. Relation 
of classroom instruction to staff assignments. See page 199 under Secondary Education for 
description of Standard Teaching Credential program. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Prerequisite: consent of department chairman. Individually supervised projects relating to journalism 
education. 


Comparative Literature 291 

749 Student Teaching in Journalism in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 208 for description and prerequisites. 

COMPARATIVE LITERATURE PROGRAM 

The program in comparative literature is an interdisciplinary program directed by the Committee on 
the Program in Comparative Literature. The committee is responsible for formulating curricular 
policies, approving courses, and advising students. The chairman of the English Department adminis- 
ters the program, and the courses are taught by faculty from the English Department and other 
departments whose courses are approved by the committee. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN COMPARATIVE LITERATURE 

The major in comparative literature provides professional competence and personal enrichment for 
students with an exceptional concern and appreciation for the study of the interrelationships be- 
tween the languages and literatures of various civilizations. The program offers courses in literary 
form and content, theory and philosophy, genres and movements, providing insight into the back- 
grounds of mankind's worldwide culture and literatures. The comparative literature courses are 
conducted in English and required reading is available in English. 

Upper Division Requirements 

1. Eighteen units selected from courses listed under comparative literature. 

2. Three units from any adviser-approved 400-level course offered by the Foreign Language and 
Literatures Department provided it is not taught in translation. This requirement can be met 
through examination. 

3. Six units selected from literature courses listed under English and numbered 300 or above. 

4. Six units of anthropology, history, art history, music history or philosophy approved by the adviser 
and aimed at enlarging total perspective. 

5. The remainder of required units selected from any 300- or 400-level literature course in compara- 
tive literature, English, French, German, Italian, Russian, or Spanish. 

Total 42 units 

Distribution 

1. Of these 42 units, 15 must span the chronological range of the literary continuum, one in each 
of the following literary periods: Classical or Medieval; Renaissance; Neoclassical or Baroque; 
Romantic; Contemporary (1850- ). 

2. One course in a literary genre. 

3. One course in a major figure. 

It should be noted that (2.) and (3.) can perform the dual function of also satisfying (1.) (i.e., 
a senior seminar in Hugo would satisfy both the major figure and\}r\e Romantic Period require- 
ments). 

More detailed information on the comparative literature major can be obtained from the brochure 
available in the Department of English office. The importance of close consultation with an adviser 
cannot be stressed enough for comparative literature, since the diversity of language specialties and 
other factors may necessitate individual tailoring in any given case. 

master of arts in comparative literature 

The objectives of the master's degree program in comparative literature are to promote the under- 
standing of other literatures, p)eoples, and cultures in various historical periods, including the present, 
and to prepare the student for more advanced work in comparative literature, leading to the Ph.D. 
degree. The program also prepares teachers of world literature in the high schools and community 
colleges and provides a liberal arts background preparation for library studies. In addition to fulfilling 
all general prerequisites for graduate work established at Cal State Fullerton, the applicant, in order 
fo gain admission to the program, must meet the following criteria: 

1- Possession of a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution. 

2. An undergraduate major in comparative literature, English or foreign language with a CPA of 
3.0 or better in the major courses and a CPA of 2.5 in all other college and/or university work. 
If the student's degree is in another field, he must have completed a total of 24 units of upper 
division work in comparative literature, English or foreign language, with a CPA of 3!0. 


292 Comparative Literature 

3. Satisfactory completion of a written examination in an approved foreign language, or satisfac- 
tory completion of an upper division course taught in an approved foreign language. 

Study Plan 

Required are 30 units of coursework completed with a minimum GPA of 3.0, to be distributed as 


follows: Units 

1. A minimum of 18 units in 500-series courses: 

Comparative Literature 510, Graduate Seminar: Theory and Method of Comparative 

Literature 3 

Courses at the 500-level in comparative literature (six of these units may be in 

Comparative Literature 598, Thesis) 12 

A course at the 500 level in a related area 3 

Total 18 

2. Upper division courses: 

Adviser-approved courses in comparative literature 6 

Adviser-approved courses in a related area 6 

(At least 3 units of related coursework must be in foreign literature, read in the 
original language.) 

Total 12 


At the conclusion of his coursework, the student will take a written comprehensive examination for 
the master's degree. The examination may be waived If the student completes a thesis. 

For further information, consult the Department of English. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


COMPARATIVE LITERATURE COURSES 

(Offered by the Department of English) 

202 Short Story (3) 

(Same as English 202) 

305 The Hebrew Prophets (3) 

(Same as Religious Studies 333) 

312 The Bible as Literature (3) 

A comprehensive survey of Biblical literature emphasizing intrinsic literary qualities as well as the 
influence of major themes of both Old and New Testament writings upon Western literary 
traditions. 

314 The Oral Tradition in Literature (3) 

A study of storytelling as an art, particularly as developed through the media of the folktale. 

315 Classical Mythology in World Literature (3) 

The origins, elements, forms and functions of classical mythology in works from the earliest times 
to the present. 

316 Celtic and Germanic Mythology (3) 

A basic study of the principal Celtic and Germanic myths with some discussion of literary and 
archeological relationships. 

317 Indie Mythology (3) 

A survey of the mythologies embodied in the Mahabharata, the Ramayana, the Vedas and the 
Sathapatha Brahmana of India, and in the Abast, Avesta, and Shah Namah of Persia, and their 
relation to the principal mythologies of Europe. 

318 Baltic and Slavic Mythology (3) 

A study of the principal myths of the Balts and Slavs and their relation to the Indo-European 
inheritance. 

319 African Mythology (3) 

A study of the principal myths of sub-Saharan Africa, together with their reflections in African art 
and custom. 


Comparative Literature 293 


320 Greek and Roman Literature (3) 

Readings in English translation from the literature of classical Greece and Rome. 

324A Advanced World Literature (3) 

Selected readings in Indian, Chinese, Japanese, Middle Eastern and European literature from the 
beginning to 1650. 

324B Advanced World Literature (3) 

Selected readings from Oriental and Western literature from 1650 to the present. 

332 Medieval Literature of Western Europe (3) 

Selected readings in modern English translation from the medieval literature of England and the 
continent from St. Augustine to Sir Thomas Malory. 

333 Literature of the Renaissance (3) 

Major phases of the Renaissance as a literary movement, from Erasmus to Montaigne and Cervantes. 

352 African Literature (3) 

(Same as English 352) 

360 Irish Literature (3) 

Selected writings representative of Irish literature from the early Middle Ages to the present. 

371A,B The French Tradition (3) 

A comprehensive survey of French Literature from the Renaissance to present times. The first 
semester will include the novel, short story and essay; the second semester will cover drama and 
poetry. 

373 Masters of Russian Literature (3) 

Reading, discussion, and Interpretation of selected works by Pushkin, Dostoyevsky, Tolstoy, Chek- 
hov, Pasternak, and others, and their relationship to Western literature. 

374 Modern Russian Literature (3) 

A study of literary trends and representative works of Russian writers from Maxim Corky to the 
present times. Special consideration of the Soviet literary theory and its impact upon their 
literature. Lectures and readings in English. 

375 Hispanic Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations from Hispanic literature and their relations to world literature. 
Readings in the picaresque novel, Cervantes, Golden Age drama, Caldos, Unamuno, Lorca. 

376 Main Trends in Spanish-American Literature (3) 

An introduction to the main currents of Spanish-American literature, emphasizing contemporary 
writers such as Alegria, Asturias, Borges, Fuentes, Neruda. Close attention will be given to the 
relation between the artistic expression and the ideological values of the same period. 

402 Art, Literature, and the Development of Consciousness (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 402) 

403 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 403) 

404 The Nature of Love: Plato to Joyce (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 404) 

405 Psychoanalysis and Drama (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 405) 

425 Indian Literature (3) 

A study of selected works of Indian literature. 

426 Chinese and Japanese Literature (3) 

A study of selected translations of Chinese and Japanese literature. 

427 Modern Japanese Fiction (3) 

A study of major writers and literary movements in 20th-century Japanese fiction. 

430 Persian and Arabian Literature (3) 

A survey course on the nature and distribution of the classics of western Asia In English translation, 
with lectures, readings and discussion. 

445 Literature of the Americas: Contemporary Novelists (3) 

A study of the Interdependency of the contemporary fiction of North and South America. It focuses 
on direct Influences, such as Hemingway's and Faulkner's on Latin American writers, and Borges 
influence on North American writers. It also examines several parallels in techniques and themes 
as they reflect relationships in and between the Northern and Southern cultures. 


294 Comparative Literature 

450 The Naturalists (3) 

A study of naturalism in the works of Turgenev, Balzac, the brothers Goncourt, Maupassant, Zola, 
Huysmans, Ibsen, Verga; and also the works of Cissing, Moore, Hardy, Garland, Crane, Norris, 
Dreiser, London and O'Neill. 

453 The Novel in France and Germany (3) 

Reading, discussion, and interpretation of outstanding novels in translation with a view toward 
determining some principles of the narrative arts. Emphasis on Goethe, Stendhal, Flaubert, Mann, 
Kafka, Proust and others. 

454 Contemporary Movements in European Literature (3) 

A study of modern literary movements, including naturalism, realism, symbolism, expressionism and 
surrealism, with reading and discussion of selected examples. 

457 The Experimental Novel (3) 

A study of contemporary novels, including examples of surrealism and the nouveau roman, as well 
as other novels not readily classified. 

458 The Spanish Novel (3) 

A study of major Spanish novels in translation. 

473A,B World Drama (33) 

Reading, discussion and interpretation of great plays of the world in translation, emphasizing them 
as literature for performance. First semester from ancient Greece through the mid-19th century; 
second semester, from Ibsen to the present. 

482 Senior Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures involving intensive study of major 
writers. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections 
available. This course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

483 Senior Seminar: Special Studies in Comparative Literature (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures devoted to significant periods, move- 
ments, and themes in world literature. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule 
of classes for the sections available. This course number may be repeated with different content 
for additional credit. 

491 Senior Seminar: Greek Tragedy (3) 

Fifth century Creek tragedy through the extent works of Aeschylus and Sophocles, and 10 plays of 
Euripides. (Same as Theatre 492) 

491 Senior Seminar: Realism (3) 

The theory, the origins, and the development of realism. 

492 Literature of Action in 20th-Century France (3) 

(Same as French 492) 

492 German Literature in Translation (3) 

(Same as German 492) 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

510 Graduate Seminar: Theory and Method of Comparative Literature (3) 

Introduction to the theories and methods of comparative literature and the problems of translation. 

550 Graduate Seminar: Medieval Literature (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this course offers 
directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures, concerning the literature of Western 
Europe during the Middle Ages. Special problems as the development of medieval narrative, the 
growth and development of the Arthurian legend, lyric poetry, allegory and devotional literature. 

551 Graduate Seminar: The Renaissance and Baroque (3) 

Comparative investigation of a theme, genre, or major figures in western literature for the Renais- 
sance and Baroque Period. Directed research and writing, group discussions, independent study. 
Since the topic each year will vary, depending upon the specialized interests and publications 
of the instructor, this course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

552 Graduate Seminar: Neoclassicism (3) 

553 Graduate Seminar: Romanticism (3) 

554 Graduate Seminar: Studies in the Modern Period (3) 


English 295 


571 Graduate Seminar: The Novel (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized interests and publication of the instructor, this course offers 
directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures concerning the genre of the novel. 
An ability to read the novels in the original language will be helpful. The student should consult 
his adviser and the schedule of classes for sections appropriate to his graduate program. This 
course number may be repeated with different content for additional credit. 

572 Graduate Seminar: Poetry (3) 

573 Graduate Seminar: Drama (3) 

580 Graduate Seminar: Major Figures in World Literature (3) 

Directed study and research on a major figure in world literature. Students will write reports and 
a long paper on approved topics. 

582 Graduate Seminar: Dante (3) 

591 Seminar in Comparative Literary Criticism (3) 

598 Thesis (3) 

599 Independent Study (1-3) 

EARTH SCIENCE 

(See program offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

FACULTY 

joan V. Greenwood 
Department Chairman 

Don Austin, Rosemary Boston, John Brugaletta, Miriam Cox, Sherwood Cummings, Dorothea de 
France, George Friend, Cynthia Fuller, Stephen Garber, Joseph Gilde, Annabelle Haaker, Jean Hall, 
Mary Hayden, Joseph Hayes, Dennis Hengeveld, Jane Hipolito, Robert Hodges, Michael Holland, 
Wayne Huebner, Charlotte Hughes, Helen Jaskoski, Hazel Jones *, Dorothy Kilker, Thomas Klam- 
mer, William Koon, A. David Law, Joanne Lynn, Willis McNelly, Russell Miller, Keith Neilson, Irene 
Nims, Paul Obler, Rita Oleyar, Urania Petalas, June Salz Poliak, Orrington Ramsay, Michael Riley, 
Sally Romotsky, William Rubinstein, Joseph Sawicki, Clarence Schneider, John Schw'arz, Sari Scott, 
Alice Scoufos, Donald Sears, Howard Seller, Priscilla Shames, Som Sharma, George Spangler, 
Alexander Stupple, Elena Tumas, Martha Vogeler, M. John Wagner, John White, Helen Yanko 
The English Department offers courses designed to acquaint the student with the nature and develop- 
ment of our language, with the literatures of England and America, and with the disciplines involved 
in the various kinds of writing. Except for freshman English offerings, courses in world literature in 
English translation are listed separately, under Comparative Literature. In addition the Department 
of English offers some specialized professional courses for the preparation of teachers. On the senior 
and graduate levels, various opportunities are provided for seminar work and indep)endent study. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: A total of 42 units beyond English 100 and 103, or their equivalents. Including 201 
which should be completed before upper division courses are taken. 

Lower Division (maximum of 9 units) 

May include survey courses in British, American or world literature. 

Basic Course (3 units) 

201 Analysis of Literary Forms 


* University administrative officer 


296 English 

Upper Division (minimum of 33 units) 

Language courses (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

303 The Structure of Modern English 
305 American Dialects 
490 History of the English Language 
American literature (6 units): 

321 American Literature to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 
Major author courses (9 units) 

333 Chaucer 

334 Shakespeare 
341 Milton 

Period courses (minimum of 6 units, at least 3 in a period preceding the Romantic Movement) 
selected from the following: 

332 Medieval Literature 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose 

337 17th Century Poetry and Prose 

338 Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century 

339 Restoration Literature (1 660-1 7(X)) 

340 18th-Century Poetry and Prose 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature 

344 Victorian Literature 

345 The Development of the English Novel through jane Austen 

346 The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel 

462 Modern British and American Novels 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels 

464 Modern British and American Drama 
466 Modern British and American Poetry 

Transfer students should consult with their advisers who may recommend the granting of further 
credit for lower division work completed at other institutions. 

Electives to complete a minimum of 42 units selected from additional courses in language and 
com(X)sition, period courses, literary criticism, senior seminars, and comparative literature. Com- 
parative literature offerings are listed separately, but count toward an English major. 

A program of literary studies gains In perspective through the study of history, sociology, philosophy, 
and psychology. Students of literature are strongly advised to include such courses In their program. 
English majors who intend to pursue graduate study are urged to acquire proficiency in at least one 
foreign language. Note: Freshmen intending to major in English should complete two years of course 
work in a foreign language, or demonstrate equivalent accomplishment by transfer or by examina- 
tion. 

MINOR IN ENGLISH 

Requirements: a total of 21 units. 

Lower Division (maximum of 9 units) 

201, 211, 212, or any lower division course beyond English 100 and 103 or the equivalent. 
Lower division electives (3 units) 

Upper Division (minimum of 12 units), including: 

American Literature (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

321 American Literature to Whitman 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns 
Language courses (minimum of 3 units), selected from the following: 

303 The Structure of Modern English 
305 American Dialects 
490 History of the English Language 
Major author courses (minimum of 6 units) 

334 Shakespeare 

333 Chaucer or 

341 Milton 


687-4 t 47D 




English 299 


MASTER OF ARTS IN ENGLISH 

To qualify for admission to the program for the M.A. in English (classified graduate status), a student 
must hold a bachelor's degree in English from an accredited institution at which he has maintained 
at least a 3.0 grade-point average in the major courses provided that he has a minimum of 24 units 
of upper-division coursework; or if he holds a bachelor's degree in another major, he must have 
completed 24 units of upper-division coursework in English with at least a 3.0 grade-point average. 
If the student lacks the prerequisite number of English courses, he must make them up before he 
may begin work in the master's degree program, earning at least a 3.0 in such makeup coursework. 
In the event that the student's CPA in prerequisite English courses is less than 3.0, he may be allowed 
to take from six to nine units of probationary, adviser-approved coursework. If his CPA in these 
probationary courses is 3.0 or better, he may be admitted (classified). Courses taken to remove 
qualitative and quantitative deficiencies may not be applied to the M.A. program. 

A student is required to have two years of one foreign language at the college or university level 
or six units of study in comparative literature. If taken as graduate work, these six units may be 
applied to the master's degree under "units in subjects related to English." 


Study Plan: Units 

Minimum units in courses restricted to graduate students (5(X) series) 18 

Maximum units in specified upper-division courses in English 6 

Units in subjects related to English 6 

Total 30 


At the conclusion of his program he will take the written comprehensive examination for the 
master's degree. 

Note: The student is strongly advised to take the steps necessary for admission to the program 
before registering for his first graduate courses. Part of the admission process is to confer with 
the graduate adviser, who will analyze prerequisites and designate those courses which will 
apply to the degree program. Courses taken by an unclassified student do not necessarily apply 
toward a degree. At the time the student achieves classified status, no more than nine units of 
postgraduate coursework may be applied to the master's degree program. 

For further information, consult the Department of English. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


ENGLISH COURSES 

For world literature in English translation see courses under comparative literature. 

100 Composition (3) 

A basic course in composition. The course carries no credit toward the major. 

103 Seminars in Writing (3) 

A course for the student with some proficiency in composition. Readings on a relevant topic are 
meant to motivate the student to express his thoughts in a meaningful, disciplined manner. 

105 Introduction to Creative Writing (3) 

An exploratory creative writing course in which the student is given the opportunity to write in 
various genres. The course carries no credit toward the major. 

110 Literature of the Western World from Ancient through Medieval Times (3) 

The study of representative writers and works from the ancient through the medieval world. 

111 Literature of the Western World from the Renaissance through the 19th Century (3) 
The study of representative writers and works from the Renaissance through the 19th century. 

112 Modern Literature of the Western World (3) 

The study of representative writers and works of modern literature. 

201 Analysis of Literary Forms (3) 

The main literary forms — prose fiction, poetry, and drama — are studied and analyzed. Various 
critical methods are applied to representative works mainly from English and American literature. 
English majors should schedule this basic course as early in their programs as possible. 


871—4 t 4B0 


300 English 

202 The Short Story (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of the structure and technique of the short 
story. Emphasis on critical analysis of selected American and European short stories. (Same as 
Comparative Literature 202) 

205 Introduction to Drama (3) 

A course designed to introduce the student to the study of dramatic literature. Emphasis on close 
analysis of individual plays. 

206 Introduction to Poetry (3) 

A course designed to increase students' understanding and appreciation of the art of poetry. The 
primary activity will be close reading of poems written in English. 

211 Masters of British Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: limited to students who are of sophomore standing or who have obtained the consent 
of instructor. An introduction to major periods and movements, major authors and major forms 
through 1760. 

212 Masters of British Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: limited to students who are of sophomore standing or who have obtained the consent 
of the instructor. An introduction to major periods and movements, major authors and major 
forms from 1760 through modern times. 

301 Advanced Composition (3) 

Prerequisites: English 100, 103, or their equivalents. Exercises in creativity, analysis, and rhetoric as 
applied in expository writing. Required of English majors seeking the secondary credential. 

303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

Prerequisite: junior standing. Thegrammar of contemporary English. Modern English usage. Required 
of English majors seeking the secondary credential. Must be taken before student teaching is 
begun. 

305 American Dialects (3) 

An examination of the principles of dialectology. Emphasis will be on the description of modern 
American dialects and their role in social, cultural and educational issues of today. (Same as 
Linguistics 305) 

320 Literature of the American Indian (3) 

A study of the prose and poetry of the American Indian, focusing on the literatures of the North 
American tribes. 

321 American Literature to Whitman (3) 

Emphasis on major writers: Hawthorne, Poe, Melville, Emerson, Thoreau, Whitman, and others. 

322 American Literature from Twain to the Moderns (3) 

Emphasis on Twain, James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, O'Neill, Frost, Eliot. 

325 American Ballad and Folksong (3) 

A survey of Anglo-American balladry and folksong, with attention to historical development, ethnic 
background and poetical values. 

332 Medieval English Literature (3) 

An introduction to the literature of medieval England, exclusive of Chaucer. Readings in modern 
English versions pf representative major works and genres from Beowulf Xo Malory. 

333 Chaucer (3) 

A study of The Canterbury Tales and of Chaucer's language, with particular emphasis upon the 
understanding of the vocabulary, pronunciation, grammar, and syntax of the East Midland dialect 
of Middle English, as indispensable to literary appreciation. 

334 Shakespeare (3) 

An Introduction to Shakespeare's art through a detailed study of the more famous plays. 

335 Elizabethan and Jacobean Drama (3) 

Studies of representative English dramatists of the late 16th and early 17th centuries. Emphasis on 
the development of the dramatic tradition in the plays of Marlowe, jonson, Webster, Beaumont 
and Fletcher, and others. 

336 Elizabethan Poetry and Prose (3) 

A study of the nondramatic literature of the English Renaissance from More to Campion. Emphasis 
on Renaissance thought and the works of Spenser. 

337 17th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

A survey of the major writers of the period from 1603 to 1660 exclusive of Milton. 


English 301 


338 The Drama of the Restoration and the 18th Century (3) 

A study of representative plays of the Restoration and the 18th century. Emphasis will be placed on 
the development of such dramatic movements as the heroic play, Restoration comedy and 
sentimental drama. 

339 Restoration Literature (1660-1700) (3) 

Butler, Rochester, Dryden, Pepys, and selected minor writers. 

340 18th-Century Poetry and Prose (3) 

Swift, Addison and Steele, Pope, Boswell, Johnson, and selected minor writers. 

341 Milton (3) 

An intensive study of the poetry and prose in the light of Milton's intellectual development. 

343 The Romantic Movement in English Literature (3) 

Burns, Blake; Wordsworth, Coleridge; Byron, Shelley, and Keats. The reaction against rationalism, 
the rise of revolutionary and liberal thought, humanitarianism, and emphasis on individual 
creativity. 

344 Victorian Literature (3) 

A study of literature in its relationship to the problems which emerge from the social, cultural, 
scientific and Industrial revolutions of the Victorian period. 

345 The Development of the English Novel through Jane Austen (3) 

A study of the English novel from Its beginnings to the 19th century considering such novelists as 
Defoe, Richardson, Fielding, Sterne and Austen. 

346 The Development of the 19th-Century English Novel (3) 

A study of such novelists as the Brbntes, Thackeray, Dickens, Eliot and Hardy. 

351 Science Fiction (3) 

Prerequisite: English 101. The study of science fiction as a genre, including future-scene fiction, the 
utopian novel, the superman novel, and short fantasy stories. 

352 African Literature (3) 

African literature written in the English language, with special emphasis on the fiction, poetry and 
drama of the new nations. (Same as Comparative Literature 352) 

353 Black Writers in America (3) 

A study of black American writers from Frederick Douglass to the present. Concentration on 
important figures such as Wright, Ellison and Baldwin. 

364 Seminar in Writing (3) 

Prerequisites: evidence of student's previous interest in creative writing and consent of instructor. 
Study of superior models, development of style, and group criticism and evaluation of each 
student's independent work. Depending on the specialized writing field of the instructor, the 
various sections will concentrate on fiction, plays or poetry. May be repeated for credit. (Same 
as Theatre 364) 

391 Survey of English Literary Criticism (3) 

A study of the major English critics from the Renaissance to the modern. Emphasis on Sidney, 
Dryden, Johnson, Coleridge, Arnold and Eliot. 

421 Minority Images in American Literature (3) 

An examination of 19th- and 20th-century literature written by and about racial groups in America. 
Includes Unde Tom's Cabin, Soul on Ice and Laughing Boy. 

423 Early American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: English 321 or consent of instructor. The literature of colonial and revolutionary Ameri- 
ca, including the Puritans, 18th-century deism and rationalism, and the literary antecedents of 
American democratic thought. 

425 Darwinism in American Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of instructor. An examination of selected writings of 
Darwin and of such Darwinians as Spencer and Huxley; then a study of the literary adaptations 
and assimilations of Darwinism. (Same as American Studies 425) 

433 Children's Literature (3) 

A study of masterpieces of the world's literature for children. Illustrates literary qualities appealing 
to children and demonstrates the ways in which children's literature reflects the particular 
cultural differences of the various Oriental, classical and modern cultures. 

435 Studies in Shakespeare (3) 

Prerequisite: English 334 or consent of instructor. An intensive study of selected plays with primary 
emphasis upon problems of dramatic structure and artistic meanings. 


t s« 


302 English 

445 The American Tradition in Poetry (3) 

A study of selected American poems from the 17th century to 1914. Emphasis on the close reading 
of individual |X>ems. 

446 The American Novel to 1914 (3) 

A study of selected novelists from C. B. Brown, through Melville and Twain, to Dreiser. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) 

(Same as Interdisciplinary Center 451) 

452 Modern Literary Criticism (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing or consent of instructor. A study of the major movements in 
20th-century British and American criticism. 

462 Modern British and American Novels (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. Development of modern British and American novels from 1900 to 1950. 

463 Contemporary British and American Novels (3) 

The novel in English since World War II. 

464 Modern British and American Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. The development of British and American drama from 1900 to the present. 

465 Contemporary British and American Drama (3) 

British and American drama from 1950 to the present. 

466 Modern British and American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: survey of English, American or world literature; an upper division literature course; or 
consent of instructor. The development of British and American poetry from 1900 to the present. 

467 Contemporary British and American Poetry (3) 

British and American poetry from 1950 to the present. 

490 History of the English language (3) 

Prerequisite: senior or graduate standing. The historical development of English vocabulary, 
phonology, morphology and syntax from Indo-European to modern American English. 

491 Senior Seminar (3) 

Prerequisite: an undergraduate course in the area to be studied, a B average or better in English 
courses, or consent of instructor. Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures 
covering selected topics from language studies, intensive studies of major writers, criticism, and 
literary types, periods, and ideological trends. 

499 Independent Study (3) 

Open to advanced students in English with the consent of department chairman. May be repeated 
for credit. 

570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering philology, historical develop- 
ment, and structure of English. Individual offerings under this course number may deal with only 
one aspect of language studies. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes 
for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. May be repeated with different content for 
additional credit. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering major figures such as: Shakespeare, 
Milton, Chaucer, Melville, Twain, Hawthorne, Joyce and Coleridge. The student should consult 
his adviser and the schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. May 
be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as Theatre 571 ) 

572 Graduate Seminar: Literary Genres (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion and lectures, covering such major literary types as: the 
epic, the novel, the short story, lyric (X)etry, tragedy, comedy and historical drama. The student 
should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for sections appropriate to his graduate 
program. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. (Same as Theatre 572) 


Environmental Studies 303 


573 Graduate Seminar: Cultural Periods (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of instructor, this course will offer directed 
research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering the literature of a particular cultural 
period from the Anglo-Saxon to modern times. The student should consult his adviser and his 
schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. May be repeated with 
different content for additional credit. 

574 Graduate Seminar: Special Problems in Literature (3) 

As appropriate to the specialized research and publication of the instructor, this course will offer 
directed research and writing, group discussion and lectures covering special problems such as: 
the detailed critical study of varying influences on literature, including philosophical, religious, 
scientific, geographic and other ecological viewpoints. The student should consult his adviser and 
his schedule of classes for the sections appropriate to his graduate program. May be repeated 
with different content for additional credit. 

579 Graduate Seminar: Problems in Criticism (3) 

Directed research and writing, group discussion, and lectures covering historical development and 
schools of criticism. Individual offerings within this course number may deal with only one aspect 
of critical problems. The student should consult his adviser and the schedule of classes for the 
sections appropriate to his graduate program. May be repeated with different content for addi- 
tional credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (3) 

Research projects in areas of specialization beyond regularly offered coursework. Oral and written 
reports. May be repeated with different content for additional credit. 


ENGLISH EDUCATION COURSES 

442 Teaching English in the Secondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 411, admission to teacher education. Principles, methods, and materials of 
teaching English In the secondary school. The student who has not had teaching experience must 
register concurrently in Education 449. 

749 Student Teaching in English in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 208 for description and prerequisites. 

ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

William C. Langworthy 
Program and Human Ecology Director 

Arthur Earick (Urban Studies), Barry Gerber (Technological Studies), Barry Thomas (Environmental 
Education), Edwin Carr (Education), James Do (Student), Margaret Fitch (Psychology), Cary 
Hannes (Geography), Christopher Hulse (Anthropology), William Ketteringham (Geography), 
Robert Laidlaw (Student), Michael Lee (Art), Peter Mlynaryk (Finance), William Petak (Politi- 
cal Science), Leonard Pettyjohn (Geography), Marvin Rosen (Communications), Frank St. Clair 
(Student), James Stupple (English), Imre Sutton (Geography), Floyd Thomas (Engineering), Joel 
Weintraub (Biological Science), W. Van Willis (Chemistry) 

Environmental studies Is an interdisciplinary program of courses dealing with man and his interac- 
tions with his environments — cultural as well as natural. The courses, both pre-existing in various 
departments and specially developed, attempt to integrate knowledge and methods from several 
disciplines, all of which independently study special aspects of this area. The program will deal with 
man in his social and cultural aspect, as he exploits, modifies and attempts to achieve balance with 
his environment. The student will have the opportunity to cope with problems involving ecological 
changes, pollution, technological solutions, economics, balanced land use, and politics. 

The program Is Intended to provide the widest possible variety of students with an opportunity to 
become acquainted with and acquire a common vocabulary in this vital area. A basic element will 
be an introductory seminar in environmental studies, which will bring together students and staff 
from various disciplines to delineate environmental problems and explore fundamental methods. 
This seminar may be taken either on the undergraduate or graduate level and will be prerequisite 
to all further work In the projected graduate program. Additional graduate-level interdisciplinary 


304 Environmental Studies 


courses are planned, including core seminars designed to serve as foundations for graduate curricula 
In the program options. 

No degree objective in environmental studies is planned for undergraduates; however, participation 
by such students In the program is encouraged. Individuals Interested in environmental problems, 
irrespective of their majors, and those planning to enter job-related areas should consider supple- 
menting their regular course schedules with elements of this program. A proposed master's degree 
in environmental studies is under development; students in the program will be able to elect options 
In human ecology, technological studies, urban studies or environmental education. 

Courses in Environmental Studies 

Environmental Studies 431 Ecology of the Santa Ana Mountains (3) 

Environmental Studies 440A,B Introduction to Environmental Studies (3-3) 

Environmental Studies 568 Law and Environment (3) 


Related Departmental Courses 

Listed below are a number of departmental courses which either bring up environmental Issues or 
deal with concepts bearing on such issues. Few have extensive prerequisites; they are therefore 
suitable for undergraduates interested in learning more about man and his environment. 
Anthropology 204 Man's Many Faces (3) 

Anthropology 460 Culture Change (3) 

Biological Science 102 Crisis Biology (3) 

Biological Science 267 Man and Insects (3) 

Biological Science 316 Principles of Ecology (4) 

Engineering 207 Pollution and Politics (3) 

Engineering 425A,B Environmental Engineering (3,3) 

Geography 150 Environment In Crisis (3) 

Geography 350 Conservation of the American Environment (3) 

Geography 370 Urban Geography (3) 

Geography 453 Cultural Ecology (Also Anthropology 453) (3) 

Nature Interpretation 350 Field Biology and Conservation (3) 

Nature Interpretation 460 Applied Conservation (4) 

Physical Science 100 Man and His Physical Environment (4) 

Sociology 361 Population Problems (3) 

Sociology 371 Urban Sociology (3) 

Technological Studies 1(X) Introduction to Technological Studies (3) 

Technological Studies 110A,B Man-Made World (3,3) 

Technological Studies 410 Society and Technology (3) 

Technological Studies 430 Technology and Ideology (3) 


ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES COURSES 

431 Ecology of the Santa Ana Mountains (3) 

An interdisciplinary course composed of seminars, field Investigation, and laboratory compilation 
of environmental factors of a wild region within the urbanizing areas of Southern California. 
Instructed and supervised by specialists in earth science, geography and biological science. 
Intensive field Investigation of factors of significance in the location and distribution of plants and 
animals, utilizing techniques of aerial photography, remote sensing, geologic and vegetation 
mapping, instrumentation of environmental factors and taxonomy. Open to advanced under- 
graduate and graduate students. 

440A,B Introduction to Environmental Studies (3^) 

Prerequisites: advanced standing in an academic major and permission of the director. 440A is 
prerequisite to 440B. Principles, fundamentals, and current problems involving man and his 
physical, biological, and man-made environment. Seminars and field trips (weekend trips may 
be required) . 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 305 


568 Law and Environment (3) 

An interdisciplinary seminar in the role of law in the allocation, management, and administration of 
resources and the environment. Relevant studies relate to conservation law, land tenure, water 
rights, environmental health and other topics. 

DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 
AND LITERATURES 

FACULTY 
Samuel Cartledge 
Department Chairman 

Linda Andersen, Oswaldo Arana, Nancy Baden, Robert Bertalot, Gerald Boarino, Modesto Diaz, 
Leon Gilbert, Walter Kline, G. Bording Mathieu, Harvey Mayer, Doris Merrifield, Ervie Pena, 
Charles Shapley, Curtis Swanson, Jacqueline Thornton, Marjorie Tussing, Eva Van Ginneken, 
Stephen Vasari, Jon Zimmermann 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

Several options are offered: 

1. French major. Requirements: French 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents; plus a 
minimum of 24 units of upper division courses including 315, 317, 375, 431, 441, 451, 461. 

2. German major. Requirements: German 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents; plus 24 
units of upper division coursework, which must include 315, 317, 375 and three of the following 
literature courses: 430, 440, 450, 460. 

3. Spanish major. Requirements: Spanish 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents, 315, 316, 
317 or 318, 375, 400 (or its equivalent), plus 15 units of upper division courses In Spanish which 
must include Spanish 430, 441 and 461. 

Those Spanish majors who wish to prepare themselves to teach In bilingual programs would 
pursue the following 27-unit upper division sequence: Spanish 315 or 316, 317 or 318, 375, 400 
(or Its equivalent), 466, 467, 468, at least one 4()0-level Spanish literature course, plus an elective, 
chosen In consultation with the adviser, from the areas of Spanish literature, Chicano studies, 
education or social sciences. 

MINOR IN A FOREIGN LANGUAGE 

Requirements: Courses 101, 102, 203, 204, 213, 214, or their equivalents, completed satisfactorily; 
plus nine units in upper division courses selected in consultation with the adviser. Minor concentra- 
tions are offered In French, German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish. 

PROGRAMMED COURSES IN UNCOMMONLY TAUGHT LANGUAGES 

The department has available a number of programmed courses in languages which cannot be 
regularly taught such as Arabic, Hindi, Japanese, etc. For details see Foreign Languages 198. 

CREDENTIAL PROGRAMS 

All prospective teachers, before being admitted to a credential program, must pass a proficiency 
examination in which their skills of listening, speaking, reading, writing and knowledge of linguistic 
principles will be tested. The examination is administered twice yearly, in September and February. 
Students should make arrangements with the department to take the test during their senior year 
or during the first semester of their fifth year. 

STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL, SPECIALIZATION IN ELEMENTARY TEACHING 

Students who are candidates for the standard teaching credential with a specialization in elementary 
teaching are encouraged to enroll in Foreign Languages Education 432 and 433. 

STANDARD TEACHING CREDENTIAL, SPECIALIZATION IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 

The credential program is the same as for the liberal arts major, with the following additional 
requirements: 

Foreign Languages Education 442; 

French or German or Spanish Applied Linguistics 466; 


306 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

plus six units in the major language selected with the approval of the adviser and taken in the senior 
year or thereafter at the 400 and 500 level. 

INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS 

In accordance with recommendations made by the Modern Language Association of America, the 
Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures encourages all majors interested in a teaching 
career to participate in a study-abroad program.This will enable a student to perfect his mastery of 
the language and afford him additional insights into the foreign culture. To this end, the California 
State University and Universitys International Programs offer a wide variety of study opportunities 
on the junior, senior and graduate level. Language majors are, however, required to complete a 
minimum of three literature courses at the 400 level on the Fullerton campus. For further information, 
see page 21. 

THE LANGUAGE LABORATORY 

Students enrolling in courses 101, 102, 203, 204 are required, in addition to the regular class periods, 
to practice for the minimum of prescribed time in the language laboratory. The 30-station laboratory 
operates like a library; students may use it at a time most convenient to them preferably every day 
in sessions of 15 to 30 minutes. Further details will be announced by each instructor and by the 
supervisor of the language laboratory. 

Students are invited to make use of the collection of literary and cultural recordings In French, 
German, Portuguese, Russian and Spanish available In the language laboratory. 

MASTER IN ARTS IN FRENCH, GERMAN OR SPANISH 

The degrees of Master of Arts in French, German and Spanish require a minimum of 30 semester 
units beyond the bachelor's degree. A candidate presenting a B.A. which has fewer than 24 upper 
division units in the major language, or is otherwise inadequate, normally will be required to take 
additional courses to build a full undergraduate major before beginning the graduate program. The 
student must also demonstrate proficiency in English, either by examination or a three-unit upper 
division course in English grammar. The 30 units in the graduate program are distributed as follows: 

Units 


Language and linguistics courses (minimum of 9 on 500 level) 12 

Literature courses (minimum of 6 on 5(X) level) 12 

Subjects In an approved related field 6 

Minimum total 30 

A part of the 30 units may be assigned to a thesis. 


The candidate for the M.A. degree must consult a graduate adviser before beginning his program. 
Before being advanced to candidacy for the degree, he must demonstrate proficiency In the language 
to a faculty committee appointed for that purpose. The terminal evaluation is by comprehensive 
written and oral examination, including fluency in the specified language. 

For further information, consult the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 307 

FOREIGN LANGUAGES COURSES 

198 Programmed Courses in Uncommonly Taught Languages (1-3) 

Intensive individualized programmed instruction in specific languages other than those regularly 
offered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Literatures, such as Arabic, Chinese, Hindi 
and Japanese. Designed to develop the skills of auditory comprehension and speaking in the 
language to form a basis for later development of the reading and writing skills. A minimum of 
3 hours per week in the learning laboratory as well as regular sessions with native informants, 
are required for each unit of credit. May be repeated for credit. 


FOREIGN LANGUAGES EDUCATION COURSES 

432 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Elementary School (2) 

Methods of teaching FLES: foreign languages in elementary schools. Critical review of materials, 
audiolingual-visual aids, and current research. Conducted in English, with practice by students 
in the language they plan to teach. 

433 Electromechanical Aids in the Foreign Language Classroom (1) 

Principles and techniques of advanced electromechanical, auditory, visual and programmed learning 
devices in foreign language instruction. Special emphasis on instructional television and the 
language laboratory. 

442 Teaching Foreign Languages in the Secondary School (2) 

Prerequisites: Education 340 and 411; French, German or Spanish 266; and admission to teacher 
education. Open also to experienced teachers. The student who has not had teaching experience 
must register concurrently in Education 449. See page 199 under Secondary Education for 
description of Standard Teaching Credential program. The theory and practice of language 
learning and language teaching with special emphasis on the audiolingual method in combination 
with electromechanical aids. Conducted in English, with practice by students in the language they 
plan to teach. Required, before student teaching, of students presenting majors in foreign lan- 
guages for the standard teaching credential with a specialization in secondary education. 

749 Student Teaching in Foreign Languages in the Secondary School and Seminar (6) 

See page 208 for description and prerequisites. 


FRENCH COURSES 

French 315 and 375 are prerequisites for all French literature courses at the 400-level. 

101 Fundamental French (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of French. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in French. 

102 Fundamental French (5) 

Prerequisite: French 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of French. 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language 
laboratory. Conducted in French. 

203 Intermediate French (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in French. 

204 Intermediate French (3) 

Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in French. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) 

.Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with French 203. Conducted in French. 


308 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

214 Intermediate Composition and Phonetics (2) 

Practice in written expression and oral delivery of cultural and literary materials. Detailed analysis 
of individual problems in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language 
laboratory. May be taken concurrently with French 204. Conducted in French. 

300 French Conversation (3) 

Prerequisites: French 204 and 214 or equivalent. Designed to enable the student to develop further 
his oral control of the language in the context of his own or contemporary concerns rather than 
in the context of the subject matter of a French major. Conducted in French. (1 hour lecture, 
2 hours activity) 

303 Readings in Scientific French (3) 

Prerequisite: French 102 or equivalent. Open only to science and mathematics majors. Readings 
reflecting a broad spectrum of writing in the physical and natural sciences and mathematics. 
Special attention given to the development of rapid reading for comprehension. 

315 Introduction to French Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Reading and discussions to develop a view of the French tradition (its social, intellectual and 
literary evolution) while at the same time strengthening facility with the language. Conducted 
in French. 

317 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in 
French. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or equivalent. Designed to give the student special competence in the 
control of French as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in French. 

325 Contemporary French Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: French 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Reading and discussion to develop understanding of the social and intellectual problems, trends, 
and contributions of present-day France, while at the same time strengthening facility with the 
language. Conducted in French. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the principal literary forms, 
prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of the literary techniques 
and criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to increase the student's abilities 
in reading, language, and literary criticism. Conducted in French. 

400 French for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: French 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken French, while develop- 
ing the student's pKDwers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
French. 

431 French Literature in the Middle Ages and Renaissance (3) 

Prerequisite: French 31 5 or consent of instructor. The development of French literature from the 1 2th 
through the 16th centuries, through analysis of representative works. Conducted in French. 

441 French Literature in the Century of Revolution (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The principal authors and movements (romanti- 
cism, realism, naturalism, symbolism) of the 19th century. Conducted in French. 

451 French: Literature in the Baroque and Classic Age (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The essence and evolution of 17th-century classi- 
cism, studied principally in the major authors (Corneille, Moli^re, Racine, La Fayette) and in the 
dominant genre (the theater). Conducted in French. 

461 French Literature in the Age of Enlightenment (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. Two complementary aspects of the 18th century: 
reason and feeling, the phUosophes and the current of sensibility. Emphasis on major authors 
(Marivaux, Voltaire, Diderot, Rousseau, Laclos). Conducted In French. 

466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to French, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between French and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic analysis 
to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 


710-^ 3 30 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 309 

471 Senior Seminar: Contemporary French Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: French 315 or consent of instructor. The major figures of the 20th century, including 
the generations of Proust, Apollinaire, Malraux, Sartre and Robbe-Crillet. Conducted in French. 

485 Senior Seminar in French Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: French 431, 441, 451, 461, or senior standing. Exploration of a literary current, period, 
author, genre or problem. Subject will change each time course is given and may be repeated 
for credit. Conducted in French. 

492 Literature of Action in 20th-Century France (3) 

Selected works read, discussed and analyzed in the light of current philosophical trends as well as 
historical and political developments. The works studied might include such titles as: The Coun- 
terfeiters (Cide); Man's fa/eand The Tempation of the West (Malraux); The Wall and What 
is Literature (Sartre); The Plague and Resistance, Rebellion and Death (Camus); Wind, Sand and 
Stars an6 A Sense of Life (Saint-Exupery). Readings and lectures in English. May not be counted 
toward fulfillment of the requirements for the major in French. 

499 ImJependent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in French language or literature to be taken with the consent of the instructor 
and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

520 Old French (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Readings in the medieval literature of northern France represent- 
ing a wide variety of dialects and centuries. Conducted in French. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: French 466 or consent of instructor. It is highly recommended that the student have 
some previous study of Latin. Studies in the phonetic, morphological, syntactic and semantic 
changes that characterize the development of Latin into the French of today. Conducted in 
French. 

557 Graduate Seminar: French Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

571 Graduate Seminar: French Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

575 Graduate Seminar: French Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in French. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in French. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in French and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in French 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


GERMAN COURSES 

German 315 and 375 are prerequisites for all German literature courses at the 400 level. 

101 Fundamental German (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structures of German. Audiolingual assignments are an 
integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in 
German. 

102 Fundamental German (5) 

Prerequisite: German 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of 
German. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. Conducted in German. 


717—4 3 46 


310 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

203 Intermediate German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in sp)eaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in German. 

204 intermediate German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in German. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with German 203. Conducted in German. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with German 204. Conducted in German. 

303 Readings in Scientific German (3) 

Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. Open only to science and mathematics majors. Readings 
reflecting a broad spectrum of writing in the physical and natural sciences and mathematics. 
Special attention given to the development of rapid reading for comprehension. 

315 Introduction to German Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussions in German literature, arts and institutions to develop insights into 
German culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in German. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of Instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in German. 

318 Advanced Composition and Grammar (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. Designed to give the student special competence 
in the control of German as an instrument for free oral and written expression. Conducted in 
German. 

325 Modern German Thought in Science and Culture (3) 

Prerequisite: German 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussion of modern German thought In science, literature, philosophy and art, 
designed to acquaint the student with a broad range of German contributions to present-day 
civilization while strengthening facility with German language. Conducted In German. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: German 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the principal literary forms, 
prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of literary techniques and 
criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to increase the student's abilities in 
reading, language and literary criticism. Conducted in German. 

390 Group Reading and Oral Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: German through fourth semester or consent of Instructor. Oral reading of Horspiele, 
dramatic literature and p>oetry in group session. Emphasis on the practice of reading aloud from 
the printed page with proper pronunciation and intonation with simultaneous discussion of 
surface, inner and personal meaning of the literary work. Conducted in German. 

399 German Phonetics (1) 

Prerequisites: junior standing and consent of Instructor. Detailed analysis of individual problems in 
pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory. May be repeated 
for credit. Conducted in German. 

400 German for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisites: German 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of German while developing 
the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
German. 

430 German Literature to the Baroque (3) (Formerly 451) 

Prerequisite: German 375. Masterpieces of German literature from the HUdebrandsHed to Der 
Abenteuediche SimpHcissimus dir\6 their relationship to cultural, historical and intellectual deve- 
lopments between ca. 800-1670 A.D. Conducted in German. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 311 

440 18th-Century German Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. The principal authors and move- 
ments (Enlightenment, Storm and Stress, Classicism, early Romanticism) of the 18th century. 
Conducted in German. 

450 German Literature of the 19th Century (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375. Significant impulses in 19th-century German literature from 
Romanticism to Naturalism, including examination of decisive philosophic, political, and eco- 
nomic influences. Conducted in German. 

460 20th-Century German Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: German 315, 317 and 375, or consent of instructor. Major German prose, drama and 
poetry of the 20th century. Conducted in German. 

466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to German, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between German and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

485 Senior Seminar in German Literature (3) 

Prerequisites: senior standing in German and consent of instructor. Research and discussion in depth 
of a literary movement, a genre or an author. Subject will vary and will be announced in the 
class schedule. Topics offered in past years have included the Baroque, the Novelle, Brecht, 
Modern Drama, Keller, Poetic Realism, Romantic Period. May be rep>eated for credit with a 
different topic. Conducted in German. 

492 German Literature in Translation (3) 

Open to all students. Reading, discussion and interpretation of relevant German literature with 
emphasis on determining the specific contribution these works have made to world literature and 
the shaping of global philosophies. Authors include Goethe, Schiller, Kafka, Hesse, Mann, Brecht, 
Crass, Hauptmann. Readings and lectures in English. May not be counted toward fulfillment of 
the requirements for the major in German. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in German language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor 
and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: German 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in German. 

557 Graduate Seminar: German Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in 
German. 

571 Graduate Seminar: German Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the class schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

575 Graduate Seminar: German Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced in the class schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Subject will vary and will be announced In the class schedule. 
May be repeated for credit with a different topic. Conducted in German. 

598 Thesis (3-^) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 


312 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in German and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in German 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


HEBREW COURSES 

101 Fundamental Hebrew (3) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

102 Fundamental Hebrew (3) 

Prerequisite 101. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to 
develop control of the sounds and the basic structure of Hebrew. 

203 Intermediate Hebrew (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 or consent of instructor. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, 
reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to 
sentence. Conducted in Hebrew. 

204 Intermediate Hebrew (3) 

Prerequisite: Hebrew 203 or consent of instructor. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, 
reading and writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to 
sentence. Conducted in Hebrew. 

499 independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Hebrew language or literature to be taken with consent of instructor and 
department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 


ITALIAN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Italian (4) 

Intensive practice In listening comprehension, speaking and writing to develop control of the sounds 
and the basic structure of Italian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and 
are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Italian. 

102 Fundamental Italian (4) 

Prerequisite: Italian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of sounds and the basic forms and structure of Italian. 
Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared In the language 
laboratory. Conducted in Italian. 

203 Intermediate Italian (3) 

Prerequisite: Italian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted In Italian. 

204 Intermediate Italian (4) 

Prerequisite: Italian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Italian. 


LATIN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Latin (3) 

Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowledge and a fundamental writing ability 
in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will be applied. 

102 Fundamental Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin TOl or equivalent. Intensive practice to develop a comprehensive reading knowl- 
edge and a fundamental writing ability in Latin. Modern techniques of language instruction will 
be applied. 


731-4 3 13B 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 313 


203 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 102 or equivalent (two years of high school Latin). Intensive reading and writing. 
Selected prose and poetry from the Golden Age. Audiolingual techniques of language learning 
are used when applicable. 

204 Intermediate Latin (3) 

Prerequisite: Latin 203 or equivalent (three years of high school Latin) . Intensive reading and writing. 
Selected prose from the Silver and Middle Ages. Audiolingual techniques of language learning 
are used when applicable. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Latin langauge and Roman literature. To be taken with consent of department 
chairman as a means of meeting special curricular problems. Subject matter will vary. May be 
repeated for credit. 


PORTUGUESE COURSES 

101 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehension, and writing to develop control of the 
sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portuguese. Enrollment restricted to students with 
previous study of a Romance language. Conducted in Portuguese. 

102 Fundamental Portuguese (4) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 101 or equivalent. Listening comprehension, speaking, reading comprehen- 
sion, and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of Portu- 
guese. Enrollment restricted to students with previous study of a Romance language. Conducted 
in Portuguese. 

315 Introduction to Luso-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

Prerequisites: Portuguese 102 or equivalent, reading knowledge of Portuguese or consent of instruc- 
tor. Readings and discussions to develop insights into the main currents of Portuguese culture 
and civilization, their expansion to the New World, and the intellectural and artistic development 
of Brazil from Its discovery to the end of the Second Empire. Conducted In Portuguese. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 102 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instruc- 
tor. Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted In Portuguese. 

325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. Readings and discussion toward developing 
an understanding of the social and intellectural problems, trends, and contributions to Brazil from 
the advent of the Republic. Major emphasis on present day Brazil. Conducted in Portuguese. 

431 Portuguese Literature of the Golden Age (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 315 or consent of instructor. The literature of Portugal's golden age (1500- 
17(X)) . The major works of the Cancioneiros, Gil Vicente, Luis de Cameos and other writers will 
be examined from the point of view of their artistic structure as well as within the context of 
Portuguese culture and civilization. Conducted in Portuguese. 

441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Portuguese 31 5 or consent of instructor. The literature of Brazil from the Colonial period 
to the present. Conducted in Portuguese. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Portuguese language or literature to be taken with the consent of the instructor 
and the department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 


RUSSIAN COURSES 

101 Fundamental Russian (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the language laboratory. Conducted in Russian. 


314 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

102 Fundamental Russian (5) 

Prerequisite: Russian 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structures of 
Russian. Audiolingual assignments are an integral part of the course and are to be prepared in 
the language laboratory. Conducted in Russian. 

203 Intermediate Russian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading, and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Russian. 

204 Intermediate Russian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis/ from sound to sentence. 
Conducted In Russian. 

213 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Russian 203. Conducted in Russian. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice in written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Russian 204. Conducted in Russian. 

303 Readings in Scientific Russian (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 102 or equivalent. Open only to science and mathematics majors. Readings 
reflecting a broad spectrum of writing in the physical and natural sciences and mathematics. 
Special attention given to the development of rapid reading for comprehension. 

315 Introduction to Russian Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Reading and discussion to develop a view of the Russian tradition (its social, intellectual and 
literary evolution) while at the same time strengthening facility with the language. Conducted 
in Russian. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of Instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted In Russian. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 317 or consent of instructor. An introduction to the principal literary forms, 
prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of literary techniques and 
criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to Increase the student's abilities in 
reading, language and literary criticism. Conducted in Russian. 

400 Russian for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 31 7 or consent of instructor. Intensive review of spoken Russian, while develop- 
ing the student's powers of self-expression In the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
Russian. 

431 Early Russian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or consent of instructor. Evolution of Russian literature from the medieval 
ecclesiastic traditions and transition to Baroque and Classicism. French and German influence 
on the 18th century. Transition to Romanticism and the beginnings of Realism. Conducted in 
Russian. 

441 The Works of Tolstoy and Dostoevsky (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 315 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Major works of Tolstoy and Dosto- 
evsky in their intellectual and historical setting and their impact on Russian and world literature. 
Conducted iri Russian. 

451 The Golden Age of Russian Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of major literary works of the first half of the 19th century 
which exemplify cultural and intellectual movements in Russia. Conducted in Russian. 

461 Russian Literature from 1917 (3) 

Prerequisite: Russian 31 5 or equivalent, or consent of instructor. Representative works of outstanding 
modern Russian writers with an emphasis on The Nobel Prize winners (M. Sholokhov and B. 
Pasternak) . Analysis and discussion of their prose and poetry in the light of the social problems 
of present-day Russia. Conducted In Russian. 


Foreign Languages and Literatures 315 


499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in Russian language or literature to be taken with the consent of the instructor 
and department chairman. May be rep)eated for credit. 


SPANISH COURSES 

Spanish 315, 316 and 375 are prerequisites for ail Spanish literature courses at the 400 level. 

101 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, reading and writing to develop control of 
the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. Audiolingual assignments are an integral 
part of the course and are to be prepared in the langauge laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 

102 Fundamental Spanish (5) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking, 
reading and writing to develop control of the sounds and the basic forms and structure of Spanish. 
Audiolingual assignments are an Integral part of the course and are to be prepared in the language 
laboratory. Conducted in Spanish. 

203 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent. Intensive practice in speaking, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted In Spanish. 

204 Intermediate Spanish (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 203 or equivalent. Intensive practice In speakir>g, understanding, reading and 
writing based on cultural and literary materials. Linguistic analysis from sound to sentence. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

213 Intermediate composition (2) 

Practice In written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Spanish 203. Conducted In Spanish. 

214 Intermediate Composition (2) 

Practice In written expression based on cultural and literary materials. May be taken concurrently 
with Spanish 204. Conducted in Spanish. 

315 Introduction to Spanish Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Readings and discussions in Spanish literature, arts and Institutions to develop insights into 
Spanish culture, while strengthening facility with the language. Conducted in Spanish. 

316 Introduction to Spanish-American Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of Instructor. 
Reading and discussion in Spanish-American literature, arts and institutions to develop insights 
into Spanish-American literature and culture while strengthening facility with the language. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 204 or equivalent. Open to lower division students with consent of instructor. 
Emphasis on free oral and written expression. Conducted in Spanish. 

318 Advanced Spanish Syntax and Composition (3) 

Emphasis on linguistic problems encountered by the Spanish /English bilingual student in connection 
with his written expression. Conducted In Spanish. 

375 Introduction to Literary Forms (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of Instructor. An introduction to the principal literary forms, 
prose fiction, poetry, drama and the essay and to the major concepts of the literary techniques 
and criticism. Close analysis and interpretation of various texts to Increase the student's abilities 
in reading, language and literary criticism. Conducted in Spanish. 

399 Spanish Phonetics (1) 

Prerequisite: junior standing and consent of Instructor. Detailed analysis of students' specific prob- 
lems in pronunciation followed by intensive work in class and the language laboratory until 
articulatory proficiency is achieved. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 


316 Foreign Languages and Literatures 

400 Spanish for Advanced Students and Teachers (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 317 or consent of instructor. Intensive study of spoken Spanish, while develop- 
ing the student's powers of self-expression in the spoken and written language. Conducted in 
Spanish. 

415 Contemporary Spanish Culture (3) 

Prerequisite:^ Spanish 315 or consent of instructor. An analysis and study of the cultural — social, 
economical, political — characteristics of contemporary Spanish life. Conducted in Spanish. 

430 Spanish Literature to Neoclassicism (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 315 and 375. Spanish literature from its beginnings to 1700, with special 
emphasis on the outstanding representative works of each genre. Conducted in Spanish. 

440 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 316 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from The Conquest 
to 1888. Conducted in Spanish. 

441 Spanish-American Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 316 or consent of instructor. Spanish-American Literature from modernismo 
to the present. Conducted in Spanish. 

461 Spanish Literature Since Neoclassicism (3) 

Representative works of the 19th and 20th centuries. Conducted in Spanish. 

466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

The analytical procedures of general linguistics as applied to Spanish, with special attention to 
structural contrasts between Spanish and English. Emphasis on the application of linguistic 
analysis to the teaching of modern foreign languages. 

467 Dialectology: Current Trends in Modern Spanish (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 317 or 318; 400 or equivalent; and 466, the latter of which may be taken 
concurrently. Focuses on the differences in phonology, morphology, syntax and lexicon found 
in the linguistic patterns of all Spanish-speaking regions. Includes the influence and contribution 
of cultural and historical features, as well as the continuing interactions of Spanish and English. 
(3 hours lecture) 

468 Spanish-English Contrastive Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Spanish 317 or 318; 400 or equivalent; and 466, the latter of which may be taken 
concurrently. Theory and techniques of contrasting phonological grammatical and lexical struc- 
tures of Spanish and English, with special emphasis on comparison of the two languages as related 
to the speaker of both languages. Development of specific professional means to deal with 
problems of linguistic interference encountered in multilingual classroom situations. (3 hours 
lecture) 

472 Senior Seminar: Cervantes and the Age of Humanism (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 430 or consent of Instructor. Cervantes' artistic creation and its relation to the 
culture of the 16th century. Sp>ecial emphasis on Don Quixote and the Novelas ejemplares. 
Conducted in Spanish. 

475 Senior Seminar: Contemporary Literature of Spain (3) 

The Generation of '98 and 20th-century theatre, poetry and novel. Conducted in Spanish. 

485 Senior Seminar: Spanish Literature (3) 

Prerequisite: senior standing In Spanish. Exploration of a literary current period, author, genre or 
problem in the literature of Spain and Spanish America. Subject will change each time the course 
Is given. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects in Spanish language or literature to be taken with consent of Instructor 
and department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

510 Graduate Seminar: Phonology (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

530 Graduate Seminar: Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Spanish 466 or consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

556 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

557 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Poetry (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of Instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 


Geography 317 


567 Graduate Seminar: Spanish-American Novel (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

571 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Prose (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Spanish Drama (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Conducted in Spanish. 

576 Graduate Seminar: Major Writers (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. Conducted in Spanish. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: recommendation of student's graduate committee. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: fluency in Spanish and consent of instructor. Supervised research projects in Spanish 
language or literature. May be repeated for credit. 


SWAHILI COURSES 

101 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Intensive practice in listening comprehension, speaking and writing to master the basic structure of 
Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written communication. Conducted in Swahili. 
(Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 104) 

102 Fundamental Swahili (4) 

Prerequisite: Swahili 101 or equivalent. Intensive practice In listening comprehension, speaking and 
writing to master the basic structure of Swahili and the requisite skills for both oral and written 
communication. Conducted in Swahili. (Same as Afro-Ethnic Studies 105) 


DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 


FACULTY 


Ronald Helln 

Acting Department Chairman 

Robert Brown, Arthur Earick, Wayne Engstrom, Cary Hannes, William Ketteringham, Tso-Hwa Lee, 
Leonard Pettyjohn, Bill Puzo, Gertrude Reith, Imre Sutton 
The major in geography provides knowledge concerning variety and change In the earth's physical 
foundation and in man's economic, cultural and political relationship to that foundation. In doing 
so It contributes to a broad, liberal education and furnishes sound preparation for employment In 
business, planning, and government service. The field also provides a foundation for teaching on the 
elementary and secondary levels and for advanced geographic study on the graduate level leading 
to university and university teaching and research. 

Students and counselors are advised that departmental offerings are numbered according to instruc- 
tional level and course content. These criteria are applied in the following ways: 


Instructional level 

survey courses designed primarily for non-majors 100-199 

survey courses designed primarily for majors 200-299 

courses designed for students with general needs and not normally applicable to 

graduate programs in geography 300-399 

courses designed for students with special needs; prerequisites cited are strictly inter- 
preted 400-499 

courses for graduate students and qualified undergraduate students 500-599 


Course content 
general courses: 
physical courses: 
regional courses: 
human courses: 
technical courses: 
special studies: 


00-09 (e.g.. Geography 100 or 500) 
10-29 (e.g., Geography 211 or 323) 
30-49 (e.g.. Geography 342 or 433) 
50-79 (e.g., Geography 250 or 367) 
80-89 (e.g.. Geography 280 or 381 ) 
90-99 (e.g.. Geography 499 or 599) 


318 Geography 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

The major consists of at least 36 units of geography, including no more than 1 3 units of lower division 
work and excluding all work applied toward the general education requirement. To fulfill the major 
a student must complete the geography core (Geography 1(X), 211, 250 and 280) and a 24 unit 
concentration in upper division geography, including at least one course from each of the following 
groups: Physical, Regional, Human, Technical. 

No unit credit toward the major will be allowed for geography courses in which a grade of D is 
received. Content credit for such courses may be allowed by the student's adviser. 

TEACHING MINOR IN GEOGRAPHY 

The minor in geography is intended as a second field for persons completing a major in another 
discipline in preparation for a teaching credential. It is designed to give a basic understanding of earth 
science and geographic relationships helpful to the classroom teacher. The program provides a 
balance between the physical and social sciences. 

The minor consists of at least 21 units of work In geography. Including a minimum of nine units from 
the geography core (1(X), 211, 250 and 280) and a minimum of nine upper division units selected 
from at least three of the following groups: Physical, Regional, Human, Technical. 

MASTER OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY 

This program provides advanced study in geographic concepts, techniques and methods. Through 
seminars and research it develops the analytical and Interpretive abilities of the student, and provides 
requisite background for employment in teaching, government and business. 

Prerequisites 

Admission to the program requires the equivalent of 27 semester units of geography distributed as 
follows: (1) nine units in Introductory geography; (2) nine units in upper division physical and 
human geography, including at least three units in physical and three units in human geography; (3) 
six units In upper division techniques, including three units in cartography; and (4) three units In 
upper division regional geography. A 3.0 (B) average in all geography courses Is required prior to 
classification In the program. Course or grade deficiencies may be made up with consent of the 
departmental %xdAua\e committee. After completion of all prerequisites and removal of deficiencies, 
if any, the student Is reviewed for classification by the departmental committee, which then 
supervises the student in the formulation of an official study plan. 


Study Plan Units 

Geography seminars 9-1 2 

Geography 597 (Project) or Geography 598 (Thesis) 6 

Elective upper division or graduate geography, including three units of technique .... 9-6 

Upper division or graduate work in related fields 6 

Total 30 


Candidacy Is attained on the satisfactory completion, i.e., B or better In all, of 12 approved units of 
work, including at least three units In a 500-level geography seminar. A written or oral examination 
may be required for advancement to candidacy. Each candidate normally prepares two three-unit 
research projects, but, if recommended by his personal committee, he may substitute a six-unit 
thesis. Students interested in foreign area studies are expected to demonstrate a proficiency in a 
suitable foreign language. 

All graduate students are to confer with their adviser sometime during the first two weeks of each 
semester. For further information, consult the Department of Geography. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


17—4 3 305 






Geography 321 


GEOGRAPHY COURSES 

100 Man and the Land (3) 

An introduction to world geography, with emphasis on the world's major regions and on their use 
and modification by man. 

150 Environment in Crisis (3) 

A geographic analysis and approach to the problems of man and his environment, dealing with man's 
interpretation of the environment and his use and misuse thereof. Factors of discussion will 
include population, nutrition, health, settlement, pollution, resource utilization and local environ- 
mental problems. Not acceptable on the geography major. 

211 Physical Geography (4) 

A study of the basic elements of the physical environment (e.g., weather, climate, landforms, oceans, 
vegetation and soils) and an analysis of their world distribution and interrelationships. (3 hours 
lecture, 2 hours activity) 

250 Human Geography (3) 

Systematic study of the elements of the man-made environment as correlated with their physical 
and cultural foundations (e.g., population distributions, sociocultural groupings, health and nutri- 
tion, land utilization, transportation and trade, allocation of land and territory, and rural and urban 
settlement). 

280 Introduction to Geographical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 1(X) or consent of instructor. Designed to help students Interpret physical 
and human features and activities of the landscape. An understanding will be gained by first-hand 
field experience together with the utilization of graphics and written material. (1 hour lecture, 
3 hours activity, two Saturday field trips) 

312 Geomorphology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 21 1 or Earth Science 101 . A study of the development of landforms through 
an analysis of the processes that construct and modify them. 

323 Weather and Climate (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 21 1 or consent of instructor. A study of atmospheric elements and controls, 
climatic classification systems, and world climatic distributions. 

330 Geography of California (3) 

Description and analysis of the geographic regions of California — their environmental diversity, 
population distribution, economic development and current problems. 

332 Geography of Anglo-America (3) 

Prerequisite: (Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of the United States and 
Canada emphasizing the interrelated physical and cultural features that give geographic personal- 
ity both to the individual regions as well as the individual countries. 

333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A systematic and regional survey of Middle 
and South America with particular emphasis on the interrelationships of the physical and social 
factors of the area. 

336 Geography of Europe (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or upper division standing. Description and analysis of physical environ- 
ments and human occupance patterns in Europe west of the Soviet Union. 

338 Geography of the Soviet Union (3) 

Prerequisite: (Geography 100 or upper division standing. Character of and bases for the regional 
diversity of man and land in the Soviet Union. 

340 Geography of Asia (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. A regional study of Asian nations, exclusive 
of the Soviet Union and Southwest Asia, showing the interrelationships of physical and cultural 
characteristics with special emphasis on the growing significance, In economic, social and 
political terms, of such countries as China, India and Japan. 

342 Geography of the Middle East and North Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of Instructor. The physical, human and regional geography 
of Southwest Asia and the coastal countries of Africa from Spanish Sahara to Somalia. Emphases 
will be placed on geographic considerations of Israel, Egypt and the Arabian Peninsula. 

^ Geography of Subsaharan Africa (3) 

Prerequisite: (Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, human and regional geography 
of Africa south of the Sahara. 


11—83097 


2£— 4 3 310 


322 Geography 

346 Australia and the Pacific Islands (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 100 or consent of instructor. The physical, cultural, and regional geography 
of Australia, New Zealand, Melanesia, Micronesia and Polynesia. 

350 Conservation of the American Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. A survey of resource-use problems and the principles of 
conservation, with discussions of philosophy, ethics, public policy and environmental law. 

355 Population Perspectives (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. An introduction to spatial analysis of demographic variables 
with an emphasis on the economic and social factors influencing population distribution and 
mobility. World patterns will be discussed with an emphasis on the United States. 

360 Economic Geography (3) (Formerly 260) 

A systematic inquiry Into the world distribution of economic activities: agriculture, extractive and 
manufacturing industries, transportation and tertiary services. 

367 Political Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 250 or consent of instructor. The political map of the world with special 
reference to the geopolitical structure of states, dependencies and other politically organized 
areas. 

370 Urban Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. The city as a geographic unit; urban settlements as regional 
centers; city-region relationships; the structure of villages, towns and cities, and their historical 
developments; case studies. 

381 Cartography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. Compilation and construction of maps and 
graphs as geographic tools, with emphasis on the principles of effective cartographic representa- 
tion. (1 hour lecture, 6 hours laboratory) 

412 Regional Geomorphology of the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 312. Examination of the major physiographic provinces of the United States. 
Special emphasis is placed on the record that present and past geomorphic processes have left 
on the landscape. 

423 Physical Climatology (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 323 or consent of instructor. A study of selected topics in atmospheric 
science, including heat-transfer, atmospheric motion, synoptic and climatic analysis of weather 
data, and the effects of urban environment on the atmosphere. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

430 Problems of California Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 330 or consent of instructor. A seminar analyzing selected geographic 
problems of California, such as urbanization, transportation, water supply and pollution. 

431 Man's Impact on the Southern California Environment (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 330 or consent of Instructor. A seminar analyzing the Southern California 
environment and the geographic problems which have resulted from man's impact on the land 
and its resources. 

433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 333 or consent of instructor. A seminar for advanced students in Latin 
American studies or geography. Studies of contemporary interest dealing with man and his 
development in the area of Latin America. Specific content of the course will vary from year to 
year, but major stress will be placed upon the larger countries of the region. 

453 Cultural Ecology (3) 

Prerequisite: upper division standing. A seminar for students in geography, related disciplines and 
in environmental studies. A topical treatment (e.g., nutrition, health, land tenure, technology) 
of the ecological approach to man-land relationships. 

472 Urban Growth and Planning (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 370 or consent of instructor. A seminar on urban development with an 
emphasis on the decentralizing forces operating In contemporary urban space; identification of 
trends in the planning process. 

477 Historical Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. A seminar analyzing significant geographic 
Influences on selected aspects of American history. 


Geography 323 


482 Advanced Cartography — Thematic Mapping (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 381 and consent of instructor. Application of photographic techniques and 
cartographic analysis to advanced problems In map compilation and design. (1 hour lecture, 6 
hours laboratory) 

484 Airphoto and Image Interpretation (3) 

Prerequisite: junior, senior or graduate standing and consent of instructor. Use of aerial photography, 
space photography and other remote sensors as tools and research sources. Emphasis on inter- 
pretation of physical and cultural elements of the landscape. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

485 Quantitative Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: geography core or consent of instructor. An introduction to spatial analysis and geo- 
graphic application of basic concepts of descriptive and inferential statistics. Includes some use 
of the electronic computer. (2 hours lecture, 2 hours activity) 

487 Research, Bibliography and Writing (3) (Formerly 587) 

Prerequisite: senior standing or consent of instructor. Directed study in how to prepare a written 
report. Includes a consideration of the various resources (e.g., graphic, textual and statistical) 
and techniques (e.g., data-gathering, writing, documentation, editing) that geographers utilize in 
the preparation of manuscripts for presentation or publication. 

488 Field Methods (3) 

Prerequisite: Geography 280 and consent of Instructor. Analysis and interpretation of urban and rural 
land use and settlement with specific references to geographic field problems. Application of 
geographic techniques and tools to local field studies. Saturday field sessions. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students. Student must have consent of instructor under whom study will be 
undertaken before enrolling. May be repeated once for credit. 

500 Seminar in the Evolution of Geographic Thought (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. An Inquiry into the nature, scope, and 
development of the geographic discipline. 

530 Seminar in Regional Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected regions or selected 
topics within a regional setting. May be repeated once for credit. 

550 Seminar in Human Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected topics pertaining to 
cultural, political or social geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

560 Seminar in Resource Geography (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing or consent of instructor. A seminar on selected problems in resource 
utilization, land use planning and economic geography. May be repeated once for credit. 

571 Seminar in Urban Problems (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of instructor. An In-depth study of selected urban 
problems. Topics will vary from semester to semester and will allow for concerns of the partici- 
pants. 

597 Project (3) 

Prerequisite: advancement to candidacy and consent of adviser. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units of credit. 

598 Thesis (3-6) 

Prerequisite: advancement to candidacy and consent of adviser. May be repeated for a maximum 
of six units of credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students by consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 


GEOLOGY 

(See Earth Science under the Department of Science and Mathematics Education) 


324 History 


DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 

FACULTY 

George Giacumakis 
Department Chairman 

George Baker, Gordon Bakken, Warren Beck, Leland Bellot, Lauren Breese, Giles Brown,* Lawrence 
de Graaf, jack Elenbaas, George Etue, Robert Feldman, Thomas Flickema, Charles Frazee, Arthur 
Hansen, B. Carmon Hardy, Harry Jeffrey, James Jordan, Frederic Miller, Michael Onorato, 
Charles Povlovich, Jackson Putnam, Ronald Rietveld, Danton Sailor, Seymour Scheinberg, Gary 
Shumway, Cameron Stewart, Ernest Toy,* David Van Deventer, Nelson Woodard, Kinji Ken 
Yada, Ka-Che Yip, Cecile Zinberg 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The study of history is indispensable to the education of civilized man. The undergraduate major 
in history is designed to provide cultural enrichment, a sense of alternative, and perspectives 
especially relevant to a society confronted with widespread institutional change. The department 
offers an extensive number of courses which expose the student to man's rich and diverse experi- 
ence. In addition to subject matter, the department gives particular emphasis to various methodolo- 
gies and ways of thinking about mankind's past. The major may be pursued to fulfill various 
professional and cultural objectives common to a liberal arts program. It serves, especially, as a 
preparation for teaching, law, government, and other services, and as the foundation for advanced 
study at the graduate level. 

The undergraduate program for the history major contains three well defined levels of study: 
introductory, intermediate and advanced. At the introductory level, the student has the opportunity 
to enroll in topical or survey courses in various fields. At the intermediate level, the student builds 
on the foundations he has established in early study, extending his understanding and moving toward 
greater sophistication in the use of historical materials. At the advanced level, he will devote himself 
to seminar work and independent study in his area or areas of specialization, at which time he will 
be required to apply his knowledge and training in original and challenging ways. 

The undergraduate major requires a total of 40 units: 13 in introductory classes and 27 in intermediate 
and advanced courses. At the primary level, each student is to enroll in History 100, Introduction 
to History. He must also complete four topical or survey offerings. At the intermediate level. History 
399, Historical Methodology, must be taken along with 18 units, six each in the three fields of United 
States history; European history; and Latin American, Asian or African history. At the advanced level 
the student will be required to enroll in a research seminar and any other elective, at the upper 
division level, which he may choose. 

Except for History 100, all courses offered in the department may be counted toward fulfillment of 
the general education and social science requirement for the bachelor's degree at this university. 
Beyond this, any American history class will satisfy the California State requirements in U.S. history. 
Students majoring in history are encouraged to take work in other of the social sciences and 
humanities. Those Intending to do graduate work In history should commence the study of at least 
one foreign language appropriate to the pursuit of advanced study in their particular specialty. 

Program of Study for the Major 

1. Introductory requirements: 13 units 

A. History 100 (prerequisite for Intermediate and advanced courses) * 

B. Four courses (100-200 level) from three of the following four fields. These may be survey 
and/or topical courses: 

1. U.S. history (170A,B and/or 210 topic courses) 

• University administrative officer 

• Students transferring from accredited institutions who have completed nine or more semester units of work in introductory or survey 

history courses are exempt from this requirement. 


History 325 

2 European and ancient Mediterranean (110A,B and/or 220 topic courses) 

3. Latin America, Asian and African (230, 240, 250 topic courses) 

4. World or comparative history (101 A, B and/or 260 topic courses) 

2. Intermediate requirements: 21 units 

A. History 399 

B. At least six units of U.S. history 

C. At least six units of European history 

D. At least six units in Latin America, Asian or African history 

3. Advanced Requirements: 6 units 

A. History 490 

B. Three units of elective beyond the introductory level 

TEACHING MINOR IN HISTORY 

The teaching minor in history is composed of units in history exclusive of the general education 


requirements: 

Recommended teaching minor: Units 

Introductory courses 9 

Electives at the intermediate and advanced levels 12 

Total 21 


MASTER OF ARTS IN HISTORY 

The Master of Arts in History is designed to improve the student's academic and professional 
competence for educational services at the elementary, secondary and community university levels 
as preparation for advanced graduate work toward the doctoral degree in history. It is relevant to 
various other specialties in public or private enterprise and general cultural or community service. 
The program aims to deepen the students understanding of man's condition through a careful study 
of human experience. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisite to this master's degree is an undergraduate major in history with at least a CPA of 3.0 
in the upper division history courses. Each student's background and record are evaluated by the 
department graduate program adviser. Satisfactory scores on the aptitude test and the advanced test 
in history of the Graduate Record Examination are required. 

Students with limited subject, grade, or breadth deficiencies may be considered for admission to the 
program upon completing courses approved by the graduate program adviser in history in addition 
to those required for the degree, with at least a B average. 

Study Plan 

Of the 30 units of adviser-approved graduate courses on the study plan for the degree, 1 8 must be 
in appropriate work at the 500-level, and six must be in other supportive social sciences or related 
fields. The required courses are: 

History 501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3 units) 

History 590 History and Historians (3 units) 

Plan I: 

A primary focus in one area in which a field is intensively developed. This results in a specific topic 
of research with a written thesis as the final product (History 598, Thesis: 3-6 units). 

An oral examination on the thesis and the coursework will be required upon completion of the 
coursework but prior to the final draft of the thesis. 

Plan II: 

The focus in this plan is in two fields not found in the same general area. There is a minimum 
requirement of one graduate research seminar besides History 501 and 590. There is also a minimum 
requirement of one graduate reading seminar in the recent interpretations of history in the particular 
fields of interest. 


326 History 

A written comprehensive in each of the two fields will be required upon completion of the program. 
Students in the History Department's graduate program must demonstrate a broad cultural under- 
standing of one or more foreign countries relevant to the student's area of specialization. This 
requirement may be met by a reading knowledge of an appropriate foreign language or an approved 
selection of comparative studies (12 units post-B.A.), but the option chosen must be approved by 
the student's adviser. In certain programs, an examination in statistics may be substituted for the 
language requirement. 

For further information, consult the Department of History. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


HISTORY COURSES 

100 Introduction to History (1) 

Designed to introduce the new history major to his academic discipline through exposure to the 
following topics: the uses and significance of history; the nature of history; areas and fields of 
history; the language and vocabulary of history; and methods of studying history. Required of 
all lower division majors. 

101A World History to 1500 (3) 

The history of mankind from earliest times to 15(X) A.D. Special attention is given to the definition, 
evolution, and interaction of the major civilizations. 

101B World History Since 1500 (3) 

Global history during the past four centuries, with special emphasis on the interaction between the 
expanding West and the non-Western areas of the world. 

110A Western Civilization to the 17th Century (3) 

The study of man and Western institutions from their beginnings until the middle of the 17th century. 

110B Western Civilizations from 1648 ( 3) 

The study of man and the modernization of Western Institutions from 1 648 to the present. 

170A United States to 1877 (3) 

A survey of the political, social, economic, and cultural development of the United States to 1877. 
Attention Is given to Old World background, rise of the new nation, sectional problems, the Civil 
War and Reconstruction. Satisfies the state requirement in U.S. history. 

170B United States Since 1877 (3) 

A survey of U.S. history from the late 19th century to the present. Attention is given to economic 
transformation, political reform movements, social, cultural, and Intellectual changes, and the 
role of the United States in world affairs. Satisfies the state requirement in U.S. history. 

210 American Topical Courses (3) 

Introductory American history courses. 

220 European Topical Courses (3) 

Introductory European history courses. 

230 Latin American Topical Courses (3) 

Introductory Latin American history courses. 

240 African Topical Courses (3) 

Introductory African history courses. 

250 Asian Topical Courses (3) 

Introductory Asian history courses. 

260 World or Comparative Topical Courses (3) 

Introductory world or comparative history courses. 

340 Ancient and Medieval Britain (3) (Formerly 340A) 

The history of Britain from 55 B.C. to 1485. Emphasis on the constitutional, institutional and cultural 
aspects of Roman, Celtic, Anglo-Saxon, Norman and Plantagenet Britain. 

341 Tudor-Stuart England (3) 

The history of England from the accession of Henry VII to the Glorious Revolution. Emphasis on the 
political. Institutional, ecclesiastical and cultural aspects of the period of the Tudors and Stuarts. 


History 327 


342 History of England and Great Britain (3) (Formerly 340B) 

A study of the political, economic and social history of Great Britain from the later Stuarts to the 
present. Particular stress on the modification of the parliamentary system and the growth of 
economic and social democracy within Britain and upon the development of responsible political 
systems in the dependent territories. 

350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

A survey of the pre-Columbian cultures; the conquests by Spain and Portugal and the European 
background of these countries; the development of the socioeconomic, cultural, and governmen- 
tal institutions in colonial life; the background of revolutions and the wars for independence. 

350B Republican Latin America (3) 

A survey of the Latin American republic since 1826, emphasizing the struggle for responsible 
government, socioeconomic, and cultural changes, and the role of U.S. foreign policy. 

383 History of California (3) 

A survey of the political, economic, and social history of California from the aboriginal inhabitants 
to the present, tracing the development of contemporary Institutions and the historical back- 
ground of current Issues. 

399 Historical Methodology (3) 

A study of historical knowledge in relation to general knowledge; an introduction to the plurality of 
approaches in the analysis of history through the social sciences and humanities. Special empha- 
sis will be placed upon the application of theory In historical Investigations and upon forms of 
historical communication. Required of ail majors. 

401 European Intellectual History from 1500 to the Present (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. The history of the competing ideas in European history from 1 500 
to the present which have entered into the formation of modern European institutions. 

412A Ancient Near East — Mesopotamia (3) 

Prerequisite: History 110A. A study of the political, socioeconomic, religious, and literary history of 
Mesopotamian culture from the rise of the Sumerian city-states to Alexander the Great, a period 
of over three mlllenia. This will include discussion of the Sumerians, Assyrians, Babylonians, 
Hurrians and Persians. 

412B Ancient Near East — East Mediterranean (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 lOA. A study of ancient Egypt from early dynastic times In the third millennium 
B.C. to the conquest of Alexander the Great. The history of the Syro-Palestinian region will be 
studied In light of its migrations an International culture. A careful study of the Hebrews and their 
contributions to modern civilization will be included. 

415A Classical Greece (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 10A or consent of instructor. A study of the civilization of ancient Greece. This 
course traces the rise and flourishing of the classical city-states; considerable attention Is devoted 
to the literary and philosophic contributions to our modern civilization. 

415B Hellenistic Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 lOA or consent of instructor. A study of the Hellenistic synthesis and the new 
patterns in government, the arts and sciences, philosophy and literature that appeared between 
the Macedonian conquest and the intervention of Rome. 

417A Roman Republic (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 lOA or consent of instructor. A study of the development of Roman social and 
political institutions under the republic. 

417B Roman Empire (3) 

Prerequisite: History 11 OA or consent of instructor. A study of Roman imperial institutions and 
culture. Attention is also given to the rise of Christianity. 

419 The Byzantine Empire (3) 

An historical survey of the East Roman Empire from Constantine to the Ottoman Conquest of 1453. 
Special attention to institutional aspects of Byzantine society: church, state, the economy, law 
and culture. 

423A Medieval Europe, 300-1000 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 lOA or consent of instructor. The genesis of European society from the decline 
of Rome to the age of the Vikings. Particular attention is given to the transmission of classical 
elements into Christian thought and culture; to the barbarian migrations which culminated In the 
Carolingian Empire; and to the impact of the Vikings on Northern Europe. 


328 History 

423B Medieval Europe, 1000-1400 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 110A or consent of instructor. A topical approach is employed with particular 
attention given to Normandy and the Norman Conquest, technology and social change, feudal- 
ism, Gothic art and Scholasticism. 

425 A The Renaissance (3) 

The history of Europe from 1400 to 1525 with emphasis upon the beginnings of capitalism, the 
beginnings of the modern state, humanism, the pre-Reformation and the church on the eve of 
the Reformation. 

425B The Reformation (3) 

The history of Europe from 1525 to 1648; deals with the Protestant and Catholic Reformations; the 
religious wars; the price rise; royal absolution; the rise of science. 

426 Rise of Modern Europe, 164ft-1763 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 1 OB. European diplomatic history and the balance of power from 1 648 to 1 763. 
Attention is given to the social and philosophical developments of the period. 

427 Europe in the Era of the French Revolution and Napoleon (3) 

A survey of European history from 1763 to 1815. Emphasis is placed on the politics, society, and 
culture of the Old Regime, the influence of the Enlightenment, the impact of the French Revolu- 
tion on Europe, and the establishment of French hegemony by Napoleon. 

428 19th-Century Europe (3) 

Europe from 1815 to 1914. An examination of the political, economic, social, and cultural trends in 
Eruopean history from the Congress of Vienna to the outbreak of World War I. Special attention 
is given to the emerging forces of nationalism, liberalism, socialism, and secularism. 

429 Europe Since 1914 (3) 

Prerequisite: History HOB. Survey of events from the beginning of World War I to the present. 
Special emphasis given to the economic, political, social, diplomatic, and intellectual trends of 
20th-century Europe. 

432 Germany Since 1648 ( 3) 

Prerequisite: History 1 10A,B. The evolution of Germany from the Peace of Westphalia to the present. 
Emphasis is placed on political, social, economic, diplomatic and cultural trends in the 19th and 
20th centuries. 

434A Russia to 1890 (3) 

Prerequisite: History HOB. An analysis of the historical developments from the establishment of the 
Russian state at Kiev through the great reforms, the revolutionary movement and reaction of the 
19th century. Emphasis is placed upon the shaping of contemporary Russia. 

434B The Russian Revolutions and the Soviet Regime (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An evaluation of the 1905 and 1917 revolutions and the subse- 
quent consolidation of power under the Communist regime. Chief emphasis is placed upon the 
continuity and change In Russian social, political, cultural Institutions and foreign policy effected 
by the impact of Marxist-Leninist- Stalinist Ideology. 

437 East Europe Since 1815 (3) 

The political and social history of the east European peoples from the Congress of Vienna to the 
present. 

439 History of Spain (3) 

Development of Hispanic civilization from the earliest times to the present. 

450 Change in Contemporary Latin America (3) 

An analysis of political, social and economic change in present-day Latin America. 

453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

A history of Mexico from the pre-Columbian period to 1910. The course stresses the Indian heritage, 
the impact upon the native civilizations of the Spanish Conquest and the blending of Hispanic 
Institutions with those of the first Mexicans. The uniqueness of Mexican culture in the world as 
expressed In its art, literature, religion and philosophy will be examined In detail. 

453B Mexico Since 1910 (3) 

A study of the background of the Mexican Revolution of 1910 and the revolution itself from 1910 
to 1921 stressing the political, economic, and social features; special attention will be paid to the 
Revolution as the first of the great upheavals of the 20th century and the relationship of the United 
States to Mexico during these turbulent years. The quest for political stability in the 1920s and 
1930s along with economic and social changes will be studied but stress will also be placed on 
cultural renaissance of modern Mexico. 


History 329 


454 Argentina, Brazil, Chile (3) 

A history of Argentina, Brazil and Chile, with special attention to Chile. 

456 Tropical Africa to 1900 (3) 

The history of tropical Africa from earliest times to the colonial era. 

457 Tropical Africa in the 20th Century (3) 

A study of the Impact of the colonial period upon the peoples of tropical Africa Including a 
comparative analysis of the various systems of colonial administration; the factors contributing 
to the rise of African nationalism and the achievement of lndep)endence; and the problems 
encountered by these new nations. 

458A Southern Africa from Earliest Times to the 20th Century (3) 

A study of the culture and history of the indigenous peoples of southern Africa; and the development 
and impact of European interests in this area with particular emphasis on the history of South 
Africa to the Union of 1910. 

458B Southern Africa in the 20th Century (3) 

A survey of 20th-century developments in the Union (Republic) of South Africa, Central Africa (the 
Rhodesias and Nyasaland) and the Portuguese colonies with emphasis on the political, economic 
and social ramifications of race relations. 

460 Problems of the Contemporary Far East (3) 

A topics course dealing with events in the major Far Eastern nations since World War II, with 
emphasis upon problems of nationalism, communism and economic development in China, 
japan, Korea and Southeast Asia. 

461A The Far East (3) 

A study of the political, social and economic conditions In China, Japan and Korea prior to World 
War I, as well as the rise of American power in the Far East. 

461 B The Far East (3) 

A study of the developments in China and japan that led to the SIno-japanese conflict, japan's 
decision to fight the United States, the rise of Communist China and the growth of postwar japan. 

462A History of China (3) 

Chinese history from ancient times to the middle of the 17th century, with special attention to the 
development of society, thought, economy and political institutions. 

462B History of China (3) 

Chinese history from the middle of the 17th century to the 1950s. A study of China's internal 
developments and foreign intrusion, with special attention to the rise of modern Chinese national- 
ism and Intellectual developments In the Republican period, as well as the attempts at moderniza- 
tion and the triumph of communism. 

463A History of Japan (3) 

A study of the social, political, and economic history of japan until 1868, with emphasis upon the 
Tokugawa era. 

463B History of Japan (3) 

A study emphasizing the rise of the modern Japanese state, Japanese imperialism and the postwar 
era. 

464A Southeast Asia in the Modern World (3) 

A study of the social, political and economic development in Southeast Asia from 1500 to the 
establishment of the colonial empires of the West In the 19th century. 

464B Southeast Asia in the Modern World (3) 

A study of Southeast Asia under the Impact of imperialism and the effects of decolonization. 

465A History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from ancient times to the fall of the first Islamic 
empire in India, 1526. In addition to political developments, the course includes an examination 
of evolving religious and social institutions: Hinduism, Buddhism, class and caste. 

465B History of India (3) 

A survey of the history of the Indian subcontinent from the beginning of the Mughul Empire, 1526 
to the Indian Mutiny of 1857. The course includes an examination of European intrusions and 
the crystallization of British supremacy in India. 

466A Arab Islamic Age (3) 

Prerequisite: History llOA. The study of the events transpiring in the Middle East from the Roman 
world to the period of the Crusades. This will include the impact of the Islamic civilization upon 
the Middle East society. 


330 History 

466B The Turkish World (3) 

Prerequisite: History 11 OB. The development of the countries of the Middle East following the 
Crusades to the present. This will Include the Ottoman Empire, European colonialism In the 
Middle East, an the modern Middle East. 

467 The Past and the Present in the Middle East (3) (Offered during some summer 
sessions only) 

This course Is a study tour to one of three geographical areas in the Middle East. The three areas 
which will be visited during three different summer periods of 22 days each, are: North Africa 
consisting of Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia, Libya and Egypt; the East Mediteranean consisting of 
Greece, Lebanon, Jordan, Israel and Egypt; and Turkey, Iraq and Iran. The objective of these study 
tours goes well beyond a visitation of important historical and archaeological sites, and stresses 
continuities and relationships of the past to the contemporary scene. 

468 Contemporary Middle East (3) 

A study of the social, political and economic changes taking place in the Middle East primarily since 
World War I. Where possible the Middle East will be treated as a whole and viewed through 
a topic-oriented approach. 

470 American Colonial Civilization (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course analyzes the creation of societies 
in English North America from 1607-1754, stressing the emergence of economic, social and 
political patterns and structures In a maturing Anglo-American culture. 

471 The United States From Colony to Nation (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. This course analyzes and describes the social, 
economic, political and intellectual developments in 18th century America, stressing the Anglo- 
American Imperial problems leading to the revolution, the origins of American nationalism, the 
social structure of the new nation, the formation of the Constitution and the rise of a party system. 

472 Jeffersonian Themes in American Society, 1800-1861 (3) 

Prereqisite: History 1 70A or consent of instructor. Analyzes Jeffersonian values and their impact upon 
the social, political and cultural life of the nation during the era of their greatest relevance. 

473 Democracy on Trial 1845-1877 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. The study of America's "great national crisis" 
and the Impact of slavery, civil war and national reconstruction upon the democratic process 
of the republic. 

474 America in the Age of the Industrial Revolution (1876-1914) (3) 

A study of the maturation of the American industrial economy and its transforming impact upon class 
structure, politics, intellectual and cultural life, and diplomacy. Special consideration is given to 
the attempts made In the Progressive years to cope with the changes wrought by the Industrial 
Revolution. 

475 America Comes of Age, 1914-1945 (3) 

A multi-topic analysis of major trends in U.S. domestic policy, foreign policy, economy and society 
from World War I through World War II. Course will concentrate on conflicting values and ideals 
of domestic policy and U.S. role in world affairs. 

476 Age of Power, Affluence and Anxiety Since 1945 (3) 

Multi-topic analysis of U.S. History from 1945 to the present stressing the interrelationship of foreign 
policy, economic prosperity, domestic tensions and protest movements. 

479 The Emergence of Urban America (3) 

A study of the historical development of urban life in America with special emphasis on the process 
of urbanization and the development of urban and suburban cultures. 

480A Community History (3) (Formerly 492A) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the historical development of communities in general, 
and of the Orange County area in particular. Special emphasis on the techniques of gathering 
and processing local historical data including oral interviews and other archival materials. 

480B Community History (3) (Formerly 492B) 

Prerequisite: History 480A. Community history studies continued. Special emphasis Is on the gather- 
ing, editing and utilization of local community history documents. 

481 Westward Movement in the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A,B or equivalent. A survey of the expansion of the Unites States population 
and sovereignty from the eastern seaboard to the Pacific, colonial times to 1 900, and i history 
of regional development during the frontier period. 


History 331 


482A Socioeconomic History of the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A or consent of instructor. The course explores the interaction of social and 
economic factors upon each other in the development of American society. Special attention 
Is given to the role of business and labor In economic change. The first semester covers the 
development of a colonial economy and the early national economy. 

482B Socioeconomic History of the United States (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170B or consent of Instructor. The course continues to explore the Interaction 
of social and economic factors upon each other In the development of American society. Special 
attention is given to the role of business and labor In economic change. The second semester 
begins with the "takeoff stage of economic development" and ends with contemporary America. 

484A American Constitutional History to 1865 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A. English and colonial origins, the growth of democracy, the slavery 
controversy, and the sectional conflict as they reflect constitutional development. 

484B American Constitutional History from 1865 (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170B. Constitutional problems Involved in the post-Civll War era, the expansion 
of business. World War I, the New Deal, World War II, and civil rights in the postwar era. 

485A United States Foreign Relations to 1900 (3) 

A comprehensive survey of the foreign relations of the United States from the beginning of the nation 
until 1900. Particular attention is given to bases of policy, critical evaluation of major policies and 
relationships between domestic affairs and foreign policy. 

485B United States Foreign Relations from 1900 (3) 

Relations from 1900 to the present. An analysis of the rise of the United States as a world power 
in the 20th century with special emphasis on the search for world order and the diplomacy of 
the atomic age. 

486A Social and Intellectual History of the United States (3) 

A study of the social and Intellectual development of the Unites States from the Puritans to the Civil 
War. 

486B Social and Intellectual History of the United States (3) 

A study of the social and intellectual development of the United States from the Civil War to the 
present. 

487A History of Politics in American Society (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A,B or consent of Instructor. The first semester of this course traces political 
developments from the Colonial Period to the end of the Civil War. Its primary focus is upon 
political patterns of behavior. Institutional development and the response of the American 
political system to changing societal demands and needs. 

487B History of Politics in American Society (3) 

Prerequisite: History 170A,B or consent of instructor. The second semester of the course traces 
political developments from Reconstruction to Lyndon Baines Johnson. Its primary focus is upon 
political patterns of behavior, institutional development and the response of the political system 
to changing societal demands and needs. 

488A American Negro From Slavery to Jim Crow (3) 

A history of black Americans from African backgrounds through the era of slavery and the Civil War 
to the post- Reconstruction era. 

488B American Negro Since 1890 (3) 

History of black Americans from Booker T. Washington to present, stressing both their culture and 
role in American life and the Issues Involved in their relations with other segments of the 
population In various regions. 

489 The Mexican-American in the Southwest (3) 

Historical role of the Mexican-American in the Southwest stressing the cultural uniqueness, contribu- 
tions, with special emphasis upon migration, education, and economic changes since 1945. 

490 Senior Research Seminar (3) 

Directed research seminar with class discussions applied to specific topics and areas as schedule 
and staff allow. Designed to give students experience In original research and writing. Required 
of all history majors. 

491 Proseminar in Special Historical Topics (3) 

Intensive study of trends, phenomena, themes or periods of history involving occasional lecture, 
discussion, directed reading, and student research. 


332 Interdisciplinary Center 

495 Colloquium in History (3) 

Interpretation and analysis of significant documents and works of history aimed at broad synthesis 
and mastery of major interpretations in an area. Involves extensive directed reading and discus- 
sion. Themes will vary according to Instructor. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Open to advanced students in history with consent of department chairman. May be repeated for 
credit. 

501 Seminar in the Content and Method of History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. 

505 Seminar in Recent Interpretations in History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

520 Seminar in European History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

550 Seminar in Latin American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

560 Seminar in Afro-Asian History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

570 Seminar in American History (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

585 Seminar in the History of United States Foreign Relations (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of the instructor. 

590 History and Historians (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A study of the writings, personalities, and philosophies of repre- 
sentative historians from Herodotus to the present. 

598 Thesis (3 or 6) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Open to graduate students in history with consent of department chairman. May be repeated for 
credit. 


INTERDISCIPLINARY CENTER PROGRAM 

FACULTY 
Paul Obler 
Director 

William Lyon (Interdisciplinary Studies), Ricardo Organista, Miles McCarthy * (Biology), Som 
Sharma (English) 

The Interdisciplinary Center was created out of the conviction that much of the real excitement 
happening In the intellectual world today (and probably other times as well) is at the boundary lines 
where traditional disciplines converge. The concrete reality of the human situation raises problems 
amenable to no facile descriptions or easy solutions — certainly none that any one discipline can 
yield. We are coming more and more to recognize the need for diverse perspectives — that whether 
we are confronting the immense complexity of the modern city or the subtle dimensions of love 
or anxiety, no single frame of reference or specialized knowledge can be sufficient. 

Many of the courses now offered or planned by the center lie outside the province of any single 
department or academic discipline. They challenge students and professors alike to utilize their 
specialized knowledges and yet to go beyond them. A subject like love may be approached from 
historical, psychological, aesthetic or philosophical perspectives. Several courses (Psychology and 
Literary Criticism, Social Sciences and Humanities: A Critical Analysis) utilize the complementary 
methodologies of the physical sciences, social sciences, or humanities. It follows that interdiscipli- 
nary courses frequently involve two or more professors and feature guests from outside the academic 
community. Many courses are of a frankly experimental nature, often one-time journeys into strange 
seas, perhaps Ill-fated. Many can be used as credits toward upper-level general education or are 
cross-listed with several majors. The center is interested in new courses or innovative programs; it 
originally sponsored the religious studies program; it recently participated in developing a proposal 
for a B.A. in Human Services. It welcomes suggestions from students or all other members of the 
academic community. 


• University administrative officer 


Interdisciplinary Center 333 


INTERDISCIPLINARY CENTER COURSES 

301 Psychological Approaches to Literature (3) 

A development of the work of I. A. Richards begun in his Practical Criticism. Psychological ex- 
perimentation relevant to understanding errors of interpretation, particularly interpretation of 
literary texts. Several experimental approaches to understanding errors in interpretation will be 
described and illustrated, including those of Piaget (errors of the child), Asch (structural factors 
of personality) and Adorno. Current therapeutic techniques for the development of attitude 
change. 

303 Yoga (3) 

A study of Yoga: its theories, literature and practices; some methods of meditation taught; its 
relevance for today's world. 

310 Seminar in Human Sexuality (3) 

The concept of sexuality as it relates to man, including data regarding sexual practices, their biologi- 
cal and social implications, and their relationship to population and the survival of the species. 

315 Jazz: Past, Present and Future (3) 

Jazz — its primitive and European roots; cross-cultural description of improvisation. Lectures, demon- 
strations, some concerts. 

318 Character and Conflict: The Struggle for Autonomy (3) 

An exploration — via lectures, discussion and group encounter — into the problems and techniques 
of resolving the conflicts created by the individual's struggle to achieve and maintain personal 
autonomy while living successfully in an automated world. Topics for exploration include the 
changing concepts of masculinity and femininity, love, marriage, sexual morality, encountering 
others. 

351 Poverty in America (3) 

A study of the extent, causes, consequences and possible cures of poverty in modern America. 
Poverty will be treated as, among other things, a political issue, and spokesmen from various 
political groups will lecture on their organization's approach to the poverty question. Lectures, 
discussion, some documentary films. 

402 Art, Literature and the Development of Consciousness (3) 

An application of theories of consciousness, particularly existential and jungian, to poems, paintings 
and musical compositions. Intensive encounters between the individual and the art work; oppor- 
tunities at checking one's own responses against those of others and exploring the significance 
of the differences. (Same as Comparative Literature 402) 

403 The Quest for Self: East and West (3) 

A comparative study of quest narratives which exemplify the Eastern and Western man's search for 
self-identity and fulfillment. Religious, psychological and literary texts will be used to help 
illuminate the comparison. (Same as Comparative Literature 403 and Anthropology 416) 

404 The Nature of Love: Plato to Joyce (3) 

An examination of the various dimensions of love as found in notable philosophical, psychological 
and literary works. (Same as Comparative Literature 404) 

405 Psychoanalysis and Drama (3) 

A detailed study of Freud's topographic and structural theories and their recent elaborations; the 
application of theory to selected readings in dramatic literature mainly, but also to some fiction, 
poetry and films. (Same as Comparative Literature 405) 

410 Self-Actualization Group: Experiences in Human Growth (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Intensive small group experiences will assist each individual in 
unleashing his own growth potential and accelerating his own developmental processes. Self- 
actualization and related existential and humanistic concepts will be explored in depth, using 
recently developed methods. Lectures, individual assignments supplement the class experience. 

411 Group Process and Leadership (3) 

The impact of the individual personality on other persons in a group and what takes place in a group 
of people; the structure and process of a group; the influence of leadership. Learning experiences 
involving theories and concepts of those forces operating in a group situation, as well as a 
first-hand experiencing of one's own self in a group; feedback on how others see one in a group 
relation; and involvement in group dynamics. 


334 Latin American Studies 


412 Special Group Experiences (3) 

Intensive group experience familiarizing the student with a practical encounter approach and its 
theoretical basis. Sections may be repeated for credit. Open Couple: An exploration of openness, 
intimacy and personal growth as aspects of the man-woman relationship. Ongoing concerns of 
enrolled couples are spring-boards for intensive experiences. Open to married and unmarried 
couples. Transactional Group: Se\i-^ciud\\zdX\on using Transactional Analysis. Selected readings 
to enhance personal growth and development. Ongoing group experience using Transactional 
Analysis, Gestalt techniques, poetry and other approaches to new self-awareness and personal 
decisions. Special Social Croup. 

418A,B Practicum in Group Leadership (3) 

Prerequisite: Interdisciplinary Center 318. Practical experience in developing the ability to effectively 
lead other persons in their efforts to further both their own individual self-understanding and their 
ability to Interact productively within a peer group. 

419 Individual Personality (3) 

Major theories of personality development, with emphasis upon the dynamics and modification of 
the autonomous individual personality. 

421 Great 19th-Century Revolutionaries: Darwin, Marx, Freud (3) 

Consideration of the three great 19th-century revolutionaries, Darwin, Marx and Freud, with a 
purpose of discovering the force of their impact on 20th-century society. Their major literary 
works will be discussed and their biographies studied to determine why they became revolutio- 
naries. 

422 Jewish and Comparative Mysticism (3) 

A description and analysis of Jewish mysticism, and Its comparison with other systems of mysticism 
from different cultures. (Same as Anthropology 422) 

450 The Way (3) 

An exploration of sensory awareness. Interpersonal relations, dreams, body language through study 
and through laboratory sessions in Gestalt theory. 

451 Philosophical Backgrounds of Modern Literature (3) 

The connection between representative writers and such thinkers and philosophers as Freud, Spen- 
gler, Schopenhauer, Nietzsche and Kierkegaard. (Same as English 451) 

452 Student Protest (3) 

The dynamics of student protest with major attention given to contemporary activities in the United 
States. (Same as Political Science 417) 

470 Seminar: Interdisciplinary Issues (3) 

Concentrated study each year of a different key issue approached from an interdisciplinary view and 
frequently combined with two or three courses In other departments to form a nine-hour block. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects to be taken with consent of instructor and program coordinator. May 
be repeated for credit. 

799 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised research projects to be taken with consent of instructor and program coordinator. May 
be repeated for credit. 

LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

William Ketteringham 
Director 

Oswaldo Arana (Foreign Languages), Nancy Baden (Foreign Languages), George Baker (History), 
David Feldman (Linguistics), Thomas Flickema (History), Paul Kane (Education), Martin Klein 
(Communications), John Lafky (Economics), Leroy Joesink-Mandeville (Anthropology), Neil 
Maloney (Earth Science), Ivan Richardson * (Political Science), Edgar Wiley (Management), 
John Yinger (Political Science) 


• University administrative officer 


Latin American Studies 335 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES 

The B.A. in Latin American Studies is an interdisciplinary program organized and taught by faculty 
from numerous fields with special training and fieldwork in Latin America. 

The program is designed for students desiring a general education with specific knowledge about 
Latin America. It is designed for students planning careers which will necessitate residence in or 
knowledge of Latin America, such as teaching, business, scientific research, engineering, journalism 
or government service. It is also designed for students who are planning to teach Spanish or social 
studies in the secondary schools. The program serves as a sound base for students preparing for 
graduate work in Latin American studies or in specific disciplines with a specialization in the region 
of Latin America. 

Foundation Courses: 

Language: All students in the program should develop a proficiency level in language measured 
by Spanish 204 and Portuguese 102. (This need may be met by completion of the above courses, 
their equivalents, or by passing requirements as stated by the Department of Foreign Languages 
and Literatures). 

Required Core Courses: 

Language: 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

or Portuguese 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Literature: Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to the Present (3) 
or Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

History and Culture: Span\s\\ 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) 
or Portuguese 325 Introduction to Luzo-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

History 350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

History 350B Republican Latin America (3) 

Recommended Selected Concentrations: 15 units selected from three or more of the following 
groupings: 

Culture: 

Portuguese 315 Introduction to Luzo-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

Portuguese 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 
or Spanish 317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

Portuguese 325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 
or Spanish 316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) 

Anthropology 322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 324 Ancient Mesoamerica (3) 

Anthropology 325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Fine Arts and Literature: 

Art 462 Art of Mesoamerica (3) 

Art 471 Art of Central and South America (3) 

Portuguese 441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

or Spanish 441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to the Present (3) 

Spanish 440 Spanish American Literature from The Conquest to 1888 (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

History and Politics: 

History 450 Change in Contemporary Latin America (3) 

History 453 A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

History 453B Mexico Since 1910 (3) 

History 454 Argentina, Brazil, Chile (3) 

Political Science 438 Latin American Interest Croups (3) 

Geography and Economics: 

Geography 333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

Geography 433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 

Economics 330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

Economics 333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 

Senior Seminar: 

Latin American Studies 401 Contemporary Latin America (3) 

91—3 12 UO 


336 Linguistics 


LATIN AMERICAN STUDIES COURSES 

For courses within the Latin American studies program which originate in other departments, the 
students should refer to the department originating the course for the description. 

Anthropology 

322 Peoples of Mesoamerica (3) 

324 Ancient Mesoamerica (3) 

325 Peoples of South America (3) 

Art 

462 Art of Mesoamerica (3) 

471 Art of Central and South America (3) 

Economics 

330 Comparative Economic Systems (3) 

333 Economic Development: Analyses and Case Studies (3) 

411 International Trade (3) 

Geography 

333 Geography of Latin America (3) 

433 Man and Geographic Relationships in Latin America (3) 

History 

350A Colonial Latin America (3) 

350B Republican Latin America (3) 

450 Change in Contemporary Latin America (3) 

453A Mexico to 1910 (3) 

453B Mexico Since 1910 (3) 

454 Argentina, Brazil, Chile (3) 

Latin American Studies 

401 Contemporary Latin America (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. An interdisciplinary team-taught senior seminar on topics relevant 
to contemporary Latin America. The exact content of the course will vary depending upon the 
faculty and present conditions within Latin America. May be repeated for credit. 

Political Science 

438 Latin American Interest Groups (3) 

Portuguese 

315 Introduction to Luzo-Brazilian Culture and Civilization (3) 

317 Advanced Conversation and Composition (3) 

325 Contemporary Brazilian Civilization (3) 

441 Brazilian Literature (3) 

Spanish 

316 Introduction to Spanish American Civilization (3) 

440 Spanish American Literature from The Conquest to 1888 (3) 

441 Spanish American Literature from Modernismo to the Present (3) 

466 introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

DEPARTMENT OF LINGUISTICS 

FACULTY 
David Feldman 
Department Chairman 

Ralph Beckett (Speech Communication), Samuel Cartledge (Foreign Languages), Lawrence Chris- 
tensen (Anthropology), Seth Fessenden (Speech Communications), Joseph Kalir, Alan Kaye, 
Thomas Klammer (English), Harvey Mayer (Foreign Languages), Irene Nims (English), Otto 
Sadovszky (Anthropology), James Santucci, Clarence Schneider (English), Donald Sears (Eng- 
lish), William Smith (Psychology), Frank Verges (Philosophy), Jon Zimmermann (Foreign Lan- 
guages) 


Linguistics 337 

Linguistics is the scientific study of language — its nature and development, its universal properties, 
its diversified structures and their dialectal variants. Its acquisition by children and non-native 
speakers, its systems of writing and transcription, its cultural role in the speech community, and its 
application to other areas of human knowledge. As such, It is concerned with the multiple aspects 
of human communicative behavior which encompass thought, symbolization, language, meaning, 
acoustics, perception and the physiological processes of utterance and audition. 

The interdisciplinary aspects of this study are reflected in the organization of the program which not 
only offers Its own core of general linguistics courses but draws widely upon linguistically-related 
courses in other departments of the university. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 

This program is designed for students with an exceptional interest in and aptitude for the study of 
the systems of human communication. It enables the undergraduate student to perceive the function 
of language in the development of civilization; to understand the essential relationships between 
language and thought and language and culture; to gain substantial familiarity with the structure of 
foreign languages as well as English; to observe several types of linguistic structures; and to become 
conversant with the historical study of language and formal techniques and theoretical foundations 
of linguistic analysis. The program will enable the student with linguistic and philological Interests 
to grasp the scope of the entire field and, in addition, to determine more accurately the most 
meaningful concentrations in graduate study. 


Lower Division Requirements 

One year of Latin, Greek, Hebrew or Sanskrit (6) 
Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural Anthropology (3) 

Upper Division Requirements (minimum of 30 units) 

317 Course In a modern foreign language (3) 

Linguistics 341 Introduction to Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 410 Language and Culture (3) 

English 490 History of the English Language (3) 

Linguistics 491 Linguistics In Relation to Other Disciplines (1) 
Linguistics 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 


Three electives (or more) from the following; 

Education 312 Human Growth and Development (3) 

Education 380 The Teaching of Reading (3) 

English 303 Structure of Modern English (3) 

French, German, Russian or Spanish 400 course (3) 

French, German, or Spanish 466 course (3) 

Linguistics 305 American Dialects (3) 

Linguistics 375 The Philosophy of Language (3) 

Linguistics 402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Linguistics 403 Speech and Language Development (3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Mathematics 304 Mathematical Logic (3) 

Philosophy 368 Symbolic Logic (3) 

Philosophy 450 Seminar In Philosophy of Language (3) 

Physics 405 Acoustics (4) 

Psychology 415 Cognitive Processes (3) 

Quantitative Methods 364 Computer Logic and Programming (3) 

Speech Communication 304 Message Reception and Analysis (3) 

Speech Communication 340 Speech Science (3) 

Students must consult with an adviser in linguistics before establishing their individual programs of 
study. 


338 Linguistics 

MASTER OF ARTS IN LINGUISTICS 

The M.A. in Linguistics is designed for students who have exceptional interest in and aptitude for 
the study of the systems of human communication, reinforced by undergraduate study in linguistics 
and allied areas, such as foreign languages, English language, anthropology, speech communication 
and related areas in psychology and philosophy. It enables the graduate student to study in depth 
the position and function of human communication systems In the development of civilization; to 
understand more fully the essential relationships between thought, language and culture; to deepen 
mastery of the structure of foreign languages as well as English; to work intensively with several types 
of linguistic structures with special attention to non-Indo-European languages; and to increase 
expertise in the historical study of language and formal techniques and theoretical foundations of 
linguistic analysis. 

The core courses of the program are devoted to an in-depth consideration of descriptive, historical 
and applied linguistics. The remainder of the program combines advanced work In: the theory of 
phonemic; morphological and syntactical analysis; articulatory and experimental phonetics; seman- 
tics; lexicology; dialectology; language typology; and field methods, in which the procedures of the 
linguist working under field conditions are demonstrated by the analysis of several languages elicited 
from informants. A variety of approaches to descriptive analysis and several theoretical points of 
view, both American and European, including generative grammar, transformational analysis and 
prosodies are presented. A series of courses on the structure of individual languages, both ancient 
and modern, provides opportunities for applying the general principles of structural analysis and for 
establishing linguistic data by elicitation from informants and analysis of written records. The lan- 
guages examined will be drawn from a wide variety of language families Including the more familiar 
members of the Indo-European group. General courses In comparative linguistics and comparison 
within Individual language families review methods of establishing genetic relationships among 
languages. The geographical diffusion of linguistic features and problems of language contact are 
studied by examining areal groupings of genetically unrelated languages. The relationship between 
linguistics and other disciplines and the application of the techniques, findings, and Insights of that 
science to such activities as language teaching are treated in Interdisciplinary courses and seminars. 
The aim of the graduate program in linguistics, as reflected in the course offerings, Is to provide 
thorough and well-balanced training for practice and research in the several areas of linguistic studies 
and to prepare qualified students for careers in the communication sciences and allied disciplines. 


Course requirements 

Coursework in descriptive, historical and structural linguistics 

Linguistics 501 Research Methods and Bibliography (1) 

Linguistics 505 Phonological Analysis (3) 

Linguistics 507 Seminar: Morphosyntax (3) 

Linguistics 508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

Linguistics 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Coursework selected from any one of the following six areas of subspecialization. Includ- 
ing other courses in the department with the approval of the adviser 


Units 

13 


Applied Linguistics 

English 303 The Structure of Modern English (3) 

English 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Foreign Languages Ed 520 Advanced Seminar In Applied Linguistics (3) 
French 466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

French 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

German 466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

German 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 305 American Dialects (3) 

Linguistics 403 Speech and Language Development (3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 529 Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 

Linguistics 565 Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families (3) 
Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 
Linguistics 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 
Spanish 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


Linguistics 


Anthropological Linguistics 

Anthropology 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 410 Language and Culture (3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 565 Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues In Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 592 Field Methods (3) 

Linguistics 593 Language Typology (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Analysis of Specific Language Structures 

French 466 Introduction to French Linguistics (3) 

German 466 Introduction to German Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 466 Introduction to Spanish Linguistics (3) 

French 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

German 500 Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

Spanish 5(X) Graduate Seminar: Advanced Structure and Style (3) 

French 510 Phonology (3) 

German 510 Phonology (3) 

Spanish 510 Phonology (3) 

French 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

German 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Spanish 530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

French 520 Old French (3) 

English 570 Graduate Seminar: Language Studies (3) 

English 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Spanish 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

French 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

German 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 565 Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues In Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Experimental Phonetics 

Linguistics 402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

Linguistics 540 Seminar in Experimental Phonetics (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Physics 405 Acoustics (4) 

Speech Communication 543 Major Problems in Speech Pathology and Audiology 
(3) 

Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Communication and Semantics 

Anthropology 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Linguistics 411 Bilingualism (3) 

Linguistics 412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 504 Graduate Seminar: Semantics (3) 

Linguistics 515 Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Linguistics 529 Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 

Linguistics 575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Linguistics 584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

Linguistics 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Philosophy 450 Seminar: Philosophy of Language (3) 

Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 


340 Linguistics 


Disorders of Communication 


Speech and Language Development (3) 

Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 

Seminar in Experimental Phonetics (3) 

Graduate Seminar: Current Issues In Linguistics (3) 

Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Speech Pathology: Nonorganic Disorders (3) 

Speech Pathology: Organic Disorders (3) 

Diagnostic Methods in Speech and Hearing (3) 
Therapeutic Procedures In Speech and Hearing (3) 
Audiology (3) 

Audiometry (3) 

Speech Communication 557A-I Seminar in Siaeech Pathology (3) 

Speech Communication 563 Seminar In Audiology (3) 

Speech Communication 599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Coursework in a related field 

Linguistics 597 Project (2) 


Linguistics 403 
Linguistics 515 
Linguistics 529 
Linguistics 540 
Linguistics 575 
Linguistics 599 
Speech Communication 441 
Speech Communication 443 
Speech Communication 451 
Speech Communication 452 
Speech Communication 463 
Speech Communication 464 


Units 


6 

2 


Total 30 

A minimum of 15 units in 500-level courses is required. Also, satisfactory completion of written 
and oral comprehensive examinations will be required at the conclusion of the program. 


Admission to the Graduate Program 

In addition to fulfilling all general prerequisites for graduate work established at Cal State Fullerton, 
an applicant, in order to gain admission to this program, must hold a bachelor's or equivalent degree 
with a major in linguistics consisting of 24 upp)er division semester credit hours, or equivalent, in the 
field, with grades testifying to above-average scholarship from an accredited Institution. Those 
having degrees with other related majors may be admitted if they have completed the following 
courses or their equivalents. These prerequisites may be fulfilled concurrently with graduate course- 
work In the program. 

Linguistics 406 (3) 

English 490 (3) 

Linguistics 410 (3) 

Linguistics 491 (1) 


Knowledge of one foreign language is required. Students without coursework in a foreign language 
may demonstrate proficiency by a score of "average" or better on the MLA-ETS Proficiency 
Examination for Advanced Students. Work toward fulfillment of this requirement may be taken 
concurrently with graduate coursework In linguistics. 

For further Information, consult the graduate coordinator of the Department of Linguistics. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

LABORATORY FOR PHONETIC RESEARCH 

See description appearing on page 25. 

For further Information, consult the chairman of the Department of Linguistics. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


Linguistics 341 


LINGUISTICS COURSES 

301 Sanskrit (3) 

An introduction to the Sanskrit language, emphasizing the acquisition of reading fluency. The 
devanagari script, phonology, morphology and syntax will be examined in depth, along with 
relevant points on Hindu culture and on the place of Sanskrit in the development of the Indo- 
European language family. 

302 Sanskrit (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 301 or equivalent. Continuation of 301, concentrating on the intensive and 
extensive reading of Sanskrit texts. Further development of the relationship between the Sanskrit 
language and Hindu culture will be complemented by an in-depth treatment of the genetic and 
typological relationships between Sanskrit and other languages of the Indo-European family. 
Special attention will be given to paleographic techniques and graphemics. 

305 American Dialects (3) 

(Same as English 305) 

341 Phonetics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 341, Theatre 341) 

375 Philosophy of Language (3) 

(Same as Philosophy 375) 

402 Phonetic Analysis of Speech (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 402) 

403 Speech and Language Development (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 403) 

406 Descriptive Linguistics (3) 

Introduction to the nature of human linguistic behavior. Phonological, morphological, and syntactic 
structures of languages are examined through the use of techniques developed for the description 
of such structures. 

410 Language and Culture (3) 

(Same as Anthropology 410) 

411 Bilingualism (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. The study of the personal and social development of 
bilingual communities as reflected in the conflict between the language of the home and the 
language of the community. 

412 Sociolinguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or equivalent. The study of social dialects in relation to the surrounding 
communities. Topics include social stratification, acculturation, language maintenance, standard- 
ization, language planning and language change. 

417 Introduction to Psycholinguistics (3) 

(Same as Psychology 417) 

491 Linguistics in Relation to Other Disciplines (1) (Formerly 490) 

Open to all upper division students. The mutually contributing relationships between linguistics and 
the social and natural sciences, literature, music, psychology, philosophy, mathematics and 
language pedagogy. 

499 Independent Study (1-3) 

Supervised projects in linguistics to be taken with consent of department chairman as a means of 
meeting special curricular problems. Selection of topic to be studies varies with needs of the 
students enrolled. May be repeated for credit. 

501 Research Methods and Bibliography (1) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and Linguistics 406, or equivalent. Introduction to principal books, 
periodicals, and collections in general linguistics, specific languages and related fields; techniques 
of preparing research papers and field reports in linguistics. 

504 Graduate Seminar: Semantics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 504) 

505 Seminar: Phonological Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. Study of various kinds of phonological systems 
that occur in languages. Emphasis on practical problems in the phonetic and phonemic analysis 
of selected language data. (Same as Anthropology 505) 


342 Linguistics 

507 Seminar: Morphosyntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406 or consent of instructor. The study of word formation and sentence 
construction in a variety of languages. Application of immediate constituent, tagmemic, and 
transformational analysis to selected linguistic data. (Same as Anthropology 507) 

508 Theories of Syntax (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 507 or consent of instructor. Intensive and practical study of contemporary 
theories of grammar, with special emphasis on transformational, generative, logical and elec- 
tromechanical bases and techniques of utterance analysis. (Same as Anthropology 508) 

515 Graduate Seminar: Psycholinguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 417 or equivalents. An examination of the behavioral, conceptual, 
motivational and social aspects of language, emphasizing recent developments In information 
theory, behavioral theory and linguistic theory as applied to human communication. (Same as 
Psychology 515) 

529 Graduate Seminar: Linguistic Ontogeny (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 515, their equivalent, or consent of Instructor. An Intensive exami- 
nation of the development of language and linguistic systems in the human species and in the 
individual from the viewpoint of contemporary linguistic analysis and theory. Special attention 
will also be given to non-verbal communication systems, paralanguage, and kinesics as language- 
relevant communication media. Work with informants and experimental subjects in the Labora- 
tory for Phonetic Research will complement the theoretical material. 

530 Historical Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406, its equivalent, or consent of Instructor. The history of language, also 
including principles and techniques for the historical study and classification of individual lan- 
guages and language families, writing systems, lexicostatistical methods, and linguistic geography. 

532 Indo European Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 406 and 530, their equivalents, or consent of instructor. Lingulstical analysis 
of Proto-Indo-European. Attention will be given to the later development and spread of the 
Proto-Indo-European language and the culture of the Indo-European language family. 

540 Graduate Seminar: Experimental Phonetics (3) 

(Same as Speech Communication 540) 

565 Graduate Seminar: Major Language Families (3) 

Prerequisite: Linguistics 406, its equivalent, or consent of instructor. The linguistic history and present 
structure of the world's major language families. Each semester a different language family will 
be studied and analyzed In terms of Its synchronic and diachronic phonology, morphology, 
syntax and semantics, with collateral attention given to the relationships between the language 
family and the cultures with which it Is associated. May be repeated for credit. 

575 Graduate Seminar: Current Issues in Linguistics (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing In the Department of Linguistics or consent of instructor. An Intensive 
exploration of the latest research and development in linguistic theory, technique and me- 
thodology. May be repeated for credit. 

584 Linguistics and Reading (3) 

(Same as Education 584) 

592 Field Methods (3) 

Prerequisites: Linguistics 505 and 507 or consent of Instructor. Methods of analysis and description 
of language structures. Data elicited from informants will be analyzed and described. Controlled 
study of a live informant's language. (Same as Anthropology 592) 

597 Project (2) 

Preparation and completion of an approved project. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing and consent of department chairman. May be repeated for credit. 

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 

FACULTY 

Edsel Stiel 

Department Chairman 

Dennis Ames, Russell Benson, Edwin Buchman, Joseph Bucuzzo, Michael Clapp, Russell Egbert, 
Robert Cauntt, Richard Gilbert, Vuryl Klassen, Vyron Klassen, Gerald Marley, John Mathews, 
Ronald Miller, Sam Pierce, Rollin Sandberg, Harris Shultz, Yun-Cheng Zee 

116—4 4 65 






Mathematics 345 


BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MATHEMATICS 

The program of studies in mathematics offers courses stressing the understanding of mathematical 
concepts and the axiomatic approach. A sufficient variety of courses is given to satisfy the needs 
of: 

1 . The proficient aiming toward graduate study 

2. The student planning to use mathematics in a career in industry and government service 

3. Preprofessional students in other science areas 

4. The prospective elementary and secondary teacher 

The major program is designed to provide a student with both depth and breadth in mathematics. 
It also prepares a student for subsequent graduate work in mathematics. 

The applied option is designed to prepare a student for industrial employment in applied mathemat- 
ics. 

The teaching option is designed to prepare a student for the teaching of mathematics (credentialed) 
at the high school or elementary levels. 

The science-language requirements for all mathematics majors are: 

Units 


Physics 225A and 226A 4 

and either 

Thirteen Units (or their equivalent) of a modern foreign language, German, French or 

Russian. (Note: for the Teaching Option — German, French, Russian or Spanish) .. 13 

or 

Twelve units from one or several of the following categories 12 


1. Additional courses from Physics 225B,C,D, and 226B,C and/or upper division physics 

2. Chemistry 101A,B and/or upper division chemistry 

3. Philosophy 368, Symbolic Logic, or Mathematics 304 * but not both 

4. Quantitative Methods 264, Programming 

Any mathematics major may, if he desires, satisfy his science-language requirements with the above 
courses rather than the courses prescribed In a previous catalog. 

Each of these courses must be passed with a grade of at least C, hence none may be taken on a 
credit/ no credit basis. 

To qualify for the Bachelor of Arts In Mathematics, students must have at least a C in all mathematics 
courses required for the major. 

The basic courses In mathematics may also be used to meet the general education requirements. 
Mathematics majors should take the lower division mathematics courses (150A, B, 250, 291 ) during 
the first two years. Furthermore, majors requiring advanced calculus (350A, B) should complete 
these courses before the senior year. 


Major Program in Mathematics 

Required courses: Units 

Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus 8 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 4 

Math 291 Linear Algebra 3 

Math 306 Vector and Tensor Analysis } 

Math 307 Elementary Differential Geometry { (choice) 3 

Math 302 Modern Algebra 3 

Math 350A,B Advanced Calculus 6 

Math 407 Abstract Algebra 
Math 412 Complex Analysis 

Math 414 Topology (choice of three) 9 

Math 450 Real Analysis 


Any other 400-level course in mathematics (exclusive of Math 4%) 3 

39 

• The student in the teaching option may not use Math 304 for credit in both the science-language requirements and as a major elective 
in mathematics. 


195-4 4 110 


346 Mathematics 


Option in Applied Mathematics 

Required courses: Units 

Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus 8 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 4 

Math 281 Linear Algebra with Differential Equations \ Units 

Math 291 Linear Algebra ] (choice) 3 

Math 306 Vector and Tensor Analysis J 

Math 307 Elementary and Differential Geometry j (choice) 3 

Math 310 Ordinary Differential Equations 3 

Math 350A,B Advanced Calculus 6 

Math 302 Modern Algebra ] 

Math 335 Mathematical Probability | 

Math 340 Numerical Analysis | 

Math 430 Partial Differential Equations | 

Math 431 Methods of Applied Mathematics ( (choice of four, 12 

Math 435 Mathematical Statistics j at least two of 

Math 440 Advanced Numerical Analysis j which must be 400- 

Math 450 Real Analysis j level) 

Math 412 Complex Analysis 3 

42 

Option in Mathematics for Teacher Education for Elementary or Secondary Education 

Required courses: Units 

Math 150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus 8 

Math 250 Intermediate Calculus 4 

Math 291 Linear Algebra 3 

Math 302 Modern Algebra J 

Math 330 Number Theory J (choice) 3 

Math 315 Euclidean Geometry J 

Math 320 Projective Geometry j (choice) 3 

Math Ed 321 Problem Solving — Algebra 3 

Math Ed 322 Problem Solving — Geometry 3 

Math 335 Mathematical Probability \ 

Math 336 Mathematical Statistics { (choice) 3 

Elective courses from Mathematics Department only, 300-level or higher (exclusive of 

Math 496) 9 

39 

Minor Program in Mathematics 

A mathematics minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework selected from the courses offered by 
the Mathematics Department. They must include Mathematics 281 or 291 and at least six upper 
division units from the Mathematics Department. Each course must be completed with a grade C 
or better. 

Minor Program in Mathematics for Teacher Education 

A. For elementary education the minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework selected from the 
course listings in mathematics and mathematics education. These courses must include Mathematics 
150B and Mathematics Education 103A,B. 

B. For secondary education the minor shall consist of 20 units of coursework selected from the 
course listings in mathematics and mathematics education. These courses must include Mathematics 
281 or 291 and six units of upper division courses in mathematics or mathematics education. 


Mathematics 347 


Bachelor of Science in Computer Science 

The Department of Mathematics jointly offers the B.S. in Computer Science with the School of 
Engineering and the Department of Quantitative Methods. This degree program is administered by 
the Computer Science Council which consists of faculty members from each of the three areas. See 
page 168 for degree requirements. 

Minor Program in Computer Science 

Students majoring in mathematics may obtain a minor in computer science. For minor course 
requirements, see page 168. 

Master of Arts in Mathematics 

The M.A. in Mathematics is designed to provide advanced study for students interested in continuing 
studies for a Ph.D. In mathematics, high school and community college teaching, and mathematical 
analysis in industry. 

Prerequisites 

Prerequisites to the program include: 

(1 ) possession of a baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution; 

(2) an undergraduate major in mathematics or a combination of courses and work experience 
which the student's graduate committee evaluates as satisfactory preparation. 

Students with limited preparation or grade deficiencies may be considered for admission to the 
program, upon completion of committee-approved courses with at least a B average. 

Study Plan (for all except high school mathematics teachers) 

The degree program requires 30 units of graduate study approved by the student's graduate commit- 
tee. Sixteen of these units must be 500-level mathematics courses. Each student will be required to 
take electives to insure competence in algebra, analysis, topology and geometry. Nine units will be 
required outside the student's specialization, which may be taken In the Mathematics Department. 
Proficiency In reading mathematics literature in an adviser-approved foreign language will be re- 
quired before advancement to candidacy and before the department will recommend the awarding 
of the degree, the candidate must pass examinations (written and/or oral) designed to test his 
competence in the coursework he has taken. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should communicate with the chairman of 
the Department of Mathematics. 

See also "The Program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 

Study Plan for Option in Mathematics for Secondary Schools 

This option, designed for high school mathematics teachers, requires 30 units of graduate study 
approved by the student's graduate committee. The following 15 units of coursework must be 
included: Math 581, 582, 583, 590 and one unit of 597. Each student will be required to take electives 
to insure competence In algebra, geometry and analysis. 

There Is no foreign language requirement for this option. Before the department will recommend 
the awarding of the degree, the candidate must pass examinations designed to test his competence 
in the coursework he has taken. 

Graduate courses required for this option will be offered during the summer. Courses will be 
scheduled so that a student may complete the degree requirements by attending classes during three 
successive summers. It should be noted that the student must be admitted to the university for a 
regular semester and must be enrolled at the time of receiving the degree. 

For more detailed information or advisement, students should communicate with the chairman of 
the Department of Mathematics. 

See also "The program of Master's Degrees," page 71, and the Graduate Bulletin. 


348 Mathematics 

MATHEMATICS COURSES * 

100 Precalculus Mathematics (4) 

Prerequisites: three years of high school mathematics, including one year each of algebra and 
geometry. A treatment of those elements of college algebra and trigonometry needed for a study 
of calculus. Designed exclusively for the student who plans to enter the regular calculus se- 
quence, but who needs to strengthen his preparation in mathematics. Does not count as credit 
toward a mathematics minor. 

110 Methods and Concepts of Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisites: 2 years of high school mathematics, incuding one year of algebra and one year of 
geometry. Selected topics in algebra, number theory, geometry, set theory, probability and 
analysis with special emphasis on the ideas and methods involved. Designed specifically for 
non-science majors. 

120 Elementary Probability (3) 

Prerequisites: three years of high school mathematics or its equivalent. Topics include set algebra, 
finite probability models, sampling, binomial trials, conditional probability and expectation. It is 
particularly suited to students of economics, business, the biological, earth and social sciences. 

130 A Short Course in Calculus (4) 

Prerequisites: three years of high school mathematics, including second year algebra, and a passing 
score on the Mathematics Placement Examination. Elements of differential and Integral calculus 
Including sequences, limits, partial derivatives, differential equations, applications, and min-max 
problems. Designed for students of business, economics, the biological, earth and social sciences. 

150A,B Analytic Geometry and Calculus (4,4) 

Prerequisites: four years of high school mathematics Inclusive of trigonometry, and a passing score 
on the Mathematics Placement Examination. An introduction to analysis including vector alge- 
bra, analytic geometry, functions, limits, differentiation, the definite integral, techniques of inte- 
gration, first order differential equations, applications. 

230 Elementary Probability and Statistics (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 130 or 150B. An introduction, using calculus, to the elements of probability and 
statistics. Designed for students of business, economics, the biological, earth and social sciences. 

250 Intermediate Calculus (4) 

Prerequisites: Math 150A,B or equivalent. A continuation of Math 150. Topics Include functions of 
several variables, partial differentiation, curvilinear integrals, multiple integration. Infinite series, 
Taylor's theorem, linear differential equations. 

281 Linear Algebra with Differential Equations (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. An Introduction to linear algebra with particular application to the theory 
of ordinary differential equations. Topics Include: vector functions, vector spaces, linear transfor- 
mations, systems of linear algebraic and differential equations, matrices, determinants, eigenvec- 
tors and eigenvalues, applications to physical systems, series solutions of differential equations. 
Intended for students in the physical sciences and engineering. 

291 Linear Algebra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. The study of matrices, determinants, vector spaces, linear transformations. 

302 Modern Algebra (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 281 or 291 . The integers, rational numbers, real and complex numbers, polynoml- 
nal domains, introduction to groups, rings, integral domains and fields. 

304 Mathematical Logic (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 150B. An introductory course in the elements of mathematical logic. 

305 Elements of Set Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 281 or 291. Operations on sets; functions; cardinals and ordinals; 
ordering, well ordering; axiom of choice; transfinite numbers. 

306 Vector and Tensor Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 281 or 291. Analysis of vector fields; Green's, Gauss' and Stokes 
theorems. Introduction to tensor analysis. Applications to geometry, mechanics and electromag- 
netism. 


• Prerequisites may be waived in any mathematics course by consent of instructor. 


Mathematics 349 


307 Elementary Differential Geometry (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 281 or 291 . The differential geometry of curves and surfaces in Euclidean 
3-space. Differential forms in 3-space. Cartan's equations of structure. Causs-Weingarten-Codaz- 
zi equations. 

310 Ordinary Differential Equations (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 281 or 291. An introduction to existence theorems and the theory of 
ordinary differential equations. 

315 Euclidean Geometry (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. Selected topics in advanced Euclidean geometry such as convexity, transfor- 
mation theory and r^dimensional Euclidean space. 

320 Projective Geometry (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 281 or 291. Homogeneous coordinates, projective group, cross-ratio, duality, 
point and line conics. 

330 Number Theory (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250 or 281 or 291. Divisibility, congruences, prime number theory, Diophantine 
problems. 

335 Mathematical Probability (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 250. An introductory course in probability theory and its applications, based on 
use of the calculus. 

340 Numerical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 250, and 281 or 291, and a knowledge of computer coding. Solution of systems 
of nonlinear equations. Approximation and Interpolation. Numerical differentiation, integration, 
and solution of ordinary differential equations. Difference equations. Error analysis. Computer 
coding of numerical methods. 

350A,B Advanced Calculus (33) 

Prerequisites: Math 250 and 281 or 291. Designed to introduce the student to rigorous proofs In 
analysis. Topics include continuity, differentiation and integration of functions of several varia- 
bles, Improper integrals, sequences and infinite series. 

407 Abstract Algebra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 302. Sets, mappings, groups, rings, modules, fields, homomorphlsms, advanced 
topics in vector spaces and theory of linear transformations, matrices, algebras, ideals, field 
theory, Galois theory. 

412 Complex Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. Complex differentiation and integration, Cauchy's theorem and integral 
formulas, maximum modulus theorem, harmonic functions, Laurent series, analytic continuation, 
entire and meromorphic functions, conformal transformations and special functions. 

414 Topology (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350A. An Introductory course in point set and algebraic topology. 

430 Partial Differential Equations (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350B or consent of instructor. Cauchy-Kowalewsky and other existence theo- 
rems, theory of first order equations, classification of equations of higher order, detailed study 
of elliptic, hyperbolic and parabolic equations, applications of functional analysis to partial 
differential equations. 

431 Methods of Applied Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350A or consent of instructor. Calculus of variation, partial differential equations 
of physics, Fourier series and orthogonal functions, Integral transforms. 

435 Mathematical Statistics (3) (Formerly 336) 

Prerequisite: Math 335. An Introductory course In statistical theory and Its applications, based on 
the use of calculus. 

440 Advanced Numerical Analysis (3) 

Prerequisites: experience In computer coding and either Math 306, 340 or 350A. Numerical solution 
of systems of linear equations, matrix inversion, computation of eigenvalues and eigenvectors, 
and solution of partial differential equations. Error analysis. Computer coding of numerical 
methods. 


350 Mathematics 


450 Real Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350B. An introduction to Lebesgue measure and integration and selected topics 
from the following; metric spaces, compact and perfect sets, Cantor's ternary set, limes inferior 
and superior, discontinuities, functions of bounded variation, Riemann-Stieitjes integral, families 
of continuous functions, equi-continuity, Stone-Weierstrass theorem, convergence of Fouries 
series, inverse and implicit function theorems, functional dependence. 

4% $tudent-to-Student Tutorials (1-3) 

See page 94. 

499 Independent Study (1) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Study of some special topic in mathematics, selected in consulta- 
tion with the instructor and carried out under his supervisions. 

506 Seminar in Number Theory (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 302, 330, 350B or consent of instructor. Selected topics In analytic and algebraic 
number theory. May be repeated for credit. 

507 Topics in Abstract Algebra (3) 

Prerequisites: Math 407. Modules, algebras, ideal theory, field theory, Galois theory, categories, 
functors, homology. 

508 Seminar in Algebra (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 407 or consent of instructor. Structure theory of rings, algebras, field and Galois 
theory. Homological algebra. Research topics in algebra. May be repeated for credit. 

512 Complex Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 412. Special topics in complex analysis including analytic functions of several 
variables, special functions, conformal mapping and Riemann surfaces. 

514 Topology (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 414. Advanced point set and algebraic topology. 

515 Seminar in Advanced Topology (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced areas In topology in preparation for research work. 
May be repeated for credit. 

520 Lebesgue Measure and Integration (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 350B. Lebesgue measure and integration on the line and In /^space. Topics incude 
the dominated convergence theorem, absolute continuity, convergence in measure and in mean, 
differentiation and Fublni's theorem. 

525 Differential Geometry (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 414. Differentiable manifolds, connections, curvature, torsions, covariant differen- 
tiation, topics in Riemannian geometry. 

526 Seminar in Geometry (3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing and consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

530 Topics in Applied Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for credit. 

531 Seminar in Applied Mathematics (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. Advanced topics in applied mathematics. May be repeated for 
credit. 

550 Topics in Real Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 450. General theory of measure and integration, set functions, theorems of 
Radon-Nikodym and Fubini. 

551 Seminar in Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. A semester graduate course in analysis. Advanced topics in real 
and complex analysis. May be repeated for credit. 

560 Functional Analysis (3) 

Prerequisite: Math 450; corequisite: Math 414. Topics in modern functional analysis including Hilbert 
and Banach spaces, linear transformations and spectral theory. 

580 Junior High School Mathematics from an Advanced Standpoint (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior or senior high school 
mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics related to the junior high school math- 
ematics curriculum correlated with a seminar on current junior high school mathematics pro- 
grams. 


Native American Studies 351 


581 High School geometry from an Advanced Standpoint (4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior or senior high school 
mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics related to the high school geometry 
curriculum, correlated with a seminar on current high school geometry programs. 

582 High School Algebra from an Advanced Standpoint (4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior or senior high school 
mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics related to the high school algebra 
curriculum, correlated with a seminar on current high school algebra programs. 

583 Precalculus High School Mathematics from an Advanced Standpoint (4) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching In junior or senior high school 

mathematics. The content and methods of mathematics related to the high school precalculus 
curriculum (primarily trigonometry and analytic geometry), correlated with a seminar on current 
high school precalculus programs. 

584 Elementary Analysis from an Advanced Standpoint (3) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in high school mathematics. The 
content and methods of mathematics related to the high school curriculum in analysis, correlated 
with a seminar on current high school programs in analysis. 

590 Seminar in Secondary Mathematics (2) 

Prerequisites: graduate standing plus one year of full-time teaching in junior or senior high school 
mathematics. An analysis of current Issues, programs and proposals within secondary mathemat- 
ics. May be repeated for credit. 

597 Project (1-3) 

May be repeated for credit. 

599 Independent Graduate Research (1-3) 

Prerequisite: graduate standing. One unit of Independent study required of each student for each 
regular graduate course. Also offered without being attached to any course. May be repeated 
for credit. 


METEOROLOGY 

(Offered by the Department of Science and Mathematics Education and the Department of Geogra- 
phy) 

See departmental descriptions for the following courses: 

Earth Science 

401 Studies in Earth Science (3-6) 

Geography 

323 Weather and Climate (3) 

423 Physical Climatology (3) 

NATIVE AMERICAN STUDIES PROGRAM 

FACULTY 

Lawrence Christensen (Anthropology), John Dougherty (Dance), Wacira Cethalga (Afro-Ethnic 
Studies), Fred Katz (Anthropology), Robert Renee (Theatre), Gerald Rosen (Sociology), Otto 
Sadovszky (Anthropology), Priscilla Shames (English), Gary Shumway (History), Alexander 
Stupple (English), Imre Sutton (Geography), Norman Townshend-Zellner (Economics) 

PART-TIME 
Jack Allen 

COUNSELORS 

Richard Hernasy, Beth Voien 

The native American studies program, now in development, anticipates bringing together Interested 
students — Indian and non-Indian — and faculty In a mutual effort to provide instruction In and 
dialogue on the status, condition and destiny of Indians in contemporary America. As now envi- 
sioned, the program would include Indian-oriented courses dedicated to an Indian interpretation of 
tribal experience in America as well as related courses on Indian themes. Including several already 


151. 


4 240 


352 Philosophy 

being offered, as developed by interested faculty in other academic departments. 

The intent is to create an academic environment that would stimulate students and faculty alike to 
exchange ideas and knowledge about native Americans and to establish, in a sense, a center for 
interaction on campus, which, in turn, would be guided by Indian counselors. Another objective of 
the program is to provide special kinds of instruction to reinforce the Indian student's comprehension 
of tribal problems and to define areas of solutions students might pursue allied to their degree 
objectives on, campus. Indian students should be apprised of the fact that Educational Opportunity 
Program and Bureau of Indian Affairs funding may be available to them through the university 
Financial Aid Office. It is expected within a year or two that this program will be expanded by the 
addition of several new "core" as well as "related" courses. 

Core Course: 

Afro-Ethnic Studies 230 The Native American (3) 

Related Courses: 

Anthropology 321 The American Indian (3) 

Anthropology 460 Culture Change (3) 

Art 461 Art of North American Indian (3) 

Dance 476A,B History of Dance (3^) 

Economics 334 Economics of Poverty, Race and Discrimination (3) 

English 320 Literature of the American Indian (3) 

English 421 Minority Images in American Literature (3) 

Sociology 431 Minority Group Relations (3) 

OCEANOGRAPHY 

(Offered by the Department of Biological Science and the Department